- No category
EDR-5000 Eaton Distribution Relay Instruction Manual
advertisement
IM02602007E Rev. New EDR-5000 EATON DISTRIBUTION RELAY Instruction Manual for Installing, Operating, and Maintaining the EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 EDR-5000 Application Overview EDR-5000 1 79 74 TC Metering, Statistics and Demand Current and Volt.: unbalance %THD and THD Fund. and RMS min./max./avg. phasors and angles 27A 46 50R 51R 50 BF 59A 50P 51P 67P 67R LOP 59N 3 CTS SOTF CLPU 25 1 55 A/D 47 67X 3 Power: Fund. and RMS MVA, Mwatt, Mvar, PF Disturb. recorder 27M 59M IRIG-B00X 81 U/O 81R 78V 50X 51X 51V 32 * 32V Fault recorder Event recorder Zone Interlocking Breaker Wear Programmable Logic Trend recorder standard 2 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Key Features, Functions and Benefits..........................................................................................8 General Description.........................................................................................................................................8 Features...........................................................................................................................................................9 Comments on the Manual.............................................................................................................14 What Is Included with the Device...................................................................................................................17 Storage..........................................................................................................................................................17 Important Information.....................................................................................................................................17 Symbols.........................................................................................................................................................18 General Conventions.....................................................................................................................................23 Device.............................................................................................................................................24 Device Planning.............................................................................................................................................24 Device Planning Parameters of the Device....................................................................................................24 Installation and Wiring..................................................................................................................27 Three-Side-View............................................................................................................................................27 Overview of Slots - Assembly Groups............................................................................................................28 Typical Connection Diagrams........................................................................................................................30 Slot X1: Power Supply Card with Digital Inputs..............................................................................................34 Slot X2: Relay Output Card - Zone Interlock..................................................................................................37 Slot X3: Current Transformer Measuring Inputs.............................................................................................39 Slot X4: Voltage Transformer Measuring Inputs.............................................................................................47 Slot X5: Relay Output Card............................................................................................................................52 Slot X100: Ethernet Interface.........................................................................................................................55 Slot X103: Data Communication....................................................................................................................56 Slot X104: IRIG-B00X and Supervision Contact............................................................................................60 X120 - PC Interface.......................................................................................................................................61 Control Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................................................62 Input, Output, and LED Settings..................................................................................................63 Digital Input Configuration..............................................................................................................................63 DI-8P X..........................................................................................................................................................64 Wired Inputs (Aliases)....................................................................................................................................67 Relay Output Configuration............................................................................................................................74 RO-4ZI X - Settings........................................................................................................................................77 RO-6 X Settings.............................................................................................................................................95 LED Configuration........................................................................................................................................120 The »System OK« LED ...............................................................................................................................123 LED Settings................................................................................................................................................123 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................144 Basic Menu Control......................................................................................................................................148 PowerPort-E Keyboard Commands.............................................................................................................149 PowerPort-E.................................................................................................................................151 Installation of PowerPort-E...........................................................................................................................151 Uninstalling PowerPort-E.............................................................................................................................151 Setting up the Serial Connection PC - Device..............................................................................................152 Loading of Device Data When Using PowerPort-E......................................................................................162 Restoring Device Data When Using PowerPort-E........................................................................................163 Backup and Documentation When Using PowerPort-E...............................................................................164 Off-line Device Planning Via PowerPort-E...................................................................................................165 Measuring Values........................................................................................................................165 Read Out Measured Values.........................................................................................................................165 Current - Measured Values..........................................................................................................................166 Voltage - Measured Values..........................................................................................................................169 Power - Measured Values............................................................................................................................174 Energy Counter...........................................................................................................................175 Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module .......................................................................................175 Signals of the Energy Counter Module (States of the Outputs)....................................................................175 Statistics......................................................................................................................................177 Read Out Statistics......................................................................................................................................177 Statistics (Configuration)..............................................................................................................................177 Direct Commands........................................................................................................................................178 Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module................................................................................178 States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module................................................................................................182 www.eaton.com 3 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Signals of the Statistics Module...................................................................................................................183 Counters of the Module Statistics.................................................................................................................183 System Alarms.............................................................................................................................193 Demand Management.................................................................................................................................193 Peak Demand..............................................................................................................................................195 Min. and Max. Values...................................................................................................................................195 THD Protection............................................................................................................................................195 Device Planning Parameters of the Demand Management.........................................................................195 Signals of the Demand Management (States of the Outputs)......................................................................196 Global Protection Parameter of the Demand Management..........................................................................196 States of the Inputs of the Demand Management........................................................................................200 System Alarm Signals (States of the Outputs).............................................................................................200 Resets..........................................................................................................................................201 Manual Acknowledgment.............................................................................................................................202 Manual Acknowledgment Via PowerPort-E..................................................................................................202 External Acknowledgments..........................................................................................................................202 External Acknowledge Via PowerPort-E.......................................................................................................203 External LED - Acknowledgment Signals.....................................................................................................203 Manual Resets.............................................................................................................................................204 Manual Resets Via PowerPort-E..................................................................................................................204 Status Display..............................................................................................................................205 Status Display via PowerPort E....................................................................................................................205 Operating Panel (HMI).................................................................................................................206 Special Parameters of the Panel..................................................................................................................206 Direct Commands of the Panel....................................................................................................................206 Global Protection Parameters of the Panel..................................................................................................206 Recorders....................................................................................................................................207 Disturbance Recorder..................................................................................................................................207 Fault Recorder.............................................................................................................................................215 Event Recorder............................................................................................................................................220 Trend Recorder............................................................................................................................................221 Communication Protocols..........................................................................................................226 Modbus®.....................................................................................................................................................226 IEC 61850....................................................................................................................................................232 IRIG-B00X...................................................................................................................................................239 Parameters...................................................................................................................................244 Parameter Definitions..................................................................................................................................244 Adaptive Parameters via HMI......................................................................................................................247 Operational Modes (Access Authorization)..................................................................................................259 Password.....................................................................................................................................................260 Changing of Parameters - Example.............................................................................................................261 Changing of Parameters When Using the PowerPort-E - Example.............................................................262 Protection Parameters ................................................................................................................................264 Setting Groups.............................................................................................................................................264 Comparing Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E..............................................................................................266 Converting Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E..............................................................................................266 Device Parameters......................................................................................................................268 Date and Time.............................................................................................................................................268 Version.........................................................................................................................................................268 Version Via PowerPort-E..............................................................................................................................268 TCP/IP Settings...........................................................................................................................................269 Direct Commands of the System Module.....................................................................................................269 Global Protection Parameters of the System...............................................................................................270 System Module Input States........................................................................................................................272 System Module Signals................................................................................................................................273 Special Values of the System Module..........................................................................................................274 System Parameters.....................................................................................................................275 General System Parameters........................................................................................................................275 Voltage Depending System Parameters......................................................................................................275 Current Depending System Parameters......................................................................................................276 Blocking.......................................................................................................................................278 4 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Permanent Blocking.....................................................................................................................................278 Temporary Blocking.....................................................................................................................................278 To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module....................................................280 Activate, Deactivate Respectively to Block Temporary Protection Functions...............................................281 Protection (Prot) Module............................................................................................................283 How to Block All Protective and Supervisory Functions................................................................................283 Direct Commands of the Protection Module.................................................................................................290 Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module...............................................................................290 Protection Module Input States....................................................................................................................290 Protection Module Signals (Output States)..................................................................................................290 Protection Module Values.............................................................................................................................291 Switchgear/Breaker - Manager...................................................................................................292 Breaker Configuration..................................................................................................................................292 Switching the Breaker at the Panel..............................................................................................................318 Protective Elements....................................................................................................................327 Directional Feature – Phase Current............................................................................................................327 50P/67P- DEFT Overcurrent Protection.......................................................................................................330 51P/67P - INV Overcurrent-Protection.........................................................................................................337 Directional Features for Measured (IX) Ground Fault Elements 50X/51X....................................................354 50X/67X DEFT Measured Ground Fault Protection.....................................................................................357 51X/67X INV Measured Ground Fault Protection.........................................................................................364 Directional Features for Calculated (IR) Ground Fault Elements 50R/51R..................................................372 50R/67R DEFT Calculated Ground Fault Protection....................................................................................375 51R/67R INV Calculated Ground Fault Protection.......................................................................................382 ZI - Zone Interlocking...................................................................................................................................389 79 - Automatic Reclosure.............................................................................................................................401 46 - Current Unbalance Protection...............................................................................................................431 LOP – Loss of Potential...............................................................................................................................438 SOTF - Switch Onto Fault Protection...........................................................................................................443 CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup............................................................................................449 27M - Undervoltage Protection.....................................................................................................................456 59M - Overvoltage Protection.......................................................................................................................465 27A - Auxiliary Undervoltage Protection.......................................................................................................474 59A - Auxiliary Overvoltage Protection.........................................................................................................479 59N - Neutral Overvoltage...........................................................................................................................484 25 - Sync-check...........................................................................................................................................489 47 - Voltage Unbalance Protection...............................................................................................................519 81O/U, 81R, 78V Frequency Protection.......................................................................................................526 32 - Power Protection...................................................................................................................................549 32V - Reactive Power Protection.................................................................................................................560 55A and 55D - PF Protection.......................................................................................................................571 ExP - External Protection.............................................................................................................................578 Supervision..................................................................................................................................584 50BF – Breaker Failure Supervision............................................................................................................584 CTS – Current Transformer Supervision......................................................................................................601 74TC - Trip Circuit Monitoring......................................................................................................................606 Self Supervision...........................................................................................................................................612 Programmable Logic...................................................................................................................614 General Description.....................................................................................................................................614 Programmable Logic at the Panel................................................................................................................618 Programmable Logic Via PowerPort-E.........................................................................................................618 Commissioning...........................................................................................................................641 Commissioning/Protection Test....................................................................................................................641 Decommissioning – Removing the Plug from the Relay..............................................................................642 Service and Commissioning Support........................................................................................644 Maintenance Mode......................................................................................................................................644 Principle – General Use...............................................................................................................................644 Before Use...................................................................................................................................................645 How to Use the Maintenance Mode.............................................................................................................645 Forcing the Relay Output Contacts..............................................................................................................647 Disarming the Relay Output Contacts..........................................................................................................648 Failure Simulator (Sequencer)*....................................................................................................................649 www.eaton.com 5 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Technical Data.............................................................................................................................666 Climatic Environmental Conditions...............................................................................................................666 Degree of Protection EN 60529...................................................................................................................666 Routine Test.................................................................................................................................................666 Housing........................................................................................................................................................666 Current and Ground Current Measurement.................................................................................................667 Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement................................................................................................667 Frequency Measurement.............................................................................................................................668 Voltage Supply.............................................................................................................................................668 Power Consumption.....................................................................................................................................668 Display.........................................................................................................................................................668 Front Interface RS232..................................................................................................................................668 Real Time Clock...........................................................................................................................................668 Digital Inputs................................................................................................................................................668 Relay Outputs..............................................................................................................................................669 Supervision Contact (SC).............................................................................................................................669 Time Synchronization IRIG-B00X.................................................................................................................669 Zone Interlocking.........................................................................................................................................670 RS485*........................................................................................................................................................670 Fiber Optic*..................................................................................................................................................670 URTD-Interface*..........................................................................................................................................670 Boot Phase..................................................................................................................................................670 Standards.....................................................................................................................................671 Approvals.....................................................................................................................................................671 Design Standards........................................................................................................................................671 High Voltage Tests (IEC 60255-6)................................................................................................................671 EMC Immunity Tests....................................................................................................................................671 EMC Emission Tests....................................................................................................................................672 Environmental Tests.....................................................................................................................................672 Mechanical Tests.........................................................................................................................................673 Specifications..............................................................................................................................674 Specifications of the Real Time Clock..........................................................................................................674 Specifications of the Measured Value Acquisition........................................................................................674 Protection Elements Accuracy.....................................................................................................................675 Appendix......................................................................................................................................681 Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)........................................................................................................687 Time Current Curves (PHASE)....................................................................................................................688 Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Calculated).......................................................................700 Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Measured)........................................................................701 Time Current Curves (Ground Current)........................................................................................................702 Assignment List..........................................................................................................................714 6 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E ff29cf4c2846dafcd774575c3a3fc66e 7e00f5bb7cdd4f821e6f72b400fc1985 RMS Handoff: 0 File: C:\p4_data\deliver_EDR-5000_KWelchering\generated\EDR-5000_user_manual_eaton_en.odt This manual applies to devices (version): Version 1.0.b Build: 12288 www.eaton.com 7 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Key Features, Functions and Benefits • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Microprocessor-based protection with monitoring and control for medium voltage main and feeder applications. Current, voltage, and frequency protection for electrical power distribution systems. Complete metering of voltage, currents, power, energy, minimum/maximum, and demand functions. Complete metering, protection, and control in a single compact case to reduce panel space, wiring, and costs. Integral test function reduces maintenance time and expense. Zone selective interlocking improves coordination and tripping time, and saves money compared to a traditional bus differential scheme. Programmable logic control functions for main-tie-main transfer schemes. Reduce trouble shooting time and maintenance costs - Trip and event recording in non-volatile memory provides detailed information for analysis and system restoration. Waveform capture aids in post fault analysis (viewable using PowerPort-E software). Minimum replacement time - Removable terminal blocks ideal in industrial environments. Front RS-232 port and PowerPort-E software provides local computer access and User-friendly windows based interface for relay settings, configuration, and data retrieval. Breaker open/close from relay faceplate or remotely via communications. Fast an easy troubleshooting, improved maintenance procedures, and increased device security. Provides detailed traceability for system configuration changes Relays self-diagnostics and reporting improves up-time and troubleshooting. Breaker trip circuit monitoring improves the reliability of the breaker operation. General Description Eaton’s EDR-5000 distribution protection relay is a multi-functional, microprocessor-based relay for feeder circuits of all voltage levels. It may be used as the primary protection on feeders, mains, and tie breaker applications; or as backup protection for transformers, high voltage lines, and differential protection. The relay is most commonly used on medium voltage switchgear applications. The EDR-5000 feeder protection relay provides complete current, voltage, and frequency protection and metering in a single, compact case. The relay has four current inputs rated for either 5 amperes or 1 ampere and four voltage inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are to be connected to the 3-phase power voltage for voltage protection and for metering. They can be connected in wye-ground or open delta configuration. The fourth voltage is for independent single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage protection, or ground protection for an ungrounded system. The maintenance mode, password protected soft key can be used for arc flash mitigation to change to an alternate settings group or set to have instantaneous elements only. The multiple setting groups can also be changed,via communications or a digital input. An integral keypad and display is provided for direct User programming and retrieval of data without the need of a computer. 14 programmable LEDs provide quick indication of relay status. A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An RS-485 communication port on the back is standard for local area networking using Modbus-RTU. An optional Ethernet port and protocols are available. The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay includes programmable logic functions. Logic gates and timers may be defined and arranged for customized applications. Programmable logic control functions make the EDR-5000 relay ideally suited for main-tie-main and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes. The relay allows for four preprogrammed setting groups which can be activated through software or contact input. Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows for four preprogrammed setting groups which can be activated through software, the display, or a contact input. The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms 8 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E time resolution. The relay will log 300 sequence of event records, 20 detailed trip logs, minimum/maximum values, load profiles, breaker wear information, and oscillography data. The EDR-5000 has programmable binary inputs, two normally opened and eight Form C heavy duty outputs and one form C signal alarm relay. It can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power. Features Protection Features Phase overcurrent elements • Three instantaneous elements with timers ( 50P[1], 50P[2], and 50P[3]) • Three inverse time overcurrent elements (51P[1], 51P[2], and 51P[3]) • 11 standard curves • Instantaneous or time delay reset • Voltage Restraint (51P[2] and 51P[3]) • Directional Control (All Elements) Ground overcurrent elements • Two instantaneous measured elements with timers (50X[1] and 50X[2]) • Two instantaneous calculated elements with timers (50R[1] and 50R[2]) • Two inverse time overcurrent measured elements (51X[1],and 51X[2]) • Two inverse time overcurrent calculated elements (51R[1] and 51R[2]) • 11 standard curves • Directional Control (All Elements) • Instantaneous or time delay reset Breaker failure (50BF) Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46[1], 46[2])) Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47[1], 47[2]) Main 3-phase under/overvoltage (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2]) Auxiliary single-phase under/overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2]) Ground fault overvoltage relay (59N[1], 59N[2]) Six Frequency elements that can be assigned to: over frequency, under frequency, rate of change, or vector surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5], 81[6]) Apparent and displacement power factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2]) Forward and Reverse Watts (32[1], 32[2], 32[3]) Forward and Reverse Vars (32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3]) Sync-check (25) Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B) Switch onto fault protection Cold load pickup www.eaton.com 9 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Metering Features • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Amperes: Positive, negative, and zero sequence Ampere demand Volts: Positive, negative, and zero sequence Phase angles Volt-amperes and VA demand Watts and kW demand kWh (forward, reverse, net) Vars and kvar demand kvarh (lead, leg and net) Power factor Frequency % THD V and I Magnitude THD V and I Minimum/maximum recording Trending (load profile over time) Monitoring Features • • • • • • Trip coil monitor Breaker wear primary and secondary (accumulated interrupted current) Oscillography (6000 cycles total) Fault data logs (up to 20 events) Sequence of events report (up to 300 events) Clock (1 ms time stamping) Control Functions • • • • • • • • Breaker open/close Remote open/close Programmable I/O Programmable Logic Programmable LEDs Multiple setting groups Cold load pickup CT supervision Communication Features • • • • • • • 10 Local HMI Password protected Addressable IRIG-B Local communication port Remote communication port: - RS-232; and - RS-485 Protocols: www.eaton.com EDR-5000 • IM02602007E - Modbus-RTU; - Modbus-TCP (Optional); and - IEC61850 (Optional) Configuration software Protection and Control Functions The Eaton’s EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has been designed for maximum User flexibility and simplicity. The base relay includes all the standard current and voltage protection and metering functions. Directional Overcurrent Protection The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides complete 3-phase and ground directional overcurrent protection. There are 8 independent ground overcurrent elements. The ground elements “X” use the independently measured ground (or neutral) current from a separate current-sensing input. The ground elements “R” uses a calculated 3Io residual current obtained from the sum of the 3-phase currents. This calculated current could be used for either the neutral or ground current in a 3-phase, 4-wire system. Each of the phase and ground overcurrent elements can be selected to operate based on fundamental or RMS current. Phase direction is a function used to supervise all phase current elements (50, 51). A quadrature voltage is compared to a corresponding phase current to establish the direction of the fault. This function is selectable to operate in the forward, reverse or both directions. Ground direction is used to supervise ground current elements and is accomplished by using ground, negative sequence or residual currents supervised by zero, negative, or positive sequence voltages or ground current. This function s selectable to operate in forward, reverse or both directions. Voltage Restrained Overcurrent Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P[3]). This modification of the pickup overcurrent level is compared to the corresponding phase input voltage. The EDR-5000 uses the simple linear model below to determine the effective pickup value. Sync-check The sync-check function is provided for double-ended power source applications. The sync-check monitors voltage magnitude, phase angle and slip frequency between the bus and line. It also incorporates breaker close time, dead bus dead line, dead bus live line, and live bus live line features Reverse Power Reverse power provides control for power flowing through a feeder. There are three elements to be configured: • • • Operate in forward; Reverse; or Under or over power conditions. Reverse power is typically applied to generator or motor applications while under power is generally applied to load or generation loss Reverse Vars Reverse vars can be used to detect loss of excitation in synchronous machines. There are three elements to be configured: • • • Operate in forward; Reverse; or Under or over vars conditions. www.eaton.com 11 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Inverse-Time Characteristics There are 11 User-selectable inverse-time overcurrent curve characteristics. The User can select from the ANSI, IEC, or thermal curve families and can select instantaneous or time delay reset characteristics. Breaker Failure The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated from either an internal or external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a lockout relay or trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the protective function reset times. Voltage Protection The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has four voltage-input circuits. There is a 3-phase set designated as Main Voltage (M) and a single-phase voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) protection. The 3-phase voltage protection can be set to operate on a single-phase, 2 out of 3 phases, or all 3-phase logic. The Main VTs also provide phase voltage unbalance/reversal (47 negative sequence) protection. Each element has an independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay. Ground Voltage Protection In high impedance grounded systems, ground fault protection is provided by the detection of zero sequence voltage (3Vo) voltage in the neutral of the transformer by an overvoltage element (59N) connected to the secondary of the distribution grounding transformer, or in the secondary of a Wye- Broken Delta transformer used when the neutral is not accessible or in Delta system. In the EDR-5000, the User can measure this zero sequence voltage through the 4th voltage input; the 59N element has to be desensitized for 3rd harmonic voltages that can be present in the system under normal operation. Flexible Phase Rotation The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A User setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system configuration. Frequency Protection The EDR-5000 relay provides six frequency elements than can be used to detect under/over frequency, rate of change, and a vector surge (decoupling of two systems) protection on the Main VT inputs. Each element has an independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay. Autoreclosing Logic The EDR-5000 provides a six shot-recloser scheme. Autoreclosing is normally used by the utilities in their distribution and transmission lines, but it can be used in commercial and industrial applications with long overhead lines. Nearly 85% of the faults that occur on overhead lines are transient in nature. Tripping of a breaker normally clears a transient fault and reclosing of the breaker restores power back to the circuit. Maintenance Mode The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing time and lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the User to switch to more sensitive settings via a password protected soft key, communication, or via a digital Input while maintenance work is being performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide greater security for maintenance personnel and helps reduce the possibility of injury. 12 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Monitoring and Metering Sequence of Events Records The EDR-5000 protection relay records a maximum of 300 events associated with the relay. An event is classified as a change of state as detected by the relay. These include relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact closure, alarms, setting changes, and self-diagnostic failures. Each event is date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The events are stored in a FIFO in chronological order. Trip Log The EDR-5000 protection relay will store a maximum of 20 trip records in a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault, protection elements that operated, fault location, and currents and voltages at the time of the fault. Waveform Capture The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all measured signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic, and contact closures. The EDR-5000 relay can record up to 6000 cycles of data. The number of records is proportional to the size of each record; the maximum size per record is 600 cycles. The waveform capture is initiated by up to eight different triggers; it can also be generated manually through the display or via communications. Integral User Interface The front panel User interface has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with background illumination for wide angle viewing in all light conditions. 17 programmable LEDs provide quick and easy visual display of power on, mode of operation, alarm, and trip indication. Soft keys are provided for operation mode selection, scrolling through data, and settings. In addition, the relay settings and test functions are password protected. Load Profiling/Trending The EDR-5000 relay automatically records selected quantities into non-volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30, or 60 minutes, depending on the trending report setting. Programmable I/O The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides heavy-duty, trip rated, two normally open and eight Form C contacts. Two isolated inputs can be used for monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C contact is dedicated to the relay failure alarm function and is operated in a normally energized (fail-safe) mode. There are eight Userconfigurable discrete inputs that accept a wet contact and can operate through a wide range of power. Each input and output is User-programmable for maximum application flexibility. Programmable Logic The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides logic gates and timers that the User can customize for special or unique applications. Each gate can be assigned a logic function of either AND, OR, NAND or NOR. Each gate can have a maximum of four input signals and each input signal can be required to be a NOT. Input signals can be external inputs received via the binary inputs or internal values associated with the protection, alarm or metering set points. Each gate has a unique output assignment and designation that can be used as the input to another gate. There are 24 independent timers that have adjustable pickup and dropout delay settings. www.eaton.com 13 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Comments on the Manual This manual gives a general explanation of the tasks of device planning, parameter setting, installation, commissioning, operation, and maintenance of the Eaton devices. The manual serves as reference document for: • • • • Engineers in the protection field; Commissioning engineers; Personnel dealing with the setting, testing, and maintenance of protection and control devices; and Well trained personnel involved in electrical installations and power stations. All functions concerning the type code will be defined. Should there be a description of any functions, parameters, or inputs/outputs that do not apply to the device in use, please ignore that information. All details and references are explained to the best of our knowledge and are based on our experience and observations. This manual describes the full featured versions of the devices, including all options. All technical information and data included in this manual reflect their state at the time this document was issued. Eaton Corporation reserves the right to carry out technical modifications in line with further development without changing this manual and without previous notice. Therefore no claim can be brought based on the information and descriptions included in this manual. Text, graphics, and formulas do not always apply to the actual delivery scope. The drawings and graphics are not true to scale. Eaton Corporation does not accept any liability for damage and operational failures caused by operating errors or disregarding the directions of this manual. No part of this manual is allowed to be reproduced or passed on to others in any form, unless Eaton Corporation has issued advanced approval in writing. This User manual is part of the delivery scope when purchasing the device. In case the device is passed on (sold) to a third party, the manual has to be passed on as well. Any repair work carried out on the device requires skilled and competent personnel with verifiable knowledge and experienced with local safety regulations and have the necessary experience with working on electronic protection devices and power installations. IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS The symbol/word combinations detailed below are designed to call the User's attention to issues that could affect User safety and well being as well as the operating life of the device. DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION, used with the safety alert symbol, indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. 14 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E CAUTION, without the safety alert symbol, is used to address practices not related to personal injury. NOTICE is used to address information and practices not related to personal injury. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be performed before installing, operating, or servicing this equipment. Practice all plant and safety instructions and precautions. Failure to follow the instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage. PROPER USE Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified mechanical, electrical, or other operating limits may cause personal injury and/or property damage, including damage to the equipment. Any such unauthorized modifications: (1) constitute "misuse" and/or "negligence" within the meaning of the product warranty, thereby excluding warranty coverage for any resulting damage; and (2) invalidate product certifications or listings. The programmable devices subject to this manual are designed for protection and also control of power installations and operational devices. The devices are further designed for installation in low voltage (LV) compartments of medium voltage (MV) switchgear panels or in decentralized protection panels. The programming and settings have to meet all requirements of the protection concept (of the equipment that is to be protected). The User must ensure that the device will properly recognize and manage (e.g.: switch off the breaker) on the basis of User selected programming and settings all operational conditions (failures). Before starting any operation and after any modification of the programming/settings, make a documented proof that the programming and settings meet the requirements of the protection concept. Typical applications for this product family/device line are for example: • Feeder protection; • Mains protection; • Transformer Protection and • Machine protection. This device is not designed for any usage beyond these applications. The manufacturer cannot be held liable for any resulting damage. The User alone bears the risk if this device is used for any application for which it was not designed. As to the appropriate use of the device: the technical data specified by Eaton Corporation has to be met. www.eaton.com 15 IM02602007E EDR-5000 OUT-OF-DATE PUBLICATION This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was produced. To verify that you have the latest revision, be sure to check the Eaton Corporation website: www.eaton.com The latest versions of most publications are available at this site. If the User's publication is not found on the web site, please contact Eaton Customer Support to get the latest copy. ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE AWARENESS All electronic equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, some components more than others. To protect these components from electrostatic damage, the User must take special precautions to minimize or eliminate electrostatic discharges. Follow these precautions when working with or near the device. 16 1. Before performing maintenance on the electronic device, discharge the static electricity on your body to ground by touching and holding a grounded metal object (pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.). 2. Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing clothing made of synthetic materials. Wear cotton or cotton-blend materials as much as possible because these do not store static electric charges as much as synthetics. 3. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or Styrofoam cups, cup holders, cigarette packages, cellophane wrappers, vinyl books or folders, plastic bottles, and plastic ash trays) away from the device, the modules, and the work area as much as possible. 4. Do not remove any printed circuit board (PCB) from the device cabinet unless absolutely necessary. If you must remove the PCB from the device cabinet, follow these precautions: • Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges. • Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the components with conductive devices or with your hands. • When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic, antistatic protective bag it comes in until you are ready to install the PCB. Immediately after removing the old PCB from the device cabinet, place it in the anti-static protective bag. www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Eaton Corporation reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information provided by Eaton Corporation is believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Eaton Corporation unless otherwise expressly undertaken. © Eaton Corporation, 2010. All Rights Reserved. What Is Included with the Device The device package includes all connection terminals, except communication connectors, but does not include the fastening material. Please check the package for completeness upon delivery. Device Package Contents: • • • • 1 – Protective Relay; 1 – Mount (Standard or Projection); 1 – Quick Start Guide; and 2 – CDs Disk 1 - Contains the User's Manual, Modbus Datapoint List, Wiring Diagram, and Device Template for Off-line Parameter Setting; Disk 2 - Contains PowerPort-E and Quality Manager software applications. Disk1 contains the device templates. The device templates MUST BE installed to allow PowerPort-E to configure a device off-line. Please make sure the product label, wiring diagram, type code, and materials and description pertain to this device. If you have any doubts, please contact Eaton Corporation's Customer Service Department. Storage The devices must not be stored outdoors. If stored, it must be stored in an area with temperature and humidity control (see the Technical Data section contained in this manual). Important Information In line with the customer’s requirement, the devices are combined in a modular way (in compliance with the order code). The terminal assignment of the device can be found on the top of the device (wiring diagram). In addition, it can be found within the Appendix of this manual (see Wiring Diagrams). www.eaton.com 17 18 www.eaton.com "φ "=Elements with complex functions "gray-box". Functional description: If the setting value "IG.Block at VG=0" is set to "inactive", the output 1 is active and output 2 is inactive. If the setting value "IG.Block at VE=0" is set to "active", the output 2 is active and the output 1 is inactive. Measured Values: Internal message Signal: Device Planning: Setting Value: φ AR.t-D Active Inactive IG.nondir Trip at VG=0 t-D IG 0 <Name>.*int Alm L1 Prot.I dir fwd <Name> <Name>.I 2 1 Limit value monitoring (Compared to a fixed value). Compares a value with the fixed set limit; output value is binary as a result of the comparision. If the signal exceeds the limit, the corresponding output signal becomes "1". Limit value monitoring with three analog input values. Compares 3 analog values with the set limit; output values are three different binary values as a result of the comparision. If the analog signal exceeds the limit I/ In, the corresponding output signal becomes "1". Parameter of a Module-Input (with special values): An (1..n) output from the list will be assigned to the input "<name>.identifier". If the parameter is set to "ItemNull", an "active"-signal will be given out. Parameter of a Module-Input with a SelectionList/DropDown. An (1..n) signal/output from the list or a predefined value can be selected. Option/features to be realised in the future. IC IB IA V <20%Vn I/ In No assignment,1..n 1..n, 1..n, Assignment VeEnableList No assignment 1 <Name> 1..n, Assignment List <Name> Active Inactive Bkr.Latched Direct Command Selection List <Name> Adaptive Parameter IM02602007E EDR-5000 Symbols www.eaton.com Analog Value Comparator Analog Values Quotient of Analog Values Band-pass (filter) IH2 Band-pass (filter) IH1 Negated Output Negated Input Inverting Exclusive-XR Or And IH1 IH2 IH2 IH1 XOR OR AND Time stage minimum pulse width: The pulse width <name>.t will be started if a "1" is feed to the input. By starting <name>.t, the output becomes "1". If the time is expired, the output becomes "0" independent from the input signal. Edge triggered counter + Increment R Reset Time stage: A "1" at the input starts the element. If the time <name>.t is expired, the output becomes "1" too. The time stage will be reset by "0" at the input. Thus the output will be set to "0" at the same time. RS flip-flop abcd 0 0 Unchanged 0101 1010 1101 b a t 1 R + Q Q Counter t2 t1: Switch On Delay t2: Switch Off Delay t2 c d Bkr.t-TripCmd t1 t1 Delay Timer R1 S t1 Delay Timer t2 EDR-5000 IM02602007E 19 2 20 www.eaton.com Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Phase overcurrent Please Refer to Diagram: IH2 Please Refer to Diagram: IH2 Please Refer to Diagram: IH2 Please Refer to Diagram: IH2 Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings** 10a 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings 1 Please Refer to Diagram: Prot 2 VTS.Pickup VTS.Pickup Please Refer to Diagram: VTS Please Refer to Diagram: VTS 12 11 Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Prot - 50X - Direction Detection Fault 10b Prot - 50R - Direction Detection Name. Fault in Projected Direction Name. Fault in Projected Direction IH2.Blo IG IH2.Blo Phase C IH2.Blo Phase B IH2.Blo Phase A Name.Active Name.Blo TripCmd Name.Active Prot.Available Input Signal Output Signal Name.TripCmd Name.TripCmd Name.TripCmd Name.TripCmd Name.TripCmd Name.Trip Phase C Name.Trip Phase C Name.Trip Phase C Name.Trip Phase B Name.Trip Phase B Name.Trip Phase B Name.Trip Phase A Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Name.TripCmd Name.Trip Phase A Name.Pickup Name.Trip Phase A Each pickup of a module (except from supervision modules but including BF) will lead to a general pickup (collective pickup). 19d 19c 19b 19a 19 18b 18a 18 17b 17a 17 16b 16a 16 15 14 IM02602007E EDR-5000 www.eaton.com Name.Pickup Name.Pickup IC Name.Pickup IC Name.Pickup IC Name.Pickup IB Name.Pickup IB Name.Pickup IB Name.Pickup IA Name.Pickup IA Name.Pickup IA Name.Trip Name.Trip Phase C Name.Trip Phase B Name.Trip Phase A Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. 27 26b 26a 26 25b 25a 25 24b 24a 24 23 22 21 20 CTS.Pickup Q->&V<.Decoupling Energy Resource LOP.LOP Blo Bkr.Pos Disturb Bkr.Pos Indeterm Bkr.Pos OPEN Bkr.Pos CLOSE Bkr.State Prot.Blo TripCmd Name.Pickup Name.Pickup Phase C Name.Pickup Phase B Name.Pickup Phase A Name.Pickup Name.Pickup Name.Pickup Name.Pickup 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27d 27c 27b 27a Please Refer to Diagram: CTS.Pickup 40 39 Please Refer to Diagram: Q->&V<.Decoupling Energy Resource Please Refer to Diagram: LOP.LOP Blo Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). EDR-5000 IM02602007E 21 22 Breaker.CLOSE Cmd Breaker.Prot CLOSE Breaker.CLOSE Cmd Breaker.Prot CLOSE 42 41 IM02602007E EDR-5000 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E General Conventions »Parameters are indicated by right and left double arrow heads and written in italic.« »SIGNALS are indicated by right and left double arrow heads and small caps.« [Paths are indicated by brackets.] Software and Device names are written in italic. Module and Instance (Element) names are displayed italic and underlined. »Pushbuttons, Modes, and Menu entries are indicated by right and left double arrow heads.« 1 2 3 Image References (Squares) . www.eaton.com 23 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device EDR-5000 Device Planning Planning of a device means to reduce the functional range to a degree that suits the protection task to be fulfilled (i.e.: the device shows only those functions needed or desired). If the User, for example, deactivates the voltage protection function, all parameter branches related to this function will not appear in the parameter. All corresponding events, signals, etc. will also be deactivated. Due to this change, the parameter trees become very transparent. Planning also involves adjustment of all basic system data (frequency etc.). It MUST be taken into account that by deactivating, for instance, protective functions, the User also changes the functionality of the device. If the User cancels the directional feature of the overcurrent protections, then the device no longer trips in a directional way but merely in a non-directional way. The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material damage as a result of incorrect planning. Contact your Eaton Customer Service representative for more information. Beware of the inadvertent deactivating of protective functions/modules. If the User is deactivating modules within the device planning, all parameters of those modules will be set on default. If the User is activating one of these modules, again, all parameters of those reactivated modules will be set on default. If the protective device is equipped with Zone Interlocking, overcurrent and earth current elements are needed to trigger the Zone Interlocking function. Therefore, some overcurrent and earth current elements cannot be deactivated if the device is equipped with Zone Interlocking. Device Planning Parameters of the Device Parameter Description Options Hardware Variant 1 Optional Hardware Extension »A« 8 DI, 2 Form A, 8+1 Form C, 8 DI, 2 ZI Form A, 8+1 Form C, ZI [EDR-5000] Hardware Variant 2 Optional Hardware Extension »0« Without, [EDR-5000] »1« Sensitive Ground Current 24 www.eaton.com Default »0« Without Menu Path IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Communica Communication tion Options Default Menu Path »B« Modbus RTU: RS485 / Terminals, Modbus RTU: RS485 / Terminals [EDR-5000] »A« Standard [EDR-5000] »H« Ethernet: RJ45, »I« RS485 term / Ethernet Printed Circuit Board Printed Circuit Board »A« Standard, »B« Conformal Coating There are two mounts available for the EDR-5000: a Standard Mount and a Projection Mount. To order the EDR-5000 with a Standard Mount, append the device code with a zero (0). To order the EDR-5000 with a Projection Mount, append the device code with a one (1). Refer to the table below for details of the available device options. A retrofit kit for Eaton IQ cutouts is available (Style No. 66D2217G01 – Catalog No. ER-IQEDRKIT). This kit is required when replacing a DT-3000 with the EDR-5000. EDR-5000 Eaton Distribution Relay Removable Terminals EDR-5000 A 0 B A 1 Choose from the following options. Hardware Option 1 8 DI, 11 Outputs, Removable Terminals, Zone Interlocking. A 8 DI, 11 Outputs, Removable Terminals, Zone Interlocking, and Larger Display*. B Hardware Option 2 Phase Current 5A/1A, Ground Current 5A/1A, Power Supply Range: 19-300 Vdc, 40-250 Vac. 0 (Zero) Phase Current 5A/1A, Sensitive Ground Current 0.5A/0.1A, Power Supply Range: 19-300 Vdc, 40-250 Vac.* 1 Communication Options Modbus-RTU (RS-485) B IEC-61850 (Goose) H Modbus-RTU + Modbus-TCP I www.eaton.com 25 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Conformal Coating Options None A Conformal Coated Circuit Boards B Mounting Options Standard Mount 0 (Zero) Projection Panel Mount * 1 Consult the factory for the availability of sensitive ground and larger display. The catalog number identification table defines the electrical characteristics and operation features included in the EDR-5000. For example, if the catalog number were EDR-5000A0BA1, the device would have the following: EDR-5000 (A) - 8 DI, 11 Outputs Relays, Removable Terminals, Zone Interlocking (0) 5A/1A Phase and Ground CTs, Power Supply Range: 19-300 Vdc, 40-250 Vac. - (B) - Modbus-RTU (RS-485) (A) - Without Conformal Coating (1) Projection Panel Mount 26 - www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Installation and Wiring Three-Side-View Depending on the connection method of the communication system used, the needed space (depth) differs. If, for instance, a D-Sub-Plug is used, it has to be added to the depth dimension. Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched-off, unsafe voltages remain at the device connections. Outline Projection Mount - Door Cut-out The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (AWG 12-10 [4 to 6 mm2] / 15 In-lb [1.7 Nm]) to the housing, using the screw that is marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device). The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (AWG 14 [2.5 mm2] / 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]) at terminal X1. DO NOT over-tighten the mounting nuts of the relay (0.164 X32 ). Check the torque by means of a torque wrench (1.7 Nm [15 In-lb]). Over-tightening the mounting nuts could cause personal injury or damage the relay. www.eaton.com 27 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Outline Standard Mount - Door Cut-out The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (AWG 12-10 [4 to 6 mm2] / 15 In-lb [1.7 Nm]) to the housing, using the screw that is marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device). The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (AWG 14 [2.5 mm2] / 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]) at terminal X1. Overview of Slots - Assembly Groups In line with the customers' requirement, the devices are combined in a modular way (in compliance with the order code). In each of the slots, an assembly/group may be integrated. In the following diagram, the terminal assignment of the individual assembly/groups are shown. The exact installation/placement of the individual modules can be determined from the connection diagram attached to the top of your device. 28 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Overview of Slots Housing B2 Slot1 Slot2 X1 X2 X100 X101 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 X3 X4 X5 X6 X102 X103 X104 Schematic Diagram The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (AWG 12-10 [4 to 6 mm2] / 15 In-lb [1.7 Nm]) to the housing, using the screw that is marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device). The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (AWG 14 [2.5 mm2] / 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]) at terminal X1. Grounding The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (AWG 12-10 [4 to 6 mm2] / 15 In-lb [1.7 Nm]) to the housing, using the screw that is marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device). The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (AWG 14 [2.5 mm2] / 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]) at terminal X1. The devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges. www.eaton.com 29 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Typical Connection Diagrams A B C A B C X4. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B X3. C IA' IB' IC' IX' IA IB IC LOAD Wye VTs and 5 A CTs in Residual Connection 30 www.eaton.com 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VA/ VAB VB/ VBC VC/ VCA VX 1A 5A N IA 1A 5A N IB 1A 5A IC N 1A 5A N IX IM02602007E EDR-5000 A B C A B C X4. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C IA' IB' IC' IA IB IC IX' X3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VA/ VAB VB/ VBC VC/ VCA VX 1A 5A N IA 1A 5A N IB 1A 5A IC N 1A 5A IX N LOAD Wye Input Wiring with Aux VX Input Connected to the Load Side of the Breaker and 1A CTs in Residual Connection www.eaton.com 31 IM02602007E EDR-5000 A B C A A B B X4. C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C IA' IB' IC' IX' IA IB X3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VA/ VAB VB/ VBC VC/ VCA VX 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 5A IC N 1A 5A N IC Open Delta VTs Input Wiring and 1 A CTs in Residual Connection www.eaton.com IB 1A LOAD 32 IA IX IM02602007E EDR-5000 A B C A A B B X4. C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C IA' IB' IC' IA IB IC IX' X3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VA/ VAB VB/ VBC VC/ VCA VX 1A 5A N IA 1A 5A N IB 1A 5A IC N 1A 5A N IX LOAD Open Delta VTs Input Wiring with Aux VTs Connected to the Load Side of the Breaker and 1A CTs in Residual Connection www.eaton.com 33 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Slot X1: Power Supply Card with Digital Inputs Slot1 Slot2 X1 X2 X100 X101 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 X3 X4 X5 X6 X102 X103 X104 Rear Side of the Device (Slots) The type of power supply card and the number of digital inputs on it used in this slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The different variants have a different scope of functions. Available assembly groups in this slot: • (DI8-X1): This assembly group comprises a wide-range power supply unit; and two non-grouped digital inputs and six (6) digital inputs (grouped). The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code. DI-8 X - Power Supply and Digital Inputs Make sure that the tightening torque is 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]. This assembly group comprises: • • • 34 A wide-range power supply unit; Two non-grouped digital inputs; and Six (6) digital inputs, grouped. www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Auxiliary Voltage Supply • The auxiliary voltage inputs (wide-range power supply unit) are non-polarized. The device can be powered with an AC or DC control voltage. Digital Inputs For each digital input group, the related voltage input range has to be configured. Wrong switching thresholds can result in malfunctions/wrong signal transfer times. The digital inputs are provided with different switching thresholds (that are configurable) (two AC and five DC input ranges). The following switching levels can be defined: • • • • • 24 Vdc; 48 Vdc 60 Vdc; 110/120 Vac/dc; and 230/240 Vac/dc. If a voltage >80% of the set switching threshold is applied at the digital input, the state change is recognized (logically “1”). If the voltage is below 40% of the set switching threshold, the device detects logically “0”. When using DC supply, the negative potential has to be connected to the common terminal (COM1, COM2, COM3 - please see the terminal marking). www.eaton.com 35 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Terminal Marking X?. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE V+ Power Supply VN.C. COM1 DI1 COM2 DI2 COM3 COM DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 Do not use Do not use Pin Assignment 36 1 PE 2 V+ 3 V- 4 N.C. 5 COM1 6 DI1 7 COM2 8 DI2 9 COM3 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 0+HTL-NT COM3 Power Supply DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 Do not use Do not use www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Slot X2: Relay Output Card - Zone Interlock Slot1 Slot2 X1 X2 X100 X101 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 X3 X4 X5 X6 X102 X103 X104 Rear Side of the Device (Slots) The type of card in this slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The different variants have a different scope of functions. Available assembly groups in this slot: • (RO-4Z X2): Assembly Group with four Relay Outputs (two Form A and two Form C) and Zone Interlocking. The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code. RO-ZI X - Relay Outputs and Zone Interlock The Relay Outputs are potential-free contacts. In the Assignment/Relay Outputs section, the assignment of the Relay Outputs is specified. The changeable signals are listed in the Assignment List section. Make sure that the tightening torque is 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]. Please carefully consider the current carrying capacity of the Relay Outputs. Please refer to the Technical Data. www.eaton.com 37 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Terminal Marking X?. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Do not use Do not use RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 OUT COM IN COM Pin Assignment 1 Do not use RO1 N.O. 5 4 3 Do not use 2 RO-4Z X 38 7 RO3 N.C. 8 RO3 CMN 9 RO3 N.O. 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 6 RO2 N.O. RO4 N.C. RO4 CMN RO4 N.O. OUT COM IN COM www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Slot X3: Current Transformer Measuring Inputs Slot1 Slot2 X1 X2 X100 X101 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 X3 X4 X5 X6 X102 X103 X104 Rear Side of the Device (Slots) This slot contains the current transformer measuring inputs. Depending on the order code, this might be a standard current measuring card or a sensitive ground current measuring card. Available assembly groups in this slot: • (TI-4 X3): Standard ground current measuring card. • (TIS-4 X3): Sensitive Ground current measuring card. The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code. TI X- Standard Phase and Ground Current Measuring Input Card A current measuring card is provided with four (4) current measuring inputs: three for measuring the phase currents and one for measuring of the ground current. Each of the current measuring inputs has a measuring input for 1 A and 5 A. The input for ground current measuring either can be connected to a zero sequence current transformer or, alternatively, it is possible to connect the summation current path of the phase current transformer to this input (residual connection). Current transformers have to be earth grounded on their secondary side. www.eaton.com 39 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Interrupting the secondary circuits of current transformers causes hazardous voltages. The secondary side of the current transformers have to be short circuited before the current circuit to the device is opened. The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current measuring transformers (with galvanic separation). • Do not mix the inputs (1 A/5 A). • Make sure the transformer ratios and the power of the CTs are correctly rated. If the rating of the CTs is not correct (overrated), then the normal operational conditions may not be recognized. The pickup value of the measuring unit amounts to approximately 3% of the rated current of the device. Also, the CTs need a current greater than approximately 3% of the rated current to ensure sufficient accuracy. Example: For a 600 A CT (primary current), any currents below 18 A cannot be detected. • Overloading can result in destruction of the measuring inputs or faulty signals. Overloading means that, in case of a short circuit, the current carrying capacity of the measuring inputs could be exceeded. Make sure that the tightening torque is 17.7 In-lb [2 Nm]. 40 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Terminal Markings X?. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1A 5A IA N 1A 5A IB N 1A 5A IC N 1A 5A IX N Pin Assignment 0+HTL-TI-x IA-1A 1 IA-5A 2 IB-1A 4 IB-5A 5 IC-1A 7 IC-5A 8 IX-1A 10 IX-5A 3 IA-N 6 IB-N 9 IC-N 12 IX-N 11 www.eaton.com 41 IM02602007E EDR-5000 TIS X – Phase and Sensitive Ground Current Measuring Card The sensitive ground current measuring card is provided with four (4) current measuring inputs: three for measuring the phase currents and one for measuring of the sensitive ground current. Each of the phase current measuring inputs has a measuring input for 1 A and 5 A. The sensitive ground current measuring inputs has a measuring input for 0.1 A and 0.5 A. The input for ground current measuring either can be connected to a zero sequence current transformer or, alternatively, it is possible to connect the summation current path of the phase current transformer to this input (residual connection). Current transformers have to be earth grounded on their secondary side. Interrupting the secondary circuits of current transformers causes hazardous voltages. The secondary side of the current transformers have to be short circuited before the current circuit to the device is opened. The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current measuring transformers (with galvanic separation). Make sure that the tightening torque is 17.7 In-lb [2 Nm]. 42 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Terminal Markings X?. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1A 5A IA N 1A 5A IB N 1A 5A IC N 0.1A 0.5A IX N Pin Assignment IA-1A 1 IA-5A 2 IB-1A 4 IB-5A 5 IC-1A 7 IC-5A IX-0.1A IX-0.5A 3 IA-N 6 IB-N 9 IC-N 12 IX-N 8 10 11 Common CT Wiring Configurations Check the installation direction. It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be grounded. www.eaton.com 43 IM02602007E EDR-5000 The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current measuring transformers (with galvanic separation). CT secondary circuits must always to be low-burdened or short-circuited during operation. For current and voltage sensing function external wired and appropriate current and voltage transformer shall be used, based on the required input measurement ratings. Those devices provide the necessary insulation functionality. All current measuring inputs can be provided with 1 A or 5 A nominal. Make sure that the wiring is correct. CT Connection Options The current transformers may be connected in several ways, and the specified configuration affects the way system measurements are made and results computed. The computation of the residual current IR, is dependent on the system configuration setting for the CT connection. The configurations resulting from the setting options are shown as well as the calculated IR residual current. 3-phase, 3-wire IG Calculated A B C X3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 IA' IB' IA IC' IB IC IR calc = IA + IB + IC = IG Three-phase Current Measurement; Inom Secondary = 5 A. 44 www.eaton.com 1A 5A IA N 1A 5A IB N 1A 5A IC N 1A 5A N IX IM02602007E EDR-5000 3-phase, 3-wire IG Measured A B C IA' IB' IA IC' IB IX' X3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1A 5A IA N 1A 5A IB N 1A 5A IC N 1A 5A IX N IC Zero Sequence Current Transformer: Measures the ground current (sum of the three phase currents). Can be used for measuring the ground current in isolated and compensated networks. The shield is to be returned through the zero sequence current transformer. IR calc = IA + IB + IC IX meas = IG Three-phase Current Measurement; Inom Secondary = 1 A. Ground Current Measuring via Zero Sequence CT ; IGnom Secondary = 1 A. Warning! The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the zero sequence current transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side. www.eaton.com 45 IM02602007E EDR-5000 4-wire system, 4th CT on Neutral A B N C X3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 IA' IB' IA IC' IB IN' IC IN IR calc´ IR calc = IG = IA + IB + IC - IN IX meas=IN 4-wire system, 4th CT on Neutral; In secondary = 5 A. 46 www.eaton.com 1A 5A N IA 1A 5A N IB 1A 5A IC N 1A 5A N IX IM02602007E EDR-5000 4-wire System Ground Current CT Involving Neutral A B N C X3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 IA' IA IB' IB IC' IR calc´ IC 1A 5A N IA 1A 5A N IB 1A 5A IC N 1A 5A N IX IG = IA + IB + IC + IN IR calc = IA + IB + IC = IG + IN IN IX meas = IG 4-wire system with ground current CT (Torodial) involving Neutral; In secondary = 5 A. Slot X4: Voltage Transformer Measuring Inputs Slot1 Slot2 X1 X2 X100 X101 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 X3 X4 X5 X6 X102 X103 X104 Rear Side of the Device (Slots) www.eaton.com 47 IM02602007E EDR-5000 This slot contains the voltage transformer measuring inputs. Voltage Measuring Inputs The device is provided with 4 voltage measuring inputs. Three for measuring the mains voltages (»VAB«, »VBC« , »VCA« - in case of Open Delta) or phase-to-neutral voltages (»VA«, »VB«, »VC« in case of Wye). The fourth measuring input is to be used for »VX«. Make sure that the tightening torque is 1.2-1-6 Nm [11-15 In-lb]. The rotating field of your power supply system has to be taken in to account. Make sure that the voltage transformers are wired correctly. For the Open Delta connection the system parameter »Main VT con« has to be set to »Open Delta«. For the Wye connection the system parameter »Main VT con« has to be set to »Wye«. Please refer to the Technical Data. 48 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Terminal Marking X?. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VL1/VL12 VL2/VL23 VL3/VL31 VX Pin assignment 1 VL1.1 2 VL1.2 3 VL2.1 4 VL2.2 5 VL3.1 6 VL3.2 7 VX1.1 8 0+HTL-TU-x VX1.2 www.eaton.com 49 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Common VT Wirings Check the installation direction of the VTs. It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be grounded. For current and voltage sensing function, externally wired and appropriate current and voltage transformer must be used, based on the required input measurement ratings. Those devices provide the necessary insulation functionality. VT Check Measuring Values Connect a three-phase measuring voltage equal to the rated voltage to the relay. Take the connection of the measuring transformers (open delta/Wye connection) into account. Now adjust the voltage values in the nominal voltage range with the corresponding nominal frequencies that are not likely to cause over-voltage or under-voltage trips. Compare the values shown in the device display with the readings of the measuring instruments. The deviation must be according to the specifications in the Technical Data section. 50 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 VT Wye A B C A VCA' VAB' B VBC' VAB C N VA' VBC VB' VC' VCA X?. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VA/ VAB VB/ VBC VC/ VCA VX VA VB VC Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs: "Wye" www.eaton.com 51 IM02602007E EDR-5000 VT Open Delta A B C X?. A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VCA' VAB' B VBC' C VAB VBC VCA Two-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measuring inputs: "Open Delta" Slot X5: Relay Output Card Slot1 Slot2 X1 X2 X100 X101 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 X3 X4 X5 X6 X102 X103 Rear Side of the Device (Slots) 52 www.eaton.com X104 VA/ VAB VB/ VBC VC/ VCA VX EDR-5000 IM02602007E The type of card in this slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The different variants have a different scope of functions. Available assembly groups in this slot: • (RO-6 X5): Assembly Group with 6 Relay Outputs (Form C). The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code. RO-6 X - Relay Outputs The Relay Outputs are potential-free contacts. In the Assignment/Relay Outputs section, the assignment of the Relay Outputs is specified. The changeable signals are listed in the Assignment List section. Make sure that the tightening torque is 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]. Please carefully consider the current carrying capacity of the Relay Outputs. Please refer to the Technical Data. www.eaton.com 53 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Terminal Marking X?. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6 Pin Assignment 54 1 RO1 N.C. 2 RO1 CMN 3 RO1 N.O. 4 RO2 N.C. 5 RO2 CMN 6 RO2 N.O. 7 RO3 N.C. 8 RO3 CMN 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 0+HTL-MK RO3 N.O. RO4 N.C. RO4 CMN RO4 N.O. RO5 N.C. RO5 CMN RO5 N.O. RO6 N.C. RO6 CMN RO6 N.O. www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Slot X100: Ethernet Interface Slot1 Slot2 X1 X2 X100 X101 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 X3 X4 X5 X6 X102 X103 X104 Rear Side of the Device (Slots) An Ethernet interface may be available depending on the device type ordered. The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code. Ethernet - RJ45 1 N.C. N.C. RxD – N.C. N.C. RxD + TxD – TxD + Terminal Marking 8 www.eaton.com 55 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Slot X103: Data Communication Slot1 Slot2 X1 X2 X100 X101 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 X3 X4 X5 X6 X102 X103 X104 Rear Side of the Device (Slots) The data communication interface in the X103 slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The scope of functions is dependent on the type of data communication interface. Available assembly groups in this slot: • RS485 Terminals The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code. 56 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 RS485 - Modbus® RTU Make sure that the tightening torque is 2-4 In-lb [0.22-0.45 Nm]. Terminal Marking Protective Relay 560Ω 560 Ω A(-) B(+) 120Ω 1 2 3 4 5 6 X103 HF Shield GND +5V Pin Assignment Protective Relay +5V R1 HF Shield R2 A(-) R1 B(+) R1 = 560 Ω R2 = 120 Ω GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 The Modbus® connection cable must be shielded. The shielding has to be fixed at the screw that is marked with the ground symbol at the rear side of the device. The communication is Half Duplex. www.eaton.com 57 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Wiring Example: Device in the Middle of the Bus Protective Relay +5V R1 R2 HF Shield R1 = 560 Ω R2 = 120 Ω GND R1 1 2 3 4 5 6 B(+) B(+)* A(-)* A(-) Wiring Example: Device at the End of the BUS (Using the Integrated Terminal Resistor) Protective Relay +5V R1 R2 R1 1 2 3 4 5 6 B(+) A(-) 58 www.eaton.com HF Shield R1 = 560 Ω R2 = 120 Ω GND IM02602007E EDR-5000 Shield at bus master side connected to earth termination resistors used Shield at bus device side connected to earth termination resistors used Shield at bus master side connected to earth termination resistors not used Common 6 HF Shield 5 TR-N 4 A(-) 3 TR-P 2 2.2nF (internal) B(+) 1 HF Shield 6 TR-N 5 Common 4 B(+) 3 A(-) 2 2.2nF (internal) TR-P 1 Common 6 HF Shield 5 TR-N HF Shield 4 B(+) Common 3 A(-) TR-N 2 2.2nF (internal) TR-P B(+) 1 A(-) TR-P Shielding Options (2-wire + Shield) 1 2 3 4 5 6 2.2nF (internal) Shield at bus device side connected to earth termination resistors not used Shield at bus master side connected to earth termination resistors used Shield at bus device side connected to earth termination resistors used 6 Shield at bus master side connected to earth termination resistors not used www.eaton.com 1 2 HF Shield 5 Common 4 A(-) 3 TR-N 2 B(+) 1 2.2nF (internal) TR-P 6 HF Shield 5 Common 4 TR-N 3 A(-) 2 B(+) 1 2.2nF (internal) TR-P 6 HF Shield HF Shield 5 Common Common 4 TR-N TR-N 3 A(-) A(-) 2 TR-P B(+) 1 2.2nF (internal) B(+) TR-P Shielding Options (3-wire + Shield) 3 4 5 6 2.2nF (internal) Shield at bus device side connected to earth termination resistors not used 59 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Slot X104: IRIG-B00X and Supervision Contact Slot1 Slot2 X1 X2 X100 X101 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6 X3 X4 X5 X6 X102 X103 X104 Rear Side of the Device (Slots) This comprises the IRIG-B00X and the System contact (Supervision Contact). System Contact and IRIG-B00X Make sure that the tightening torque is 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]. 60 SC IRIG-B- 1 2 3 4 5 X104 IRIG-B+ Terminals www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Pin Assignment for Device 0+HTL-uP-6 / 0+HTL-uP-14 SC N.O. SC CMN IRIG-B- SC N.C. IRIG-B+ X104 1 2 3 4 5 The Supervision Contact (SC) closes after the boot phase of the device if the protection is working. This Supervision Contact (SC) will open if an internal device error has occurred (please refer to the Self Supervision section). The System-OK contact (SC relay) cannot be configured. The system contact is a Form “C” contact that picks up when the device is free from internal faults. While the device is booting up, the System OK relay (SC) remains dropped-off (unenergized). As soon as the system is properly started, the System Contact picks up and the assigned LED is activated accordingly (please refer to the Self Supervision section). X120 - PC Interface The interface is a 9-pole D-Sub at all device fronts. Pin Assignment 1 6 5 9 1 DCD 2 RxD 3 TxD 4 DTR 5 GND 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS 9 RI Housing shielded www.eaton.com 61 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Assignment of the Null Modem Cable Assignment of the fully wired, null modem cable. Dsub -9 (Female) 2 3 4 6,1 7 8 5 9 Signal RxD TxD DTR DSR, DCD RTS CTS GND (Ground) Ring Signal Dsub -9 (Female) 3 2 6,1 4 8 7 5 9 The connection cable must be shielded. Control Wiring Diagram Below is the recommended control wiring schematic for the EDR-5000. Wiring Diagrams Please refer to the file “edr-5000_wiring_diagrams.pdf” on your manual CD. 62 www.eaton.com Signal TxD RxD DSR, DCD DTR CTS RTS GND (Ground) Ring Signal IM02602007E EDR-5000 Input, Output, and LED Settings Digital Input Configuration The State of the Digital Inputs can be checked within menu: [Operations/Status Display/Name of the assembly group (e.g. DI-8X)] The Digital Inputs can be configured within menu: [Device Para/Digital Inputs/Name of the assembly group (e.g. DI-8X)/Group X] Set the following parameters for each of the digital inputs: • »Nominal voltage«; • »Debouncing time«: A state change will only be adopted by the digital input after the debouncing time has expired; and • »Inverting« (where necessary). Inverting DI Slot X.DI x XOR State of the Digital Input. Nom Voltage Debouncing Time t Input Signal 0 The debouncing time will be started each time the state of the input signal alternates. In addition to the debouncing time that can be set via software, there is always a hardware debouncing time (approx 12 ms) that cannot be turned of. www.eaton.com 63 IM02602007E EDR-5000 DI-8P X Name of the Assembly group: DI-8P X1 Device Parameters of the Digital Inputs on DI-8P X Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Nom Voltage Nominal voltage of the digital inputs 24 V dc, 110/120 V dc [Device Para 48 V dc, /Digital Inputs 60 V dc, /DI-8P X1 110/120 V dc, /Group 1] 230/240 V dc, 110/120 V ac, 230/240 V ac Inverting 1 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 /Group 1] Debouncing Time 1 A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time, only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms, transient signals will not be misinterpreted. 50 ms, 20 ms /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 100 ms Nom Voltage Nominal voltage of the digital inputs 24 V dc, [Device Para /Group 1] 110/120 V dc [Device Para 48 V dc, /Digital Inputs 60 V dc, /DI-8P X1 110/120 V dc, /Group 2] 230/240 V dc, 110/120 V ac, 230/240 V ac Inverting 2 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 /Group 2] 64 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Debouncing Time 2 A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time, only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms, transient signals will not be misinterpreted. 50 ms, Default Menu Path 20 ms [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 100 ms Nom Voltage Nominal voltage of the digital inputs 24 V dc, /Group 2] 110/120 V dc [Device Para 48 V dc, /Digital Inputs 60 V dc, /DI-8P X1 110/120 V dc, /Group 3] 230/240 V dc, 110/120 V ac, 230/240 V ac Inverting 3 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 /Group 3] Debouncing Time 3 A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time, only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms, transient signals will not be misinterpreted. 50 ms, 20 ms /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 100 ms Inverting 4 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, [Device Para /Group 3] Inactive Active [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 /Group 3] Debouncing Time 4 A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time, only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms, transient signals will not be misinterpreted. 50 ms, 20 ms /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 100 ms Inverting 5 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, Active [Device Para /Group 3] Inactive [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 /Group 3] www.eaton.com 65 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Debouncing Time 5 A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time, only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms, transient signals will not be misinterpreted. 50 ms, Default Menu Path 20 ms [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 100 ms Inverting 6 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, /Group 3] Inactive Active [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 /Group 3] Debouncing Time 6 A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time, only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms, transient signals will not be misinterpreted. 50 ms, 20 ms /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 100 ms Inverting 7 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, [Device Para /Group 3] Inactive Active [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 /Group 3] Debouncing Time 7 A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time, only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms, transient signals will not be misinterpreted. 50 ms, 20 ms /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 100 ms Inverting 8 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, [Device Para /Group 3] Inactive Active [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 /Group 3] Debouncing Time 8 A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time, only be recognized after the debouncing time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms, transient signals will not be misinterpreted. 50 ms, 100 ms 66 www.eaton.com 20 ms [Device Para /Digital Inputs /DI-8P X1 /Group 3] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Digital Inputs Output Signals on DI-8P X Name Description DI 1 Signal: Digital Input DI 2 Signal: Digital Input DI 3 Signal: Digital Input DI 4 Signal: Digital Input DI 5 Signal: Digital Input DI 6 Signal: Digital Input DI 7 Signal: Digital Input DI 8 Signal: Digital Input Wired Inputs (Aliases) Available Elements: WiredInputs The module WiredInputs allows aliasing Digital Inputs. By means of the menu [Device Para/WiredInputs] the User can assign specific functions on digital inputs. Alias Example: The 52a contact will be assigned/connected to Digital input1 (DI1). Once the 52a is aliased (linked) on the DI1, the signal »WiredInput.52A« can be used instead of the DI1 signal for further processing within the protective relay. That means, from now on any state changes of the Digital Input1 will we represented by the »WiredInput.52A« signal. Global Protection Parameter of the Wired Inputs Wired Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path 52a M1 Main 1 Breaker Closed -.-, -.- [Device Para DI-8P X1.DI 1, /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 www.eaton.com 67 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path 52b M1 Main 1 Breaker Open -.-, -.- [Device Para DI-8P X1.DI 1, /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 TOCa M1 Main 1 Breaker Connected -.-, -.- DI-8P X1.DI 1, [Device Para /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 43/10 M1 Main 1 Breaker Selected To Trip -.-, DI-8P X1.DI 1, DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 68 www.eaton.com -.- [Device Para /WiredInputs] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path 52a M2 Main 2 Breaker Closed -.-, -.- [Device Para DI-8P X1.DI 1, /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 52b M2 Main 2 Breaker Open -.-, -.- DI-8P X1.DI 1, [Device Para /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 TOCa M2 Main 2 Breaker Connected -.-, DI-8P X1.DI 1, -.- [Device Para /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 www.eaton.com 69 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path 43/10 M2 Main 2 Breaker Selected To Trip -.-, -.- [Device Para DI-8P X1.DI 1, /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 52a T Tie Breaker Closed -.-, -.- DI-8P X1.DI 1, [Device Para /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 52b T Tie Breaker Open -.-, DI-8P X1.DI 1, DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 70 www.eaton.com -.- [Device Para /WiredInputs] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path TOCa T Tie Breaker Connected -.-, -.- [Device Para DI-8P X1.DI 1, /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 43/10 T Tie Breaker Selected To Trip -.-, -.- DI-8P X1.DI 1, [Device Para /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 43 M System In Manual -.-, DI-8P X1.DI 1, -.- [Device Para /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 www.eaton.com 71 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path 43 A System in Auto -.-, -.- [Device Para DI-8P X1.DI 1, /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 43 P1 Preferred Source 1 -.-, -.- DI-8P X1.DI 1, [Device Para /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 43 P2 Preferred Source 2 -.-, DI-8P X1.DI 1, DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 72 www.eaton.com -.- [Device Para /WiredInputs] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Bkr Trouble Breaker Trouble -.-, -.- [Device Para DI-8P X1.DI 1, /WiredInputs] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 States of the Inputs of the Wired Inputs Module Name Description Assignment Via 52a M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Closed [Device Para /WiredInputs] 52b M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Open [Device Para /WiredInputs] TOCa M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Connected [Device Para /WiredInputs] 43/10 M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Selected To Trip [Device Para /WiredInputs] 52a M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Closed [Device Para /WiredInputs] 52b M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Open [Device Para /WiredInputs] TOCa M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Connected [Device Para /WiredInputs] 43/10 M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Selected To Trip [Device Para /WiredInputs] 52a T -I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Closed [Device Para /WiredInputs] 52b T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Open [Device Para /WiredInputs] www.eaton.com 73 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via TOCa T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Connected [Device Para /WiredInputs] 43/10 T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Selected To Trip [Device Para /WiredInputs] 43 M-I State of the module input: System In Manual [Device Para /WiredInputs] 43 A-I State of the module input: System in Auto [Device Para /WiredInputs] 43 P1-I State of the module input: Preferred Source [Device Para 1 /WiredInputs] 43 P2-I State of the module input: Preferred Source [Device Para 2 /WiredInputs] Bkr Trouble-I Breaker Trouble [Device Para /WiredInputs] Relay Output Configuration The State of the Relay Outputs can be checked within menu: [Operations/Status Display/Name of the assembly group (e.g. RO-XX)] The Relay Outputs can be configured within menu: [Device Para/Relay Outputs/Name of the assembly group (e.g. RO-XX)] Set the following parameters for each of the relay output contacts. • Up to seven (7) signals from the »assignment list« (OR-connected). The states of the module outputs and the signals (e.g. states of protective functions) can be assigned to the relay output contacts. The relay output contacts are “dry-type“ contacts. • Each of the assigned signals can be inverted. • The (collective) state of the relay output contacts can be inverted. • Each relay output contact can be set as »Latched« (Latched = active or inactive). A latched relay output contact will return to it's latched position after a loss of power to the protective device. A latched relay output contact will keep it´s position as long as it has not been reset and as long as the power supply feeds the protective relay. In the case of a loss of power to the protective device, the relays will return to the latched position once the power is restored to the protective device (latched = relay output contacts have a memory). A latched state of a relay output contact always needs to be reset after a power loss even if the assignments are taken away (if the assignments are reprogrammed). 74 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E • Latched = inactive«: If the latching function is »inactive«, the relay output and, respectively, the relay output contact will adopt the state of those pickups that were assigned. • »Latched = active«: If the latching function is »active«, the state of the relay output and, respectively, the relay output contact that was set by the pickups will be stored (they have a memory that needs to be reset). The relay output contact can only be acknowledged after reset of those signals that had initiated the setting of the relay and after expiration of the »t-OFF delay«. • At signal changes, the minimal latching time (»t-OFF delay«) ensures that the relay will be maintained as picked-up or released for at least this period. If the relay output contacts are configured as »Latched=active«, they will keep their position even if there is a power outage within the power supply of the protective device. If the relay output contacts are configured as »Latched=active«, they will also retain their position even if they are reprogrammed in another way. This also applies if the relay output contacts are set to »Latched is set to inactive«. Resetting a relay output contact that has latched a signal will always require an acknowledgement. The »System OK Relay« (watchdog) cannot be configured. Acknowledgment Options Relay output contacts can be acknowledged: • Via the push-button »C« at the operating panel; • If »Latched is active«, each relay output contact can be acknowledged by a signal (for example: It could be reset by the state of a digital input); • Via the module »Ex Acknowledge« where all relay output contacts can be acknowledged at once if the signal for external acknowledgment that was selected from the »Assignment list« becomes true (e.g.: the state of a digital input); and • Via Communication (Comm), all relay output contacts can be acknowledged at once. Relay output contacts can be set by force or disarmed (for commisioning support, please refer to the “Service/Disarming the Relay Output Contacts“ and “Service/Forcing the Relay Output Contacts“ sections). www.eaton.com 75 76 www.eaton.com Latched Acknowledge-Comm Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List Acknowledge -HMI Active Inactive Inverting 7 Assignment 7 Inverting 6 Assignment 6 Inverting 5 Assignment 5 Inverting 4 Assignment 4 Inverting 3 Assignment 3 Inverting 2 Assignment 2 Inverting 1 Assignment 1 Inverting OR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR OR XOR AND R1 S Q Q OR t-Off Delay 0 Switch Off Delay OR State of the Relay Output IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 RO-4ZI X - Settings RO-4Z X2 Direct Commands of RO-4ZI X Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path DISARMED This is the second step, after the "DISARMED Ctrl" has been activated, that is required to DISARM the relay output contacts. This will DISARM those relay output contacts that are currently not latched and that are not timing out. CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance. Inactive, Inactive [Service Active /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /DISARMED /RO-4Z X2] Only available if: DISARMED Ctrl = Active Force all Outs By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Forcing all relay output contacts of an entire assembly group has precedence to forcing a single relay output. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-4Z X2] Force ZI RO Signal: Forced Zone Interlocking OUT Normal, Normal De-Energized, [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) Energized /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-4Z X2] Force RO1 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-4Z X2] www.eaton.com 77 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Force RO2 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-4Z X2] Force RO3 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-4Z X2] Force RO4 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-4Z X2] Global Protection Parameters of RO-4ZI X Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.1 s [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] 78 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges the corresponding Relay Output) can be assigned to each Relay Output. The acknowledgment-signal is only effective if the parameter "Latched" is set to active. Default Menu Path -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Only available if: Latched = Active Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List Breaker TripCmd [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] www.eaton.com 79 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Inverting 6 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] 80 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] Inverting 7 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges the corresponding Relay Output) can be assigned to each Relay Output. The acknowledgment-signal is only effective if the parameter "Latched" is set to active. -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Only available if: Latched = Active Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List Prot.Pickup [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] www.eaton.com 81 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] 82 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Inverting 6 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Inverting 7 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] www.eaton.com 83 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges the corresponding Relay Output) can be assigned to each Relay Output. The acknowledgment-signal is only effective if the parameter "Latched" is set to active. -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Only available if: Latched = Active Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List BF.Trip [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] 84 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] www.eaton.com 85 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 6 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Inverting 7 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges the corresponding Relay Output) can be assigned to each Relay Output. The acknowledgment-signal is only effective if the parameter "Latched" is set to active. -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Only available if: Latched = Active Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] 86 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] www.eaton.com 87 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Inverting 6 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Inverting 7 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] 88 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range DISARMED Ctrl Enables and disables the disarming of the Inactive, relay output contacts. This is the first step of a two step process, to inhibit the Active operation or the relay output contacts. Please refer to "DISARMED" for the second step. Default Menu Path Inactive [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /DISARMED /RO-4Z X2] Disarm Mode CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to Permanent, safely perform maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire Timeout process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance. Permanent [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /DISARMED /RO-4Z X2] t-Timeout DISARM The relays will be armed again after expiring of this time. 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.03 s [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) Only available if: Mode = Timeout DISARM /WARNING! Cont? /DISARMED /RO-4Z X2] Force Mode By means of this function the normal Relay Permanent, Output States can be overwritten (forced) in case that the Relay Output is not in a Timeout disarmed state. The relays can be set from normal operation (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force de-energized" state. Permanent [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-4Z X2] t-Timeout Force The Output State will be set by force for the 0.00 – 300.00 s duration of this time. That means, for the duration of this time, the Relay Output does not show the state of the signals that are assigned on it. 0.03 s [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? Only available if: Mode = Timeout DISARM /Force RO /RO-4Z X2] www.eaton.com 89 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Input States of RO-4ZI X Name Description Assignment Via RO1.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] RO1.2 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] RO1.3 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] RO1.4 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] RO1.5 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] RO1.6 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] RO1.7 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 1] 90 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via Ack signal RO 1 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para for the Relay Output. If latching is set to active, the Relay Output can only be /Relay Outputs acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-4Z X2 is expired. /RO 1] RO2.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] RO2.2 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] RO2.3 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] RO2.4 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] RO2.5 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] RO2.6 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] www.eaton.com 91 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via RO2.7 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 2] Ack signal RO 2 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para for the Relay Output. If latching is set to active, the Relay Output can only be /Relay Outputs acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-4Z X2 is expired. /RO 2] RO3.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] RO3.2 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] RO3.3 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] RO3.4 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] RO3.5 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] 92 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via RO3.6 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] RO3.7 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 3] Ack signal RO 3 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para for the Relay Output. If latching is set to active, the Relay Output can only be /Relay Outputs acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-4Z X2 is expired. /RO 3] RO4.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] RO4.2 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] RO4.3 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] RO4.4 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] www.eaton.com 93 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via RO4.5 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] RO4.6 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] RO4.7 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-4Z X2 /RO 4] Ack signal RO 4 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para for the Relay Output. If latching is set to active, the Relay Output can only be /Relay Outputs acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-4Z X2 is expired. /RO 4] Signals of RO-4ZI X Name Description ZI OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT RO 1 Signal: Relay Output RO 2 Signal: Relay Output RO 3 Signal: Relay Output RO 4 Signal: Relay Output DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals. 94 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 RO-6 X Settings RO-6 X5 Direct Commands of RO-6 X Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path DISARMED This is the second step, after the "DISARMED Ctrl" has been activated, that is required to DISARM the relay output contacts. This will DISARM those relay output contacts that are currently not latched and that are not timing out. CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance. Inactive, Inactive [Service Active /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /DISARMED /RO-6 X5] Only available if: DISARMED Ctrl = Active Force all Outs By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Forcing all relay output contacts of an entire assembly group has precedence to forcing a single relay output. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-6 X5] Force RO1 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-6 X5] Force RO2 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-6 X5] www.eaton.com 95 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Force RO3 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-6 X5] Force RO4 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-6 X5] Force RO5 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-6 X5] Force RO6 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Output State can be overwritten (forced). The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized, (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized energized" state. Normal [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-6 X5] 96 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Parameters of RO-6 X Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges the corresponding Relay Output) can be assigned to each Relay Output. The acknowledgment-signal is only effective if the parameter "Latched" is set to active. -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Only available if: Latched = Active Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] www.eaton.com 97 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] 98 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Inverting 6 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Inverting 7 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges the corresponding Relay Output) can be assigned to each Relay Output. The acknowledgment-signal is only effective if the parameter "Latched" is set to active. -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Only available if: Latched = Active www.eaton.com 99 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] 100 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Inverting 6 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] www.eaton.com 101 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 7 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges the corresponding Relay Output) can be assigned to each Relay Output. The acknowledgment-signal is only effective if the parameter "Latched" is set to active. -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Only available if: Latched = Active Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] 102 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] www.eaton.com 103 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Inverting 6 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Inverting 7 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] 104 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges the corresponding Relay Output) can be assigned to each Relay Output. The acknowledgment-signal is only effective if the parameter "Latched" is set to active. Default Menu Path -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Only available if: Latched = Active Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] www.eaton.com 105 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Inverting 6 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] 106 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Inverting 7 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges the corresponding Relay Output) can be assigned to each Relay Output. The acknowledgment-signal is only effective if the parameter "Latched" is set to active. -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Only available if: Latched = Active Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] www.eaton.com 107 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] 108 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Inverting 6 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] Inverting 7 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] www.eaton.com 109 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges the corresponding Relay Output) can be assigned to each Relay Output. The acknowledgment-signal is only effective if the parameter "Latched" is set to active. -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Only available if: Latched = Active Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Active Inactive [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] 110 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Assignment 6 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] www.eaton.com 111 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 6 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Assignment 7 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Inverting 7 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] DISARMED Ctrl Enables and disables the disarming of the Inactive, relay output contacts. This is the first step of a two step process, to inhibit the Active operation or the relay output contacts. Please refer to "DISARMED" for the second step. Inactive [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /DISARMED /RO-6 X5] Disarm Mode CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to Permanent, safely perform maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire Timeout process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance. Permanent [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /DISARMED /RO-6 X5] t-Timeout DISARM The relays will be armed again after expiring of this time. 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.03 s [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) Only available if: Mode = Timeout DISARM /WARNING! Cont? /DISARMED /RO-6 X5] 112 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Force Mode By means of this function the normal Relay Permanent, Output States can be overwritten (forced) in case that the Relay Output is not in a Timeout disarmed state. The relays can be set from normal operation (relay works according to the assigned signals) to "force energized" or "force de-energized" state. Default Menu Path Permanent [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Force RO /RO-6 X5] t-Timeout Force The Output State will be set by force for the 0.00 – 300.00 s duration of this time. That means, for the duration of this time, the Relay Output does not show the state of the signals that are assigned on it. 0.03 s [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? Only available if: Mode = Timeout DISARM /Force RO /RO-6 X5] Input States of RO-6 X Name Description Assignment Via RO1.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] RO1.2 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] RO1.3 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] RO1.4 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] www.eaton.com 113 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via RO1.5 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] RO1.6 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] RO1.7 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 1] Ack signal RO 1 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para for the Relay Output. If latching is set to active, the Relay Output can only be /Relay Outputs acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5 is expired. /RO 1] RO2.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] RO2.2 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] RO2.3 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] 114 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via RO2.4 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] RO2.5 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] RO2.6 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] RO2.7 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 2] Ack signal RO 2 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para for the Relay Output. If latching is set to active, the Relay Output can only be /Relay Outputs acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5 is expired. /RO 2] RO3.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] RO3.2 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] www.eaton.com 115 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via RO3.3 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] RO3.4 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] RO3.5 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] RO3.6 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] RO3.7 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 3] Ack signal RO 3 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para for the Relay Output. If latching is set to active, the Relay Output can only be /Relay Outputs acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5 is expired. /RO 3] RO4.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] 116 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via RO4.2 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] RO4.3 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] RO4.4 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] RO4.5 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] RO4.6 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] RO4.7 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 4] Ack signal RO 4 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para for the Relay Output. If latching is set to active, the Relay Output can only be /Relay Outputs acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5 is expired. /RO 4] www.eaton.com 117 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via RO5.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] RO5.2 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] RO5.3 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] RO5.4 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] RO5.5 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] RO5.6 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] RO5.7 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 5] 118 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via Ack signal RO 5 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para for the Relay Output. If latching is set to active, the Relay Output can only be /Relay Outputs acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5 is expired. /RO 5] RO6.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] RO6.2 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] RO6.3 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] RO6.4 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] RO6.5 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] RO6.6 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] www.eaton.com 119 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via RO6.7 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para /Relay Outputs /RO-6 X5 /RO 6] Ack signal RO 6 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para for the Relay Output. If latching is set to active, the Relay Output can only be /Relay Outputs acknowledged if those signals that initiated the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5 is expired. /RO 6] Signals of RO-6 X Name Description RO 1 Signal: Relay Output RO 2 Signal: Relay Output RO 3 Signal: Relay Output RO 4 Signal: Relay Output RO 5 Signal: Relay Output RO 6 Signal: Relay Output DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals. LED Configuration The LEDs can be configured within menu: [Device Para/LEDs/Group X] Attention must be paid to insure that there are no overlapping functions due to double or multiple LED assignment of colors and flashing codes. If LEDs are configured as »Latched=active«, they will keep (return to) their blink code and color even if there is a power outage within the power supply of the protective device. If the LEDs are configured as »Latched=active«, they will also retain their blink code and color even if the LEDs are reprogrammed in another way. This also applies if the LEDs are set to »Latched = inactive«. Resetting a LED that has latched a signal will always require an acknowledgement. 120 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E This chapter contains information on the LEDs that are placed on the left hand side of the display (Group A). If your device is also equipped with LEDs on the right hand side of the display (Group B), the analog information in this chapter is valid. The only difference between “Group A” and “Group B” is within the menu paths. Via the »INFO« push-button, it is always possible to display the current pickups and alarm texts that are assigned to an LED. Please refer to the Navigation section for a description of the »INFO« push-button functionality. Set the following parameters for each LED. • »Latching (self holding function)«: If »Latching« is set to »Active«, the state that is set by the pickups will be stored until it is reset. If »Latching« is set to »Inactive«, the LED always adopts the state of those pickups that were assigned. • »Acknowledgement«: Signal that will reset the LED. • »LED active color«: LED lights up in this color when at least one of the allocated functions is valid (red, red-flashing, green, green flashing, off). • »LED inactive color«: LED lights up in this color when none of the allocated functions is valid (red, redflashing, green, green flashing, off). • »Assignment 1...n« Apart from the LED for System OK, each LED can be assigned up to five functions (e.g. pickups) out of the »Assignment list«. • »Inverting an Assignment 1...n«: This will invert the input signal. Acknowledgment Options LEDs can be acknowledged by: • The push-button »C« at the operating panel; • A signal from the »LED Reset list« (e.g. digital inputs or communication signals) (If »Latched = active«); • The »Ex Acknowledge« module - all LEDs can be acknowledged at once, if the signal for external acknowledgment becomes true (e.g.: the state of a digital input); and • Communication (Comm) - all LEDs can be acknowledged at once. www.eaton.com 121 122 www.eaton.com XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR Acknowledge-Comm Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List Acknowledge -HMI Active Inactive Latched Inverting 5 Assignment 5 Inverting 4 Assignment 4 Inverting 3 Assignment 3 Inverting 2 Assignment 2 Inverting 1 Assignment 1 OR OR AND Q Q S R1 OR LED Inactive Color LED Active Color IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 The »System OK« LED This LED flashes green while the device is booting. After booting is complete, the LED for System OK lights up in green signaling that the protection (function) is »activated«. If, however, in spite of successful booting, or after the third unsuccessful reboot caused by the self supervision module, the System OK – LED flashes in red or is solidly illuminated in red, please contact your Eaton Corporation Customer Service Representative (also see the Self Supervision section). The System OK LED cannot be configured. LED Settings LEDs group A ,LEDs group B Device Parameters of the LEDs Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, LEDs group A: Active [Device Para Active /LEDs LEDs group B: Inactive /LEDs group A /LED 1] Ack signal Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If 1..n, Assignment List latching is set to active the LED can only be acknowledged if all signals that initiated the setting of the LED are no longer present. -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A Dependency Only available if: Latched = Active LED Active Color /LED 1] The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, Red flash, LEDs group A: Red [Device Para /LEDs LEDs group B: Green Green flash, /LEDs group A /LED 1] LED Inactive Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is false. Red, - [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 1] - www.eaton.com 123 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: [Device Para 51P[1].TripCmd /LEDs LEDs group B: Breaker.Pos /LEDs group A OPEN /LED 1] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active Menu Path [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] 124 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, LEDs group A: Active Active [Device Para /LEDs LEDs group B: Inactive /LEDs group A /LED 2] Ack signal Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If 1..n, Assignment List latching is set to active the LED can only be acknowledged if all signals that initiated the setting of the LED are no longer present. -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A Only available if: Latched = Active /LED 2] LED Active Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, Red [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 2] LED Inactive Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is false. Red, - [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 2] - www.eaton.com 125 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: [Device Para 51X[1].TripCmd /LEDs LEDs group B: Breaker.Pos /LEDs group A CLOSE /LED 2] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active Menu Path [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: [Device Para 51R[1].TripCmd /LEDs LEDs group B: -./LEDs group A /LED 2] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] 126 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Active Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] Ack signal Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If 1..n, Assignment List latching is set to active the LED can only be acknowledged if all signals that initiated the setting of the LED are no longer present. -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A Only available if: Latched = Active /LED 3] LED Active Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, Red [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 3] LED Inactive Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is false. Red, - [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 3] - www.eaton.com 127 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: [Device Para 50P[1].TripCmd /LEDs LEDs group B: 27M[1].TripCmd /LEDs group A /LED 3] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: -.- [Device Para /LEDs LEDs group B: 59M[1].TripCmd /LEDs group A /LED 3] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] 128 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Active Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] Ack signal Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If 1..n, Assignment List latching is set to active the LED can only be acknowledged if all signals that initiated the setting of the LED are no longer present. -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A Only available if: Latched = Active /LED 4] LED Active Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, Red [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 4] LED Inactive Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is false. Red, - [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 4] - www.eaton.com 129 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: [Device Para 50X[1].TripCmd /LEDs LEDs group B: 81[1].TripCmd /LEDs group A /LED 4] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: [Device Para 50R[1].TripCmd /LEDs LEDs group B: 81[3].TripCmd /LEDs group A /LED 4] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: -.- [Device Para /LEDs LEDs group B: 81[5].TripCmd /LEDs group A /LED 4] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] 130 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, LEDs group A: Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs LEDs group B: Active /LEDs group A /LED 5] Ack signal Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If 1..n, Assignment List latching is set to active the LED can only be acknowledged if all signals that initiated the setting of the LED are no longer present. -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A Only available if: Latched = Active /LED 5] LED Active Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, Red flash, LEDs group A: Red flash [Device Para /LEDs LEDs group B: Red Green flash, /LEDs group A /LED 5] LED Inactive Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is false. Red, - [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 5] - www.eaton.com 131 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: Prot.Pickup [Device Para /LEDs LEDs group B: ZI.TripCmd /LEDs group A /LED 5] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] 132 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, Active Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] Ack signal Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If 1..n, Assignment List latching is set to active the LED can only be acknowledged if all signals that initiated the setting of the LED are no longer present. -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A Only available if: Latched = Active /LED 6] LED Active Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, Red [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 6] LED Inactive Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is false. Red, - [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 6] - www.eaton.com 133 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: BF.Trip [Device Para /LEDs LEDs group B: LOP.LOP Blo /LEDs group A /LED 6] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] 134 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched when it picks up. Inactive, LEDs group A: Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs LEDs group B: Active /LEDs group A /LED 7] Ack signal Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If 1..n, Assignment List latching is set to active the LED can only be acknowledged if all signals that initiated the setting of the LED are no longer present. -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A Only available if: Latched = Active /LED 7] LED Active Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, Red flash, LEDs group A: Green flash [Device Para /LEDs LEDs group B: Red Green flash, /LEDs group A /LED 7] LED Inactive Color The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, the OR-assignment of the signals is false. Red, - [Device Para /LEDs Red flash, /LEDs group A Green flash, /LED 7] - www.eaton.com 135 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: [Device Para Sys.Maint Mode Active /LEDs LEDs group B: Prot.Trip Menu Path /LEDs group A /LED 7] Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] Inverting 2 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] Assignment 3 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] Inverting 3 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] Assignment 4 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] 136 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Inverting 4 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Default Menu Path Inactive [Device Para Active /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] Assignment 5 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] Inverting 5 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive Active [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] LED Input States Name Description Assignment Via LED1.1 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] LED1.2 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] LED1.3 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] LED1.4 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] www.eaton.com 137 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via LED1.5 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] Acknow Sig 1 Module Input State: Acknowledgment Signal (only for automatic acknowledgment). [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 1] LED2.1 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] LED2.2 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] LED2.3 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] LED2.4 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] LED2.5 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] 138 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via Acknow Sig 2 Module Input State: Acknowledgment Signal (only for automatic acknowledgment). [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 2] LED3.1 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] LED3.2 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] LED3.3 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] LED3.4 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] LED3.5 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] Acknow Sig 3 Module Input State: Acknowledgment Signal (only for automatic acknowledgment). [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 3] www.eaton.com 139 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via LED4.1 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] LED4.2 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] LED4.3 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] LED4.4 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] LED4.5 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] Acknow Sig 4 Module Input State: Acknowledgment Signal (only for automatic acknowledgment). [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 4] LED5.1 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] 140 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via LED5.2 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] LED5.3 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] LED5.4 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] LED5.5 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] Acknow Sig 5 Module Input State: Acknowledgment Signal (only for automatic acknowledgment). [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 5] LED6.1 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] LED6.2 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] www.eaton.com 141 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via LED6.3 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] LED6.4 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] LED6.5 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] Acknow Sig 6 Module Input State: Acknowledgment Signal (only for automatic acknowledgment). [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 6] LED7.1 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] LED7.2 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] LED7.3 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] 142 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via LED7.4 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] LED7.5 Module Input State: LED [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] Acknow Sig 7 Module Input State: Acknowledgment Signal (only for automatic acknowledgment). [Device Para /LEDs /LEDs group A /LED 7] www.eaton.com 143 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Front Panel Programmable LEDs LED »System OK« Display 2 3 1 Programmable LEDs 4 Protective Device 5 Softkeys 6 7 INFO Key ACK/RST-key (Signals/Messages) 144 8 RS232 Interface (PowerPort-E Connection) www.eaton.com 9 10 OK-key Control IM02602007E EDR-5000 Item Graphic Name Description 1 Group A: Programmable LEDs Basically, there are 14 programmable LEDs (7 on the left, 7 on the right side) provided for User to configure. The choice for each programmable LED can be any signal from the global assignment list, which includes all internal operation states of each function activated. Based on the application need, up to 14 (but not necessarily all) programmable LEDs can be activated. By properly configuring some or all 14 LEDs, the User will be able to view the relay's overall operation and some critical information immediately and intuitively without having to access any menu. 2 LED »System OK« Should the LED »System OK« flash red during operation, contact Customer Support immediately. 3 Display Via the display, the User can view operational data and edit the parameters. (Example for an insert) www.eaton.com 145 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Item Graphic Name Description 4 Group B: Programmable LEDs Basically, there are 14 programmable LEDs (7 on the left, 7 on the right side) provided for User to configure. The choice for each programmable LED can be any signal from the global assignment list, which includes all internal operation states of each function activated. Based on the application need, up to 14 (but not necessarily all) programmable LEDs can be activated. By properly configuring some or all 14 LEDs, the User will be able to view the relay's overall operation and some critical information immediately and intuitively without having to access any menu. Softkeys The function of the »SOFTKEYS« changes. Their active functions appear on the bottom line of the display. (Example for an insert) 5 Possible functions are: 146 www.eaton.com • Navigation; • Parameter decrement/increment; • Scrolling up/down a menu page; • Moving to a digit; and • Change into the parameter setting mode »Wrench Symbol«. IM02602007E EDR-5000 Item Graphic Name Description 6 INFO Key Looking through the present (Signals/Message LED assignment. The Direct s) Select key can be activated at any time. If the INFO key is actuated again, the User will leave the LED menu. Here only the first assignments of the LEDs will be shown. Every three seconds the »SOFTKEYs« will be shown (flashing). Displaying the Multiple Assignments If the INFO key is pressed, only the first assignments of any LED is shown. Every three seconds the »SOFTKEYs« will be shown (flashing). If there is more than one signal assigned to an LED (indicated by three dots), the User can check the state of the multiple assignments by proceeding as follows. In order to show all (multiple) assignments, select an LED by means of the »SOFTKEYs« »up« and »down«. Via the »Softkey« »right«, call up a sub-menu of this LED that gives the User detailed information on the state of all signals assigned to this LED. An arrow symbol points to the LED whose assignments are currently displayed. Via the »SOFTKEYs« »up« and »down«, the User can call up the next / previous LED. In order to leave the LED menu, press the »SOFTKEY« »left« multiple times. www.eaton.com 147 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Item Graphic Name Description 7 »ACK/RST- Key« Used to abort changes and to acknowledge messages as well as resetting counters. In order to reset, press the Softkey »Wrench« and enter the password. The User can exit the reset menu by pressing the Softkey »Arrow-left« 8 RS232 Interface (PowerPort-E Connection) Connection to the computer/software PowerPortE is done via the RS232 interface. 9 »OK Key« When using the »OK« key, parameter changes are temporarily stored. If the »OK« key is pressed again, those changes are stored indefinitely. 10 »CTRL Key« Access to the Control menu (not available in all devices) Basic Menu Control The graphic User interface is equivalent to a hierarchical structured menu tree. For access to the individual submenus, the »SOFTKEYS«/Navigation Keys are used. The function of the »SOFTKEYS« can be found near the bottom of the display. Softkey 148 Description • Via »SOFTKEY« »Up«, the User will be taken to the prior menu point/one parameter up by scrolling upwards. • Via »SOFTKEY« »Left«, the User will be taken one step back. • Via »SOFTKEY« »Down«, the User will be taken to the next menu point/one parameter down by scrolling downwards. • Via »SOFTKEY« »Right«, the User will be taken to a sub-menu. • Via »SOFTKEY« »Top of List«, the User will be taken directly to the top of a list. • Via »SOFTKEY« »Bottom of List«, the User will be taken directly to the end of a list. www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Softkey Description • Via »SOFTKEY« »+«, the related digit will be incremented. (Continuous pressure -> fast). • Via »SOFTKEY« »-«, the related digit will be decremented. (Continuous pressure -> fast) • Via »SOFTKEY« »Left«, the User will be taken one digit to the left. • Via »SOFTKEY« »Right«, the User will be taken one digit to the right. • Via »SOFTKEY« »Parameter Setting«, the User will call up the parameter setting mode. • Via »SOFTKEY« »Delete«, data will be deleted. In order to return to the main menu, just keep pressing the Softkey »Arrow-Left« until you arrive at the »Main Menu». PowerPort-E Keyboard Commands The User can control PowerPort-E alternatively by means of keyboard commands (instead of the mouse). Key Description á Move up within the navigation tree or parameter list. â Move down within the navigation tree or parameter list. ß Collapse the tree item or select a folder on a higher level. à Expands the tree item or selects a sub-folder. Numpad + Expands the tree item. Numpad - Collapses the tree item. Home Moves to the top of the active window. End Moves to the bottom of the active window. Ctrl+O Opens the file opening dialog. Allows browsing through the file system for an existing device file. Ctrl+N Creates a new parameter file by means of a template. Ctrl+S Saves the actual loaded parameter file. F1 Displays the on-line help information. www.eaton.com 149 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Key Description F2 Loads device data. F5 Reloads the displayed data of a device. Ctrl+F5 Enables the automatic refresh. Ctrl+Shift+T Moves back to the navigation window. Ctrl+F6 Walks through the tabular forms (detail windows). Page á Moves to the previous value (parameter setting). Page â Moves to the next value (parameter setting). 150 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E PowerPort-E PowerPort-E is software that is used to configure a device and read data from a device. PowerPort-E provides the following: • • • • • • Menu controlled parameter setting including validity checks; Off-line configuration of all relay types; Reading and evaluation of statistical data and measuring values; Commissioning Support (Forcing Relays, Disarming Relays); Display of the device status; and Fault analysis via event and fault recorder. Installation of PowerPort-E Port 52152 must not be blocked by a Firewall. If it is, the connection will be blocked. If the Windows Vista User Access Control pops up while installing PowerPort-E, please “Allow” all installation requirements concerning PowerPort-E. System Requirements: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7). To install PowerPort-E: • Double-click on the installation file with the left mouse button. • Confirm by pressing the »Continue« button in the INFO frame. • Select an installation path or confirm the standard installation path by mouse click on the »Continue« button. • Confirm the entry for the suggested installation folder by mouse click on the »Continue« button. • Start the installation process by mouse click on the »Install« button. • Finish the installation procedure by mouse click on the »Complete« button. If the suggested installation folder was chosen in the procedure above, the User can now call up the program via [Start > Programs > Eaton Relays> PowerPort-E]. Uninstalling PowerPort-E Via the [Start>System Control >Software] menu, the PowerPort-E application can be uninstalled from the computer. www.eaton.com 151 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Setting up the Serial Connection PC - Device Set Up a Connection Via Serial Interface Under Windows 2000 After installation of the software, the »Connection PC/Notebook to the Device« has to be initially configured so that the User is able to read device data or re-write them into the device by means of the PowerPort-E application. To connect the device to the User's PC/notebook, a special null modem cable is needed (no serial cable!- -please refer to the section »Null Modem Cable«). If the PC/notebook does not have a serial interface, the User will need a special USB-to-serial-adapter. If the USB-to-serial-adapter is correctly installed, communication with the device can be established using the CD provided (see the next section). The connection of the PC/notebook to the device MUST NOT be protected/encrypted via a smartcard. If the network connection wizard asks to encrypt the connection via a smartcard or not, please choose »Do not use the smartcard«. Setting Up/Configuring the Connection • Connect the PC/notebook with the device via a null modem cable. • Start the PowerPort-E application. • • Select the menu point »Device Connection« in the »Settings« menu. • Click on »Serial Connection«. • Click the »Settings« button. • When initially setting up the connection, a dialog window appears with the information that, so far, a direct connection with your protection device has not been established. Click on »Yes«. • If, to this point, a location has not been set up on your PC, your location information has to be put in. Confirm the pop-up window »Telephone and Modem Options« with »OK«. • The Windows network connection assistant appears after the location information is set up. Select the connection type »Establish direct connection to another computer«. • Select the serial interface (COM-Port) where the device shall be connected. • Select »To be used for all Users« in the »Availability of the connection« window. • Do not change the connection name appearing in window »Name of the connection« and click the button »Complete«. • Finally, you arrive again in the window »Device Installation« from where you started establishing the connection. Confirm the adjustments by clicking the »OK« button. 152 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Due to a problem in Windows 2000, it is possible that the automatically made communication settings are not correctly adopted. In order to overcome this problem, proceed as follows after setting up the serial connection. • Select the menu point »Device Connection« in the »Settings« menu. • Select »Serial Connection«. • Click on the »Settings« button. • Change the register card to »General«. • Ensure that »Communication cable between two computers Com X« is selected in the »Drop Down Menu«. X = the interface number where the User has connected the null modem cable. • Click the »Configure« button. • Ensure that the »Hardware Flowing Control« is activated. • Ensure that a baud rate »115200« is selected. Set Up a Serial Connection Via Serial Interface Under Windows XP After installation of the software, the »Connection PC/Notebook to the Device« has to be initially configured so that the User is able to read device data or re-write them into the device by means of the PowerPort-E application. To connect the device to the User's PC/notebook, a special null modem cable is needed (no serial cable!- -please refer to the section »Null Modem Cable«). If the PC/notebook does not have a serial interface, the User will need a special USB-to-serial-adapter. If the USB-to-serial-adapter is correctly installed, communication with the device can be established using the CD provided (see the next section). Setting Up/Configuring the Connection • Connect your PC/notebook with the device via a null modem cable. • Start the PowerPort-E application. • Select the menu point »Device Connection« in the »Settings« menu. • Click on »Serial Connection«. • Click the »Settings« button. • When initially setting up the connection, a dialog window appears with the information that, so far, a direct connection with your protection device has not been established. Click on »Yes«. www.eaton.com 153 IM02602007E EDR-5000 • If, to this point, a location has not been set up on your PC, your location information has to be put in. Confirm the following pop-up window »Telephone and Modem Options« by selecting »OK«. • The Windows network connection assistant appears after the location information is set up. Select the connection type »Establish direct connection to another computer«. • Select the serial interface (COM-Port) where the device will be connected. • Select »To be used for all Users« in the »Availability of the connection« window. • Do not change the connection name appearing in the »Name of the connection« window and click the »Complete« button. • Finally, you arrive again in the »Device Installation« window where you started establishing the connection. Confirm the adjustments by clicking the »OK« button. Parameter Setting and Evaluation via Serial/RS232 Device Example Protective Relay RS232 PowerPort-E Set up a Connection Via Serial Interface Under Windows Vista or Windows 7 Establishing the connection between PowerPort-E and the device is a three step procedure. 1.Installing PowerPort-E (the application itself) 2.Installing a (virtual) modem (that is a precondition for TCP/IP communication via a null modem cable)/ (to be done within the Windows Phone and Modem dialog). 154 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E 3.Establishing a network connection between PowerPort-E and the device (to be done within PowerPort-E). 1. Installation of PowerPort-E (the application itself). • Refer to the “Installation of PowerPort-E” (earlier in this section). 2. Installation of the (virtual) modem. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Open the Windows Start menu and type “Phone and Modem” and RETURN. This opens the “Phone and Modem” Dialog. Go to the »Modem« tab. Click on the »Add« button. The Hardware Wizard window “Install New Modem” pops up. Set the check box “Don´t detect my modem; I will select it from a list”. Click on the »Next« button. Select Communications cable between two computers. Click on the »Next« button. Choose the correct COM-Port. Click on the »Next« button. Click on the »Finish« button. Select the new added modem and click on the »Properties« button. Go to the »General« tab. Click on the »Change settings« button. Go to the »Modem« tab. Within the Drop-Down Menu, set the correct baud rate = 115200. Close this dialog with the »OK« button. Close the Phone and Modem dialog with the »OK« button. You have to reboot your computer now! 3. Establishing a network connection between PowerPort-E and the device. • • • • • • • • • Connect the device to the PC/notebook via a correct null modem cable. Run PowerPort-E. Call up »Device Connection« within the menu »Device Connection«. Click on the »Settings« button. A connection wizard will pop up asking you How do you want to connect. Choose »Dial-up«. The telephone number must not be empty. Please enter any number (e.g. 1). The User name and password can be ignored. Click on the »OK« button. Calling Up Web Site While Connected to a Device In principle, it is possible to call up web sites while there is an active connection to the device. If your computer has no direct connection to the Internet, that means that it is placed behind a proxy server. In certain circumstances, the device connection has to be modified. The device connection has to be provided with www.eaton.com 155 IM02602007E EDR-5000 the proxy settings. Internet Explorer For each connection, the proxy settings have to be set manually. Please proceed as follows. • Start your Internet Explorer. • Call up the »Tools« menu. • Call up the »Internet options« menu. • Call up the »Connections« tab. • Left click on the »Settings« button on the right of the »Device-Connection«. • Set the check box »Use Proxy Server for this connection«. • Enter the proxy settings that are available from your network administrator. • Confirm the settings by pressing »OK«. Firefox The proxy settings are centrally managed, so there is no need to modify any settings. Establishing the Serial Connection Via a USB-/RS232-Adapter If your PC/notebook does not have an RS-232 interface, an USB-/RS232-Adapter+Null Modem Cable can be used. Only an adapter approved by Eaton Corporation may be used. First install the adapter (with the related driver that you can find on the CD) and then establish the connection (PowerPort-E => Device). The adapters must support very high speed data transfer. Set-up a Connection Via Ethernet - TCP/IP Warning: Mixing up IP Addresses (In case there is more than one protective device within the TCP/IP network or establishing an unintentional wrong connection to a protective device based on a wrong entered IP address. Transferring parameters into the wrong protective device might lead to death, personal injury, or damage of electrical equipment. In order to prevent faulty connections, the User MUST document and maintain a list with the IP addresses of any switchboard/protective devices. The User MUST double check the IP addresses of the connection that is to be established. That means, the User MUST first read out the IP address at the HMI of the device (within menu [Device para/TCP IP]) then compare the IP address with the list. If the addresses are identical, establish the connection. If they are not, DO NOT establish the connection. 156 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if your device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45). Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection. Part 1: Set the TCP/IP Parameters at the panel (Device). Call up the »Device parameter/TCP/IP« menu at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters: • TCP/IP address • Subnet mask • Gateway Part 2: Setting the IP address within PowerPort-E. • Call up the menu Settings/Device Connection within PowerPort-E. • Set the radio button Network Connection. • Enter the IP-Address of the device that should be connected. PowerPort-E IP-Address TCP/IP Device Example Parameter Setting and Evaluation via TCP/IP www.eaton.com 157 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Or: PowerPort-E TCP/IP Ethernet TCP/IP Device Example TCP/IP ... IP-Address Protective Relay IP-Address IP-Address TCP/IP Device Example Protective Relay Device Example Parameter Setting and Evaluation via TCP/IP Set-up a Connection Via Modbus Tunnel Establishing a connection via a Gateway (TCP/IP)/Modbus RTU to the device is only possible if your device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45). Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection. Part 1: If you do not know the Slave ID of the device that should be connected via Modbus Tunnel, it can be read out at the device. 158 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 • IM02602007E Call up the menu »Device parameter/Modbus« at the HMI (panel) and read out the Slave ID. Part 2: Setting the IP address of the gateway and the Slave ID of the device that is to be connected via Modbus tunnel using PowerPort-E. • Call up the menu Settings/Device Connection within PowerPort-E. • Set the radio button Modbus TCP Gateway. • Enter the IP-Address of the device that should be connected. • Enter the Slave ID of the device. www.eaton.com 159 IM02602007E EDR-5000 PowerPort-E TCP/IP Power Xpert Gateway IP-Address Modbus RTU Device Example ... SLAVE ID n Protective Relay Modbus RTU SLAVE ID 3 SLAVE ID 2 Modbus RTU Device Example Protective Relay Device Example Parameter Setting and Evaluation via Modbus Tunnel PowerPort-E Troubleshooting • Make sure that the Windows service Telephony is started. In [Start>System Control >Administration >Services] the service »Telephony« must be visible and must have been started. If not, the service has to be started. • For establishing the connection, the User needs to have sufficient rights (administration rights). • If a firewall is installed on your computer, TCP/IP port 52152 must have been released. 160 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E • If your computer does not have a serial interface, the User needs a USB-to-serial-adapter, approved by Eaton Corporation. This adapter has to be properly installed. • Ensure that a null modem cable is used (a standard serial cable without control wires does not enable communication). If a serial interface connection can not be established, and the User is running a Windows XP Operating System, the following may be the cause. If a serial interface was selected in the connection assistant, it may be that this is not entered correctly in the dial-up network due to a bug in the Windows operating system. Your attention is drawn to this problem by the operational software and the error message »Warning, invalid connection setting« will be shown. To solve this problem, you need administration rights. Please proceed as follows. • Select the menu item »Device Connection« in the »Settings« menu. • Select »Serial Connection«. • Click the »Settings« button. • Change the register card to »General«. • Ensure that »Communication cable between two computers (Com X)« is selected in the Drop Down menu. »X« = the interface number where the null modem cable is connected. If the message »Warning, invalid connection settings« appears during establishment of the connection, it indicates that the connection adjustments chosen are not correct. If this warning is displayed, the User may respond as follows. »Yes«: (to set up a completely new connection). By selecting »Yes«, all adjustments are canceled and the connection assistant is opened again for renewed adjustment of the connection to the device. This procedure is advisable in case basic adjustments cannot be modified via the characteristics dialog (e.g.: if a new additional serial interface has been installed on the system). »No«: (to modify the existing dial-up network entry). Selecting »No« opens the dialog for characteristics of the connection settings. During the dialog, it is possible to correct invalid settings (e.g.: the recommended baud rate). »Cancel«: The warning is ignored and the connection adjustments remain as they are set. This procedure is accepted for a limited time, but the User is required to establish a correct connection at a later time. www.eaton.com 161 IM02602007E EDR-5000 PowerPort-E Persistent Connection Problems In the case of persistent connection problems, the User should remove all connection settings and establish them again. In order to remove all connection settings, please proceed as follows. 1. Remove the Settings for the Dial-up Network. • Close PowerPort-E. • Call up the »Control Panel«. • Choose »Network & Internet«. • On the left side, click on »Manage Network Connections«. • Right click on »"Protective Device Name" Direct Connection«. • Choose »Delete« from the shortcut menu. • Click on the »OK« button. 2. Remove the (Virtual) Modem. • Call up the »Control Panel«. • Choose »Hardware & Sound«. • Choose »Phone & Modem Options«. • Go to the »Modem« tab. • Click on the correct (in case there is more than one) entry »Connection cable between two computers«. • Click on the »Remove« button. Loading of Device Data When Using PowerPort-E • Start the PowerPort-E application. • Make sure the connection has been established properly. • Connect your PC with the device via a null modem cable. • Select »Receiving Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu. 162 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Restoring Device Data When Using PowerPort-E By selecting the »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« button, only modified parameters are transmitted into the device. Parameter modifications are indicated by a red “star symbol” in front of the parameter. The star symbol (in the device tree window) indicates that parameters in the opened file (within PowerPort-E) differ from parameters stored on your local hard disk. By selecting the »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« button, the User can transmit all parameters that are marked by this symbol. If a parameter file is saved on the local hard drive, these parameters are no longer classified to be modified and cannot be transmitted via the »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« button. In case the User has loaded and modified a parameter file from the device and saved it to the local hard drive without transferring the parameters into the device before hand, the User cannot use the »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« button. In this case, use the »Transfer all parameters into the device« button. The »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« button only works if modified parameters are available in the PowerPort-E application. In contrast, all parameters of the device are transferred when the »Transfer all parameters into the device« button is pressed (provided all device parameters are valid). • In order to (re-)transfer changed parameters into the device, select »Transfer all parameters into the device« in the »Device« menu. • Confirm the safety inquiry »Shall the parameters be overwritten into the device?«. • Enter the password for setting parameters in the pop-up window. • The changed data is transferred to the device and adopted. • Confirm the inquiry »Parameters successfully updated?«. It is recommended to save the parameters into a local file on your hard drive. Confirm »Shall The Data Be Saved Locally?“« with »Yes« (recommended). Select a suitable folder on the hard disk. • Confirm the chosen folder by clicking »Save«. • The changed parameter data are now saved in the chosen folder. www.eaton.com 163 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Backup and Documentation When Using PowerPort-E How to Save Device Data on a PC Click on »Save as ...« in the »File« menu. Specify a name, choose a folder on the hard disk, and save the device data accordingly. Printing of Device Data When Using PowerPort-E (Setting List) The »Printing« menu offers the following options: • • • • Printer settings; Page preview; Printing; and Exporting the selected print range into a "txt" file. The printing menu of the PowerPort-E software offers different types of printing ranges. • Printing of the complete parameter tree: All values and parameters of the present parameter file are printed. • Printing of the displayed working window: Only the data shown on the relevant working window are printed (i.e.: this applies, if at least one window is opened). • Printing of all opened working windows: The data shown on all windows are printed (i.e.: this applies only if more than one window is opened). • Printing of the device parameter tree as from a shown position on: All data and parameters of the device parameter tree are printed as from the position/marking in the navigation window. Below this selection, the complete name of the marking is additionally displayed. Exporting Data as a “txt” File Via PowerPort-E Within the print menu [File>Print], the User can choose »Export into File« in order to export the device data into a “txt” file. When exporting data, only the actual selected printing range will be exported into a “txt” file. That means that if the User has chosen the “Complete device parameter tree” printing range, then the “Complete device parameter tree” will be exported. But, if the User has chosen the “Actual working window” printing range, only that range of data will be exported. This is the only method available to export data via PowerPort-E. If the User exports a “txt” file, the content of this file is encoded as Unicode. That means that, if the User wants to edit this file, the application must support Unicode encoded files (e.g.: Microsoft Office 2003 or higher). 164 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Off-line Device Planning Via PowerPort-E In order to be able to transmit a parameter file (e.g.: created off-line) into the device, the following information must be located: • Type code (written on the top of the device/type label); and • Version of the device model (can be found in menu [Device Parameters\Version]. The PowerPort-E application also enables the User to create a configuration/parameter file off-line using a “Device Model”. The advantage of using a device model is that the User can pre-configure a device by setting parameters in advance. The User can also read the parameter file out of the device, further process it off-line (e.g.: from the office) and finally re-transfer it to the device. The User can either: • • • Load an existing parameter file from a device (please refer to the Section “Loading Device Data When Using PowerPort-E"); Create a new parameter file (see below); or Open a locally saved parameter file (backup). In order to create a new device/parameter file by way of a device template off-line. • In order to create a new off-line parameter file, select »Create new parameter file« within the »File« menu. • A working window pops- up. Please make sure that you select the right device type with the correct version and configuration. • Finally click on »Apply«. • In order to save the device configuration, select »Save« out of the »File« menu. • Within the »Modify Device Configuration (Typecode)« menu, the User can modify the device configuration or simply find out the type code of the current selection. If the User wants to transfer the parameter file into a device, please refer to Section “Restoring Device Data When using PowerPort-E”. Measuring Values Read Out Measured Values In the »Operation/Measured Values« menu, both measured and calculated values can be viewed. The measured values are ordered by »Standard values« and »Special values« (depending on the type of device). www.eaton.com 165 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Read Out of Measured Values Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If the device data have not been loaded, select »Receive Data From The Device« from the »Device« menu. • Double click on the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click on the »Measured Values« icon within the »Operation« navigation tree. • Double click the »Standard Values« or »Special values« within the »Measured values« tree. • The measured and calculated values are now shown in tabular form in the window. To have the measuring data read in a cyclic manner, select »Auto refresh« in the »View« menu. The measured values are read out about every two seconds. Current - Measured Values If the device is not equipped with an voltage measuring card the first measuring input on the first current measuring card (slot with the lowest number) will be used as the reference angle (»IA«). Value Description Menu Path IA Fund. Measured value: Phase current (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] IB Fund. Measured value: Phase current (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] IC Fund. Measured value: Phase current (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] IX meas Fund. Measured value (measured): IX (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] IR calc Fund. Measured value (calculated): IR (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] 166 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path I0 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Zero current (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] I1 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Positive phase sequence current (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] I2 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Unbalanced load current (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] Angle IA Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor IA [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] Angle IB Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor IB [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] Angle IC Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor IC [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] Angle IX meas Measured Value: Angle of Phasor IX meas [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] Angle IR calc Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor IR calc [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] Angle I0 Measured Value (calculated): Angle of Zero [Operation Sequence System /Measured Values /Current Fund.] Angle I1 Measured Value (calculated): Angle of Positive Sequence System [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] www.eaton.com 167 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path Angle I2 Measured value (calculated): Angle of Negative Sequence System [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] IA RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] IB RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] IC RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] IX meas RMS Measured value (measured): IX (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] IR calc RMS Measured value (calculated): IR (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] %IA THD Measured Value (Calculated): IA Total Harmonic Distortion [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] %IB THD Measured Value (Calculated): IB Total Harmonic Distortion [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] %IC THD Measured Value (Calculated): IC Total Harmonic Distortion [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] IA THD Measured Value (Calculated): IA Total Harmonic Current [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] 168 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path IB THD Measured Value (Calculated): IB Total Harmonic Current [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] IC THD Measured Value (Calculated): IC Total Harmonic Current [Operation /Measured Values /Current RMS] %(I2/I1) Measured value (calculated): I2/I1 if ABC, I1/I2 if CBA [Operation /Measured Values /Current Fund.] Voltage - Measured Values The first measuring input on the first measuring card (slot with the lowest number) is used as the reference angle. E.g. »VA« respectively »VAB«. Value Description Menu Path f Measured Value: Frequency [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VAB Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] VBC Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] VCA Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] VA Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] www.eaton.com 169 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path VB Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] VC Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] VX meas Fund. Measured value (measured): VG measured [Operation (Fundamental) /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] VR calc Fund. Measured value (calculated): VR (Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] V0 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components Zero voltage(Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] V1 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components positive phase sequence voltage(Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] V2 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components negative phase sequence voltage(Fundamental) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] VAB RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VBC RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VCA RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] 170 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path VA RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VB RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VC RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VX meas RMS Measured value (measured): VG measured [Operation (RMS) /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VR calc RMS Measured value (calculated): VR (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] Angle VAB Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor VAB [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] Angle VBC Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor VBC [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] Angle VCA Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor VCA [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] Angle VA Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor VA [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] Angle VB Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor VB [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] www.eaton.com 171 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path Angle VC Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor VC [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] Angle VX meas Measured Value: Angle of Phasor VX meas [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] Angle VR calc Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of Phasor VR calc [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] Angle V0 Measured Value (calculated): Angle of Zero [Operation Sequence System /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] Angle V1 Measured Value (calculated): Angle of Positive Sequence System [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] Angle V2 Measured value (calculated): Angle of Negative Sequence System [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] %(V2/V1) Measured value (calculated): %V2/V1 if ABC, %V1/V2 if CBA [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage Fund.] % VAB THD Measured value (calculated): VAB Total Harmonic Distortion / fundamental [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] % VBC THD Measured value (calculated): VBC Total Harmonic Distortion / fundamental [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] % VCA THD Measured value (calculated): VCA Total Harmonic Distortion / fundamental [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] 172 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path % VA THD Measured value (calculated): VA Total Harmonic Distortion / fundamental [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] % VB THD Measured value (calculated): VB Total Harmonic Distortion / fundamental [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] % VC THD Measured value (calculated): VC Total Harmonic Distortion / fundamental [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VAB THD Measured value (calculated): VAB Total Harmonic Distortion [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VBC THD Measured value (calculated): VBC Total Harmonic Distortion [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VCA THD Measured value (calculated): VCA Total Harmonic Distortion [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VA THD Measured value (calculated): VA Total Harmonic Distortion [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VB THD VB THD [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] VC THD VC THD [Operation /Measured Values /Voltage RMS] www.eaton.com 173 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Power - Measured Values Value Description Menu Path Disp PF Measured Value (Calculated): 55D Displacement Power Factor Power factor [Operation /Measured Values /Power] Wh Fwd Positive Active Power is consumed active energy [Operation /Measured Values /Energy] Wh Rev Negative Active Power (Fed Energy) [Operation /Measured Values /Energy] VArh Lag Positive Reactive Power is consumed Reactive Energy [Operation /Measured Values /Energy] VArh Lead Negative Reactive Power (Fed Energy) [Operation /Measured Values /Energy] VAh Net Net VA Hours [Operation /Measured Values /Energy] Wh Net Net Watt Hours [Operation /Measured Values /Energy] VArh Net Net VAr Hours [Operation /Measured Values /Energy] Start Date/Time Energy counters run since ... (Date and time of last reset) [Operation /Measured Values /Energy] Syst VA RMS Measured VAs (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Power] 174 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path Syst W RMS Measured Watts. Active power (P- = Fed Active Power, P+ = Consumpted Active Power) (RMS) [Operation /Measured Values /Power] Syst VAr RMS Measured VARs. Reactive power (Q- = Fed [Operation Reactive Power, Q+ = Consumpted Reactive Power) (RMS) /Measured Values /Power] Apt PF Measured Value (Calculated): 55A Apparent Power Factor [Operation /Measured Values /Power] Energy Counter EnergyCr Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module Parameter Description Res all Energy Reset of all Energy Counters Cr Setting Range Default Menu Path Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active /Reset] Signals of the Energy Counter Module (States of the Outputs) Name Description Cr Overflow VAh Net Signal: Counter Overflow VAh Net Cr Overflow Wh Net Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Net Cr Overflow Wh Fwd Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Fwd Cr Overflow Wh Rev Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Rev Cr Overflow VArh Net Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Net Cr Overflow VArh Lag Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lag Cr Overflow VArh Lead Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lead VAh Net Res Cr Signal: VAh Net Reset Counter Wh Net Res Cr Signal: Wh Net Reset Counter Wh Fwd Res Cr Signal: Wh Fwd Reset Counter Wh Rev Res Cr Signal: Wh Rev Reset Counter VArh Net Res Cr Signal: VArh Net Reset Counter VArh Lag Res Cr Signal: VArh Lag Reset Counter www.eaton.com 175 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description VArh Lead Res Cr Signal: VArh Lead Reset Counter Res all Energy Cr Signal: Reset of all Energy Counters Cr OverflwWarn VAh Net Signal: Counter VAh Net will overflow soon Cr OverflwWarn Wh Net Signal: Counter Wh Net will overflow soon Cr OverflwWarn Wh Fwd Signal: Counter Wh Fwd will overflow soon Cr OverflwWarn Wh Rev Signal: Counter Wh Rev will overflow soon Cr OverflwWarn VArh Net Signal: Counter VArh Net will overflow soon Cr OverflwWarn VArh Lag Signal: Counter VArh Lag will overflow soon Cr OverflwWarn VArh Lead Signal: Counter VArh Lead will overflow soon 176 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Statistics Statistics In the »Operation/Statistics« menu, the minimum, maximum, and mean values of the measured and calculated quantities can be found. The statistics are ordered by »Standard values« and »Special values« (depending on the type of device and the device planning). In the »Device Parameter/Statistics« menu, the User can either set a fixed synchronization time and a calculation interval or start and stop the statistics via a function (e.g.: digital input). Read Out Statistics • Call up the main menu. • Call up the »Operation/Statistics« sub-menu. • Call up either the »Standard values« or »Special values«. Statistics to Be Read Out Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If device data have not been downloaded recently, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu. • Double click on the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click on the »Statistics« icon within the »Operation« navigation tree. • Double click on the »Standard values« or »Special values« icon. • In the window, the statistical data are shown in tabular form. The values can be read out cyclically. For this purpose, please select »Auto Refresh« out of the »View« menu. Statistics (Configuration) The Statistics module can be configured within the »Device Parameter/Statistics« menu. The time interval, that is taken into account for the calculation of the statistics, can either be limited by a fixed duration or it can be limited by a start function (freely assignable signal from the »assignment list« menu). Fixed Duration: If the statistics module is set to a fixed duration/time interval, the minimum, maximum, and average values will be calculated and displayed continuously on the basis of this duration/time interval. Start Function (Flexible Duration): If the statistics module is to be initiated by a start function, the statistics will not be updated until the start function becomes true (rising edge). At the same time, a new time interval will be started. www.eaton.com 177 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Statistics (Configuration) Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If device data have not been downloaded recently, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the»Device« menu. • Double click on the »Device Parameter« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click on the »Statistics« icon within the »Device Parameter« navagation tree. • Configure the Statistics module. Direct Commands Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path ResFc all Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Demand, Power Demand, Min, Max) Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active ResFc I Demand Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg) Inactive, /Reset] Inactive Active ResFc P Demand Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg) Inactive, /Reset] Inactive Active ResFc Min Resetting of all Minimum values Inactive, Resetting of all Maximum values Inactive, [Operation /Reset] Inactive Active ResFc Max [Operation [Operation /Reset] Inactive Active [Operation /Reset] Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path ResFc Max Resetting of all Maximum values 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Statistics /Min / Max] ResFc Min Resetting of all Minimum values 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Statistics /Min / Max] 178 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Start I Demand Start Current demand by: via: Setting Range Default Menu Path Duration, Duration [Device Para StartFct /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] Start I Demand Start of the calculation, if the assigned Fc signal becomes true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Statistics Only available if: Start I Demand via: = StartFct /Demand /Current Demand] ResFc I Demand Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg) 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] www.eaton.com 179 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Duration I Demand Recording time 2 s, 15 s [Device Para Only available if: Start I Demand via: = Duration 5 s, /Statistics 10 s, /Demand 15 s, /Current Demand] 30 s, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 6 h, 12 h, 1 d, 2 d, 5 d, 7 d, 10 d, 30 d Window I Demand Window configuration Sliding, Fixed Fixed [Device Para /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] Start P Demand via: Start Active Power demand by: Duration, StartFct Duration [Device Para /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] 180 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Start P Demand Fc Start of the calculation, if the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Statistics Only available if: Start P Demand via: = StartFct /Demand /Power Demand] ResFc P Demand Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg) 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] Duration P Demand Recording time 2 s, 15 s [Device Para Only available if: Start P Demand via: = Duration 5 s, /Statistics 10 s, /Demand 15 s, /Power Demand] 30 s, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 6 h, 12 h, 1 d, 2 d, 5 d, 7 d, 10 d, 30 d www.eaton.com 181 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Window P Demand Window configuration Sliding, Sliding [Device Para Fixed /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module Name Description Assignment Via StartFc 1-I State of the module input: Start of Statistics [Device Para 1 (Update the displayed Demand ) /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] StartFc 2-I State of the module input: Start of Statistics [Device Para 2 (Update the displayed Demand ) /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] ResFc I Demand-I State of the module input: Resetting of [Device Para Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg) /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] ResFc P Demand-I State of the module input: Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg) [Device Para /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] ResFc Max-I State of the module input: Resetting of all Maximum values [Device Para /Statistics /Min / Max] ResFc Min-I State of the module input: Resetting of all Minimum values [Device Para /Statistics /Min / Max] 182 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Signals of the Statistics Module Name Description ResFc all Signal: Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Demand, Power Demand, Min, Max) ResFc I Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg., peak avg.) ResFc P Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg., peak avg.) ResFc Max Signal: Resetting of all Maximum values ResFc Min Signal: Resetting of all Minimum values Counters of the Module Statistics Value Description Menu Path MeasPointNo Each measuring point that is taken over by the statistics increments this counter. By means of this counter, the User can check whether the statistics are alive and if data are being acquired. [Operation Each measuring point that is taken over by the statistics increments this counter. By means of this counter, the User can check whether the statistics are alive and if data are being acquired. [Operation Number of resets since last booting. The time stamp shows date and time of the last reset. [Operation MeasPointNo2 Res Cr I Demand /Count and RevData /Statistics] /Count and RevData /Statistics] /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] Res Cr P Demand Number of resets since last booting. The time stamp shows date and time of the last reset. [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] Res Cr Min values Number of resets since last booting. The time stamp shows date and time of the last reset. [Operation /Statistics /Min /Power] Res Cr Max values Number of resets since last booting. The time stamp shows date and time of the last reset. [Operation /Statistics /Max /Power] www.eaton.com 183 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Current - Statistic Values Value Description Menu Path I1 max Fund. Maximum value positive phase sequence current (Fundamental) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Current] I1 min Fund. Minimum value positive phase sequence current (Fundamental) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Current] I2 max Fund. Maximum value unbalanced load current (Fundamental) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Current] I2 min Fund. Minimum value unbalanced load current (Fundamental) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Current] IA max RMS IA maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Current] IA avg RMS IA average value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] IA min RMS IA minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Current] 184 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path IB max RMS IB maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Current] IB avg RMS IB average value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] IB min RMS IB minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Current] IC max RMS IC maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Current] IC avg RMS IC average value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] IC min RMS IC minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Current] IX meas max RMS Measured value: IX maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Current] www.eaton.com 185 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path IX meas min RMS Measured value: IX minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Current] IR calc max RMS Measured value (calculated): IR maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Current] IR calc min RMS Measured value (calculated): IR minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Current] %(I2/I1) max Measured value (calculated): I2/I1 maximum value if ABC, I1/I2 if CBA [Operation /Statistics /Max /Current] %(I2/I1) min %(I2/I1) min [Operation /Statistics /Min /Current] IA Peak demand IA Peak value, RMS value [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] IB Peak demand IB Peak value, RMS value [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] 186 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path IC Peak demand IC Peak value, RMS value [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Current Demand] Voltage - Statistic Values Value Description Menu Path f max Max. frequency value [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] f min Min. frequency value [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] V1 max Fund. Maximum value: Symmetrical components positive phase sequence voltage (Fundamental) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] V1 min Fund. Minimum value: Symmetrical components positive phase sequence voltage (Fundamental) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] V2 max Fund. Maximum value: Symmetrical components negative phase sequence voltage (Fundamental) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] V2 min Fund. Minimum value: Symmetrical components negative phase sequence voltage (Fundamental) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] www.eaton.com 187 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path VAB max RMS VAB maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] VAB min RMS VAB minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] VBC max RMS VBC maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] VBC min RMS VBC minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] VCA max RMS VCA maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] VCA min RMS VCA minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] VA max RMS VA maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] 188 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path VA min RMS VA minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] VB max RMS VB maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] VB min RMS VB minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] VC max RMS VC maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] VC min RMS VC minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] VX meas max RMS Measured value: VX maximum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] VX meas min RMS Measured value: VX minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] www.eaton.com 189 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path VR calc max RMS Measured value (calculated): VR maximum [Operation value (RMS) /Statistics /Max /Voltage] VR calc min RMS Measured value (calculated): VR minimum value (RMS) [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] %(V2/V1) max Measured value (calculated): %V2/V1 maximum value [Operation /Statistics /Max /Voltage] %(V2/V1) min Measured value (calculated): %V2/V1 minimum value [Operation /Statistics /Min /Voltage] Power - Statistic Values Value Description Menu Path Disp PF max Maximum value of the 55D - Displacement Power Factor power factor [Operation /Statistics /Max /Power] Disp PF min Minimum value of the 55D - Displacement Power Factor power factor [Operation /Statistics /Min /Power] Syst VA max Maximum value of the apparent power [Operation /Statistics /Max /Power] 190 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path Syst VA avg Average of the apparent power [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] Syst VA min Minimum value of the apparent power [Operation /Statistics /Min /Power] Syst W max Maximum value of the active power [Operation /Statistics /Max /Power] Syst W avg Average of the active power [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] Syst W min Minimum value of the active power [Operation /Statistics /Min /Power] Syst VAr max Maximum value of the reactive power [Operation /Statistics /Max /Power] Syst VAr avg Average of the reactive power [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] www.eaton.com 191 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path Syst VAr min Minimum value of the reactive power [Operation /Statistics /Min /Power] Apt PF max Maximum value of the 55A - Apparent Power Factor [Operation /Statistics /Max /Power] Apt PF min Minimum value of the 55A - Apparent Power Factor [Operation /Statistics /Min /Power] VA Peak demand VA Peak value, RMS value [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] Watt Peak demand WATTS Peak value, RMS value [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] VAr Peak demand VARs Peak value, RMS value [Operation /Statistics /Demand /Power Demand] 192 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E System Alarms Available Elements: System Alarms Within the System Alarms menu [System Para/System Alarms], the User can configure: • General Settings (activate/inactivate the Demand Management, optional assign a signal, that will block the Demand Management); • Power Protection (please refer to section 32, 32V, 32VA); • Demand Management (Power and Current); and • THD Protection. Demand Management Demand is the average of system current or power over a time interval (window). Demand management supports the User to keep energy demand below target values bound by contract (with the energy supplier). If the contractual target values are exceeded, extra charges are to be paid to the energy supplier. Therefore, demand management helps the User detect and avoid averaged peak loads that are taken into account for the billing. In order to reduce the demand charge respective to demand rate, peak loads, if possible, should be diversified. That means, if possible, avoiding large loads at the same time. In order to assist the User in analyzing the demand, demand management might inform the User by an alarm. The User might also use demand alarms and assign them on relays in order to perform load shedding (where applicable). Demand management comprises: Watt Demand (Active Power); VAr Demand (Reactive Power); VA Demand (Apparent Power); and Current Demand. • • • • Configuring the Demand Configuring the demand is a two step procedure. Proceed as follows. Step1. Configure the general settings within the [Device Para/Demand] menu: • • • Set the trigger source to »Duration«. Select a time base for the »window«. Determine if the window is »fixed« or »sliding«. The interval time (window) can be set to fixed or sliding. Example for a fixed window: If the range is set for 15 minutes, the protective device calculates the average current or power over the past 15 minutes and updates the value every 15 minutes. Example for a sliding window: If the sliding window is selected and the interval is set to 15 minutes, the protective device calculates and updates the average current or power continuously, for the past 15 minutes (the newest measuring value replaces the oldest measuring value continuously). www.eaton.com 193 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Window configuration = Sliding Duration 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 t-Delay 0 Average Calculation 15 16 17 18 15 16 17 18 16 17 18 Pickup Sliding 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 t-Delay 0 Average Calculation Pickup Sliding 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 t-Delay 0 Average Calculation Pickup Window configuration = Fixed Average Calculation Average Calculation Duration 1 2 3 4 5 6 Average Calculation 7 Average Calculation Duration 8 9 10 Average Calculation Duration 11 12 13 14 Average Calculation Average Calculation 194 Average Calculation www.eaton.com 15 16 17 18 Average Calculation t-Delay 0 Pickup IM02602007E EDR-5000 Step 2. In addition, the Demand specific settings have to be configured in the [System Para/System Alarms/Demand] menu: Determine if the demand should generate an alarm or if it should run in the silent mode (Alarm active/inactive); Set the threshold; and Where applicable, set a delay time for the alarm. • • • Peak Demand The protective device also saves the peak demand values for current and power. The quantities represent the largest demand value since the demand values were last reset. Peak demands for current and system power are date and time stamped. Within the [Operation/Demand] menu, the current Demand and Peak demand values can be seen. Min. and Max. Values. Within the Operation menu the minimum (min.) and maximum (max.) values can be seen. Minimum values since last reset: The minimum values are continuously compared to the last minimum value for that measuring value. If the new value is less than the last minimum, the value is updated. Within the [Device Para/Statistics] menu, a reset signal can be assigned. Maximum values since last reset: The maximum values are continuously compared to the last maximum value for that measuring value. If the new value is greater than the last maximum, the value is updated. Within the [Device Para/Statistics] menu, a reset signal can be assigned. THD Protection In order to supervise power quality, the protective device can monitor the voltage (phase-to-phase) and current THDs. Within the [System Para/System Alarms/THD] menu: • • • Determine if an alarm is to be issued or not (Alarm active/inactive); Set the threshold; and Where applicable, set a delay time for the alarm. Device Planning Parameters of the Demand Management Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use www.eaton.com 195 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Signals of the Demand Management (States of the Outputs) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Alarm Watt Power Signal: Alarm WATTS peak Alarm VAr Power Signal: Alarm VArs peak Alarm VA Power Signal: Alarm VAs peak Alarm Watt Demand Signal: Alarm WATTS demand value Alarm VAr Demand Signal: Alarm VARs demand value Alarm VA Demand Signal: Alarm VAs demand value Alarm Current Demand Signal: Alarm Current demand value Alarm I THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current Alarm V THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage Trip Watt Power Signal: Trip WATTS peak Trip VAr Power Signal: Trip VArs peak Trip VA Power Signal: Trip VAs peak Trip Watt Demand Signal: Trip WATTS demand value Trip VAr Demand Signal: Trip VARs demand value Trip VA Demand Signal: Trip VAs demand value Trip Current Demand Signal: Trip Current demand value Trip I THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current Trip V THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage Global Protection Parameter of the Demand Management Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [System Alarms Active ExBlo Fc Alarm /General Settings] Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) 1..n, Assignment List blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". -.- Threshold Inactive Inactive, Active [System Alarms /General Settings] [System Alarms /Power /Watt] 196 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Threshold Alarm 1 – 40000000 kW 10000 kW [System Alarms /Power /Watt] t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 60 min 0 min [System Alarms /Power /Watt] Alarm Threshold Inactive, Inactive Active [System Alarms /Power /VAr] Threshold Alarm 1 – 40000000 kVAr 10000 kVAr [System Alarms /Power /VAr] t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 60 min 0 min [System Alarms /Power /VAr] Alarm Threshold Inactive, Inactive Active [System Alarms /Power /VA] Threshold Alarm 1 – 40000000 kVA 10000 kVA [System Alarms /Power /VA] t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 60 min 0 min [System Alarms /Power /VA] Alarm Threshold Inactive, Active Inactive [System Alarms /Demand /Power Demand /Watt Demand] www.eaton.com 197 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Threshold Alarm 1 – 40000000 kW 10000 kW [System Alarms /Demand /Power Demand /Watt Demand] t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 60 min 0 min [System Alarms /Demand /Power Demand /Watt Demand] Alarm Threshold Inactive, Inactive Active [System Alarms /Demand /Power Demand /VAr Demand] Threshold Alarm 1 – 40000000 kVAr 20000 kVAr [System Alarms /Demand /Power Demand /VAr Demand] t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 60 min 0 min [System Alarms /Demand /Power Demand /VAr Demand] Alarm Threshold Inactive, Inactive Active [System Alarms /Demand /Power Demand /VA Demand] Threshold Alarm 1 – 40000000 kVA 20000 kVA [System Alarms /Demand /Power Demand /VA Demand] 198 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 60 min 0 min [System Alarms /Demand /Power Demand /VA Demand] Alarm Threshold Inactive, Inactive Active [System Alarms /Demand /Current Demand] Threshold Alarm 10 – 500000 A 500 A [System Alarms /Demand /Current Demand] t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 60 min 0 min [System Alarms /Demand /Current Demand] Alarm Threshold Inactive, Inactive Active [System Alarms /THD /I THD] Threshold Alarm 1 – 500000 A 500 A [System Alarms /THD /I THD] t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 3600 s 0s [System Alarms /THD /I THD] Alarm Threshold Inactive, Inactive Active [System Alarms /THD /U THD] Threshold Alarm 1 – 500000 V 10000 V [System Alarms /THD /U THD] t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 3600 s 0s [System Alarms /THD /U THD] www.eaton.com 199 IM02602007E EDR-5000 States of the Inputs of the Demand Management Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo-I Module Input State: External Blocking [System Alarms /General Settings] System Alarm Signals (States of the Outputs) Name Description -.- No assignment System Alarms.Active Signal: Active System Alarms.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking System Alarms.Alarm Watt Power Signal: Alarm WATTS peak System Alarms.Alarm VAr Power Signal: Alarm VArs peak System Alarms.Alarm VA Power Signal: Alarm VAs peak System Alarms.Alarm Watt Demand Signal: Alarm WATTS demand value System Alarms.Alarm VAr Demand Signal: Alarm VARs demand value System Alarms.Alarm VA Demand Signal: Alarm VAs demand value System Alarms.Alarm Current Demand Signal: Alarm Current demand value System Alarms.Alarm I THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current System Alarms.Alarm V THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage System Alarms.Trip Watt Power Signal: Trip WATTS peak System Alarms.Trip VAr Power Signal: Trip VArs peak System Alarms.Trip VA Power Signal: Trip VAs peak System Alarms.Trip Watt Demand Signal: Trip WATTS demand value System Alarms.Trip VAr Demand Signal: Trip VARs demand value System Alarms.Trip VA Demand Signal: Trip VAs demand value System Alarms.Trip Current Demand Signal: Trip Current demand value System Alarms.Trip I THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current System Alarms.Trip V THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage 200 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Resets Collective Acknowledgments for Latched Signals: Collective Acknowledgments LEDs Relay Outputs SCADA All SCADA Via PowerPort-E or All LEDs at once: All Relay Outputs at once: signals at once: at the panel all... Where? can be [Operation\ Where? Where? acknowledged. Acknowledge] [Operation\ [Operation\ Acknowledge] Acknowledge] At the panel, the [Operation\ Acknowledge] menu can directly be accessed via the »C« key. Pending Trip Command LEDs+ Relay Outputs+ SCADA+ Pending Trip Command All pending trip commands at once: All at once: Where? [Operation\ Acknowledge] External All LEDs at once: All Relay Outputs at All SCADA signals at All Pending Trip Acknowledg-ment: once: once: commands at once: Via a signal from the Where? Where? Where? Where? assignment list (e.g.: Within the Within the Within the Within the a digital Input) all... Ex Acknowledge Ex Acknowledge Ex Acknowledge Ex Acknowledge menu. can be menu. menu. menu. acknowledged. Where? [Operation\ Acknowledge] All at once: Where? Within the Ex Acknowledge menu. Options for Individual Acknowledgments for Latched Signals: Individual Acknowledgment Via a signal from the assignment list (e.g.: a digital Input), a single... can be acknowledged. LEDs Relay Output Pending Trip Command Single LED: Relay Output: Pending Trip Command. Where? Within the Configuration menu of this single LED. Where? Within the Configuration menu of this single Relay Output. Where? Within the module TripControl If the User is within the parameter setting mode, the User cannot acknowledge. In case of a fault during parameter setting via the operating panel, the User must first leave the parameter mode by pressing either the push-buttons »C« or »OK« before accessing the »Acknowledgements« menu via the push-button. www.eaton.com 201 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Manual Acknowledgment Press the »C« button on the panel. Select the item to be acknowledged via the softkeys: • • • • • • • Relay Outputs; LEDs; SCADA; A trip command; or All the above mentioned items at once. Press the Softkey with the »Wrench-Symbol«. Enter the password. • • Manual Acknowledgment Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If device data have not been downloaded recently, select »Receive Data From The Device« from the »Device« menu. • Double click on the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click on the »Acknowledgment« icon within the operation menu. • Double click the entry within the pop-up that is to be acknowledged. • Press the »Execute immediately« button. • Enter the password. External Acknowledgments Within the [Ex Acknowledge] menu, the User can assign a signal (e.g.: the state of a digital input) from the assignment list that: Acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) LEDs at once; Acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) Output Relays at once; or Acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) SCADA signals at once. • • • Ack LED Ex Acknowledge.Ack LED 1..n, Assignment List Ack RO Ex Acknowledge.Ack RO 1..n, Assignment List Ack Comm Ex Acknowledge.Ack Comm 1..n, Assignment List Within the [Protection Para\Global Prot Para\TripControl] menu, the User can assign a signal that acknowledges a pending trip command. 202 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 For details, please refer to the Trip Control section. External Acknowledge Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If device data have not been downloaded recently, select »Receive Data From The Device« from the »Device« menu. • Double click on the »Device Parameter« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click on the »Ex Acknowledge« icon within the operation menu. • In the working window, the User can now assign each signal that resets all acknowledgeable LEDs, a signal that resets all Relay Outputs, a signal that resets the SCADA signals respectively, and a signal that acknowledges a pending trip command. External LED - Acknowledgment Signals The following signals can be used for external acknowledgment of latched LEDs. Name Description -.- No assignment DI-8P X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input Modbus.Comm Cmd 1 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 2 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 3 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 4 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 5 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 6 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 7 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 8 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 9 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 10 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 11 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 12 Communication Command www.eaton.com 203 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Modbus.Comm Cmd 13 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 14 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 15 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 16 Communication Command Manual Resets In the »Operation/Reset« menu, the User can: • • • Reset counters; Delete records (e.g.: disturbance records); and Reset special things (like statistics, thermal replica, etc.). The description of the reset commands can be found within the corresponding modules. Manual Resets Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If device data have not been downloaded recently, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu. • Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click the »Reset icon« within the operation menu. • Double click the entry within the pop-up that is to be reset or deleted. The description of the reset commands can be found within the corresponding modules. 204 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Status Display In the status display within the »Operation« menu, the present state of all signals can be viewed. This means the User is able to see if the individual signals are active or inactive at that moment. The User can see all signals sorted by protective elements/modules. State of the Module Input / Signal Is ... Is Shown at the Panel as ... false / »0« true / »1« Status Display via PowerPort E • If PowerPort E is not running, please start the application. • If the device data have not been downloaded recently, select »Receive Data From The Device« from »Device« menu. • Double click on the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click on the »Status Display« icon within the operational data. • Double click on a subfolder (e.g. Prot) in order to see e.g. the states of the general alarms. To have the status display updated in a cyclic manner, select »Automatic Up-Date« in the »VIEW« menu. State of the Module Input / Signal Is ... Is Shown in PowerPort-E as ... false / »0« 0 true / »1« 1 No connection to the device ? www.eaton.com 205 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Operating Panel (HMI) HMI Special Parameters of the Panel The »Device Parameter/HMI« menu is used to define the contrast of the display, the maximum admissible edit time, and the menu language (after expiration, all unsaved parameter changes will be rejected). Direct Commands of the Panel Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Contrast Contrast 30 - 60 50 [Device Para /HMI] Global Protection Parameters of the Panel Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t-max Edit If no other key(s) is pressed at the panel, after expiration of this time, all cached (changed) parameters are canceled 20 – 3600 s 180 s [Device Para 206 /HMI] www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Recorders Disturbance Recorder Disturb rec The disturbance recorder works with 32 samples per cycle. It can be started by one of eight start events (selection from the »Assignment list«/OR-Logic). The disturbance record contains the measuring values including the pre-trigger time. By means of PowerPort-E/ Quality Manager (option), the oscillographic curves of the analog (current, voltage) and digital channels/traces can be shown and evaluated in a graphical form. The disturbance recorder has a storage capacity of 120 s (duration). The amount of records depends on the file size of each record. The disturbance recorder can be configured in the»Device Parameter/Recorder/Disturb rec« menu. Determine the maximum recording time to register a disturbance event. The maximum total length of a recording is 10 s (including pre-trigger and post-trigger time). To trigger the disturbance recorder, up to eight signals can be selected from the »Assignment list«. The trigger events are OR-linked. If a disturbance record is written, a new disturbance record cannot be triggered until all trigger signals, which have triggered the previous disturbance record, are gone. Recording is only done for the time the assigned event exists (event controlled), plus the time for the pre- and post-trigger, but not longer than 10 s. The time for the pre- and post-trigger is to be entered as percent of the maximum file size. The post-trigger time will be up to the "Post-trigger time" depending on the duration of the trigger signal. The post-trigger will be the remaining time of the "Max file size" but, at maximum, the "Post-trigger time". Example The disturbance recorder is started by the general activation facility. After the fault has been cleared (plus follow-up time), the recording process is stopped (but after 10 s at the latest). The parameter »Auto Delete« defines how the device will react if a location to which to save the disturbance record is not available. In case »Auto Delete« is »Active«, the first recorded disturbance will be overwritten according to the FIFO principle. If the parameter is set to »Inactive«, recording of the disturbance events will be stopped until the storage location is manually released. www.eaton.com 207 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Start: 1 Trigger Start: 2 Trigger Start: 3 Trigger Start: 4 Trigger OR Start: 5 Trigger OR Start: 6 Trigger Start: 7 Trigger Start: 8 Trigger Man. Trigger 208 www.eaton.com Recording IM02602007E EDR-5000 Start 1 = Prot.Pickup Start 2 = -.Start 3 = -.Start 4 = -.Start 5 = -.Start 6 = -.Start 7 = -.Start 8 = -.Auto overwriting = Active Post-trigger time = 25% t-rec = Max file size Pre-trigger time = 15% Max file size = 2s Start 1 1335 ms 1 0 t Pre-trigger time 300 ms 1 0 t Post-trigger time 365 ms 1 0 t t-rec 2000 ms 1 0 t Max file size 2000 ms 1 0 t www.eaton.com 209 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Start 1 = Prot.Trip Start 2 = -.Start 3 = -.Start 4 = -.Start 5 = -.Start 6 = -.Start 7 = -.Start 8 = -.- t-rec < Max file size Auto overwriting = Active Post-trigger time = 25% Pre-trigger time = 15% Start 1 Max file size = 2s 200 ms 1 0 t Pre-trigger time 300 ms 1 0 t Post-trigger time 500 ms 1 0 t t-rec 1000 ms 1 0 t Max file size 2000 ms 1 0 t 210 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Read Out of Disturbance Records Within the »Operation/Disturb rec« menu, the User can: • Detect the accumulated disturbance records. Within the »Operation/Recorders/Man Trigger« menu, the User can trigger the disturbance recorder manually. To Read Out the Disturbance Recorder with PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu. • Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click the »Recorders« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click the »Disturb rec« icon. • In the window, the disturbance records are shown in tabular form. • A pop-up will appear by double clicking on a disturbance record. Choose a folder where the disturbance record is to be saved. • The User can analyze the disturbance records by means of the optionally available Quality Manager by clicking on »Yes« when asked “Shall the received disturbance record be opened by the Quality Manager?" Deleting Disturbance Records Within the »Operation/Disturb rec« menu, the User can: • Delete disturbance records; • Choose the disturbance record that is to be deleted via »SOFTKEY« »up« and »SOFTKEY« »down«; • Call up the detailed view of the disturbance record via »SOFTKEY« »right«; • Confirm by pressing »SOFTKEY« »delete«; • Enter the User password followed by pressing the »OK« key; • Choose whether only the current or all disturbance records should be deleted; and • Confirm by pressing »SOFTKEY« »OK«. www.eaton.com 211 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Deleting Disturbance Records Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu. • Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click the »Recorders« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click the »Disturb rec« icon. • In the window, the disturbance records are shown in tabular form. • In order to delete a disturbance record, double click on (the red x) in front of the disturbance record and confirm. Direct Commands of the Disturbance Recorder Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Man. Trigger Manual Trigger False, False [Operation True /Recorders /Man. Trigger] Res all rec Reset all records Inactive, Inactive Active [Operation /Reset] Global Protection Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder Module Parameter Description Setting Range Start: 1 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List Default Menu Path Prot.Pickup [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start: 2 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start: 3 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] 212 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Start: 4 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List Default Menu Path -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start: 5 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start: 6 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start: 7 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start: 8 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Auto overwriting If there is no more free memory capacity left, the oldest file will be overwritten. Inactive, Active Active [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Post-trigger time The post trigger time is settable up to a maximum of 50% of the Maximum file size setting. The post-trigger will be the remaining time of the "Max file size" but at maximum "Post-trigger time" 0 - 50% Pre-trigger time The pre trigger time is settable up to a maximum of 50% of the maximum file size setting. 0 - 50% 20% [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] 20% [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Max file size The maximum storage capacity per record 0.1 – 10.0 s is 10 seconds, including pre-trigger and post-trigger time. The disturbance recorder has a total storage capacity of 120 seconds. 2s [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] www.eaton.com 213 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Disturbance Recorder Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via Start1-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start2-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start3-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start4-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start5-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start6-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start7-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Start8-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Disturb rec] Disturbance Recorder Module Signals Name Description Recording Signal: Recording Memory full Signal: Memory Full Clear fail Signal: Clear Failure in Memory Res all rec Signal: All records deleted 214 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Res record Signal: Delete Record Man. Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger Special Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder Value Description Default Size Menu Path Rec state Recording state Ready Ready, [Operation Recording, /Status display Writing file, /Disturb rec] Trigger Blo Error code Error code OK OK, [Operation Write err, /Status display Clear fail, /Disturb rec] Calculation err, File not found, Auto overwriting off Fault Recorder Fault rec The fault recorder can be started by one of eight start events (selection from the »Assignment list«/OR-Logic). It can register up to 20 faults. The last of the recorded faults is stored in a fail-safe manner. If one of the assigned trigger events becomes true, the fault recorder will be started. When a trigger event happens, each fault is saved including the module and name, fault number, number of grid faults and record number at that time. For each of the faults, the measuring values (at the time when the trigger event became true) can be viewed. Up to eight signals to trigger the fault recorder can be selected from the »Assignment list«. The trigger events are OR-linked. The parameter »Auto Delete« defines how the device will react if there is no saving place available. In case »Auto Delete« is »Active«, the first recorded fault will be overwritten according to the FIFO principle. If the parameter is set to »Inactive«, recording of the fault events will be stopped until the storage location is released manually. www.eaton.com 215 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Start: 1 Trigger Start: 2 Trigger Start: 3 Trigger Start: 4 Trigger OR Start: 5 Trigger OR Recording Start: 6 Trigger Start: 7 Trigger Start: 8 Trigger Man. Trigger Read Out the Fault Recorder The measured values at the time of tripping are saved (fail-safe) within the fault recorder. If there is no more memory free, the oldest record will be overwritten (FIFO). In order to read out a failure record: • Call up the main menu; • Call up the sub-menu »Operation/Recorders/Fault rec.«; • Select a fault record; and • Analyze the corresponding measured values. To Read Out the Fault Recorder Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu. • Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree. 216 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 • Double click the »Fault Rec« icon within the »Operation/Recorders« tree. • In the window, the fault recordings are shown in tabular form. • In order to receive more detailed information on a fault, click the »Plus Sign« in front of the fault number. Via the print menu, the User can export the data into a file. Please proceed as follows. • Call up the data as described above. • Call up the »File/Print« menu. • Choose »Print Actual Working Window« within the pop-up. • Press the »Print« button. • Press the »Export to File« button. • Enter a file name. • Choose a location where to save the file. • Confirm the »Save« button. Direct Commands of the Fault Recorder Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Res all rec Reset all records Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active Man. Trigger Manual Trigger False, /Reset] False True [Operation /Recorders /Man. Trigger] Global Protection Parameters of the Fault Recorder Module Parameter Description Setting Range Start: 1 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List Default Menu Path Prot.Trip [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] www.eaton.com 217 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Start: 2 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List Default Menu Path -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start: 3 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start: 4 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start: 5 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start: 6 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start: 7 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start: 8 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Auto overwriting If there is no more free memory capacity left, the oldest file will be overwritten. Inactive, Active Active [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Fault Recorder Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via Start1-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] 218 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via Start2-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start3-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start4-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start5-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start6-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start7-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Start8-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: [Device Para /Recorders /Fault rec] Fault Recorder Module Signals Name Description Res record Signal: Delete Record Man. Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger Fault Recorder Trigger Functions These events (Pickups, Trips, Digital Inputs, Relay Output states) will start the fault recorder. www.eaton.com 219 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Event Recorder Event rec The event recorder can register up to 300 events and the last 50 (minimum) saved events are stored in nonvolatile memory, and therefore retailed when power is lost to the unit. The following information is provided for any of the events. Events are logged as follows: Record No. Fault No. No of grid faults Sequential Number Number of the ongoing fault. A grid fault No. can have Time stamp several Fault Nos. This counter will be incremented by each General Pickup (Prot.Pickup). This counter will be incremented by each General Pickup. (Exception AR: this applies only to devices that offer auto reclosing). Date of Record Module Name State What has changed? Changed Value There are three different classes of events. • Alternation of binary states are shown as: 0->1 if the signal changes physically from »0« to »1«. • 1->0 if the signal changes physically from »1« to »0«. • • • Counters increment is shown as: • Old Counter state -> New Counter state (e.g.: 3->4) Alternation of multiple states are shown as: Old state -> New state (e.g.: 0->2) • Read Out the Event Recorder • Call up the »main menu«. • • Call up the sub-menu »Operation/Recorders/Event rec«. • Select an event. To Read Out the Event Recorder via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device menu. • Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click the »Event Rec« icon within the »Operation/Recorders« menu. 220 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 • In the window, the events are shown in tabular form. To have the event recorder updated in a cyclic manner, select »Automatic Up-Date« in the »View« menu. PowerPort-E is able to record more events than the device itself, if the window of the event recorder is opened and »Automatic Up-Date« is set to active. Via the print menu, the User can export the data into a file. Please proceed as follows. • Call up the data as described above. • Call up the »File/Print« menu. • Choose »Print Actual Working Window« within the pop-up. • Press the »Print« button. • Press the »Export to File« button. • Enter a file name. • Choose a location where to save the file. • Confirm the »Save« button. Direct Commands of the Event Recorder Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Res all rec Reset all records Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active /Reset] Event Recorder Module Signals Name Description Res all rec Signal: All records deleted Trend Recorder Available Elements: Trend rec Functional Description The Trend Data are data points stored by the Trend Recorder on the relay device over fixed intervals of time, and can be downloaded from the device using PowerPort-E. A Trend Record is viewable using the Quality www.eaton.com 221 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Monitor software by selecting files saved by PowerPort-E with a file extension of “.ErTr”. The list of available trend recorder data is viewable by selecting [Operation/ Recorders/Trend Recorder] on the front panel of the relay. When viewed within the Quality Manager, the trend record will show the observed values (up to 10) that the User has specified. The available values are dependent on the ordered protective device. Managing Trend Records To download information from the Trend Recorder, select [Operation/Recorder/Trend Rec] from the menu tree. The User will find three options within the Trend Recorder window that will allow the User to: • • • Receive Trend Records, Refresh the Trend Recorder, and Delete Trend Records. Selecting the »Receive Trend Record« button will download data from the relay to the User's PC. By selecting the »Refresh Trend Recorder«”, PowerPort-E updates the list of the Trend Recorder. The »Delete Trend Recorder« function will clear all trend data from the relay, leaving the data files on the User's PC. To view data using the Quality Manager, first the User must open the desired “.ErTr” file to be viewed from a folder location previously designated by the User. Once the “.ErTr” file is open, the User will see the “Analog Channels” that are monitored by the Trend Recorder. By clicking on the “Analog Channels”, all monitored parameters are listed. To view a channel, the User must click on the left mouse key, then drag and drop the channel onto the right side of the Quality Manager screen. The channel is then listed under the »Displayed Channels«. To remove a channel from view, the User must select the Trend Data to be removed in the »Displayed Channels« menu tree, then click on the right mouse button to bring up the menu options. Here, the User will find the »Remove« menu option that, when selected, will remove the trend data. Configuring the Trend Recorder The Trend Recorder is to be configured within [Device Para/Recorders/Trend Recorder] menu. The User has to set the time interval. This defines the distance between two measuring points. The User can select up to ten values that will be recorded. Selection List for Trending Name Description - No assignment IA RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS) IB RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS) IC RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS) IX meas RMS Measured value (measured): IX (RMS) IR calc RMS Measured value (calculated): IR (RMS) I0 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Zero current (Fundamental) I1 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Positive phase sequence current (Fundamental) 222 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description I2 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Unbalanced load current (Fundamental) IA avg RMS IA average value (RMS) IB avg RMS IB average value (RMS) IC avg RMS IC average value (RMS) VA RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS) VB RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS) VC RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS) VX meas RMS Measured value (measured): VG measured (RMS) VAB RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS) VBC RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS) VCA RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS) V0 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components Zero voltage(Fundamental) V1 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components positive phase sequence voltage(Fundamental) V2 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components negative phase sequence voltage(Fundamental) VA avg RMS VA average value (RMS) VB avg RMS VB average value (RMS) VC avg RMS VC average value (RMS) VAB avg RMS VAB average value (RMS) VBC avg RMS VBC average value (RMS) VCA avg RMS VCA average value (RMS) f Measured Value: Frequency Disp PF Measured Value (Calculated): 55D - Displacement Power Factor Power factor Apt PF Measured Value (Calculated): 55A - Apparent Power Factor IA THD Measured Value (Calculated): IA Total Harmonic Current IB THD Measured Value (Calculated): IB Total Harmonic Current IC THD Measured Value (Calculated): IC Total Harmonic Current VA THD Measured value (calculated): VA Total Harmonic Distortion VB THD VB THD VC THD VC THD VAB THD Measured value (calculated): VAB Total Harmonic Distortion VBC THD Measured value (calculated): VBC Total Harmonic Distortion VCA THD Measured value (calculated): VCA Total Harmonic Distortion www.eaton.com 223 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Global Protection Parameters of the Trend Recorder Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Resolution Resolution (recording frequency) 60 min, 15 min [Device Para 30 min, /Recorders 15 min, /Trend rec] 10 min, 5 min Observed Value1 Observed Value1 1..n, TrendRecList IA RMS [Device Para /Recorders /Trend rec] Observed Value2 Observed Value2 1..n, TrendRecList IB RMS [Device Para /Recorders /Trend rec] Observed Value3 Observed Value3 1..n, TrendRecList IC RMS [Device Para /Recorders /Trend rec] Observed Value4 Observed Value4 1..n, TrendRecList IX meas RMS [Device Para /Recorders /Trend rec] Observed Value5 Observed Value5 1..n, TrendRecList VA RMS [Device Para /Recorders /Trend rec] Observed Value6 Observed Value6 1..n, TrendRecList VB RMS [Device Para /Recorders /Trend rec] Observed Value7 Observed Value7 1..n, TrendRecList VC RMS [Device Para /Recorders /Trend rec] Observed Value8 Observed Value8 1..n, TrendRecList VX meas RMS [Device Para /Recorders /Trend rec] 224 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Observed Value9 Observed Value9 1..n, TrendRecList - [Device Para /Recorders /Trend rec] Observed Value10 Observed Value10 1..n, TrendRecList - [Device Para /Recorders /Trend rec] Trend Recorder Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Hand Reset Hand Reset Direct Commands of the Trend Recorder Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Reset Delete all entries Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active www.eaton.com /Reset] 225 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Communication Protocols Modbus® Modbus Modbus® Protocol Configuration The time-controlled Modbus® protocol is based on the master-slave working principle. This means that the substation control and protection system sends an inquiry or instruction to a certain device (slave address) that will then be answered or carried out accordingly. If the inquiry/instruction cannot be answered/carried out (e.g.: because of an invalid slave address), a failure message is returned to the master. The master (substation control and protection system) can query information from the device, such as: • • • • • • • Type of unit version; Measuring values/statistical measured values; Switch operating position (in preparation); State of device; Time and date; State of the device’s digital inputs; and Protection-/state pickups. The master (control system) can give commands/instructions to the device, such as: • • • • • Control of switchgear (where applicable, i.e.: each according to the applied device version); Change-over of parameter set; Reset and acknowledgment of pickups/signals; Adjustment of the date and time; and Control of pickup relays. For detailed information on data point lists and error handling, please refer to the Modbus® documentation. To allow configuration of the devices for Modbus® connection, some default values of the control system must be available. Device Planning Parameters of the Modbus Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode RTU, RTU [Device Planning] TCP Modbus RTU Part 1: Configuration of the Devices Call up »Device parameter/Modbus« and set the following communication parameters: • Slave address, to allow clear identification of the device; and • Baud rate. 226 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Also, select the RS485 interface-related parameters such as: • Number of data bits; • One of the following supported communication variants: • Number of data bits, • Even, • Odd, • Parity or no parity, or • Number of stop bits; • »t-timeout«: communication errors are only identified after expiration of a supervision time »t-timeout«; and • Response time (defining the period within which an inquiry from the master has to be answered). Part 2: Hardware Connection • For hardware connection to the control system, there is an RS485 interface at the rear side of the device (RS485, fiber optic or terminals). • Connect the bus and the device (wiring). • Up to 32 devices can be connected to the bus (point to point connection/spurs). • Connect a terminating resistor to the bus. Error Handling - Hardware Errors Information on physical communication errors, such as: • • Baud rate error and Parity error; can be obtained from the event recorder. Error Handling – Errors on Protocol Level If, for example, an invalid memory address is inquired, error codes will be returned by the device that need to be interpreted. Modbus TCP Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if the device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45). Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection. Part 1: Setting the TCP/IP Parameters www.eaton.com 227 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Call up »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters: • TCP/IP address; • Subnetmask; and • Gateway. Part 2: Configuration of the Devices Call up »Device parameter/Modbus« and set the following communication parameters. • Setting a unit identifier is only necessary if a TCP network should be coupled to a RTU network. • If a different port than the default port 502 should be used, please proceed as follows: • Choose “Private” within the TCP-Port-Configuration. • Set the port number. • Set the maximum acceptable time out for “no communication”. If this time has expired without any communication, the device concludes a failure has occurred within the master system. • Allow or disallow the blocking of SCADA commands. Part 3: Hardware Connection • There is a RJ45 interface at the rear side of the device for the hardware connection to the control system. • Establish the connection to the device by means of a proper Ethernet cable. Direct Commands of the Modbus® Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Res Diagn Cr All Modbus Diagnosis Counters will be reset. Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active /Reset] Global Protection Parameters of the Modbus® Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Slave ID Device address (Slave ID) within the bus system. Each device address has to be unique within a bus system. 1 - 247 1 [Device Para /Modbus] Only available if:Device Planning = RTU 228 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Unit ID The Unit Identifier is used for routing. This parameter is to be set, if a Modbus RTU and a Modbus TCP network should be coupled. 1 - 255 255 [Device Para /Modbus] Only available if:Device Planning = TCP TCP Port Config TCP Port Configuration. This parameter is to be set only if the default Modbus TCP Port should not be used. Default, Default Private [Device Para /Modbus] Only available if:Device Planning = TCP Port Port number 502 - 65535 502 Only available if:Device Planning = TCP And Only available if: TCP Port Config = Private t-timeout Within this time the answer has to be received by the Communication system, otherwise the request will be disregarded. In that case, the Communication system detects a communication failure and the Communication System has to send a new request. [Device Para /Modbus] 0.01 – 10.00 s 1s [Device Para /Modbus] Only available if:Device Planning = RTU Baud rate Baud rate 1200, Only available if:Device Planning = RTU 2400, 19200 [Device Para /Modbus] 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 Physical Settings Digit 1: Number of bits. Digit 2: E=even parity, O=odd parity, N=no parity. Digit 3: Number of stop bits. More information on the parity: It is possible that the last data bit is followed by a parity bit which is used for recognition of communication errors. The parity bit ensures that with even parity ("EVEN") always an even number of bits with valence "1" or with odd parity ("ODD") an odd number of "1" valence bits are transmitted. But it is also possible to transmit no parity bits (here the setting is "Parity = None"). More information on the stop-bits: The end of a data byte is terminated by the stop-bits. 8E1, 8O1, 8E1 [Device Para /Modbus] 8N1, 8N2 Only available if:Device Planning = RTU www.eaton.com 229 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range t-call If there is no request message sent from 1 – 3600 s Communication to the device after expiry of this time, the device concludes a communication failure within the Communication system. Comm CmdBlo Activating (allowing)/ Deactivating (disallowing) the blocking of the Communication Commands Disable Latching AllowGap Inactive, Default Menu Path 10 s [Device Para /Modbus] Inactive Active [Device Para /Modbus] Disable Latching: If this parameter is active Inactive, (true), none of the Modbus states will be latched. That means that trip signals wont Active be latched by Modbus. Inactive If this parameter is active (True), the User Inactive, can request a set of modbus register without getting an exception, because of Active invalid address in the requested array. The invalid addresses have a special value 0xFAFA, but the User is responsible for ignoring invalid addresses. Attention: This special value can be valid, if address is valid. Inactive [Device Para /Modbus] [Device Para /Modbus] Modbus® Module Signals (Output States) Some signals (that are active for a short time only) have to be acknowledged separately (e.g.: trip signals) by the communication system. Name Description Transmission Signal: Communication Active Comm Cmd 1 Communication Command Comm Cmd 2 Communication Command Comm Cmd 3 Communication Command Comm Cmd 4 Communication Command Comm Cmd 5 Communication Command Comm Cmd 6 Communication Command Comm Cmd 7 Communication Command Comm Cmd 8 Communication Command Comm Cmd 9 Communication Command Comm Cmd 10 Communication Command Comm Cmd 11 Communication Command Comm Cmd 12 Communication Command Comm Cmd 13 Communication Command Comm Cmd 14 Communication Command 230 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Comm Cmd 15 Communication Command Comm Cmd 16 Communication Command Modbus® Module Values Value Description Default Size Menu Path NoOfRequestsTotal Total number of requests. Includes requests for other slaves. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /Modbus] NoOfRequestsForM Total Number of requests for this e slave. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /Modbus] NoOfResponse Total number of requests having been responded. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /Modbus] NoOfResponsTimeO Total number of requests with 0 verruns exceeded response time. Physically corrupted Frame. 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /Modbus] NoOfOverrunErros Total Number of Overrun Failures. Physically corrupted Frame. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /Modbus] NoOfParityErrors Total number of parity errors. Physically corrupted Frame. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /Modbus] NoOfFrameErrors Total Number of Frame Errors. Physically corrupted Frame. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /Modbus] NoOfBreaks Number of detected communication aborts 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /Modbus] NoOfQueryInvalid Total Number of Request errors. Request could not be interpreted 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /Modbus] www.eaton.com 231 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Default NoOfInternalError Total Number of Internal errors while 0 interpreting the request. Size Menu Path 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /Modbus] IEC 61850 IEC61850 Introduction To understand the functioning and mode of operation of a substation in an IEC 61850 automation environment, it is useful to compare the commissioning steps with those of a conventional substation in a Modbus TCP environment. In a conventional substation, the individual Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) communicate in a vertical direction with the higher level control center via Communication. The horizontal communication is exclusively realized by wiring relay output contacts (RO) and digital inputs (DI) together. In an IEC 61850 environment, communication between the IEDs takes place digitally (via Ethernet) by a service called Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE). By means of this service, information about events is submitted between each IED. Therefore each IED has to know about the functional capability of all other connected IEDs. Each IEC 61850 capable device includes a description of its own functionality and communications skills (IED Capability Description, *.ICD). By means of a Substation Configuration Tool to describe the structure of the substation, assignment of the devices to the primary technique, etc., virtual wiring of the IEDs between each other and with other switch gear of the substation can be achieved. A description of the substation configuration will be generated in the form of a *.SCD file. Finally, this file has to be submitted to each device. Now the IEDs are able to communicate with each other, react to interlockings, and operate switch gear. 232 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Ethernet IED1 DI IED2 RO DI IED3 RO DI Ethernet IED1 IED2 IED3 RO Conventional hard wiring GOOSE IEC61850 soft wiring Commissioning steps for a conventional substation with modbus TCP environment: • • • • Comm IEC61850 IEC61850 Master Comm ModbusTCP Modbus-TCP Master Parameter setting of the IEDs; Ethernet installation; TCP/IP settings for the IEDs; and Wiring according to wiring scheme. Commissioning steps for a substation with IEC 61850 environment: 1. Parameter setting of the IEDs Ethernet installation TCP/IP settings for the IEDs 2. IEC 61850 configuration (software wiring) a) Exporting an ICD file from each device b) Configuration of the substation (generating a SCD file) c) Transmit SCD file to each device. Generation/Export of a Device Specific ICD File Each Eaton IEC 61850 capable device includes a description of its own functionality and communications skills in the form of an IED Capability Description (*.ICD) file. This file can be exported as follows and be used for the configuration of the substation. • 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A change of the devices parameters has an influence on the content of the ICD file. Connect the device with your PC/Notebook. Start PowerPort E. Click on »Receive data from Device« in the »Device« menu. Click on »IEC 61850« in the »Device Para« menu. Click on the ICD icon in the IEC 61850 window. Select a drive and file name for the ICD file and click "save". Repeat the steps 1 to 6 for all connected devices in this IEC 61850 environment. Substation Configuration, Generation of a Station Configuration Description (SCD) File The substation configuration (i. e. connection of all logical nodes of protection and control devices) as well as switch gear usually is done with a ”Substation Configuration Tool“. Therefore the ICD files of all connected IEDs in the IEC 61850 environment have to be available. The result of the station wide “software wiring” can be exported in the form of a Station Configuration Description (SCD) file. www.eaton.com 233 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Suitable Substation Configuration Tools (SCT) are available by the following Companies: H&S, Hard- & Software Technologie GmbH & Co. KG, Dortmund (Germany) (www.hstech.de). Applied Systems Engineering Inc. (www.ase-systems.com) Kalki Communication Technologies Limited (www.kalkitech.com) • • • Import of the *.SCD File into the Device When the substation configuration is completed, the *.SCD file has to be transmitted to all connected devices. This is has to be done as follows. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Connect the device with your PC/notebook. Start PowerPort E. Click on »Receive data from Device« in the »Device« menu. Click on »IEC 61850« in the »Device Para« menu. Switch the parameter »IEC 61850 Communication« to »OFF« and submit the changed parameter set into the device. Click on the SCD icon in the IEC 61850 window. Select the folder where the *.SCD file is stored. Select the *.SCD file and click "Open". A password is requested. Enter the same password, which you use for parameter setting of the device. Following Step 5, again switch on the IEC Communication and submit the changed parameter set into the device. Repeat Steps 1 through 9 for all devices connected to this IEC 61850 environment. If no error message occurs, the configuration has been completed successfully. • When changing the substation configuration, usually a new *.SCD file has to be generated. This *.SCD file must be transmitted to all devices by means of PowerPort E. If the file is not transmitted to all devices, IEC 61850 malfunctions will be the result. • If the parameters of the devices are changed after the completion of the substation configuration, changes in the corresponding *.ICD file may result. This, in turn, may make an update of the *.SCD file necessary. IEC 61850 Virtual Outputs In addition to the standardized logical node status information, up to 16 free configurable status information items can be assigned to the 16 Virtual Outputs. This can be done in the [Device Para/IEC61850] menu. Device Planning Parameters of the IEC 61850 Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use 234 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Direct Commands of the IEC 61850 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path ResetStatistic Reset of all IEC61850 diagnostic counters Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active /Count and RevData /IEC61850] Global Protection Parameters of the IEC 61850 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Active, Inactive [Device Para Inactive VirtualOutput1 /IEC61850] Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- VirtualOutput10 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- VirtualOutput11 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- VirtualOutput12 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- VirtualOutput2 VirtualOutput3 VirtualOutput4 VirtualOutput5 VirtualOutput6 VirtualOutput7 VirtualOutput8 VirtualOutput9 www.eaton.com [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] 235 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Setting Range Default Menu Path VirtualOutput13 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- [Device Para VirtualOutput14 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- VirtualOutput15 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- VirtualOutput16 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List or visualized via the SCD file to other devices within the IEC61850 substation. -.- /IEC61850] /IEC61850] Description Assignment Via VirtualOutput1-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput3-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput4-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput5-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput6-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput7-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput8-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput9-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput10-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput11-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] 236 www.eaton.com [Device Para /IEC61850] Name Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] States of the Inputs of the IEC 61850 VirtualOutput2-I [Device Para IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via VirtualOutput12-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput13-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput14-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput15-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] VirtualOutput16-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) [Device Para /IEC61850] IEC 61850 Module Signals (Output States) Name Description VirtualInput1 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput2 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput3 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput4 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput5 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput6 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput7 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput8 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput9 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput10 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput11 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput12 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput13 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput14 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput15 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) VirtualInput16 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC 61850 Module Values Value Description Default Size Menu Path NoOfGooseRxAll Total number of received GOOSE messages including messages for other devices (subscribed and not subscribed messages). 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] www.eaton.com 237 IM02602007E Value EDR-5000 Description Default NoOfGooseRxSubsc Total Number of subscribed GOOSE 0 ribed messages including messages with incorrect content. Size Menu Path 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] NoOfGooseRxCorre Total Number of subscribed and ct correctly received GOOSE messages. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] NoOfGooseRxNew Number of subscribed and correctly received GOOSE messages with new content. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] NoOfGooseTxAll Total Number of GOOSE messages 0 that have been published by this device. 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] NoOfGooseTxNew Total Number of new GOOSE 0 messages (modified content) that have been published by this device. 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] NoOfServerRequest Total number of MMS Server sAll requests including incorrect requests. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] NoOfDataReadAll Total Number of values read from this device including incorrect requests. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] NoOfDataReadCorre Total Number of correctly read ct values from this device. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] NoOfDataWrittenAll Total Number of values written by this device including incorrect ones. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] NoOfDataWrittenCor Total Number of correctly written rect values by this device. 0 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] 238 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Default NoOfDataChangeNo Number of detected changes within 0 tification the data sets that are published with GOOSE messages. Size Menu Path 0[Operation 9999999999 /Count and RevData /IEC61850] Values of the IEC 61850 Value Description GoosePublisherStat State of the GOOSE Publisher (on e or off) GooseSubscriberSta State of the GOOSE Subscriber (on te or off) MmsServerState State of MMS Server (on or off) Default Size Menu Path Off Off, [Operation On, /Status display Error /IEC61850] Off, [Operation On, /Status display Error /IEC61850] Off, [Operation On, /Status display Error /IEC61850] Off Off IRIG-B00X IRIG-B Requirement: A IRIG-B00X time code receiver is needed. IRIG-B004 and higher will support/transmit the “year” information. If you are using an IRIG time code that does not support the “year” information (IRIG-B000, IRIG-B001, IRIG-B002, IRIG-B003), you have to set the “year” manually within the device. In these cases the correct year information is a precondition for a properly working IRIG-B. Principle - General Use This standard is the most used standard to synchronize the time of protection devices in medium voltage applications. www.eaton.com 239 IM02602007E EDR-5000 GPS Satellite Signal (optional) GPS Conncection (optional) IRIG-B Time Code Generator Protective Relay - + Twisted Pair Cable To Other Devices Based on the IRIG STANDARD 200-04, the device interface and software provides all time synchronization formats IRIG-B00X (IRIG-B000 / B001 / B002 / B003 / B004 / B005 / B006 / B007) as described in the standard. IRIG-B004 and higher will support/transmit the “year” information. Time code B has a time frame of 1 second with an index count of 10 milliseconds and contains time-of-year and year information in a binary code decimal (BCD) format, and seconds-of-day in straight binary seconds (SBS) format. Time accuracy of ±1ms is a requirement to synchronize the different protection devices. The location of the IRIG-B interface depends to the device type. Please see the wiring diagram supplied with the protective device. Function The following IRIG-B parameters can be set within the Device Parameters menu. • Set the IRIG-B type (choose B000 through B007). • Set the time synchronization via IRIG-B to Active or Inactive. • Set the time zone parameter (choose one of the 36 UTC Time Zones). • Activate or deactivate the “Daylight Savings Time” function. Parameter for Daylight Savings Time (summer-winter time) has to be set manually. 240 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Check the wiring (wiring error) if no IRIG signal can be detected. A signal will be issued if no IRIG-B time code is received for longer than 60 s. IRIG-B Control Commands In addition to the date and time information, the IRIB-B code offers the option to transmit up to 18 control commands that can be processed by the protective device. They have to be set and issued by the Time Code Generator. The protective devices offer up to 18 IRIG-B assignment options for those control commands in order to carry out the assigned action. That means if the IRIG-B time code is fed with the corresponding state of those control commands, than they can be used for further processing within the devices (e.g.: in order to start statistics, switch on or off street lighting). Device Planning Parameters of the IRIG-B00X Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Direct Commands of the IRIG-B00X Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Res IRIG-B Cr Resetting of the Diagnosis Counters: IRIGB Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active /Reset] Global Protection Parameters of the IRIG-B00X Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Device Para Active IRIG-B00X Determination of the Type: IRIG-B00X. IRIG-B types differ in types of included “Coded Expressions” (year, controlfunctions, straight-binary-seconds). IRIB-000, IRIB-001, /IRIG-B] IRIB-000 [Device Para /IRIG-B] IRIB-002, IRIB-003, IRIB-004, IRIB-005, IRIB-006, IRIB-007 www.eaton.com 241 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Time Zones Time Zones UTC+14 Kiritimati, UTC+0 London UTC+13 Rawaki, UTC+12.75 Chatham Island, UTC+12 Wellington, UTC+11.5 Kingston, UTC+11 Port Vila, UTC+10.5 Lord Howe Island, UTC+10 Sydney, UTC+9.5 Adelaide, UTC+9 Tokyo, UTC+8 Hong Kong, UTC+7 Bangkok, UTC+6.5 Rangoon, UTC+6 Colombo, UTC+5.75 Kathmandu, UTC+5.5 New Delhi, UTC+5 Islamabad, UTC+4.5 Kabul, UTC+4 Abu Dhabi, UTC+3.5 Tehran, UTC+3 Moscow, UTC+2 Athens, UTC+1 Berlin, UTC+0 London, UTC-1 Azores, UTC-2 Fern. d. Noronha, UTC-3 Buenos Aires, UTC-3.5 St. John’s, UTC-4 Santiago, UTC-5 New York, UTC-6 Chicago, UTC-7 Salt Lake City, UTC-8 Los Angeles, UTC-9 Anchorage, UTC-9.5 Taiohae, UTC-10 Honolulu, UTC-11 Midway Islands [Device Para Inactive, [Device Para Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Time Time Default Inactive Active Signals of the IRIG-B00X (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active Inverted Signal: IRIG-B inverted Control Signal1 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal2 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal4 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal5 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal6 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal 242 www.eaton.com Menu Path /IRIG-B] /IRIG-B] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Control Signal7 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal8 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal9 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal10 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal11 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal12 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal13 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal14 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal15 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal16 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal17 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Control Signal18 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B00X Values Value Description Default Size Menu Path NoOfFramesOK Total number valid Frames. 0 0 - 65535 [Operation /Count and RevData /IRIG-B] NoOfFrameErrors Total Number of Frame Errors. Physically corrupted Frame. 0 0 - 65535 [Operation /Count and RevData /IRIG-B] Edges Edges 0 0 - 65535 [Operation /Count and RevData /IRIG-B] www.eaton.com 243 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameters Parameter setting and planning can be done: • Directly at the device; or • By way of the PowerPort-E software application. Parameter Definitions Device Parameters Device Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree. By modifying the Device Parameters, the User may (depending on the type of device): • • • • • • • • • • • Set cutoff levels; Configure digital inputs, Assign LEDs; Configure Relay Outputs; Assign acknowledgment signals; Configure statistics; Configure general Protocol Settings; Adapt HMI settings; Configure recorders (reports); Set date and time; Change passwords; and/or Check the version (build) of the device. System Parameters System Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree. System Parameters comprise the essential, basic settings of your switchboard such as rated frequency and transformer ratios. Protection Parameters Protection Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree. This Protection Parameters include the following. • Global Protection Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters: All settings and assignments that are done within the Global Parameter tree are valid independent of the Setting Groups. They have to be set only once. In addition, Global Protection Parameters include the parameters used for Breaker Management. • The Parameter Setting Switch is part of the Protection Parameters: The User may either directly switch to a certain parameter setting group or determine the conditions for switching to another parameter setting group. • Setting Group Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters: By means of the Setting Group Parameters, the User may individually adapt the protective device to the current conditions or grid conditions. The Setting Group Parameters may be individually set in each Settings group. 244 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Device Planning Parameters Device Planning Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree. • Improving the Usability (Clarity): All protection modules that are currently unused can be hidden (switched to invisible) through Device Planning. In the Device Planning menu, the User can adapt the scope of functionality of the protective device exactly as needed. The User can improve the usability by hiding all modules that are not currently needed. • Adapting the device to the application: For those modules that are needed, determine how they should be set up (e.g.: directional, non-directional, <, >...). Direct Commands Direct Commands are part of the Device Parameter tree but NOT part of the parameter file. They will be executed directly (e.g.: Resetting of a Counter). State of the Module Inputs Module Inputs are part of the Device Parameter tree. The State of the Module Input is context-dependent. By means of the Module Inputs, information can be passed to and acted upon by the modules. The User can assign signals to Module Inputs. The state of the signals that are assigned to an input can be viewed from the Status Display. Module Inputs can be identified by an ”-I” at the end of the name. Signals Signals are part of the Device Parameter tree. The state of the signal is context-dependent. • Signals represent the state of the installation/equipment (e.g.: position indicators of the breaker). • Signals are assessments of the state of the grid and the equipment (System OK, Transformer failure detected, ...). • Signals represent decisions that are taken by the device (e.g.: Trip Command) based on the User parameter settings. www.eaton.com 245 246 www.eaton.com PSS via Comm PSS via Inp fct PS4 PS3 PS2 PS1 PSet-Switch.Mode ExBlo Fc Active/ Inactive Active/ Inactive Active/ Inactive Active/ Inactive Active/ Inactive Active/ Inactive Active/ Inactive Active/ Inactive Parameter Set 1 Parameter Set 2 Parameter Set 3 Parameter Set 4 & AND Function 1..n, Assignment List AdaptSet 1 1..n, Assignment List AdaptSet 2 1..n, Assignment List AdaptSet 3 1..n, Assignment List AdaptSet 4 Rvs Blo Fc Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive & AND Active/Inactive & AND Protection Para/Global Prot Para / I-Prot / I[1]...[n] / AdaptSet... Active/ Inactive Active/ Inactive Active/ Inactive Active/ Inactive Blo TripCmd & Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive ExBlo TripCmd Fc AdaptSet 4 AdaptSet 3 AdaptSet 2 AdaptSet 1 Standard AND PSet-Switch [0…*In] [0…*In] [0…*In] [0…*In] Pickup Standard [1...n] [1...n] [1...n] [1...n] Curve Shape Standard [0…s] [0…s] [0…s] [0…s] t Standard [0.05...n] [0.05...n] [0.05...n] [0.05...n] t-multiplier Standard [1...n] [1...n] [1...n] [1...n] Reset Mode Standard [0…s] [0…s] [0…s] [0…s] t-reset Standard Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive IH2 Blo Standard Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Nondir Trip at V=0 Standard [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] Active/Inactive Active/Inactive [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] Active/Inactive Active/Inactive [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] Active/Inactive Active/Inactive [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] Active/Inactive Active/Inactive Protection Para et tS ap Ad IM02602007E EDR-5000 Adaptive Parameter Sets EDR-5000 IM02602007E Adaptive Parameter Sets are part of the Device Parameter tree. By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets, the User can temporarily modify single parameters within the Parameter Setting groups. Adaptive Parameters drop-out automatically if the acknowledged signal that has activated them has dropped-out. Please take into account that Adaptive Set 1 is dominant to Adaptive Set 2. Adaptive Set 2 is dominant to Adaptive Set 3. Adaptive Set 3 is dominant to Adaptive Set 4. In order to increase the usability (clarity), Adaptive Parameter Sets become visible if a corresponding activation signal has been assigned (PowerPort-E V. 1.2 and higher). Example: In order to use Adaptive Parameters within Protective Element I [1], please proceed as follows. • Assign within the Global Parameter tree, within Protective Element I[1], an activation signal for Adaptive Parameter Set 1. • Adaptive Parameter Set 1 becomes now visible within the Protection Parameter Sets for element I[1]. By means of additional activation signals, further Adaptive Parameter Sets can be used. The functionality of the IED (relay) can be enhanced / adapted, by means of Adaptive Parameters in order to meet the requirements of modified states of the grid or the power supply system respectively, to manage unpredictable events. Moreover, the adaptive parameter can also be used to realize various special protective functions or to expand the existing function modules in a simple way, without costly redesign the existing hardware or software platform. The Adaptive Parameter feature allows, besides a standard parameter set, one of the four parameter sets labeled from 1 to 4, to be used, for example, in a time overcurrent element under the control of the configurable Set Control Logic. The dynamic switch-over of the adaptive parameter set is only active for a particular element when its adaptive set control logic is configured and only as long as the activation signal is true. For some protection elements, such as time overcurrent and instantaneous overcurrent ( 50P, 51P, 50G, 51G, …), besides the “default” setting there exists another four “alternative” settings for pickup value, curve type, time dial, and reset mode set values that can dynamically be switched-over by means of the configurable adaptive setting control logic in the single set parameter. If the Adaptive Parameter feature is not used, the adaptive set control logic will not be selected (assigned). The protective elements work, in this case, just like a normal protection using the “Default” settings. If one of the Adaptive Set Control logic is assigned to a logic function, the protective element will be “switched-over” to the corresponding adaptive settings if the assigned logic function is asserted and will drop-out to the “Default” setting if the assigned signal that has activated the Adaptive Set has dropped-out. Adaptive Parameters via HMI The use of Adaptive Parameters via the HMI (panel) differs a bit to the use via PowerPort-E. www.eaton.com 247 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Adaptive Parameters can be also used via the HMI (instead of using the recommended PowerPort-E). The principle method of using them via the HMI is as follows. 1. Assign an activation signal for an Adaptive Parameter Set within the Global Parameters »Global Para« for a protective element (available for current functions only). 2. Call up this protective element within a Setting Group. 3. Go to the parameter that should be modified adaptively and call it up for editing (arrow-right-key). 4. Choose the corresponding Adaptive Set. 5. Set the modified parameter for the selected Adaptive Set. Application Example The tripping time »t« for the 50[1] element of »Parameter Set 1« should be desensitized (reduced) in case Digital Input 2 becomes active. 1. Call up the menu [Protection Para/Global Protection Para/I-Prot/50[1]/Adaptive Para1] and assign Digital Input 2 as activation signal. 2. Call up the 50[1] element within the menu [Protection Para/Set[1]/I-Port/50[1]. 3. Go to the tripping time parameter »t« by means of the softkey (arrow-down) and call up the submenu by means of the softkey (arrow-right). 4. Call up the corresponding parameter set (Adaptive Set 1 in this example). 5. Set the reduced tripping time for »Adaptive Set 1«. Check and confirm that the functionality is in compliance with your protection plan via a commissioning test. Application Example During a “Switch-OnTo-Fault” condition, the User is usually requested to make the embedded protective function tripping of the faulted line faster, instantaneous, or sometimes non-directional. Such a “Switch-OnTo-Fault” application can easily be realized using the Adaptive Parameter features mentioned previously. The standard time overcurrent protection element (e.g.: 51P) should trip instantaneously in case of SOTF condition,. If the SOTF logic function »SOTF ENABLED« is detecting a manual breaker close condition, the relay switches to Adaptive Set 1 if the signal »SOTF.ENABLED« is assigned to Adaptive Set 1. The corresponding Adaptive Set 1 will become active and than »t = 0« sec. 248 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E The screen shot above shows the adaptive setting configurations following applications based on only one simple overcurrent protection element: 1.Standard Set: Default settings; 2.Adaptive Set 1: SOTF application (Switch-OnTo-Fault); 3.Adaptive Set 2: CLPU application (Cold Load Pickup); Application Examples • The output signal of the Switch OnTo Fault module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set that sensitizes the overcurrent protection. • The output signal of the Cold Load Pickup module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set that desensitizes the overcurrent protection. • By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets, an Adaptive Auto Reclosure can be realized. After a reclosure attempt, the tripping thresholds or tripping curves of the overcurrent protection can be adapted. • Depending on undervoltage, the overcurrent protection can be modified (voltage controlled). This applies to devices that offer voltage protection only. • The ground overcurrent protection can be modified by the residual voltage. This applies to devices that offer voltage protection only. www.eaton.com 249 IM02602007E • EDR-5000 Dynamic and automatic adaption of the ground current settings in order to adapt the settings to different loads (single-phase load diversity). Adaptive Parameter Sets are only available for devices with current protection modules. Adaptive Parameter Set Activation Signals Name Description -.- No assignment 27M[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 27M[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 59M[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 59M[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 47[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry 47[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry SOTF.enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings. CLPU.enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled AR.Running Signal: Auto Reclosing Running AR.Pre Shot Pre Shot Control AR.Shot 1 Shot Control AR.Shot 2 Shot Control AR.Shot 3 Shot Control AR.Shot 4 Shot Control AR.Shot 5 Shot Control AR.Shot 6 Shot Control DI-8P X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input Logic.LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE2.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE2.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output 250 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE2.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE2.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE3.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE3.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE3.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE3.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE4.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE4.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE4.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE4.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE5.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE5.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE5.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE5.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE6.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE6.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE6.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE6.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE7.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE7.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE7.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE7.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE8.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE8.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE8.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE8.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE9.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE9.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE9.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE9.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE10.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE10.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE10.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE10.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE11.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE11.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE11.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE11.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE12.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate www.eaton.com 251 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE12.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE12.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE12.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE13.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE13.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE13.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE13.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE14.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE14.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE14.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE14.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE15.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE15.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE15.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE15.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE16.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE16.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE16.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE16.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE17.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE17.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE17.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE17.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE18.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE18.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE18.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE18.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE19.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE19.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE19.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE19.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE20.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE20.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE20.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE20.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE21.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE21.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE21.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE21.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) 252 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE22.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE22.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE22.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE22.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE23.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE23.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE23.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE23.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE24.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE24.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE24.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE24.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE25.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE25.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE25.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE25.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE26.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE26.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE26.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE26.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE27.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE27.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE27.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE27.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE28.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE28.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE28.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE28.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE29.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE29.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE29.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE29.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE30.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE30.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE30.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE30.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE31.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE31.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE31.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) www.eaton.com 253 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE31.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE32.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE32.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE32.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE32.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE33.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE33.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE33.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE33.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE34.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE34.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE34.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE34.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE35.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE35.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE35.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE35.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE36.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE36.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE36.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE36.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE37.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE37.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE37.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE37.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE38.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE38.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE38.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE38.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE39.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE39.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE39.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE39.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE40.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE40.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE40.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE40.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE41.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE41.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output 254 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE41.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE41.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE42.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE42.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE42.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE42.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE43.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE43.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE43.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE43.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE44.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE44.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE44.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE44.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE45.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE45.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE45.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE45.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE46.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE46.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE46.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE46.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE47.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE47.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE47.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE47.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE48.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE48.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE48.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE48.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE49.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE49.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE49.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE49.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE50.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE50.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE50.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE50.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE51.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate www.eaton.com 255 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE51.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE51.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE51.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE52.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE52.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE52.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE52.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE53.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE53.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE53.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE53.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE54.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE54.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE54.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE54.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE55.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE55.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE55.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE55.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE56.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE56.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE56.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE56.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE57.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE57.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE57.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE57.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE58.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE58.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE58.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE58.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE59.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE59.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE59.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE59.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE60.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE60.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE60.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE60.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) 256 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE61.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE61.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE61.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE61.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE62.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE62.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE62.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE62.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE63.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE63.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE63.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE63.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE64.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE64.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE64.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE64.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE65.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE65.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE65.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE65.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE66.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE66.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE66.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE66.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE67.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE67.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE67.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE67.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE68.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE68.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE68.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE68.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE69.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE69.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE69.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE69.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE70.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE70.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE70.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) www.eaton.com 257 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE70.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE71.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE71.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE71.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE71.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE72.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE72.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE72.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE72.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE73.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE73.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE73.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE73.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE74.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE74.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE74.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE74.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE75.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE75.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE75.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE75.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE76.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE76.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE76.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE76.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE77.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE77.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE77.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE77.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE78.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE78.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE78.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE78.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE79.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE79.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE79.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE79.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE80.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE80.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output 258 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE80.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE80.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Sys.Maint Mode Active Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Active Sys.Maint Mode Inactive Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Inactive Operational Modes (Access Authorization) Operational Mode – »Display Only« • The protection is activated. • All data, measuring values, records, and counters/meters can be viewed. Operation Mode – »Parameter Setting and Planning« In this mode, the User is able to: • Edit and set parameters; • Change device planning details; and • Configure and reset operational data (event recorder/fault recorder/power meter/switching cycles). If the device was not active within the parameter setting mode for a longer time (can be set between 20 – 3600 seconds), the device will automatically reset to »Display Only« mode (Please refer to the Appendix Module Panel). As long as the User is within the parameter setting mode, the device cannot acknowledge. In order to change into the operation mode (»Parameter Setting«) please proceed as follows. 1.Mark the parameter to be changed in the device display. 2.Press the »Wrench« soft key to temporarily change into the Parameter Setting mode. 3.Enter the parameter password. 4.Change the parameter. 5.Change any additional parameters that are needed. As long as the User is within the parameter setting mode, a wrench icon will be shown in the upper right corner of the display. 6. For saving the altered parameter(s): www.eaton.com 259 IM02602007E • • EDR-5000 Press the »OK« key; and Confirm by pressing the »Yes« soft key. 7.Then the device changes into the »Display Only« mode. Password Password Entry at the Panel Passwords can be entered by way of the soft keys 1 2 3 4 Example: For password (3244) press successively: • • • • Soft key 3; Soft key 2; Soft key 4; and Soft key 4. Password Changes Passwords can be changed at the device in the »Device Para/Password« menu or by means of the PowerPort-E software. A password must be a User-defined combination of the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4. All other characters and keys WILL NOT be accepted. The password for the operation mode »Parameter setting and planning« enables the User to transfer parameters from the PowerPort-E software into the device. When the User wants to change a password, the existing one has to be entered first. The new password (up to 8 digits) is then to be confirmed twice. Please proceed as follows. • • • In order to change the password, please enter the old password followed by pressing the »OK« key. Next, enter the new password and press the »OK« key. Finally, confirm your new password and press the »OK« key. Password Forgotten All passwords can be reset to the fail-safe adjustment (1234) by pressing the »Ack/Rst« key during cold booting. For this procedure, confirm the inquiry »Reset Passwords?« with »Yes«. 260 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Changing of Parameters - Example • Move to the parameter to be change by using the soft keys. • Press the »Wrench« soft key. • Enter the password for parameter setting. • Edit/change the parameter. Now the User can: • Save the change made and have it adopted by the system; or • Change additional parameters and save all the altered parameters and have them adopted by the system. To Save Parameter Changes Immediately • Press the »OK« key to save the changed parameters directly and to have them adopted by the device. Confirm the parameter changes by pressing the »Yes« soft key or dismiss by pressing »No« soft key. To Change Additional Parameters and Save Afterwards • Move to other parameters and change them. A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the modifications have only temporarily been saved. They are not yet stored and adopted by the device. In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher-ranking menu level, the intended change of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol (star trace). This makes it possible to control or follow from the main menu level at any time where parameter changes have been made and have not been saved. In addition to the star trace to the temporarily saved parameter changes, a general parameter changing symbol is faded in at the left corner of the display. It is possible from each point of the menu tree to see that there are parameter changes still not adopted by the device. Press the »OK« key to initiate the final storage of all parameter changes. Confirm the parameter changes by pressing the »Yes« soft key or dismiss by pressing the »No« soft key. www.eaton.com 261 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Plausibility Check In order to prevent obvious incorrect settings, the device constantly monitors all temporarily saved parameter changes. If the device detects a conflict, it is indicated by a question mark in front of the respective parameter. In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex parameter changes are involved, a question mark appears above the temporarily saved parameters (on every superior /higher - ranking menu level). This makes it possible to control or follow, from the main menu level, where conflicts are intended to be saved. This can be done at any time. In addition to the question mark trace to the temporarily saved conflict parameter changes, a general conflict symbol/question mark is faded-in at the left corner of the display, and so it is possible to see from each point of the menu tree that conflicts have been detected by the device. A star/parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question mark/conflict symbol. If a device detects a conflict, it rejects saving and adopting of the parameters. Example: If the residual voltage has been configured as »calculated« (»EVTcon = calculated«), then the device recognizes a conflict in case voltage measuring is configured as »Phase to Phase« (»VTcon = Phase to Phase«). The calculation of the residual voltage is physically not possible by means of phase-to-phase voltages. Changing of Parameters When Using the PowerPort-E - Example Example: Changing of a protective parameter (to alter the characteristic for the overcurrent protection function I[1] in Parameter Set 1). • If PowerPort-E is not in operation, please start the application. • If the device data have not been loaded, select »Data To Be Received From The Device« in the »Device« menu. • Double-click the »Protection Para Icon« in the navigation tree. • Double-click the »Protection Para Set Icon« in the navigation tree. • Double-click the »Set 1 Icon« in the navigation tree. • Double-click the »protection stage I[1]« in the navigation tree. • In the working window, a tabulated overview appears showing the parameters assigned to this protective function. • In this table, double-click the value/parameter to be changed (in this example: »Char«). • Another window (pop-up) is opened where the User can select the required characteristic. 262 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 • IM02602007E Close this window by clicking the »OK« key. A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the alterations have only temporarily been saved. They are not yet stored and adopted by the software/device. In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher menu level, the intended change of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol (star trace). This makes it possible to control or follow, from the main menu level, where parameter changes have been made and have not been saved. This can be done at any time. Plausibility Check In order to prevent obvious incorrect settings, the application constantly monitors all temporarily saved parameter changes. If the device detects a conflict, it is indicated by a question mark in front of the respective parameter. In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher menu level above of the temporarily saved parameters, a conflict is indicated by a question mark (plausibility trace). This makes it possible to control or follow, from the main menu level, where conflicts exist. This can be done at any time. So it is possible to see from each point of the menu tree that conflicts have been detected by the application. A star/parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question mark/conflict symbol. If the software detects a conflict, it rejects the saving and adopting of the parameters. Example: If the residual voltage has been configured as »Calculated« (»EVTcon = calculated«), then the application recognizes a conflict in case voltage measuring is configured as »Phase to Phase« (»VTcon = Phase to Phase«). The calculation of the residual voltage is physically not possible by means of phase-to-phase voltages. • Additional parameters can be changed if required. • In order to transfer changed parameters into the device, please select »Transfer all parameters into the device« in the »Device« menu. • Confirm the safety inquiry »Shall The Parameters Be Overwritten?«. • Enter the password for setting parameters in the pop-up window. • Confirm the inquiry »Shall The Data Be Saved Locally?« with »Yes« (recommended). Select a suitable storing location on your hard disk. www.eaton.com 263 IM02602007E EDR-5000 • Confirm the selected storage location by clicking »Save«. • The changed parameter data is now saved in the data file chosen. Thereafter, the changed data is transferred to the device and adopted. Once the User has entered the parameter setting password, PowerPort-E will not ask the User again for the password for at least 10 minutes. This time interval will start again each time parameters are transmitted into the device. If, for more than 10 minutes, no parameters are transmitted into the device, PowerPort-E will again ask for the password when the User tries to transmit parameters into the device. Protection Parameters Please note that by deactivating, for example protective functions, the User also changes the functionality of the device. The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material damage as a result of incorrect planning. Contact your Eaton Customer Service representative for more information. The protection parameters include the following protection parameter trees. • Global Protection Parameters »Global Prot Para«: Here the User can find all protection parameters that are universally valid. That means they are valid independent of the protection parameter sets. • Setting Group Parameters »Set1..4«: The protection parameters that the User set within a parameter set are only valid if the parameter set selected is switched to active. Setting Groups Setting Group Switch Within the »Protection Para/P-Set Switch« menu, the User has the following possibilities: • • • To manually set one of the four setting groups active; To assign a signal to each setting group that sets this group to active; and Scada switches the setting groups. Setting Group Switch Manual Selection Switching Options 264 Via Input Function (e.g.: Digital Input) Switch over, if another setting Switch over not until the request group is chosen manually within is clear. the »Protection Para/P-Set That means if there is more or Switch« menu. less than one request signal active, no switch over will be executed. www.eaton.com Via Scada Switch over if there is a clear Scada request. Otherwise no switch over will be executed. EDR-5000 IM02602007E The description of the parameters can be found within the “System Parameters” section. Setting Group Switch Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu. • Double click the »Protection Para« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click the »P-Set Switch« within the protection parameters. • To configure the Setting Group Switch respectively, manually choose an active set. The description of the parameters can be found within the “System Parameters” section. Copying Setting Groups (Parameter Sets) Via PowerPort-E Setting groups can only be copied if there are no conflicts (no red question marks). For applications using multiple settings groups, one can use the configuration file from the first group to create the second group. With the help of PowerPort-E, the User can simply copy an existing setting group to another (not yet configured) one. The User only needs to change those parameters where the two setting groups are different. To efficiently establish a second parameter set where only few parameters are different, proceed as follows. • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • Open a (off-line) parameter file of a device or load data of a connected device. • Carefully save the relevant device parameters by selecting [File\Save as]. • Select »Copy Parameter Sets« out of the “Edit” menu. • Then define both source and destination of the parameter sets to be copied (source = copy from; destination: copy to). • Click on »OK« to start the copy procedure. • The copied parameter set is now cached (not yet saved!). • Then, modify the copied parameter set(s), if applicable. • Assign a new file name to the revised device parameter file and save it on your hard disk (backup copy). www.eaton.com 265 IM02602007E • EDR-5000 To transfer the modified parameters back to the device, click on the »Device« menu item and select »Transfer All Parameters into the Device«. Comparing Setting Groups Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • Click on menu item »Edit« and select »Compare Parameter Sets«. • Select the two parameter sets from the two drop down menus that are to be compared with each other. • Press the »Compare« button. • The values that are different from the set parameters will be listed in tabular form. Comparing Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E With the help of PowerPort-E, the User can simply compare/differentiate the currently open parameter/device file against a file on the hard disk. The precondition is that the versions and type of devices match. To compare the parameter files, please proceed as follows. • Click on »Compare with a Parameter File« within the »Device« menu. • Click on the Folder icon in order to select a file on your hard disk. • The differences will be shown in tabular form. Converting Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E Parameter files of the same type can be up- or down-graded (converted). During this process, the new parameter file will keep all active settings from the source parameter file and, at the same time, remove all inactive settings. As many parameters as possible will be converted. • Parameters that are newly added will be set to default. • Parameters that are not included in the target file version will be deleted. • In order to convert a parameter file please proceed as follows. • If PowerPort-E is not in operation, please start the application. • Open a parameter file or load the parameters from a device that should be converted. • Make a backup of this file in a fail-safe place. • Choose »Save as« from the »File« menu. • Enter a new file name (in order to prevent overwriting the original file). 266 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E • Choose the new file type from drop down menu »File Type«. • Confirm the security check by clicking on »Yes« only if the User is sure that the file conversion should be executed. • In tabular form the modifications will be shown as follows. Added parameter: Deleted parameter: www.eaton.com 267 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Parameters Sys Date and Time In the »Device parameters/Date/Time« menu, the User can set the date and time. Synchronize Date and Time Via PowerPort-E • If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application. • If device data have not been downloaded recently, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu. • Double click the »Device parameters« icon in the navigation tree. • Double click the »Date/time« icon within the operational data. • From the working window, the User can now synchronize the date and time of the device with the PC (i.e.: that means that the device accepts the date and time from the PC). Version Within the»Device parameters/Version« menu, the User can obtain information on the software and hardware versions. Version Via PowerPort-E Within the »File/Properties« menu, the User can obtain detailed information on the currently opened file (e.g.: software and hardware version). In order to be able to transmit a parameter file (e.g.: created off line) into the device, the following parameters must agree: 268 • Type Code (written on the top of the device/type label); and • Version of the device model (can be found in the »Device Parameters\Version« menu). www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 TCP/IP Settings Warning: Mixing up IP Addresses (In case there is more than one protective device within the TCP/IP network or establishing an unintentional wrong connection to a protective device based on a wrong entered IP address. Transferring parameters into the wrong protective device might lead to death, personal injury, or damage of electrical equipment. In order to prevent faulty connections, the User MUST document and maintain a list with the IP addresses of any switchboard/protective devices. The User MUST double check the IP addresses of the connection that is to be established. That means, the User MUST first read out the IP address at the HMI of the device (within menu [Device para/TCP IP]) then compare the IP address with the list. If the addresses are identical, establish the connection. If they are not, DO NOT establish the connection. Within »Device Para / TCP/IP« menu, the TCP/IP settings have to be set. The first-time setting of the TCP/IP Parameters can be done at the panel (HMI) only. Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if the device is equipped with an Ethernet interface (RJ45). Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection. Set the TCP/IP Parameters: Call up »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters: • TCP/IP address; • Subnetmask; and • Gateway. Direct Commands of the System Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Ack LED All acknowledgeable LEDs will be acknowledged. Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active Ack RO All acknowledgeable Relay Outputs will be acknowledged. Inactive, Active www.eaton.com /Reset] Inactive [Operation /Reset] 269 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Ack Comm Communication will be acknowledged. Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active Ack RO LED Comm TCmd Reset the Relay Outputs, LEDs, Communication, and the Trip Command. Inactive, /Reset] Inactive Active Reboot Rebooting the device. No, /Reset] No Yes MaintMode Manually Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Switch Mode: Manual Activation of the Arc Flash Reduction Mode Maint Mode inactive, Only available if: Maint Mode = Activation Manually Activation via DI, [Operation [Service /General] Inactive Activation via Comm, [Service /MaintMode Manually] Inactive, Active CAUTION: Manually rebooting the device will release the Supervision Contact. Global Protection Parameters of the System Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path PSet-Switch Switching Parameter Set PS1, PSS via Inp fct [Protection Para PS2, /PSet-Switch] PS3, PS4, PSS via Inp fct, PSS via Comm PS1: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS by The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set to "Switch via Input" and the other three input functions are inactive at the same time. In case there is more than one input function active, no Parameter Setting Group Switch will be executed. In case all input functions are inactive, the device will keep working with the Setting Group that was activated lastly. Only available if: PSet-Switch = PSS via Inp fct 270 www.eaton.com Sys.Maint Mode [Protection Para Inactive /PSet-Switch] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range PS2: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS by The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set to "Switch via Input" and the other three input functions are inactive at the same time. In case there is more than one input function active, no Parameter Setting Group Switch will be executed. In case all input functions are inactive, the device will keep working with the Setting Group that was activated lastly. Default Menu Path Sys.Maint Mode [Protection Para Active /PSet-Switch] Only available if: PSet-Switch = PSS via Inp fct PS3: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS by The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set to "Switch via Input" and the other three input functions are inactive at the same time. In case there is more than one input function active, no Parameter Setting Group Switch will be executed. In case all input functions are inactive, the device will keep working with the Setting Group that was activated lastly. -.- [Protection Para /PSet-Switch] Only available if: PSet-Switch = PSS via Inp fct PS4: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS by The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set to "Switch via Input" and the other three input functions are inactive at the same time. In case there is more than one input function active, no Parameter Setting Group Switch will be executed. In case all input functions are inactive, the device will keep working with the Setting Group that was activated lastly. -.- [Protection Para /PSet-Switch] Only available if: PSet-Switch = PSS via Inp fct Ack LED Ack RO Ack Comm All acknowledgeable LEDs will be acknowledged if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Assignment List All acknowledgeable Relay Outputs will be acknowledged if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para /Ex Acknowledge] -.- [Device Para /Ex Acknowledge] Communication will be acknowledged if the 1..n, Assignment List state of the assigned signal becomes true. -.- [Device Para /Ex Acknowledge] Scaling Display of the measured values as primary, Per unit values, secondary, or per unit values. Primary values, Primary values [Operation /General Settings] Secondary values www.eaton.com 271 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Maint Mode Activation Mode of the Arc Flash Reduction. Inactive, Switching into another mode is only possible when no Activation Signal is active Activation Manually, (pending). Activation via Comm, Default Menu Path Inactive [Service /Maint Mode] Activation via DI Maint Mode Activated by Activation Signal for the Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Switch. -.-, DI-8P X1.DI 7 DI-8P X1.DI 1, Only available if: Maint Mode Activated by = Activation via DI /Maint Mode] DI-8P X1.DI 2, DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 System Module Input States Name Description Ack LED-I Module Input State: LEDs Acknowledgment [Device Para by Digital Input. /Ex Acknowledge] Ack RO-I Module Input State: Acknowledgment of the [Device Para Relay Outputs. /Ex Acknowledge] Ack Comm-I Module Input State: Acknowledge Communication via Digital Input. The replica that Communication has received from the device is to be reset. [Device Para State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should activate this Parameter Setting Group. [Protection Para State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should activate this Parameter Setting Group. [Protection Para State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should activate this Parameter Setting Group. [Protection Para State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should activate this Parameter Setting Group. [Protection Para PS1-I PS2-I PS3-I PS4-I 272 Assignment Via www.eaton.com [Service /Ex Acknowledge] /PSet-Switch] /PSet-Switch] /PSet-Switch] /PSet-Switch] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via Maint Mode-I Module Input State: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Switch [Service /Maint Mode] System Module Signals Name Description Reboot Signal: Rebooting the device: 1=Restart initiated by power supply; 2=Restart initiated by the User; 3=Set on defaults (Super Reset); 4=Restart by the debugger; 5=Restart because of configuration change; 6=General failure; 7=Restart initiated by System Abort (host side); 8=Restart initiated by watchdog timeout (host side); 9=Restart initiated by System Abort (dsp side); 10=Restart initiated by watchdog timeout (dsp side); 11=Power supply failure (short term interruption) or power supply voltage to low; 12=illegal memory access. Act Set Signal: Active Parameter Set PS 1 Signal: Parameter Set 1 PS 2 Signal: Parameter Set 2 PS 3 Signal: Parameter Set 3 PS 4 Signal: Parameter Set 4 PSS manual Signal: Manual switch over of a Parameter Set PSS via Comm Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Communication PSS via Inp fct Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Input Function Min. 1 param changed Signal: At least one parameter has been changed Maint Mode Active Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Active Maint Mode Inactive Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Inactive MaintMode Manually Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Manual Mode Maint Mode Comm Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Comm Mode Maint Mode DI Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Digital Input Mode Param to be saved Number of parameters to be saved. 0 means that all parameter changes are overtaken. Ack LED Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment Ack RO Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs Ack Counter Signal: Reset of all Counters Ack Comm Signal: Acknowledge Communication Ack TripCmd Signal: Reset Trip Command Ack LED-HMI Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment :HMI Ack RO-HMI Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs :HMI Ack Counter-HMI Signal: Reset of all Counters :HMI Ack Comm-HMI Signal: Acknowledge Communication :HMI Ack TripCmd-HMI Signal: Reset Trip Command :HMI Ack LED-Comm Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment :Communication www.eaton.com 273 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Ack RO-Comm Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs :Communication Ack Counter-Comm Signal: Reset of all Counters :Communication Ack Comm-Comm Signal: Acknowledge Communication :Communication Ack TripCmd-Comm Signal: Reset Trip Command :Communication Res OperationsCr Signal: Res OperationsCr Res AlarmCr Signal: Res AlarmCr Res TripCr Signal: Res TripCr Res TotalCr Signal: Res TotalCr Special Values of the System Module Value Description Menu Path Build Build [Device Para /Version] Version Version [Device Para /Version] Operating hours Cr Operating hours counter of the protective device [Operation /Count and RevData /Sys] 274 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 System Parameters System Para Within the system parameters, the User can set all parameters that are relevant for the primary side and the mains operational method like frequency, primary and secondary values, and the star point treatment. General System Parameters Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Phase Sequence Phase Sequence direction ABC, ABC [System Para ACB f Nominal frequency 50Hz, /General Settings] 60Hz 60Hz [System Para /General Settings] Voltage Depending System Parameters Parameter Description Main VT pri Main VT sec Main VT con Setting Range Default Menu Path Primary Voltage of Main VTs. The phase to 60 – 500000 V phase voltage is to be entered even if the load is in delta connection. 12000 V [System Para Secondary Voltage of Main VTs. The phase 60.00 – 600.00 V to phase voltage is to be entered even if the load is in delta connection. 120 V Main VTs connection Wye Wye, /General Settings] /General Settings] Phase-to-Phase, Open-Delta Aux VT pri Primary voltage of Aux VTs 60 – 500000 V [System Para [System Para /General Settings] 12000 V [System Para /General Settings] Aux VT sec Secondary voltage of Aux VTs 35.00 – 600.00 V 120 V [System Para /General Settings] V Sync The fourth measuring input of the voltage measuring card measures the voltage that is to be synchronized. A, B, A [System Para /General Settings] C, AB, BC, CA www.eaton.com 275 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Phase MTA IR Dir Cntrl Setting Range Default Menu Path Maximum Torque Angle: Angle between 0 - 360° phase current and reference voltage in case of a short circuit. This angle is needed to determine the fault direction in case of short circuits. 30° [System Para IOptions for direction detection IR 3V0 IR 3V0, /Direction] IR IPol, [System Para /Direction] IR Dual, IR Neg IX Dir Cntrl Options for direction detection IX 3V0, IX 3V0 IX Neg, [System Para /Direction] IX Dual 3V0 Source Ground MTA Earth overcurrent protection elements take Measured, into account this parameter for direction decisions. The User has to ensure, that this Calculated parameter is set to "Measured" only if the ground current is fed to the fourth measuring input of the current measuring card. Calculated Ground MTA 110° 0 - 360° [System Para /Direction] Only available if: Star point treatment = Solidly (Effectively) or Low-Resistance Grounded [System Para /Direction] Current Depending System Parameters Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path CT con Current transformer connection 3-wire, 3-wire [System Para 4th CT IN, /General Settings] 4th CT IG CT pri Nominal current of the primary side of the current transformers. 1 – 50000 A 500 A [System Para /General Settings] CT sec Nominal current of the secondary side of the current transformers. 1 A, 5A 276 www.eaton.com 5A [System Para /General Settings] IM02602007E EDR-5000 CT dir XCT pri XCT sec XCT dir Protection functions with directional feature 0°, can only work properly if the connection of the current transformers is free of wiring 180° errors. If all current transformers are connected to the device with an incorrect polarity, the wiring error can be compensated by this parameter. This parameter turns the current vectors by 180 degrees. 0° This parameter defines the primary nominal 1 – 50000 A current of the connected ground current transformer. If the ground current is measured via the Residual connection, the primary value of the phase current transformer must be entered here. 50 A This parameter defines the secondary 1 A, nominal current of the connected ground current transformer. If the ground current is 5 A done via the Residual connection, the primary value of the phase current transformer must be entered here. 5A Ground fault protection with directional 0°, feature depends also on the correct wiring of the ground current transformer. An 180° incorrect polarity/wiring can be corrected by means of the settings "0°" or "180°". The operator has the possibility of turning the current vector by "180°" (change of sign) without modification of the wiring. This means, that – in terms of figures - the determined current indicator was turned by "180°" by the device. 0° www.eaton.com [System Para /General Settings] [System Para /General Settings] [System Para /General Settings] [System Para /General Settings] 277 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Blocking The device provides a function for temporary blocking of the complete protection functionality or of single protections. Make absolutely sure that no illogical or even life-threatening blockings are allocated. Make sure not to carelessly deactivate protection functions that have to be available according to the protection concept. Permanent Blocking Switching “On” or “Off” the Complete Protection Functionality In the »Protection« module, the complete protection of the device can be switched “On” or “Off”. Set the Function parameter to »Active« or »Inactive« in the »Prot« module. Protection is activated only if in the »Prot« module the parameter Function is = »Active« (i.e.: with »Function« = »Inactive«, no protection function are operating). If »Function« = »Inactive«, then the device cannot protect any components. Switching Modules “On” or “Off” Each of the modules can be switched “On” or “Off” (permanently). This is achieved when the »Function« parameter is set to »Active« or »Inactive« in the respective module. Activating or Deactivating the Tripping Command of a Protection Permanently In each of the protections, the tripping command to the breaker can be permanently blocked. For this purpose, the »TripCmd Blo« parameter has to be set to »Active«. Temporary Blocking To Block the Complete Protection of the Device Temporarily by a Signal In the »Prot« module, the complete protection of the device can be blocked temporarily by a signal. On the condition that a module-external blocking is permitted (»ExBlo Fc=active«). In addition to this, a related blocking signal from the »Assignment list« must have been assigned. For the time the allocated blocking signal is active, the module is blocked. If the »Prot« module is blocked, the complete protection function does not work. As long as the blocking signal is active, the device cannot protect any components. To Block a Complete Protection Module Temporarily by an Active Assignment • 278 In order to establish a temporary blockage of a protection module, the parameter »ExBlo Fc« of the module has to be set to »Active«. This gives the permission: »This module can be blocked«. www.eaton.com EDR-5000 • IM02602007E Within the general protection parameters, a signal has to be additionally chosen from the »Assignment list«. The blocking only becomes active when the assigned signal is active. To Block the Tripping Command of a Protection Element Temporarily by an Active Assignment The tripping command of any of the protection modules can be blocked from an external signal. In this case, external does not only mean from outside the device, but also from outside the module. Not only real external signals are permitted to be used as blocking signals (for example: the state of a digital input), but the User can also choose any other signal from the »Assignment list«. • In order to establish a temporary blockage of a protection element, the parameter »ExBlo TripCmd Fc« of the module has to be set to »Active«. This gives the permission: »The tripping command of this element can be blocked«. • Within the general protection parameters, an additional signal has to be chosen and assigned to the »ExBlo« parameter from the »Assignment list«. If the selected signal is activated, the temporary blockage becomes effective. www.eaton.com 279 280 www.eaton.com TripCmd Fc 1..n, Assignment List Name.ExBlo TripCmd Active Inactive Name.ExBlo Active Inactive Name.Blo TripCmd Name = All Modules That Are Blockable Trip Blockings AND OR 3 Name.ExBlo TripCmd-I Name.ExBlo TripCmd Name.Blo TripCmd IM02602007E EDR-5000 To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module 1 www.eaton.com 1..n, Assignment List Name.ExBlo 2 1..n, Assignment List Name.ExBlo 1 Active Inactive Name.ExBlo Fc Active Inactive Name.Function (The General Protection module is not deactivated or blocked) Prot. Active Please Refer to Diagram: Prot Name =All Modules That Are Blockable Blockings OR AND AND 2 Name.ExBlo2-I Name.ExBlo1-I Name.ExBlo Name.Active EDR-5000 IM02602007E Activate, Deactivate Respectively to Block Temporary Protection Functions For the Sync-check module the signal Sync.Active will not be deactivated by an external blocking signal. 281 282 Blockings ** 1 www.eaton.com 1..n, Assignment List Name.Rvs Blo Active Inactive Name.Rvs Blo Fc 1..n, Assignment List Name.ExBlo 2 1..n, Assignment List Name.ExBlo 1 Active Inactive Name.ExBlo Fc Active Inactive Name.Function (The General Protection module is not deactivated or blocked) Please Refer to Diagram: Prot Prot. Active Name = I[1]...[n], IG[1]...[n] AND OR AND AND 4 Name.Rvs Blo-I Name.Rvs Blo Name.ExBlo2-I Name.ExBlo1-I Name.ExBlo Name.Active IM02602007E EDR-5000 Current protective functions cannot only be blocked permanently (»Function = Inactive«) or temporarily by any blocking signal from the »Assignment list«, but also by »Reverse Interlocking«. All other protection functions can be activated, deactivated, or blocked in the same manner. EDR-5000 IM02602007E Protection (Prot) Module Prot The »Protection« module serves as the outer frame for all other protection modules (i.e.: they are all enclosed by the »Protection« Module). In the case where the »Protection« module is blocked, the complete protective function of the device is disabled. Module Prot Blocked - Protection Inactive: If the master »Protection« module is allowed to be temporarily blocked and the allocated blocking signals are active, then all protection functions will be disabled. In such a case, the protective function is »Inactive«. Protection Active: If the master »Protection« module was activated and a blockade for this module was not activated respectively, the assigned blocking signals are inactive at that moment, then the »Protection« is »Active«. How to Block All Protective and Supervisory Functions In order to block all protective and supervisory functions, call up the menu [Protection/Para/Global Prot Para/Prot]: • Set the parameter »ExBlo Fc = active«; • Choose an assignment for »ExBlo1«; and • Optionally choose an assignment for »ExBlo2«. If the signal becomes true, then all protective and supervisory functions will be blocked as long as one of these signals are true. www.eaton.com 283 284 www.eaton.com OR AND AND **=Availability of third blocking input depends on device and module Selection List Prot.ExBlo 3** 1..n, Assignment List Prot.ExBlo 2 1..n, Assignment List Prot.ExBlo 1 Active Inactive Prot.ExBlo Fc Measured Values: OK At the moment, no parameter is being changed (except parameter set parameters). Prot - Active AND 1 Prot.ExBlo3-I Prot.ExBlo2-I Prot.ExBlo1-I Prot.ExBlo Prot.Active Prot.Available IM02602007E EDR-5000 EDR-5000 IM02602007E Each protection element generates its own pickup and trip signals, which are automatically passed onto the »Prot« module where the phase based and general (collective) pickup and trip signals are generated. The »Prot« module serves as a top level and a common place to group all pickups and trips from each individual protection element. For instance, »PROT.PICKUP PHASE A« is the phase A pickup signal OR-ed from all protection elements; »PROT.TRIP PHASE A« is the phase A trip signal OR-ed from all protection elements; »PROT.PICKUP« is the collective pickup signal OR-ed from all protection elements; Prot.Trip is the collective Trip signal OR-ed from all protection elements, and etc. The Tripping commands of the protection elements have to be fed to the »Bkr Manager« module for further trip request processing. The tripping commands are executed by the »Bkr Manager« module. Tripping commands have to be assigned to a breaker. The Breaker Manager will issue the trip command to the breaker. If a protection element is activated and respectively decides to trip, two pickup signals will be created. 1. The module or the protection element issues an pickup/alarm (e.g.: »50P[1].PICKUP or »50P[1].TRIP«). 2. The master »Prot« module collects/summarizes the signals and issues a pickup/alarm or a trip signal »PROT.PICKUP« »PROT.TRIP«. www.eaton.com 285 286 www.eaton.com 15 15 15 Name[n].Trip Name.Trip Name.Trip ... OR Name = Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Prot.Trip Prot.Trip IM02602007E EDR-5000 www.eaton.com Name.Pickup Name.Pickup Name.Pickup 14 14 14 ... OR Name = Each pickup of a module (except from supervision modules but including BF) will lead to a general pickup (collective pickup). Prot.Pickup Prot.Pickup EDR-5000 IM02602007E 287 288 www.eaton.com *=Depending on the type of device 23 19d 19c 19b 19a 22 18b 18a 21 17b 17a 20 16b 16a 59[n].TripCmd* 51R[1]...[n].Trip* 50R[1]...[n].Trip* 51X[1]...[n].Trip* 50X[1]...[n].Trip* V[n].Trip Phase C* 51P[1]...[n].Trip Phase C* 50P[1]...[n].Trip Phase C* V[n].Trip Phase B* 51P[1]...[n].Trip Phase B* 50P[1]...[n].Trip Phase B* V[n].Trip Phase A* 51P[1]...[n].Trip Phase A* 50P[1]...[n].Trip Phase A* OR OR OR OR Each phase selective trip of a trip authorized module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general trip. Prot.Trip Prot.Trip IX or IR Prot.Trip Phase C Prot.Trip Phase B Prot.Trip Phase A IM02602007E EDR-5000 www.eaton.com 31 27d 27c 27b 27a 30 26b 26a 29 25b 25a 28 24b 24a 59[n].Pickup* 51R[1]...[n].Pickup* 50R[1]...[n].Pickup* 51X[1]...[n].Pickup* 50X[1]...[n].Pickup* V[n].Pickup Phase C* 51P[1]...[n].Pickup IC* 50P[1]...[n].Pickup IC* V[n].Pickup Phase B* 51P[1]...[n].Pickup IB* 50P[1]...[n].Pickup IB* V[n].Pickup Phase A* 51P[1]...[n].Pickup IA* 50P[1]...[n].Pickup IA* OR OR OR OR Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective pickup). Prot.Pickup Prot.Pickup IX or IR Prot.Pickup Phase C Prot.Pickup Phase B Prot.Pickup Phase A EDR-5000 IM02602007E *=Depending on the type of device 289 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Direct Commands of the Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Res Fault a Mains No Resetting of fault number and number of grid faults. Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active /Reset] Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) the external blocking of the Inactive, global protection functionality of the device. Active Default Menu Path Inactive [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Prot] ExBlo1 ExBlo2 If external blocking of this module is activated (allowed), the global protection functionality of the device will be blocked if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Assignment List If external blocking of this module is activated (allowed), the global protection functionality of the device will be blocked if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- /Global Prot Para /Prot] -.- /Prot] Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Prot] Module Input State: External Blocking2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Prot] Protection Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Available Signal: Protection is available. Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Pickup Phase A Signal: General Pickup Phase A 290 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para Protection Module Input States ExBlo2-I [Protection Para www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Pickup Phase B Signal: General Pickup Phase B Pickup Phase C Signal: General Pickup Phase C Pickup IX or IR Signal: General Pickup - Ground Fault Pickup Signal: General Pickup Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C Trip IX or IR Signal: General Trip Ground Fault Trip Signal: General Trip Res Fault a Mains No Signal: Resetting of fault number and number of grid faults. I dir fwd Signal: Phase current failure forward direction I dir rev Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction I dir n poss Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage IR dir fwd Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) forward IR dir rev Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction IR dir n poss Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not possible IX dir fwd Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) forward IX dir rev Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) reverse direction IX dir n poss Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) direction detection not possible Protection Module Values Value Description Menu Path FaultNo Disturbance No. [Operation /Count and RevData /Prot] No of grid faults Number of grid faults: A grid fault, e.g. a [Operation short circuit, might cause several faults with trip and autoreclosing, each fault being /Count and RevData identified by an increased fault number. In this case, the grid fault number remains the /Prot] same. www.eaton.com 291 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Switchgear/Breaker - Manager Breaker WARNING: Misconfiguration of the Breaker could result in death or serious injury. Breaker Configuration For the configuration of the breaker, great attention has to be payed to the following steps: • • • • • • • • Wiring; Switching Authority; POS Indicators wiring; General Settings; Trip Manager; Interlockings; Ex OPEN/CLOSE (Option); and Synchronous Switching. It is recommended to use the status display in order to verify and analyze each of the steps. Wiring The User has to establish the wiring of the Position Indicators of the Breaker to the Digital Inputs of the protective device (52a or 52b or (both recommended)). The User has to wire a Relay Output for the Trip command. In case the protective device is used for control purposes, two additional relay outputs have to be wired for the control commands (issue the OPEN and CLOSE commands). That means the Relay Output for the Breaker Open and the Relay Output for the Breaker Close command. Switching Authority For the Switching Authority [Control\General Settings], the following general settings are possible: None: Local: Remote: Local and Remote: No switching authority (switching not allowed); Switching only via push buttons at the panel; Switching only via SCADA, digital inputs, or internal signals; and Switching via push buttons, SCADA, digital inputs, or internal signals. POS Indicators wiring In the menu [Control/Breaker/Pos Indicators wiring], the signals for the switchgear status indication (position and ready) are to be assigned. Position Indication with two contacts - 52a and 52b (recommended) To identify the current position of the switchgear, the switchgear contact outputs have to be used (called 52a/52b 292 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 at a breaker). The Position Indication can work on either one or both of these inputs. Nevertheless, it is recommended that both are used. The protective device monitors and evaluates continuously the Status of the Input Signals CinBkr52a-I and CinBkr52b-I. These signals are validated based on the supervision timers »t-Move CLOSE« and »t-Move OPEN« validation functions. As a result, the breaker position will be detected by the following signals: • • • • • Pos CLOSE; Pos OPEN; Pos Indeterm; Pos Disturb; and Pos State (0, 1, 2 or 3). CLOSE initiated (Supervision) When a CLOSE command is initiated, the »t-Move CLOSE« timer will be started. While the timer is running, the »POS INDETERM« State will become true. If the command is executed and the breaker has reached the end position before the timer has elapsed, »POS CLOSE« will become true. Otherwise, if the timer has elapsed »POS DISTURB« will become true. OPEN initiated (Supervision) When an OPEN command is initiated, the »t-Move OPEN« timer will be started. While the timer is running, the »POS INDETERM« State will become true. If the command is executed and the breaker has reached the end position before the timer has elapsed, »POS OPEN« will become true. Otherwise, if the timer has elapsed »POS DISTURB« will become true. The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on 52a and 52b. Validated Breaker Positions States of the Digital Inputs CinBkr52a-I CinBkr52b-I Pos CLOSE Pos OPEN 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 Pos Indeterm Pos Disturb Breaker State 1 0 (While a Moving timer is running) (While a Moving timer is running) 0 Intermediate 1 0 (While a Moving timer is running) (While a Moving timer is running) 0 Intermediate 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 OFF 1 0 1 0 0 0 2 ON 0 0 0 0 0 1 (Moving timer elapsed) (Moving timer elapsed) 3 Disturbed 1 1 0 0 0 1 (Moving timer elapsed) (Moving timer elapsed) 3 Disturbed If for any reason only one breaker contact (52a or 52b) is wired, the Single Contact Indication can be used. Single Contact Indication The moving time supervision works only in one direction. If the 52a signal is connected to the device, only the “CLOSE command” can be supervised and if the 52b signal is connected to the device, only the “OPEN command” can be supervised. www.eaton.com 293 IM02602007E EDR-5000 If the single contact indication is used, the »SI SINGLECONTACTIND« will become true. NOTICE: In case of single contact indication, the protective device can monitor either the 52a or the 52b contact only. In case of the 52a, the device will monitor / supervise the CLOSE command. In case of the 52b, the device will monitor / supervise the OPEN command. Single Contact Indication – 52a only If only the 52a signal is used for the Status Indication of an “CLOSE command”, the switch command will also start the moving time, the position indication indicates an INTERMEDIATE position during this time interval. When the switchgear reaches the end position indicated by the Pos CLOSE signal, the moving time will be terminated. If the moving time elapsed before the switchgear has reached the end position, the switching operation was not successful and the Position Indication will change to Pos DISTURB. An OPEN command also starts the moving time. Because the device does not receive an open signal by the breaker, it assumes that the breaker is in open position after the moving time has elapsed. The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on 52a only. Validated Breaker Positions States of the Digital Input CinBkr52a-I CinBkr52b-I Pos CLOSE Pos OPEN Pos Indeterm 0 Not wired 0 0 1 (While t-Move Pos Disturb Breaker State 0 0 Intermediate CLOSE is running) (While t-Move CLOSE is running) 0 Not wired 0 1 0 0 1 OFF 1 Not wired 1 0 0 0 2 ON 1 Not wired 0 0 0 1 (After t-Move CLOSE is elapsed) (After t-Move CLOSE is elapsed) 3 Disturbed Single Contact Indication – 52b only If only the 52b signal is used for the monitoring of the “OPEN command”, the switch command will start the moving timer. The Position Indication will indicate an INTERMEDIATE position. If the moving time elapsed before the switchgear has reached the OPEN position, the switching operation was not successful and the Position Indication will change to Pos DISTURB. A CLOSE command also starts the moving time. Because the device does not receive a close signal by the breaker, it assumes that the breaker is in close position after the moving time has elapsed. The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on 52b only. 294 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Validated Breaker Positions States of the Digital Input CinBkr52a-I CinBkr52b-I Pos CLOSE Pos OPEN Not wired 0 0 0 Pos Indeterm Pos Disturb Breaker State 0 Intermediate 1 0 (While t-Move OPEN is running) (While t-Move OPEN is running) Not wired 0 0 1 0 0 1 OFF Not wired 1 1 0 0 0 2 ON Not wired 1 0 0 0 1 (After t-Move OPEN is elapsed) (After t-Move OPEN is elapsed) 3 Disturbed General Settings In the menu [Control/Breaker/General Settings], the moving times for opening and closing of the breaker can be set. Trip Manager The command for tripping will be triggered by each of the assigned protection modules. The tripping commands of all protection modules are combined by an “OR” logic. In addition to that, the User can set the minimum hold time of the tripping command within this module and define whether the tripping command is latched or not. www.eaton.com 295 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Breaker OPEN Command Signal Breaker OPEN Breaker CLOSE Command Signal Breaker Ready Protection Trip Command Trigger [x] B re a k e r Signal Breaker CLOSE Position Indication: OPEN, CLOSE, Indeterminated, Disturbed Trigger [x] Trigger [x] HMI Trip Command XX[x] Trip Command 27[x] Trip Command 59[x] Trip Command XX[x] 296 I P r o te c tio n M o d u le Trip Command 51P[x] SCADA Autoreclosure CLOSE V P r o te c tio n M o d u le Trip Command 50P[x] www.eaton.com Name.TripCmd Name.TripCmd 15 15 Name.TripCmd 15 www.eaton.com Inactive Active Bkr.Latched Bkr.Res TripCmdCr Acknowledge-Comm Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List Acknowledge -HMI Name.TripCmd 15 . . . . Name.TripCmd 15 OR AND OR R1 S Q Q Name =Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip. Bkr.Trip Bkr OR t 1 Bkr.t-TripCmd OR R + Counter 11 TripCmd Cr Bkr.Trip Bkr EDR-5000 IM02602007E 297 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Interlockings www.eaton.com Bkr OPEN Cmd Bkr CLOSE Cmd Switch command request via Digital Input: (Manual Switch Command) Bkr OPEN Cmd Bkr CLOSE Cmd Communication issues the following commands: (Manual Switch Command) Bkr OPEN Cmd Bkr CLOSE Cmd HMI issues the following commands: (Manual Switch Command) Auto reclosure issues the following commands: (Automatic Switch Command) Bkr CLOSE Cmd Interlockings Release by synchronizing unit 15 15 15 Protection issues Trip Command (e.g. 50P) Trip command assigned and configured within the Trip manager 298 Breaker.OPEN Cmd 42 AND AND Breaker.CLOSE Cmd Breaker.Prot CLOSE 41 Breaker.TripCmd There are three interlocking inputs for each switching direction (OPEN/CLOSE) available. Switching into the corresponding switching direction can be inhibited via these inputs. Please note: The Protection Trip commands and the reclosure command of the auto reclosure module will be issued without interlocking. In cases when the breaker must not be opened, the protection trip command has to be inhibited by a separate blocking signal. IM02602007E EDR-5000 Ex OPEN/CLOSE If the breaker should be opened or closed by an external signal, the User can assign one signal that will trigger the CLOSE and one signal that will trigger the OPEN command (e.g.: digital inputs or output signals of the Logic). An applied CLOSE command will be overwritten by an upcoming OPEN command. An applied OPEN command will not be overwritten by an upcoming CLOSE command, that means, the OPEN command is dominantly. Synchronous Switching If a signal is assigned to the »Synchronism« input, the closing of the switchgear will be performed only when this signal gets active during the maximum allowed waiting time »t-MaxSyncSuperv«. If no signal is assigned to the »Synchronism« input, the synchronism release is permanent. Breaker OPEN Command Signal Breaker OPEN Breaker CLOSE Command Signal Breaker Ready Trigger [x] Breaker Signal Breaker CLOSE Trigger [x] Trip Command CLOSE Request Position Indication: OPEN, CLOSE, Indeterminated, Disturbed Synchronism HMI SCADA Ready to CLOSE SyncCheck Autoreclosure CLOSE Breaker CLOSE Initiative www.eaton.com 299 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Direct Commands of the Switchgear/Breaker Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Res Bwear Slow Breaker Resetting the slow breaker alarm Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active Ack TripCmd Acknowledge Trip Command Inactive, /Reset] Inactive Active [Operation /Reset] Global Protection Parameters of the Switchgear/Breaker Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path CinBkr-52a The breaker is in CLOSE-position if the state of the assigned signal is true (52a). -.-, DI-8P X1.DI 5 [Control DI-8P X1.DI 1, /Breaker DI-8P X1.DI 2, /Pos Indicators wiring] DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 CinBkr-52b The breaker is in OPEN-position if the state -.-, of the assigned signal is true (52b). DI-8P X1.DI 1, DI-8P X1.DI 6 [Control /Breaker DI-8P X1.DI 2, /Pos Indicators wiring] DI-8P X1.DI 3, DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 Ready 300 Breaker is ready for operation if the state of 1..n, DI-LogicList the assigned signal is true. This digital input can be used by some protective elements (if they are available within the device) like Auto Reclosure (AR), e.g.: as a trigger signal. www.eaton.com -.- [Control /Breaker /Pos Indicators wiring] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Interl CLOSE1 Interlocking of the CLOSE command 1..n, Assignment List WiredInputs.Bkr. [Control Trouble-I /Breaker /Interlockings] Interl CLOSE2 Interlocking of the CLOSE command 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] Interl CLOSE3 Interlocking of the CLOSE command 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] Interl OPEN1 Interlocking of the OPEN command 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] Interl OPEN2 Interlocking of the OPEN command 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] Interl OPEN3 Interlocking of the OPEN command 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] SC CLOSE Switching CLOSE Command, e.g.: the state of the Logic or the state of the digital input 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Control /Breaker /Ex OPEN/CLOSE Cmd] SC OPEN Switching OPEN Command, e.g.: the state 1..n, DI-LogicList of the Logic or the state of the digital input -.- [Control /Breaker /Ex OPEN/CLOSE Cmd] t-TripCmd Minimum hold time of the OPEN-command 0 – 300.00 s (Breaker, load break switch) 0.2 s [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be Latched when it picks up. Inactive, Active Inactive [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] www.eaton.com 301 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Ack TripCmd Ack TripCmd 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger1 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 50P[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger2 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 50P[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger3 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 50P[3].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger4 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 51P[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger5 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 51P[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger6 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 51P[3].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger7 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 50X[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger8 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 50X[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger9 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 51X[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] 302 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Trigger10 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 51X[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger11 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 50R[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger12 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 50R[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger13 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 51R[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger14 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 51R[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger15 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 27M[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger16 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 27M[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger17 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 59M[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger18 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 59M[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger19 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 27A[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] www.eaton.com 303 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Trigger20 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 27A[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger21 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 59A[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger22 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 59A[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger23 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 59N[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger24 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 59N[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger25 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 46[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger26 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 46[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger27 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 47[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger28 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 47[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger29 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 81[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] 304 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Trigger30 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 81[3].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger31 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 32[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger32 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 32[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger33 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 32V[1].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger34 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 32V[2].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger35 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds PF-55D[1].TripC [Control md /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger36 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds PF-55D[2].TripC [Control md /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger37 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds PF-55A[1].TripC [Control md /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger38 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds PF-55A[2].TripC [Control md /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger39 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds 81[5].TripCmd [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] www.eaton.com 305 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Trigger40 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger41 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger42 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger43 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger44 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger45 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger46 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger47 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger48 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Trigger49 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] 306 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Trigger50 Open Command to the breaker if the state of the assigned signal becomes true. 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control /Breaker /Trip Manager] Synchronism Synchronism 1..n, In-SyncList -.- [Control /Breaker /Synchronous Switching] tSynchron-Run timer: Max. time allowed for 0 – 3000.00 s MaxSyncSuper synchronizing process after a close initiate. v Only used for GENERATOR2SYSTEM working mode. 0.2 s [Control /Breaker /Synchronous Switching] t-Move CLOSE Time to move to the CLOSE Position. 0.01 – 100.00 s 0.1 s [Control /Breaker /General Settings] t-Move OPEN Time to move to the OPEN Position. 0.01 – 100.00 s 0.1 s [Control /Breaker /General Settings] Synchronism release signals Name Description -.- No assignment Breaker.CLOSE request Signal: Synchronous CLOSE request DI-8P X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input Logic.LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE2.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate www.eaton.com 307 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE2.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE2.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE2.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE3.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE3.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE3.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE3.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE4.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE4.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE4.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE4.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE5.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE5.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE5.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE5.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE6.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE6.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE6.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE6.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE7.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE7.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE7.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE7.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE8.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE8.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE8.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE8.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE9.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE9.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE9.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE9.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE10.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE10.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE10.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE10.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE11.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE11.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE11.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE11.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) 308 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE12.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE12.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE12.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE12.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE13.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE13.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE13.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE13.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE14.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE14.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE14.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE14.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE15.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE15.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE15.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE15.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE16.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE16.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE16.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE16.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE17.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE17.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE17.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE17.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE18.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE18.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE18.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE18.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE19.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE19.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE19.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE19.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE20.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE20.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE20.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE20.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE21.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE21.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE21.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) www.eaton.com 309 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE21.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE22.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE22.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE22.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE22.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE23.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE23.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE23.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE23.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE24.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE24.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE24.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE24.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE25.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE25.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE25.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE25.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE26.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE26.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE26.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE26.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE27.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE27.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE27.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE27.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE28.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE28.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE28.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE28.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE29.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE29.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE29.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE29.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE30.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE30.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE30.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE30.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE31.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE31.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output 310 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE31.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE31.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE32.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE32.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE32.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE32.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE33.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE33.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE33.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE33.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE34.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE34.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE34.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE34.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE35.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE35.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE35.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE35.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE36.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE36.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE36.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE36.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE37.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE37.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE37.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE37.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE38.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE38.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE38.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE38.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE39.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE39.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE39.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE39.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE40.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE40.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE40.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE40.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE41.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate www.eaton.com 311 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE41.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE41.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE41.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE42.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE42.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE42.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE42.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE43.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE43.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE43.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE43.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE44.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE44.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE44.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE44.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE45.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE45.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE45.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE45.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE46.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE46.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE46.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE46.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE47.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE47.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE47.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE47.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE48.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE48.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE48.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE48.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE49.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE49.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE49.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE49.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE50.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE50.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE50.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE50.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) 312 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE51.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE51.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE51.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE51.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE52.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE52.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE52.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE52.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE53.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE53.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE53.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE53.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE54.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE54.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE54.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE54.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE55.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE55.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE55.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE55.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE56.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE56.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE56.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE56.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE57.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE57.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE57.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE57.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE58.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE58.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE58.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE58.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE59.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE59.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE59.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE59.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE60.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE60.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE60.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) www.eaton.com 313 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE60.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE61.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE61.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE61.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE61.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE62.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE62.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE62.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE62.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE63.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE63.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE63.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE63.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE64.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE64.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE64.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE64.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE65.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE65.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE65.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE65.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE66.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE66.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE66.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE66.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE67.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE67.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE67.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE67.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE68.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE68.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE68.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE68.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE69.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE69.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE69.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE69.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE70.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE70.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output 314 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE70.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE70.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE71.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE71.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE71.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE71.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE72.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE72.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE72.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE72.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE73.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE73.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE73.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE73.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE74.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE74.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE74.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE74.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE75.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE75.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE75.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE75.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE76.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE76.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE76.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE76.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE77.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE77.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE77.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE77.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE78.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE78.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE78.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE78.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE79.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE79.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE79.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE79.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE80.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate www.eaton.com 315 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE80.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE80.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE80.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Switchgear/Breaker Input States Name Description Assignment Via CinBkr-52a-I Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52a) [Control /Breaker /Pos Indicators wiring] CinBkr-52b-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the [Control Bkr.. (52b) /Breaker /Pos Indicators wiring] Ready-I Module Input State: Breaker Ready [Control /Breaker /Pos Indicators wiring] Sys-in-Sync-I State of the module input: This signals has [Control to become true within the synchronization time. If not, switching is unsuccessful. /Breaker /Synchronous Switching] Ack TripCmd-I State of the module input: Acknowledgment [Control Signal (only for automatic acknowledgment). Module input signal /Breaker /Trip Manager] Interl CLOSE1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] Interl CLOSE2-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] Interl CLOSE3-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] 316 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via Interl OPEN1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] Interl OPEN2-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] Interl OPEN3-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command [Control /Breaker /Interlockings] SC CLOSE-I State of the module input: Switching CLOSE Command, e.g.: the state of the Logic or the state of the digital input. [Control /Breaker /Ex OPEN/CLOSE Cmd] SC OPEN-I State of the module input: Switching OPEN [Control Command, e.g.: the state of the Logic or the state of the digital input. /Breaker /Ex OPEN/CLOSE Cmd] Switchgear/Breaker Signals (Outputs States) Name Description SI SingleContactInd Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary contact (pole) only. Thus indeterminate and disturbed Positions cannot be detected. Pos not CLOSE Signal: Pos not CLOSE Pos CLOSE Signal: Breaker is in CLOSE-Position Pos OPEN Signal: Breaker is in OPEN-Position Pos Indeterm Signal: Breaker is in Indeterminate Position Pos Disturb Signal: Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The feedback signals (Position Indicators) contradict themselves. After expiring of a supervision timer this signal becomes true. State Signal: Breaker Position (0 = Indeterminate, 1 = OPEN, 2 = CLOSE, 3 = Disturbed) Ready Signal: Breaker is ready for operation. CES succesf Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed successfully. CES Disturbed Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command unsuccessful. Switchgear in disturbed position. CES SAuthority Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed. No switching authority. www.eaton.com 317 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description CES SwitchgDir Command Execution Supervision: Switching Direction Control. A switchgear that is already OPEN should be switched OPEN again (doubly). CES DoubleOperating Command Execution Supervision: A second switch command is in conflict with a pending one. CES CLOSE durg OPEN Cmd Command Execution Supervision: CLOSE Command during a pending OPEN Command. CES SG not ready Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready. CES Field Interl Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed because of field interlocking. CES SyncTimeout Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed No Synchronization signal while t-sync was running. Prot CLOSE Signal: CLOSE command issued by the Prot module. TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Ack TripCmd Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command. Bwear Slow Breaker Signal: Slow Breaker Alarm. Res Bwear Slow Breaker Signal: Resetting the slow breaker alarm. CLOSE Cmd Signal: CLOSE command issued to the switchgear. Depending on the setting the signal may include the CLOSE command of the Prot module. OPEN Cmd Signal: OPEN command issued to the switchgear. Depending on the setting the signal may include the OPEN command of the Prot module. CLOSE Cmd manual Signal: CLOSE Cmd manual OPEN Cmd manual Signal: OPEN Cmd manual CLOSE request Signal: Synchronous CLOSE request Switching the Breaker at the Panel Control Manually switching a switchgear at the device panel is possible at the following switching authorities: Local; and Local and Remote. • • Assumed the device displays the main screen: 1. Press the »Menu« softkey. 2. Select the »Control« menu by using the »up« or »down« softkeys and press the »right« arrow softkey button. 3. Select the »Control« menu by using the »up« or »down« softkeys and press the »right« arrow softkey button. 4. A symbol for the switchgear and its status (ON, OFF, intermediate or disturbed) is displayed. 5. 318 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 6. Dependent on the status (ON/OFF), the switchgear can be switched ON or OFF by the corresponding softkey. The current position of the switchgear will be visualized by different symbols: Breaker State Symbol 0 (Intermediate) 1 (Off) 2 (ON) 3 (Disturbed) Direct Commands of the Switching Authority Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Switching Authority Switching Authority None, Local [Control Local, /General Settings] Remote, Local and Remote Signals of the Switching Authority Name Description Local Switching Authority: Local Remote Switching Authority: Remote Breaker Wear Features The protective relay offers the following Breaker Wear features. • • • Monitoring of the accumulated interrupted currents. Slow breaker alarm. Calculation of the Breaker Open Capacity »Bkr OPEN capacity«. 100% means that breaker maintenance is mandatory now. www.eaton.com 319 IM02602007E • • EDR-5000 Breaker Wear Curve. Monitoring of total CLOSE/OPEN cycles and alarm for max allowed CLOSE/OPEN cycles per hour. Slow Breaker Alarm An increase of the closing or opening time of the breaker is an indication for the maintenance need of this switchgear. If the measured time exceeds the time »t-Move OPEN« or »t-Move CLOSE«, the signal »BWEAR SLOW BREAKER« will be activated. This signal will be active until it is reset manually. Breaker Wear Curve In order to keep the breaker in good working condition, the breaker needs to be monitored. The breaker health (operation life) depends above all on: • • • The number of CLOSE/OPEN cycles; The amplitudes of the interrupting currents; and The frequency that the breaker operates (operations per hour). The User has to maintain the breaker accordingly to the maintenance schedule that is to be provided by the manufacturer (breaker operation statistics). By means of up to ten points that the User can replicate the breaker wear curve within menu [Control/Breaker/BWear]. Each point has two settings: the interrupt current in kilo amperes and the allowed operation counts. No matter how many points are used, the operation counts the last point as zero. The protective relay will interpolate the allowed operations based on the breaker wear curve. When the interrupted current is greater than the interrupt current at the last point, the protective relay will assume zero operation counts. 320 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Breaker Maintenance Curve for a typical 25kV Breaker 4 1× 10 0.0 1.2 10000 10000 3 Number of Operations 1× 10 8.0 150 100 20.0 12 10 20.0 1 0.1 1 0 10 100 Interrupted Current in kA per operation Global Protection Parameters of the Breaker Wear Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Operations Alarm Service Alarm, too many Operations 1 - 100000 9999 [Control /Breaker /BWear] Isum Intr Alarm Alarm, the Sum (Limit) of interrupting currents has been exceeded. 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 100.00 kA [Control /Breaker /BWear] www.eaton.com 321 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Isum Intr per hour Alarm Alarm, the per hour Sum (Limit) of interrupting currents has been exceeded. 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 100.00 kA [Control /Breaker /BWear] Bwear Curve Fc WearLevel Alarm The Breaker Wear Curve defines the Inactive, maximum allowed CLOSE/OPEN cycles depending on the brake currents. If the Active breaker maintenance curve is exceeded, an alarm will be issued. The breaker maintenance curve is to be taken from the technical data sheet of the breaker manufacturer. By means of the available points this curve is to be replicated. Inactive Breaker Wear curve Alarm Level in % 80.00% 0.00 - 100.00% [Control /Breaker /BWear] Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] WearLevel Lockout Breaker Wear Curve Lockout Level in % 0.00 - 100.00% 95.00% Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Current1 Interrupted Current Level #1 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 0.00 kA Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Count1 Open Counts Allowed #1 0 - 100000 10000 Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Current2 Interrupted Current Level #2 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 1.20 kA Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Count2 Open Counts Allowed #2 0 - 100000 10000 Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Current3 Interrupted Current Level #3 0.00 – 2000.00 kA Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active 8.00 kA [Control /Breaker /BWear] 322 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Count3 Open Counts Allowed #3 0 - 100000 150 [Control Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active /Breaker /BWear] Current4 Interrupted Current Level #4 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 20.00 kA Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Count4 Open Counts Allowed #4 0 - 100000 12 Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Current5 Interrupted Current Level #5 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 20.00 kA Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Count5 Open Counts Allowed #5 0 - 100000 0 Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Current6 Interrupted Current Level #6 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 20.00 kA Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Count6 Open Counts Allowed #6 0 - 100000 0 Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Current7 Interrupted Current Level #7 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 20.00 kA Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Count7 Open Counts Allowed #7 0 - 100000 0 Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active [Control /Breaker /BWear] Current8 Interrupted Current Level #8 0.00 – 2000.00 kA Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active 20.00 kA [Control /Breaker /BWear] www.eaton.com 323 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Count8 Open Counts Allowed #8 0 - 100000 0 [Control Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active /Breaker /BWear] Current9 Interrupted Current Level #9 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 20.00 kA [Control Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active /Breaker /BWear] Count9 Open Counts Allowed #9 0 - 100000 0 [Control Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active /Breaker /BWear] Current10 Interrupted Current Level #10 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 20.00 kA [Control Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active /Breaker /BWear] Count10 Open Counts Allowed #10 0 - 100000 0 [Control Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active /Breaker /BWear] Breaker Wear Signals (Output States) Name Description Operations Alarm Signal: Service Alarm, too many Operations Isum Intr trip: IA Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded: IA Isum Intr trip: IB Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded: IB Isum Intr trip: IC Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded: IC Isum Intr trip Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded in at least one phase. Res TripCmdCr Signal: Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip commands Res Isum trip Signal: Reset summation of the tripping currents WearLevel Alarm Signal: Breaker Wear curve Alarm Level in % WearLevel Lockout Signal: Breaker Wear Curve Lockout Level in % Res Bwear Curve Signal: Res Bwear Curve Isum Intr per hour Alarm Signal: Isum Intr per hour Alarm Res Isum Intr per hour Alarm Signal: Res Isum Intr per hour Alarm 324 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Breaker Wear Counter Values Value Description Menu Path TripCmd Cr Counter: Total number of trips of the [Operation switchgear (breaker, load break switch … ). Resettable with Total or All. /Count and RevData /Breaker] Breaker Wear Values Value Description Default Size Menu Path Isum trip IA Summation of the tripping currents phase 0.00 A 0.00 – 1000.00 A [Operation /Count and RevData /Breaker] Isum trip IB Summation of the tripping currents phase 0.00 A 0.00 – 1000.00 A [Operation /Count and RevData /Breaker] Isum trip IC Summation of the tripping currents phase 0.00 A 0.00 – 1000.00 A [Operation /Count and RevData /Breaker] Isum Intr per hour Sum per hour of interrupting currents. 0.00 kA 0.00 – 1000.00 kA [Operation /Count and RevData /Breaker] Bkr OPEN capacity Bkr. OPEN capacity. 100% means, that the breaker is to be maintenanced. 0.0% 0.0 - 100.0% [Operation /Count and RevData /Breaker] Direct Commands of the Breaker Wear Module Parameter Description Res TripCmdCr Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip commands Setting Range Default Menu Path Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active Res Isum trip Reset summation of the tripping currents Inactive, /Reset] Inactive Active Res Isum Intr per hour Sum per hour of interrupting currents. Inactive, Active www.eaton.com [Operation /Reset] Inactive [Operation /Reset] 325 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Setting Range Res Bkr OPEN Resetting of the Bkr. OPEN capacity. 100% Inactive, capacity means, that the breaker is to be maintenanced. Active 326 www.eaton.com Default Menu Path Inactive [Operation /Reset] EDR-5000 IM02602007E Protective Elements Directional Feature – Phase Current All elements can be selected as »Non-directional/Forward/Reverse« operated. This has to be done in the »Device Planning« menu. For the direction detection it is mandatory, that the required voltages exceed 0.35 V and the required currents exceed 10 mA. For the case, that the voltage drops below 0.35 V, the last angle between the operating and polarizing quantity will be used for the directional detection. Overcurrent protection elements, time inverse or instantaneous or time delay, etc., can trip in a specified fault current direction. When the trip direction is set to »Non-directional«, the direction detection takes no effect. When it is set to »Forward«, a trip is only permitted in the forward direction where fault current lies within ± 90° around the maximum torque angle »Phase MTA«. When it is set to »Reverse«, a trip is only permitted in reverse direction where fault current lies within ± 90° around the opposite of the maximum torque angle. In the case of a 3-phase nearly zero voltage fault, the memorized voltage, or prefault voltages, is used to establish the correct fault direction. www.eaton.com 327 Prot - Phase failure Direction Detection 328 www.eaton.com Prot.Pickup Prot.Phase Sequence IC IB IA VC VB VA VC VCA Voltage memory VA VAB φ VB VBC Forward Phase MTA VBC Reverse I1 Prot.I Phase MTA AND AND AND (Not possible) Prot.I dir n poss (Reverse) Prot.I dir rev (Forward) Prot.I dir fwd IM02602007E EDR-5000 www.eaton.com (Not possible) Prot.I dir n poss (Reverse) Prot.I dir rev (Forward) Prot.I dir fwd Name = I[1]...[n] Active Inactive Name.Nondir Trip at V=0 Reverse Forward Non-directional Name.Mode Device Planning Direction Decision Phase overcurrent AND AND AND OR Name. Fault in Projected Direction 9 EDR-5000 IM02602007E Phase Directional Supervision Logic 329 IM02602007E EDR-5000 50P/67P- DEFT Overcurrent Protection Available Elements 50P[1] ,50P[2] ,50P[3] If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the current protection functions must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings (applies only to devices which are equipped with Inrush protection).. All overcurrent protective elements are identically structured. All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be displayed as ANSI 50 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 50 element wont change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional” to “directional”. For each element the following characteristic is available: • DEFT (definite time). Explanation t = Tripping delay I = Fault current Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip. This element offers a criterion setting. The criterion setting tells if the threshold is based on the fundamental (Phasor) or RMS. For Tripping curves, please refer to the “Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)” section. 330 www.eaton.com www.eaton.com IC IB IA 3 7 6 5 9 4 Name.Pickup (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings φ RMS Fund. Name.Criterion IH2.Blo Phase C Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* IH2.Blo Phase B Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* IH2.Blo Phase A Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* Active Inactive Name.IH2 Blo Name.* I[1]...[n] Fault in Projected Direction AND AND AND Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Phase overcurrent (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings** Name = 50P[1]...[n] 50P/67P[1]...[n] OR AND AND AND AND OR Based on above parameters, tripping times and reset modes will be calculated by the device. 0 t φ DEFT Name.t Name.Pickup AND AND AND AND 14 26a 25a 15 Name.TripCmd Name.Trip 18a Name.Trip Phase C 17a Name.Trip Phase B 16a Name.Trip Phase A Name.Pickup Name.Pickup IC Name.Pickup IB 24a Name.IH2 Blo* Name.Pickup IA EDR-5000 IM02602007E *=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection 331 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the 50P/67P Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode 50P[1]: Non-directional, Nondirectional [Device Planning] Forward, Reverse 50P[2]: Non-directional, Forward, Reverse 50P[3]: Do not use, Non-directional, Forward, Reverse Global Protection Parameters of the 50P/67P Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] Rvs Blo Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] 332 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path AdaptSet 1 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] AdaptSet 2 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] AdaptSet 3 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] AdaptSet 4 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the 50P/67P Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, 50P[1]: Active [Protection Para Active 50P[2]: Active /<n> 50P[3]: Inactive /I-Prot /50P[1]] ExBlo Fc Rvs Blo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, reverse blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/element are blocked that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active". Inactive www.eaton.com [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50P[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50P[1]] 333 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /I-Prot /50P[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Criterion True RMS Measuring method: fundamental or Reset Fundamental, [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50P[1]] [Protection Para True RMS, /<n> I2 /I-Prot /50P[1]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 40.00 In element starts to time out to trip. Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT Or Characteristic = INV Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint = Active Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint = Inactive t Tripping delay 50P[1]: 2 In [Protection Para 50P[2]: 2.5 In /<n> 50P[3]: 3.0 In /I-Prot /50P[1]] 0.00 – 300.00 s Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT 50P[1]: 0 s [Protection Para 50P[2]: 0.25 s /<n> 50P[3]: 0.25 s /I-Prot /50P[1]] 50P/67P Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] 334 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50P[1]] www.eaton.com 335 IM02602007E EDR-5000 50P/67P Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC Pickup Signal: Pickup Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, directional [ANSI 50P/67P] Object to be tested: • For each directional overcurrent element is to be measured: the total tripping time (recommendation) or alternatively tripping delays and the drop-out ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase. Especially in Holmgreen connections, wiring errors can happen easily and these are then detected safely. By measuring the total tripping time, it can be ensured that the secondary wiring is OK (from the terminal on, up to the trip coil of the Breaker). Eaton recommends measuring the total tripping time instead of the tripping delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the User. The total tripping time is measured at the position signaling contact of the breaker (not at the relay output contacts!). Total tripping time = tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the protection elements) + breaker operating time (about 50 ms) Please take the breaker operating times from the technical data specified in the relevant documentation provided by the breaker manufacturer. 336 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Necessary means • • • Synchronizable current and voltage sources Optional: ampere meters Timer Procedure Synchronize the 3-phase current and voltage sources with each other. Then simulate the tripping directions to be tested by the angle between current and voltage. Testing the threshold values (3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase) Each time feed a current which is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Then check the threshold values. Testing the total tripping delay (recommendation) Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the Brk. (Brk. tripping). Testing the trip delay (measured at the relay output) Measure the tripping times at the relay output. Testing the drop-out ratio Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the dropout ratio. Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and drop-out ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data. 51P/67P - INV Overcurrent-Protection Available Elements 51P[1] If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the current protection functions must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings (applies only to devices which are equipped with Inrush protection). All overcurrent protective elements are identically structured. All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be displayed as ANSI 51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 51 element wont change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional” to “directional”. www.eaton.com 337 IM02602007E EDR-5000 For each element, the following characteristics are available: • • • • • • • • • • • NINV (IEC/XInv); VINV (IEC/XInv); LINV (IEC/XInv); EINV (IEC/XInv); MINV (ANSI/XInv); VINV (ANSI/XInv); EINV (ANSI/XInv); Thermal Flat; Therm Flat IT; Therm Flat I2T; and Therm Flat I4T. For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Time Current Curves (PHASE)” section. 338 www.eaton.com www.eaton.com IC IB IA 3 7 6 5 9 4 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Imax Name.Pickup Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings φ RMS Fund. Name.Criterion IH2.Blo Phase C Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* IH2.Blo Phase B Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* IH2.Blo Phase A Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* Active Inactive Name.IH2 Blo Name.* I[1]...[n] Fault in Projected Direction AND AND AND Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Phase overcurrent (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings** Name = 51P/67P[1]...[n] 51P/67P[1]...[n] OR AND AND AND AND OR Imax Based on above parameters, tripping times and reset modes will be calculated by the device. INV φ Name.Reset Mode Name.t-reset Name.t-multiplier Name.Curve Shape AND AND AND AND 14 26b 25b 15 Name.TripCmd Name.Trip 18b Name.Trip Phase C 17b Name.Trip Phase B 16b Name.Trip Phase A Name.Pickup Name.Pickup IC Name.Pickup IB 24b Name.IH2 Blo* Name.Pickup IA EDR-5000 IM02602007E *=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection 339 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the 51P/67P Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Non-directional, Nondirectional [Device Planning] Forward, Reverse Global Protection Parameters of the 51P/67P Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] Rvs Blo Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] AdaptSet 1 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] 340 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path AdaptSet 2 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] AdaptSet 3 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] AdaptSet 4 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the 51P/67P Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Active [Protection Para Active /<n> /I-Prot /51P[1]] ExBlo Fc Rvs Blo Fc Blo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, reverse blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/element are blocked that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active". Inactive Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive Inactive, Active [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51P[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51P[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51P[1]] www.eaton.com 341 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Default Menu Path ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive [Protection Para Criterion True RMS Measuring method: fundamental or Reset Setting Range Fundamental, /<n> /I-Prot /51P[1]] [Protection Para True RMS, /<n> I2 /I-Prot /51P[1]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 40.00 In element starts to time out to trip. 1.00 In [Protection Para /<n> Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint = Active Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint = Inactive /I-Prot /51P[1]] Curve Shape Characteristic IEC NINV, ANSI MINV [Protection Para IEC VINV, /<n> IEC EINV, /I-Prot IEC LINV, /51P[1]] ANSI MINV, ANSI VINV, ANSI EINV, Therm Flat, IT, I2T, I4T t-multiplier Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00 The setting range depends on the selected tripping curve. 1 [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51P[1]] 342 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Reset Mode Reset Mode Instantaneous, Calculated [Protection Para t-delay, /<n> Calculated /I-Prot /51P[1]] t-reset Reset time for intermittent phase failures (INV characteristics only) 0.00 – 60.00 s 0s [Protection Para /<n> Available if:Reset Mode = t-delay /I-Prot /51P[1]] 51P/67P Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] www.eaton.com 343 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter3 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter4 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[1]] 51P/67P Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC Pickup Signal: Pickup Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 344 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, Non-directional [ANSI 51P/67P] Object to be tested: • For each directional overcurrent element is to be measured: the total tripping time (recommendation) or alternatively tripping delays and the drop-out ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase. Especially in Holmgreen connections, wiring errors can happen easily and these are then detected safely. By measuring the total tripping time, it can be ensured that the secondary wiring is OK (from the terminal on, up to the trip coil of the Breaker). Eaton recommends measuring the total tripping time instead of the tripping delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the User. The total tripping time is measured at the position signaling contact of the breaker (not at the relay output contacts!). Total tripping time = tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the protection elements) + breaker operating time (about 50 ms) Please take the breaker operating times from the technical data specified in the relevant documentation provided by the breaker manufacturer. Necessary means • • • Synchronizable current and voltage sources; Optional: ampere meters; and Timer. Procedure Synchronize the 3-phase current and voltage sources with each other. Then simulate the tripping directions to be tested by the angle between current and voltage. Testing the threshold values (3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase) Each time feed a current which is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Then check the threshold values. Testing the total tripping delay (recommendation) Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the Brk. (Brk. tripping). Testing the trip delay (measured at the relay output) Measure the tripping times at the relay output. Testing the drop-out ratio Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the dropout ratio. Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and drop-out ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data. www.eaton.com 345 IM02602007E EDR-5000 51V – Voltage Restraint Overcurrent-Protection The 51P[2] and 51P[3] elements can be used for Voltage Restraint if the Parameter »VRestraint« is set to »active« within the Parameter Set. 51P[2] ,51P[3] All voltage restraint overcurrent protective elements are identically structured. All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be displayed as ANSI 51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 51 element wont change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional” to “directional”. The 51V element restrains operation which reduces pickup levels. This allows the User to lower the pickup value of the 51V elements with the corresponding phase input voltage (phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground, depending on the setting of »Main VT con« within the System Parameters). When the minimum fault phase current is close to the load current, it may make the phase time overcurrent protection coordination difficult. In this case, an undervoltage function may be used to alleviate this situation. When the voltage (RMS) is low, the phase time overcurrent pickup threshold may be set low accordingly, so that the phase time overcurrent protection may achieve adequate sensitivity and better coordination. The device uses a simple linear model to determine the effective pickup by characterizing the relationship between the voltage and the phase time overcurrent pickup threshold. Once the voltage restraint is activated, the effective phase time overcurrent pickup threshold will be the calculated Pickup% times the phase time overcurrent pickup setting. The effective pickup threshold must be within the setting range allowed and, if it is less, the minimum pickup value will be used. Pickup% 100% 25% VRestraint max 25% VRestraint max That means: Vmin = 0.25*Vmax; • Pickup%min = 25%; • Pickup% = 25%, if V <= Vmin; • Pickup% = 1/Vmax*(V - Vmin) + 25%, if Vmin < V < Vmax; • Pickup% = 100%, if V >= Vmax; 346 www.eaton.com V IM02602007E EDR-5000 For tripping curves, please refer to the“Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)” section. If this element should be blocked in case of a Loss Of Potential, »LOP BLO« has to be set to »active«. Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of "Main VT con". In case that within the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Open-Delta": Vn=Main VT sec . In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye": Vn= MainVT sec 3 51V[1]...[n] Name = 51V[1]...[n] 4 Name.IH2 Blo* Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings** Name.Pickup IA (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Name.Pickup IB Name.Pickup IC Name.Pickup Name.IH2 Blo AND Inactive Active AND 24b 25b 26b 14 Name.Trip Phase A 16b *=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection 5 AND Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* Name.Trip Phase B IH2.Blo Phase A AND 6 Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* Name.Curve Shape IH2.Blo Phase B Name.t-multiplier 7 17b AND AND Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* Name.Trip Phase C AND 18b Name.t-reset AND IH2.Blo Phase C Name.Reset Mode φ INV OR AND 51V Pickup = %Pickup * 51P Name.Trip OR Pickup IA RMS IB AND RMS IC Name.TripCmd Based on above parameters , tripping times and reset modes will be calculated by the device. RMS Imax AND 15 Imax φ Pickup% VA RMS 100% VB RMS VC %Pickup 25% V RMS 25% VRestraint max 3 Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) www.eaton.com 347 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the 51V Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Nondirectional [Device Planning] Non-directional, Forward, Reverse Global Protection Parameters of the 51V Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] Rvs Blo Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] AdaptSet 1 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] 348 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path AdaptSet 2 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] AdaptSet 3 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] AdaptSet 4 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] Setting Group Parameters of the 51V Module In the case that Voltage Restraint is active (Vrestraint=active), the minimum pickup that can be set is 0.1 In. In the case that Voltage Restraint is inactive (Vrestraint=inactive), the minimum pickup that can be set is 0.01 In. Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, 51P[2]: Active [Protection Para Active 51P[3]: Inactive /<n> /I-Prot /51P[2]] ExBlo Fc Rvs Blo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, reverse blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/element are blocked that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active". Inactive www.eaton.com [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51P[2]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51P[2]] 349 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /I-Prot /51P[2]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Criterion True RMS Measuring method: fundamental or Reset Fundamental, [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51P[2]] [Protection Para True RMS, /<n> I2 /I-Prot /51P[2]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 40.00 In element starts to time out to trip. 1.00 In [Protection Para /<n> Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint = Active Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint = Inactive /I-Prot /51P[2]] Curve Shape Characteristic IEC NINV, [Protection Para IEC VINV, /<n> IEC EINV, /I-Prot IEC LINV, /51P[2]] ANSI MINV, ANSI VINV, ANSI EINV, Therm Flat, IT, I2T, I4T 350 ANSI MINV www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range t-multiplier Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00 The setting range depends on the selected tripping curve. Default Menu Path 51P[2]: 2 [Protection Para 51P[3]: 3 /<n> /I-Prot /51P[2]] Reset Mode Reset Mode Instantaneous, Calculated [Protection Para t-delay, /<n> Calculated /I-Prot /51P[2]] t-reset Reset time for intermittent phase failures (INV characteristics only). 0.00 – 60.00 s 0s [Protection Para /<n> Available if:Reset Mode = t-delay /I-Prot /51P[2]] VRestraint Voltage Restraint Protection Inactive, Active Active [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51P[2]] VRestraint max Maximum voltage restraint level. Definition 0.04 – 1.30 Vn of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of "Main VT con". When the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Open-Delta" , "Vn = Main VT sec ". When the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Wye", "Vn = Main VT sec/SQRT(3)". 1.00 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51P[2]] Only available if: VRestraint = Active LOP Blo Blocking if voltage transformer failure detected. LOP (Loss of Potential) Inactive, Active Inactive [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: VRestraint = Active /I-Prot /51P[2]] www.eaton.com 351 IM02602007E EDR-5000 51V Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] 352 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51P[2]] 51V Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC Pickup Signal: Pickup Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 Commissioning: Voltage Restraint [ANSI 51V] Object to be tested: Signals to be measured for Voltage Restraint element: the threshold values, total tripping time (recommended), or alternatively tripping delays and the dropout ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase. www.eaton.com 353 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Eaton recommends measuring the total tripping time instead of the tripping delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the customer. The total tripping time is measured at the position signaling contact of the breaker (not at the relay output contacts!). Total tripping time = tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the protection stages) + breaker operating time (about 50 ms) Please take the breaker operating times from the technical data specified in the relevant documentation provided by the breaker manufacturer. Necessary means: Current source; Voltage Source; Current and Voltage meters; and Timer. • • • • Procedure: Testing the threshold values (3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase) Feed %Pickup voltage. For each test performed, feed a current that is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Then check if the pickup values are %Pickup of the value according to 51P protection. Testing the total tripping delay (recommendation) Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the breakers (breaker tripping). Testing the tripping delay (measuring at the relay output contact) Measure the tripping times at the relay output contact. Testing the dropout ratio Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the dropout ratio. Successful test result The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under Technical Data. Directional Features for Measured (IX) Ground Fault Elements 50X/51X All ground fault elements can be selected as »Non-directional/Forward/Reverse« operated. This has to be done in the »Device Planning« menu. For the direction detection, it is mandatory that the required voltages exceed 0.35 V and the required currents exceed 10 mA. An exception is the measured sensitive ground current which has to exceed 1 mA. For the case that the voltage drops below 0.35 V, the last angle between the operating and polarizing quantity will be used for the directional detection. 354 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Important Definitions Polarizing Quantity: This is the quantity that is used as a reference value. The polarizing quantity can be selected by the parameter »IX Direction Control« in the [System Para/Direction] menu as follows: • »IX 3V0«: The neutral voltage selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« will be used as the polarizing quantity. The traditional way to polarize a ground fault element is to use neutral voltage (3V0). The neutral voltage can, however, be either »measured« or »calculated«. This can be selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« in the [System Para/Direction] menu. • »IX Neg«: With this selection, the negative phase sequence voltage and current (Polarizing: V2/Operating: I2) will be used to detect direction. The monitored current is still the measured residual current IX. • »IX Dual«: For this method, the negative phase sequence voltage »V2« will be used as polarizing quantity if »V2« and »I2« are available, otherwise 3V0 will be used. The operating quantity is either I2 if »V2« and »I2« are available, else IX. The following table gives the User a quick overview of the all possible directional settings. 50X/51X Direction Decision by Angle Between: [System Para/ Direction] [System Para/Direction]: [System Para/Direction]: The Following Angle Has to Be Set: IX Dir Cntrl = 3V0 Source = Measured ground current and neutral voltage: IX, 3V0 (measured) Ground MTA IX 3V0 Measured Measured ground current and neutral voltage: IX, 3V0 (calculated) Ground MTA IX 3V0 Calculated Negative sequence voltage and current I2, V2 90° + Phase MTA IX Neg N.A. Negative phase sequence current and voltage (preferred), measured ground current and neutral voltage (alternatively): I2, V2 (if available) or else: IX, 3V0 (measured) If V2 and I2 are available: 90° + Phase MTA IX Dual Measured Negative phase sequence current and voltage (preferred), measured ground current and neutral voltage (alternatively): I2, V2 (if available) or else: IX, 3V0 (calculated) If V2 and I2 are available: 90° + Phase MTA IX Dual Calculated else: Ground MTA else: Ground MTA www.eaton.com 355 356 www.eaton.com V2 3V0 V2 3V0 If V2 and I2 are available, MTA = 90° + Phase MTA, otherwise MTA = Ground MTA 90° + Phase MTA Ground MTA System Para IX Dual IX Neg IX 3V0 IX Dir Cntrl System Para If V2 and I2 are available, I2 is the operating quantity, else IX is the operating quantity I2 IG = IX meas VX meas VR calc Calculated Measured 3V0 Source System Para Prot - 50X/51X - Direction Detection Reverse operating polarizing MTA g tin era polarizing op Forward 50X/51X - Direction Detection (Not possible) Prot.IX dir n poss (Reverse) Prot.IX dir rev (Forward) Prot.IX dir fwd 10b 10b 10b IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 50X/67X DEFT Measured Ground Fault Protection Elements 50X[1] ,50X[2] If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the ground current protection functions must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings. All ground current elements are identically structured. The following table shows the application options of the earth overcurrent protection element Applications of the IG-Protection Module Setting in Option ANSI 50X – Ground overcurrent protection, nondirectional Device Planning menu Setting: Non-directional Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS ANSI 67X – Ground overcurrent protection, directional Device Planning menu Setting: Forward/Reverse Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS VX Selection: measured/calculated Criterion For all protection elements it can be determined, whether the measurement is done on basis of the »Fundamental« or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used. VX Selection Within the parameter menu, this parameter determines, whether the earth current and the residual voltage is »measured« or »calculated«. Calculation is only possible, when phase to neutral voltage is applied to the voltage inputs. At setting »measured« the quantities to be measured, i. e.: residual voltage and the measured ground current have to be applied to the corresponding 4th measuring input. All ground current protective elements can be planned User defined as non-directional or as directional stages. This means, for instance, all elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction. For each element the following characteristics are available: • DEFT (definite time). For tripping curves, please refer to the “Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Measured)” section. The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents. However, this is only possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected. www.eaton.com 357 358 Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings** IH2.Blo IG www.eaton.com *=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection 3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings φ RMS Fund. Name.Criterion Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* Active Inactive Name.IGH2 Blo Name.* Fault in Projected Direction Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) IX Measured 8 10 4 Name = 50X[1]...[n] 50X[1]...[n] Name.Pickup AND AND AND Based on above parameters, tripping times and reset modes will be calculated by the device. 0 t DEFT φ Name.t Name.Pickup AND Name.TripCmd Name.Pickup 27a 15 19a Name.Trip 14 Name.IGH2 Blo* IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Non-directional, Nondirectional [Device Planning] Forward, Reverse Global Protection Parameters of the 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] Rvs Blo Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] AdaptSet 1 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] AdaptSet 2 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] www.eaton.com 359 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path AdaptSet 3 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] AdaptSet 4 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Active [Protection Para Active /<n> /I-Prot /50X[1]] ExBlo Fc Rvs Blo Fc Blo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, reverse blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/element are blocked that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active". Inactive Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive Inactive, Active [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50X[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50X[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50X[1]] 360 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive [Protection Para Criterion True RMS Measuring method: fundamental or Reset Fundamental, /<n> /I-Prot /50X[1]] True RMS [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50X[1]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 20.00 In element will be started. 50X[1]: 1 In [Protection Para 50X[2]: 2 In /<n> /I-Prot /50X[1]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.002 – 2.000 In element will be started. 0.02 In [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50X[1]] t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.5 s Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50X[1]] 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] www.eaton.com 361 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50X[1]] 362 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 50X/67X] Please test the non-directional ground overcurrent analog to the non-directional phase overcurrent protection. www.eaton.com 363 IM02602007E EDR-5000 51X/67X INV Measured Ground Fault Protection Elements 51X[1] ,51X[2] All ground current elements are identically structured. The following table shows the application options of the earth overcurrent protection element Applications of the IG-Protection Module Setting in Option ANSI 51X – Ground overcurrent protection, nondirectional Device Planning menu Setting: Non-directional Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS ANSI 67X – Ground overcurrent protection, directional Device Planning menu Setting: Forward/Reverse Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS VX Selection: measured/calculated Criterion For all protection elements it can be determined, whether the measurement is done on basis of the »Fundamental« or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used. VX Selection Within the parameter menu, this parameter determines, whether the earth current and the residual voltage is »measured« or »calculated«. Calculation is only possible, when phase to neutral voltage is applied to the voltage inputs. At setting »measured« the quantities to be measured, i. e. Residual voltage and the measured ground current have to be applied to the corresponding 4th measuring input. All ground current protective elements can be planned User defined as non-directional or as directional stages. This means, for instance, all elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction. For each element the following characteristics are available: • • • • • • • • • • • NINV (IEC/XInv); VINV (IEC/XInv); LINV (IEC/XInv); EINV (IEC/XInv); MINV (ANSI/XInv); VINV (ANSI/XInv); EINV (ANSI/XInv); Thermal Flat; Therm Flat IT; Therm Flat I2T; and Therm Flat I4T. For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Time Current Curves (Ground Current)” section. The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents. However, this is only possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected. 364 www.eaton.com Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings** IH2.Blo IG www.eaton.com 3 Active (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings φ RMS Fund. Name.Criterion Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* Inactive Name.IGH2 Blo Name.* Fault in Projected Direction Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) IX Measured 8 10 4 Name = 51X[1]...[n] 51X[1]...[n] Name.Pickup AND AND AND Based on above parameters, tripping times and reset modes will be calculated by the device. INV φ Name.Reset Mode Name.t-reset Name.t-multiplier Name.Curve Shape AND Name.TripCmd Name.Pickup 27b 15 19b Name.Trip 14 Name.IGH2 Blo* EDR-5000 IM02602007E *=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection 365 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode 51X[1]: Non-directional, Nondirectional [Device Planning] Forward, Reverse 51X[2]: Do not use, Non-directional, Forward, Reverse Global Protection Parameters of the 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] Rvs Blo Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] AdaptSet 1 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] 366 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path AdaptSet 2 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] AdaptSet 3 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] AdaptSet 4 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Active [Protection Para Active /<n> /I-Prot /51X[1]] ExBlo Fc Rvs Blo Fc Blo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, reverse blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/element are blocked that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active". Inactive Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive Inactive, Active [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51X[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51X[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51X[1]] www.eaton.com 367 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Default Menu Path ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive [Protection Para Criterion True RMS Measuring method: fundamental or Reset Setting Range Fundamental, /<n> /I-Prot /51X[1]] True RMS [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51X[1]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 20.00 In element will be started. 0.5 In [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51X[1]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.002 – 2.000 In element will be started. 0.02 In [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51X[1]] Curve Shape Characteristic IEC NINV, [Protection Para IEC VINV, /<n> IEC EINV, /I-Prot IEC LINV, /51X[1]] ANSI MINV, ANSI VINV, ANSI EINV, Therm Flat, IT, I2T, I4T 368 ANSI MINV www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range t-multiplier Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00 The setting range depends on the selected tripping curve. Default Menu Path 51X[1]: 1 [Protection Para 51X[2]: 2 /<n> /I-Prot /51X[1]] Reset Mode Reset Mode Instantaneous, Calculated [Protection Para t-delay, /<n> Calculated /I-Prot /51X[1]] t-reset Reset time for intermittent phase failures (INV characteristics only) 0.00 – 60.00 s 0.00 s [Protection Para /<n> Only available if:Reset Mode = t-delay /I-Prot /51X[1]] 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] www.eaton.com 369 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51X[1]] 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 370 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 51X/67X] Please test the non-directional ground overcurrent analog to the non-directional phase overcurrent protection. www.eaton.com 371 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Directional Features for Calculated (IR) Ground Fault Elements 50R/51R All ground fault elements can be selected as »Non-directional/Forward/Reverse« operated. This has to be done in the »Device Planning« menu. For the direction detection, it is mandatory that the required voltages exceed 0.35 V and the required currents exceed 10 mA. An exception is the measured sensitive ground current which has to exceed 1 mA. For the case that the voltage drops below 0.35 V, the last angle between the operating and polarizing quantity will be used for the directional detection. Important Definitions Polarizing Quantity: This is the quantity that is used as a reference value. The polarizing quantity can be selected by the parameter »IR Direction Control« in the [System Para/Direction] menu as follows: Operating Quantity: • »IR 3V0«: The neutral voltage selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« will be used as the polarizing quantity. The traditional way to polarize a ground fault element is to use neutral voltage (3V0). The neutral voltage can, however, be either »measured« or »calculated«. This can be selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« in the [System Para/Direction] menu. • »IR IPol«: The measured neutral current (usually = IX) will be used as polarizing quantity. • »IR Dual«: For this method, the measured neutral current IPol=IX will be used as polarizing quantity, if available, otherwise 3V0 will be used. • »IR Neg«: With this selection, the negative phase sequence voltage and current will be used to detect the direction. The monitored current is still the calculated residual current IR. For the directional IR elements, the operating quantity is in general the calculated neutral current IR (except from »IR Neg« mode, where »I2« is the operating quantity). The ground maximum torque angles (MTA) can be adjusted from 0° to 360°, except, if »IR IPol« is selected. In this case, it is set to 0° (fixed). The following table gives the User a quick overview of the all possible directional settings. 50R/51R Direction Decision by Angle Between: [System Para/ Direction] [System Para/Direction]: [System Para/Direction]: The Following Angle Has to Be Set: IR Dir Cntrl = 3V0 Source = Residual current and neutral voltage: IR, 3V0 (measured) Ground MTA IR 3V0 Measured Residual current and neutral voltage: IR, 3V0 (calculated) Ground MTA IR 3V0 Calculated Residual current and neutral/ground current IR, IX 0° (fixed) IR IPol N.A. 372 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 50R/51R Direction Decision by Angle Between: [System Para/ Direction] [System Para/Direction]: [System Para/Direction]: The Following Angle Has to Be Set: IR Dir Cntrl = 3V0 Source = Residual current and neutral/ground current (preferred), residual current and neutral voltage (alternatively): IR, IX (if available) or else: IR, 3V0 (measured) If Ipol (=IX) is available, MTA = 0° (fixed); else MTA=Ground MTA IR Dual Measured Residual current and neutral/ground current (preferred), residual current and neutral voltage (alternatively): IR, IX (if available) or else: IR, 3V0 (calculated) If Ipol (=IX) is available, MTA = 0° (fixed); else MTA=Ground MTA IR Dual Calculated Negative sequence voltage and current I2, V2 90° + Phase MTA IR Neg N.A. www.eaton.com 373 374 www.eaton.com 90° + Phase MTA If IPol is available, MTA = 0°; else MTA=Ground MTA 0° (fixed) Ground MTA System Para I2 I0 = IR calc VX meas VR calc Calculated Measured 3V0 Source System Para V2 IX meas 3V0 IX meas 3V0 Prot - 50R/51R - Direction Detection IR Neg IR Dual IR IPol IR 3V0 IR Dir Cntrl System Para Reverse operating polarizing op MTA g tin era polarizing Forward 50R/51R - Direction Detection (Not possible) Prot.IR Neg dir n poss (Reverse) Prot.IR Neg rev dir (Forward) Prot.IR Neg dir fwd (Not possible) Prot.IR dir n poss (Reverse) Prot.IR dir rev (Forward) Prot.IR dir fwd 10a 10a 10a 10a 10a 10a IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 50R/67R DEFT Calculated Ground Fault Protection Elements 50R[1] ,50R[2] If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the ground current protection functions must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings. All ground current elements are identically structured. The following table shows the application options of the earth overcurrent protection element Applications of the IG-Protection Module Setting in Option ANSI 50R – Ground overcurrent protection, nondirectional Device Planning menu Setting: Non-directional Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS ANSI 67R – Ground overcurrent protection, directional Device Planning menu Setting: Forward/Reverse Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS VX Selection: measured/calculated Criterion For all protection elements it can be determined, whether the measurement is done on basis of the »Fundamental« or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used. VX Selection Within the parameter menu, this parameter determines, whether the earth current and the residual voltage is »measured« or »calculated«. • Calculation is only possible, when phase to neutral voltage is applied to the voltage inputs. At setting »measured« the quantities to be measured, i. e.: residual voltage and the measured ground current have to be applied to the corresponding 4th measuring input. All ground current protective elements can be planned User defined as non-directional or as directional stages. This means, for instance, all elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction. For each element the following characteristics are available: • DEFT (definite time). For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Calculated)” section. The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents. However, this is only possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected. www.eaton.com 375 376 Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings** IH2.Blo IG www.eaton.com *=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection 3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings φ RMS Fund. Name.Criterion Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* Active Inactive Name.IGH2 Blo Name.* Fault in Projected Direction Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) IX Calculated 8 10 4 Name = 50R[1]...[n] 50R[1]...[n] Name.Pickup AND AND AND t 0 0 Based on above parameters, tripping times and reset modes will be calculated by the device. t φ DEFT Name.t Name.Pickup AND Name.TripCmd Name.Pickup 27c 15 19c Name.Trip 14 Name.IGH2 Blo* IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Non-directional, Nondirectional [Device Planning] Forward, Reverse Global Protection Parameters of the 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] Rvs Blo Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] AdaptSet 1 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] AdaptSet 2 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] www.eaton.com 377 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path AdaptSet 3 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] AdaptSet 4 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Active [Protection Para Active /<n> /I-Prot /50R[1]] ExBlo Fc Rvs Blo Fc Blo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, reverse blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/element are blocked that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active". Inactive Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive Inactive, Active [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50R[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50R[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50R[1]] 378 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive [Protection Para Criterion True RMS Measuring method: fundamental or Reset Fundamental, /<n> /I-Prot /50R[1]] True RMS [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50R[1]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 20.00 In element will be started. 50R[1]: 1 In [Protection Para 50R[2]: 2 In /<n> /I-Prot /50R[1]] t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.5 s Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /50R[1]] 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] www.eaton.com 379 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter3 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter4 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /50R[1]] 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 380 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 50R/67R] Please test the non-directional ground overcurrent using the procedure for non-directional phase overcurrent protection. www.eaton.com 381 IM02602007E EDR-5000 51R/67R INV Calculated Ground Fault Protection Elements 51R[1] ,51R[2] All ground current elements are identically structured. The following table shows the application options of the earth overcurrent protection element Applications of the IG-Protection Module Setting in Option ANSI 51R – Ground overcurrent protection, nondirectional Device Planning menu Setting: Non-directional Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS ANSI 67R – Ground overcurrent protection, directional Device Planning menu Setting: Forward/Reverse Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS VX Selection: measured/calculated Criterion For all protection elements it can be determined, whether the measurement is done on basis of the »Fundamental« or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used. VX Selection Within the parameter menu, this parameter determines, whether the earth current and the residual voltage is »measured« or »calculated«. • Calculation is only possible, when phase to neutral voltage is applied to the voltage inputs. At setting »measured« the quantities to be measured, i. e.: residual voltage and the measured ground current have to be applied to the corresponding 4th measuring input. All ground current protective elements can be planned User defined as non-directional or as directional stages. This means, for instance, all elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction. For each element the following characteristics are available: • • • • • • • • • • • NINV (IEC/XInv); VINV (IEC/XInv); LINV (IEC/XInv); EINV (IEC/XInv); MINV (ANSI/XInv); VINV (ANSI/XInv); EINV (ANSI/XInv); Thermal Flat; Therm Flat IT; Therm Flat I2T; and Therm Flat I4T. For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Time Current Curves (Ground Current)” section. The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents. However, this is only possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected. 382 www.eaton.com Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings** IH2.Blo IG www.eaton.com 3 Active (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings φ RMS Fund. Name.Criterion Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* Inactive Name.IGH2 Blo Name.* Fault in Projected Direction Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) IX Calculated 8 10 4 Name = 51R[1]...[n] 51R[1]...[n] Name.Pickup AND AND AND Based on above parameters, tripping times and reset modes will be calculated by the device. INV φ Name.Reset Mode Name.t-reset Name.t-multiplier Name.Curve Shape AND Name.TripCmd Name.Pickup 27d 15 19d Name.Trip 14 Name.IGH2 Blo* EDR-5000 IM02602007E *=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection 383 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode 51R[1]: Non-directional, Nondirectional [Device Planning] Forward, Reverse 51R[2]: Do not use, Non-directional, Forward, Reverse Global Protection Parameters of the 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] Rvs Blo Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] AdaptSet 1 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] 384 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path AdaptSet 2 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] AdaptSet 3 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] AdaptSet 4 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Active [Protection Para Active /<n> /I-Prot /51R[1]] ExBlo Fc Rvs Blo Fc Blo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, reverse blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/element are blocked that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active". Inactive Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive Inactive, Active [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51R[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51R[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51R[1]] www.eaton.com 385 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Default Menu Path ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive [Protection Para Criterion True RMS Measuring method: fundamental or Reset Setting Range Fundamental, /<n> /I-Prot /51R[1]] True RMS [Protection Para /<n> /I-Prot /51R[1]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 20.00 In element will be started. 51R[1]: 0.1 In [Protection Para 51R[2]: 0.5 In /<n> /I-Prot /51R[1]] Curve Shape Characteristic IEC NINV, ANSI MINV [Protection Para IEC VINV, /<n> IEC EINV, /I-Prot IEC LINV, /51R[1]] ANSI MINV, ANSI VINV, ANSI EINV, Therm Flat, IT, I2T, I4T t-multiplier Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00 The setting range depends on the selected tripping curve. 51R[1]: 1 [Protection Para 51R[2]: 2 /<n> /I-Prot /51R[1]] 386 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Reset Mode Reset Mode Instantaneous, Calculated [Protection Para t-delay, /<n> Calculated /I-Prot /51R[1]] t-reset Reset time for intermittent phase failures (INV characteristics only) 0.00 – 60.00 s 0.00 s [Protection Para /<n> Only available if:Reset Mode = t-delay /I-Prot /51R[1]] 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] www.eaton.com 387 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /I-Prot /51R[1]] 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 51R/67R] Please test the non-directional ground overcurrent analog to the non-directional phase overcurrent protection. 388 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E ZI - Zone Interlocking Elements ZI Principle – General Use The purpose of zone interlocking is to speed up tripping for some faults without sacrificing the coordination of the system and interjecting nuisance trips into the system. Zone interlocking devices can communicate across distribution zones to determine whether or not a device sees a fault condition. Zone interlocking is a communication scheme used with breakers and protective relays to improve the level of protection in a power distribution system. This is achieved through communication between the downstream and upstream devices in a power system. The zones are classified by their location downstream of the main circuit protective device which is generally defined as Zone 1. By definition, a selectively coordinated system is one where by adjusting the trip unit pickup and time delay settings, the breaker closest to the fault trips first. The upstream breaker serves two functions: (1) back-up protection to the downstream breaker and (2) protection of the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers. For faults which occur on the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers, it is ideal for the upstream breaker to trip with no time delay. This is the feature provided by Zone Selective Interlocking. The zone interlocking information can be transferred to or received from other compatible zone interlocking devices by means of suitable communication cables. The single zone interlock terminal block, with its 3-wire scheme, can be used for either phase zone interlocking, ground zone interlocking, or a combination of the two. If phase and ground zone interlocking are combined, the potential consequences must be understood before implementation. Systems containing multiple sources, or where the direction of power flow varies, require special considerations, or may not be suitable for this feature. The breaker failure pickup signal »BF.PICKUP« is implicitly connected to zone interlocking, so that NO zone interlock output signal can be sent to the upstream device if a breaker failure on a downstream device is detected. Description of the Functions and Features • Configurable protection functions to initiate the zone interlocking OUTPUT signal (start functions). • Remove zone interlocking OUTPUT signal immediately after detection of a breaker failure. • Reset time (about ten cycles - settable) to interrupt OUTPUT signal for durable trip signal. • Small trip delay (about three cycles – settable) to wait for downstream devices interlocking signals. • Zone interlocking trip signal only possible by absence of zone interlocking INPUT signals. • Configurable zone interlocking trip functions (protective functions serve as zone interlocking trip functions). • Zone interlocking trip function pickup and tripping characteristic adaption using adaptive settings controlled by the zone interlocking input signals. www.eaton.com 389 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Zone Interlocking Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Use Use [Device Planning] Global Protection Parameters of the Zone Interlocking In the global parameter menu for zone interlocking, two external blocking inputs (»Ex Block1/Ex Block2«), as with other protection modules, can be assigned to the input of the zone interlocking function so that the zone interlock function can be blocked by an assigned functions Via an external input signal, the zone interlocking can also be blocked if the parameter »ExtBlockTripCMD« is assigned. Breaker Failure Pickup flag BF.Pickup is implicitly connected to zone interlocking, so that NO zone interlock output signal can be sent to the upstream device if a breaker failure on downstream device is detected. Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ZI] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ZI] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ZI] Setting Group Parameters of the Zone Interlocking The zone interlocking Setting Group Parameters consists of three groups of setting to configure the zone interlocking module to adapt to various application philosophies accordingly: • General: This group comprises the settings used to control the general usage of the zone interlocking module. • OUTPUT: What should be assigned to the Zone Out? - Phase, - Ground, or - Both. • The OUTPUT group comprises the settings to configure the zone interlocking output logic. If the zone interlocking application is used to a downstream device, the settings in OUTPUT group should be programmed accordingly. If the zone interlocking application is only used for an upstream device (main 390 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 breaker or Zone 1), the setting ZoneInterlockOut within the OUTPUT group should be disabled. • TRIP: Activate the Zone Trip. The TRIP group comprises the settings used to configure the zone interlocking TRIP logic. If the zone interlocking application is applied to an upstream device, (main breaker or Zone 1), the settings in the TRIP group should be programmed accordingly. If the zone interlocking application is only used for a downstream device (feeder breaker or Zone 2), the setting ZoneInterlockTrip in TRIP group should be disabled. Setting the above mentioned setting groups accordingly the zone interlocking module can be configured as: • Downstream device application (using only OUTPUT logic);, • Upstream device application (using only TRIP logic); or • Midstream device application (using both OUTPUT and TRIP logic together). The following menu and tables show the detailed information about the settings. Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /ZI /General Settings] ExBlo Fc Blo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive Inactive, [Protection Para /<n> /ZI /General Settings] Active [Protection Para /<n> /ZI /General Settings] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". www.eaton.com Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /ZI /General Settings] 391 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path ZI OUT Fc Zone Interlocking Out activate (allow) / inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Active [Protection Para Active /<n> /ZI /Zone Out] Fault Type Fault Type Phase, Both [Protection Para Ground, /<n> Both /ZI /Zone Out] Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Inactive, Active Active [Protection Para /<n> /ZI /Zone Trip] Fault Type Fault Type Phase, Both [Protection Para Ground, /<n> Both /ZI /Zone Trip] Zone Interlocking Output Logic [X2] The following current protective function elements serve as the Phase Zone Interlock OUTPUT start functions: • • • 51P[1]; 50P[1]; and 50P[2]. The following current protective function serves as the Ground Zone Interlock OUTPUT start functions: • • • • 392 51X[1]; 50X[1]; 51R[1]; and 50R[1]. www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Zone Interlocking OUTPUT Logic Timing 51P[1].Pickup 1 0 t 51P[1].Trip 1 0 t Reset Timer 10 Cycles 1 0 t ZI.Bkr Blo 1 0 t ZI.OUT 1 0 t STATE TRANSFER STANDBY STARTED TRIPPED www.eaton.com RESET STANDBY 393 394 Ground Phase Both www.eaton.com 51R[1].Pickup 50R[1].Pickup 51X[1].Pickup 50X[1].Pickup 51P[1].Pickup 50P[2].Pickup 50P[1].Pickup (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Fault Type 2 X2: ZI.Zone Out Inactive Active ZI OUT Fc 51R[1].TripCmd 50R[1].TripCmd 51X[1].TripCmd 50X[1].TripCmd OR OR OR OR OR AND AND BF[1].Trip 50P[1].TripCmd 51P[1].TripCmd 50P[2].TripCmd OR AND AND t t 166 ms 166 ms AND AND OR ZI[1].Ground OUT ZI[1].Bkr Blo ZI[1].OUT ZI[1].Phase OUT IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Zone Interlocking Trip Logic [X2] The following overcurrent protection elements trigger Phase Zone-Interlock trip functions: 1.5 * 51P[1]; 50P[1]; and 50P[2]. • • • The following overcurrent protection elements trigger Ground Zone Interlock trip functions: 51X[1]; 50X[1]; 51R[1]; and 50R[1]. • • • • Zone Interlocking TRIP Logic Timing 51P[1].Pickup 1 0 t ZI.IN 1 0 t Trip Delay Timer 3 Cycles 1 0 t ZI.Pickup 1 0 t ZI.Trip 1 t 0 STANDBY STARTED TRIPPED STANDBY INTERLOCKED STANDBY STATE TRANSFER www.eaton.com 395 396 3 2 www.eaton.com 51R[1].Pickup 50R[1].Pickup 51X[1].Pickup 50X[1].Pickup (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings Ground Phase Both Fault Type 1.5*51P[1].Pickup 50P[2].Pickup 50P[1].Pickup (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings X2: ZI.Zone Trip Inactive Active Trip OR OR OR OR AND AND ZI.IN AND AND t t 50 ms 50 ms OR OR ZI[1].Pickup 14 14 ZI[1].Ground Trip 15 ZI[1].TripCmd ZI[1].Trip ZI[1].Ground Pickup AND 14 ZI[1].Phase Trip ZI[1].Phase Pickup IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Zone Interlocking Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ZI] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ZI] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /ZI] Bkr Blo-I Signal: Blocked by Breaker Failure [] Zone Interlocking Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Bkr Blo Signal: Blocked by Breaker Failure Phase Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Pickup Phase Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Trip Ground Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Pickup Ground Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Trip Pickup Signal: Pickup Zone Interlocking Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip TripCmd Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command Phase OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase OUT Ground OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground OUT OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT IN Signal: Zone Interlocking IN Zone Interlocking Wiring The ZI Outputs are for use with connection to electronic inputs only. The zone interlocking connection between relays is done by means of a twisted shielded cable. Downstream www.eaton.com 397 IM02602007E EDR-5000 zone interlock outputs may be paralleled from up to ten devices (FP-5000 or DT-3000 or a combination of both) for connection to upstream zone interlocked relays. Zone 1 FP-X000 J3 Out 1 In 4 Com 2 Zone 2 EDR-X000 FP-X000 X2 Zone 3 Shield 13 Out 1 Out 14 In 4 Com 2 Com 15 Shield 16 In 17 Com 18 DT-3000 Ground Phase J3 EDR-X000 FP-X000 Out 13 In 14 Out 15 Shield 13 In 16 Out 14 Com 18 Com 15 Shield 16 In 17 Com 18 J3 X2 Out 1 In 4 Com 2 Hardware Terminals for Zone Interlocking By means of the zone interlocking terminals, the device can be connected to other Eaton protective devices such as an FP5000, DT3000, etc. As an upstream device, the terminals - Phase/Ground IN should be connected to the OUT terminals of up to ten downstream device(s) by means of a dedicated cable wired in parallel. As a downstream device, the terminals Phase/Ground OUT should be connected to the IN terminals of an upstream device by means of a dedicated cable. 398 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Terminal Marking X2 for Device: EDR-3000 X?. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 IRIG-B+ IRIG-B- RO3 SC OUT COM IN COM www.eaton.com 399 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Terminal Marking X2 for Device: EDR-4000 and EDR-5000 X?. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 400 Do not use Do not use RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 OUT COM IN COM www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E 79 - Automatic Reclosure AR The autoreclosure is used to minimize outages on overhead lines. The majority1 (>60% in medium voltage and >85% in high voltage) of faults (arc flash over) on overhead lines are temporary and can be cleared by means of the autoreclosure element. De-select the autoclosure element within the device planning menu if the protective device is used in order to protect cables, generators, or transformers. Features The autoreclose function is designed with diverse, very comprehensive yet flexible features which meet all requirements of different utility concepts and technical applications. The available features of the autoreclose function can be summarized as follows. • Flexible assignment of initiate functions for individual shots. • Maximum of six autoreclose shots. • Dynamic adjustment of protection setting values (e.g.: pickup, time delay tripping curve, etc.) during autoreclose process via adaptive set concept. • Reclose shots per hour limit. • Autorecloser wear monitor with maintenance alarm. • Programmable reclosing blocking feature. • Auto zone coordination with downstream reclosers. • Automatic manual-breaker-close blocking feature. • Manual/Auto reset lockout (panel, contact input, communications, etc.). • Autoreclose with Sync-check (Only in conjunction with internal Sync-check and Control modules). • External AR shot counter increment is possible. • Automatic autoreclose result evaluation (successful/unsuccessful). • Separate counters to register total, successful/unsuccessful reclosing numbers. 1: Protective Relaying: Principles and Applications, ISBN 978-0824799182 www.eaton.com 401 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Via the pre shot (fast trip), the AR-module is able to trip the breaker ahead of the protection stage that has activated the AR-module. As a general rule, a fast trip is either issued before the first reclosure attempt or after the last permitted reclosure attempt. 1. At the beginning of the sequence, a “Pre shot” (Fast trip) is executed before the time overcurrent protection element of any device on the line completely times out. Purpose: to clear the fault before any of the circuit protection trips or blows open. A short time after the pre-shot occurs, the breaker can be re-closed into the line and all circuits connected on the line will still be energized. 80%-90% of the faults are not permanent. After a period from 0.5 up to 1 sec., the line is probably no longer faulty and the complete line can be re-energized. If the line is still faulty, segments of the line will be switched off selectively by the time overcurrent protection module as a result of the system coordination. 2. A Pre shot (Fast trip) at the end of the reclosure sequence occurs after the last permitted reclosure shot. Purpose: To prevent unnecessary damage from the electrical equipment in case of permanent faults. If the last reclosure attempt is executed and the fault is still present, then the breaker can be tripped quickly before the time overcurrent protection module has completely timed out. The following table gives a folder (structure) overview. AR Menu Folder Purpose AR Within this menu, external blockings, external lockings, external shot increments and external resets can be assigned. Those external events can only become effective, if they have been activated (allowed) within the General Settings. Please see table row below. Path: [Protection Para\Global Prot Para\AR] General Settings Within this menu several general settings can be activated: the function itself, external blocking, zone coordination, external locking, and external shot increment Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\General can be set to active. The corresponding trigger events (e.g.: digital inputs) Settings] have to be assigned within the corresponding global protection parameters. Please see table row above. Furthermore, this menu contains some timers, the number of permitted reclosure attempts, the alarm mode (trip/alarm), and the reset mode can be set. Shot Manager Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\Shot Manager] In Shot manager setting menu, the control logic between individual shots and protective functions will be specified. For each shot (inclusive the pre shot), the trigger (start) events can be assigned. For each shot, a maximum of four initiate functions (protective functions which are dedicated to start this shot) can be selected from a list of available protective functions. When the autoreclosure process is running in the shot X stage, the corresponding protection and control settings will be used to control the operation during this stage. In addition, the dead times have to be set. For each shot, its dead time will be set individually, except for the shot 0, for which no dead timer setting is necessary. The shot 0 is just a virtual state to define the time before the first shot is to issue. Each dead timer specifies the time duration which has to be expired before the reclosure command for this shot can be issued. 402 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 AR Wear Supervision Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\AR Wear Superv] BlockFct Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\BlockFct] IM02602007E In this setting menu two Service Alarms can be set as well as the number of permissible reclosure attempts per hour. This group of settings specifies the protection functions by which the autoreclosure function must be blocked even if the autoreclosure function is already initiated. Note the difference between the protection function which can be blocked by autorecloser and the function(s) here to block the autorecloser. AR States The following diagram shows the state transitions between the various states of the autoreclosure function. This diagram visualizes the run time logic and timing sequence according to the state transition direction and the events which trigger the transitions. www.eaton.com 403 IM02602007E EDR-5000 State transition diagram. Initiate AR 1 Bkr=Pos CLOSE & t-ManualCloseBlock=timer elapsed Bkr=Pos OPEN Ready successful InitiateFc=True Blo=False Lock=True t-Reset Lockout=timer elapsed 3 Bkr=Pos CLOSE Bkr=Pos OPEN & t-ManualCloseBlock=timer elapsed Standby 4 t-ManualCloseBlock Blo=True AR Cycle 2 Start 6 Lock=True Lockout t-dead t-Run2Ready AR.Blo=True Lock=True Reset Lockout=True Blo=True 5 7 Blocked t-Reset Lockout In general, the autoreclosure function is only active (will be initiated) when all of the following conditions are met: • 404 Autoreclosure function is enabled (In AR General Setting: Function =active); www.eaton.com EDR-5000 • Breaker contact(s) (52a or/and 52b) is (are) installed and has (have) been programmed; and • Autoreclosure is not blocked by the blocking inputs (ExBlo1/2). IM02602007E 1 Standby The autoreclosure is in this state when the following conditions are met: • • • The breaker is in the open position; The autoreclose function is not initiated from any initiate (start) functions; and No external or internal AR blocking signals are present. No autoreclose shot operation is possible if the autoreclose function is within Standby state. 2 t-manual close block Suppose that the breaker is open and the AR state is in Standby state. Then the breaker is closed manually. The event “CB Pos On” starts a Manual-Close-Blocking timer and results in a state transition from »STANDBY« to a transit state - »T-BLO AFTER CB MAN ON«. The autoreclosure function changes into the »READY« state only as the Manual-Close-Blocking timer elapses and the breaker is closed. By means of the manual close blocking timer, a faulty starting of the autoreclose function in case of a Switch-OnTo-Fault condition is prevented. 3 Ready An activated autoreclose function is considered to be in »READY« state when all of the following conditions are true: • The breaker is in closed position; • The Manual-Close-Block-timer elapses after a breaker manual/remote close operation; • The autoreclose function is not initiated from any initiate (start) functions; and • No external or internal AR blocking signals are present. An autoreclose start is only possible if the autoreclose function is in Ready state. 4 Run (Cycle) The »RUN« state can only be reached if the following conditions are fulfilled: www.eaton.com 405 IM02602007E EDR-5000 • The autoreclose was in »READY« state before; • The breaker was in closed position before; • No external or internal AR Blocking signals exist; and • At least one of the assigned initiate functions is true (triggers the Autoreclosure). A complete autoreclose process with multi-shot reclosing will be accomplished inside the Run state. If the autoreclose gets into the »RUN« state, the autoreclose function transfers its control to a »RUN« state control automatically with several subordinate states which will be described in detail in the next section (AR Cycle). 5 Blocked An activated autoreclose function goes into the »BLOCKED« state when one of the assigned blocking functions is true. The autoreclose function exits the »BLOCKED« state if the assigned blocking signal is no longer present. 6 Lockout An activated autoreclose function goes into the »LOCKOUT« state when one of the following conditions is true: • An unsuccessful autoreclose is detected after all programmed autoreclose shots. The fault is of permanent nature; • Reclose failure (incomplete sequence); • Autoreclose rate per hour exceeds the limit; • Breaker failure during AR starting; • Manual breaker close operation during autoreclose process; • At least one protective function is still tripping before the reclose command is issued; or The autoreclose function exits the »LOCKOUT« state if the programmed lockout reset signal asserts and programmed Lockout Reset timer elapses. A Service Alarm (Service Alarm 1 or Service Alarm 2) will not lead to a lockout of the AR function. 406 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 AR Cycle (Shot) 4 Run (Cycle) The following drawing shows the state transitions in detail inside an AR run cycle. 11 Ready Initiate AR: InitiateFc=Trip ----------------------------------tCB-Open start 13 Waiting Bkr Open AR.Lock=True AR.Blo=True Bkr=Pos OPEN -----------------t-D: timer started 14 Initiate AR: InitiateFc=Trip &&(ShotCounter<set) -----------------------------------t-CB open start AR.Blo=True t-dead AR.Lock=True tD=OUT& CB=OFF& CB_READY=TRUE& Trip =False --------------------------------------------Shot=Shot+1 & tCI start & Shot=Shot+1 & tCI start & CB_CLOSE=True 15 AR.Lock=True AR.Blo=True Reclosing Bkr=Pos CLOSE ----------------------------------------tR2R start& CB_CLOSE=False 16 t-Run2Ready AR.Lock=True AR.Blo=True tR2R=OUT&& Bkr=Pos CLOSE -------------------------AR.successful 11 Ready www.eaton.com 407 IM02602007E EDR-5000 11 Ready An activated autoreclose function is considered to be in »READY« state when all of the following conditions are true: • The breaker is in closed position; • The Manual-Close-Block-timer elapses after a breaker manual/remote close operation; • The autoreclose function is not initiated from any initiate (start) functions; and • No external or internal AR blocking signals are present. 13 Waiting Bkr Open While in the »W AITING BKR OPEN« state, the autoreclosure supervises if the breaker is really tripped (open) after receiving the trip flag of the initiate protection function within a pre-set breaker supervision time (200 ms). If this is the case, the autoreclosure starts the programmed dead timer and goes to the dead timing state »t-dead«. 14 t-dead While in the dead timing state »t-dead«, the pre-set dead timer for current AR shot is timing and cannot be interrupted unless there are any blocking or lockout conditions coming. After dead timer elapses, the autoreclosure issues the breaker reclosing command and goes into the next state: »RECLOSING«, only if the following conditions are met: The breaker is in open position; The breaker is ready for next reclosing operation (if the Bkr. Ready logic input is used); No pickup from current (assigned) AR initiate function(s); No trip from current (assigned) AR initiate function(s); and No general tipping command. • • • • • Before issuing the breaker reclosing command, the current shot counter will be incremented. This is very important for the shot-controlled initiate and blocking functions. Before entering into the »RECLOSING« state, the pre-set breaker reclosing supervision timer (»t-Brk-ON-cmd«) will also be started. 15 Reclosing If there is no other blocking or lockout conditions and the breaker is closed while the breaker reclosing supervision timer is timing, the autoreclosure starts the »t-Run2Ready« timer and goes into the state: »TRUN2READY«. 408 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 16 t-Run2Ready Successful Autoreclosure: While in »T-RUN2READY« state, if there is no other blocking or lockout conditions and no more faults detected within the »t-Run2Ready« timer, the autoreclosure logic will leave the »RUN« state and goes back to the »READY« state. The flag “successful” is set. Unsuccessful Autoreclose: If a fault is detected again (the shot-controlled initiate function is triggering) while »t-Run2Ready« timer is still timing, the autoreclosure control again transfers to the »RUNNING« state. For a permanent fault, the process described before will be repeated until all programmed shots were operated and the autoreclose process changes into the »LOCKOUT« state. The flag “failed” is set. Timing Diagrams Auto Reclosing timing diagram for unsuccessful 2-shot auto reclosing scheme with acceleration at pre-shot. Fault Inception 1 Clearance 0 t Protection Pickup 1 Reset 0 50P[1].DefaultSet 50P[1]. AdaptSet1 51P[1] t Protection Trip 1 Reset 0 50P[1].Fasttrip 50P[1].Trip 51P[1].Trip t Bkr State Pos CLOSE 1 Pos OPEN 0 t Reclosing 1 t-D1 t-D2 t-Run2Ready 0 t Shot Pre Shot Shot 1 Shot 2 AR.Running 1 0 t AR - Module states Ready Running www.eaton.com Lockout 409 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Auto Reclosing timing diagram for successful 2-shot auto reclosing scheme with acceleration at pre-shot. Fault Inception 1 Clearance 0 t Protection Pickup 1 Reset 0 50P[1].DefaultSet 50P[1]. AdaptSet1 t Protection Trip 1 Reset 0 50P[1].Fasttrip 50P[1].Trip t Bkr State Pos CLOSE 1 Pos OPEN 0 t Reclosing 1 t-D1 t-D2 t-Run2Ready 0 t Shot Pre Shot Shot 1 Shot 2 AR.Running 1 0 t AR - Module states Ready Ready Running Auto Reclosing States during manual breaker closing. Bkr State Pos CLOSE 1 Pos OPEN 0 t Manual Breaker Close 1 t-ManualCloseBlock 0 t AR - Module states Standby t-Man Close Blo Ready Protection Trip while Manual Close Blocking time is Timing What happens if while the timer manual close block time is timing down the protective device gets a trip signal? While the timer manual close block time is timing, any trip during this time period trips the breaker. The manual 410 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 close block timer does not care about that and timing continues until it times out. After it times out, the AR-module looks at the breaker status again and sees that the breaker is open. The AR goes to the »STANDBY« state, no autoreclosure is possible. Note: The AR Does Not go to »LOCKOUT« state!) Bkr State Pos CLOSE 1 Pos OPEN 0 t Manual Breaker Close 1 0 t Protection Trip 1 0 t t-ManualCloseBlock AR - Module states Standby t-Man Close Blo Standby AR Lockout Reset Logic in case lockout Reset coming before manual breaker closed. Bkr State Pos CLOSE 1 Pos OPEN 0 t Manual Breaker Close 1 t-ManualCloseBlock 0 t Lockout Reset 1 Lockout Reset Time 0 t AR - Module states Lockout t-Reset Lockout Standby www.eaton.com t-Man Close Blo Ready 411 IM02602007E EDR-5000 AR Lockout Reset Logic in case lockout Reset coming after manual breaker closed. Bkr State Pos CLOSE 1 Pos OPEN 0 t Manual Breaker Close 1 0 t Lockout Reset 1 t-Lock2Ready t-ManualCloseBlock 0 t AR - Module states Lockout t-Reset Lockout t-Man Close Blo Ready Zone Coordination General Description What does Zone Coordination mean? Zone Coordination means that the upstream protection device is doing a virtual autoreclosure while the downstream protective device is doing a “real” autoreclosure. By means of the zone coordination, selectivity can be kept even if a downstream protective device changes its tripping characteristic after a reclosure cycle. The virtual autoreclosure of the upstream device follows the downstream autoreclosure. What application can be realized by means of Zone Coordination? A radial distribution system is protected by an upstream protective device (with a breaker) and a downstream protective device with a reclosure and fuse. By means of the zone coordination, a “fuse saving scheme” might be realized. In order to “save fuses”, the downstream protective device might trip for the first reclosure attempt at low tripping values (under-grade the fuse, trying to avoid a damaging of the fuse). If the reclosure attempt fails, the tripping values might be raised (over-grade the fuse) for the second reclosure attempt (using higher tripping values/characteristics). What is essential? The triggering thresholds of the upstream and the downstream devices have to be the same but the tripping times have to be selectively. How is Zone Coordination activated? The zone coordination function is part of the autoreclosure element and it can be enabled by setting the parameter »Zone coordination« as »active« within the [Protection Para/AR/General Settings] menu for an upstream feeder protection device. How does the Zone Coordination work (within the upstream protection device)? When the zone coordination function is enabled, it works similar to a normal autoreclose function with the same setting parameters: maximum reclosure attempts, dead timer for each shot, initiate functions for each shot, and other timers for autoreclose process, but with the following zone coordination features to coordinate with the downstream reclosers. • 412 The corresponding dead timer for each shot will be started even if the breaker of the upstream feeder relay is NOT tripped from the assigned initiate protective functions. www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E • The dead timer begins timing once the autoreclose senses a drawback of the assigned overcurrent protection pickup signal. This exhibits that the fault current was tripped by the downstream recloser opening. • The shot counter of an enabled zone coordination will be incremented after the dead timer elapses, even there is no breaker reclosing command issued. Meanwhile, the »T-RUN2READY« timer is started. • If a permanent fault exists after the downstream recloser is reclosed, the fault current makes the upstream overcurrent protection pick up again, but with the pickup thresholds or operating curves controlled by the incremented shot number. In this way, the upstream feeder will “follow” the protective settings of downstream recloser shot by shot. • For a transient fault, the autoreclose with zone coordination will not be initiated again because of absence of the fault current and will be reset normally after the expiration of the reset timer »tRun2Ready«. www.eaton.com 413 IM02602007E EDR-5000 t Protective Device Shot 2 (triggered by: I [2]) Shot 1 (triggered by: I [1]) I t Shot 2 (triggered by: I [2]) Recloser Shot 1 (triggered by: I [1]) I t Tripping Curve of the Fuse I 414 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Direct Commands of the Automatic Reclosure Module Parameter Description Default Menu Path Res TotNo suc Reset all statistic AR counters: Total Inactive, unsuc number of AR, successful and unsuccessful no of AR. Active Inactive [Operation Res ServiceCr Inactive Reset the Service Counters Setting Range /Reset] Inactive, [Operation Active Reset Lock via Reset the AR Lockout via the panel. HMI /Reset] Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active Res Max Shots Resetting the Counter for the maximum / h Cr allowed shots per hour. /Reset] Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active /Reset] Device Planning Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /AR] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /AR] Ex Shot Inc The AR Shot counter will be incremented by 1..n, DI-LogicList this external Signal. This can be used for Zone Coordination (of upstream Auto Reclosure devices). -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /AR] Ex Lock The auto reclosure will locked out by this external Signal (set into the lockout state). 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /AR] www.eaton.com 415 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path DI Reset Ex Lock The Lockout State of the AR can be reset by a digital input. 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /AR] Comm Reset Ex Lock The Lockout State of the AR can be reset by Communication. -.-, -.- [Protection Para Modbus.Comm Cmd 1, /Global Prot Para Modbus.Comm Cmd 2, /AR] Modbus.Comm Cmd 3, Modbus.Comm Cmd 4, Modbus.Comm Cmd 5, Modbus.Comm Cmd 6, Modbus.Comm Cmd 7, Modbus.Comm Cmd 8, Modbus.Comm Cmd 9, Modbus.Comm Cmd 10, Modbus.Comm Cmd 11, Modbus.Comm Cmd 12, Modbus.Comm Cmd 13, Modbus.Comm Cmd 14, Modbus.Comm Cmd 15, Modbus.Comm Cmd 16 Setting Group Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /AR /General Settings] 416 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description ExBlo Fc Zone coordination Setting Range Default Menu Path Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive [Protection Para Zone coordination: Sequence coordination Inactive, is to keep upstream reclosers in step with the downstream ones for fast and delay Active curve operation, thus avoiding over-tripping Inactive /<n> /AR /General Settings] [Protection Para /<n> /AR /General Settings] Ex Shot Inc Fc The AR Shot counter will be incremented by Inactive, this external Signal. This can be used for Zone Coordination (of upstream Auto Active Reclosure devices). Note: This parameter enables the functionality only. The assignment has to be set within the global parameters. Inactive Ex Lock Fc Inactive The auto reclosure will locked out by this external Signal. Note: This parameter enables the functionality only. The assignment has to be set within the global parameters. Inactive, [Protection Para /<n> /AR /General Settings] Active [Protection Para /<n> /AR /General Settings] Reset Mode Reset Mode Auto, Auto [Protection Para HMI, /<n> DI, /AR Comm, /General Settings] HMI And Comm, HMI And DI, Comm And DI, HMI And DI Attempts Maximum number of permitted reclosure attempts. 1-6 1 [Protection Para /<n> /AR /General Settings] www.eaton.com 417 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t-D1 Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase or a ground fault. 0.01 – 9999.00 s 1s [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 1-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 1] t-D2 Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase or a ground fault. 0.01 – 9999.00 s 1s [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 2-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 2] t-D3 Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase or a ground fault. 0.01 – 9999.00 s 1s [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 3-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 3] t-D4 Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase or a ground fault. 0.1 – 9999.00 s 1s [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 4-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 4] t-D5 Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase or a ground fault. 0.01 – 9999.00 s 1s [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 5-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 5] t-D6 Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase or a ground fault. 0.01 – 9999.00 s 1s [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 6] 418 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range tThis timer will be started if the Breaker was 0.01 – 9999.00 s ManualCloseBl switched on manually. While this timer is ock running, AR cannot be started. Default Menu Path 10.0 s [Protection Para /<n> /AR /General Settings] t-Lock2Ready This timer is started by the lockout reset signal, and before the timer expire the AR cannot go to any other state. 0.01 – 9999.00 s 10.0 s [Protection Para /<n> /AR /General Settings] t-Run2Ready Examination Time: If the Breaker remains 0.01 – 9999.00 s after an reclosure attempt (shot) for the duration of this timer in the Closed position, the AR has been successful and the AR module returns into the ready state. 10.0 s [Protection Para /<n> /AR /General Settings] t-Block2Ready The release (de-blocking) of the AR will be delayed for this time, if there is no blocking signal anymore. 0.01 – 9999.00 s 10.0 s [Protection Para /<n> /AR /General Settings] t-AR Supervision AR Overall supervision time (> sum of all the timers used by AR) 1.00 – 9999.00 s 100.0 s [Protection Para /<n> /AR /General Settings] Service Alarm 1 As soon as the AR-Counter exceeds this 1 - 65535 number of reclosure attempts, an alarm will be given out (overhauling of the Bkr.) 1000 [Protection Para /<n> /AR /AR Wear Superv] Service Alarm 2 Too many auto reclosure attempts. If the 1 - 65535 configured number of AR cycles is reached, an alarm will be given out. 65535 [Protection Para /<n> /AR /AR Wear Superv] www.eaton.com 419 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Max AR/h Maximum Number of permitted Autoreclosure Cycles per hour. 1 - 20 10 [Protection Para /<n> /AR /AR Wear Superv] Initiate AR: InitiateFc1 Initiate Auto Reclosure : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> /AR /Shot Manager /Initiate AR] Initiate AR: InitiateFc2 Initiate Auto Reclosure : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> /AR /Shot Manager /Initiate AR] Initiate AR: InitiateFc3 Initiate Auto Reclosure : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> /AR /Shot Manager /Initiate AR] Initiate AR: InitiateFc4 Initiate Auto Reclosure : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> /AR /Shot Manager /Initiate AR] Shot 1: InitiateFc1 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 1-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 1] 420 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Shot 1: InitiateFc2 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 1-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 1] Shot 1: InitiateFc3 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 1-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 1] Shot 1: InitiateFc4 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 1-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 1] Shot 2: InitiateFc1 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 2-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 2] Shot 2: InitiateFc2 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 2-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 2] Shot 2: InitiateFc3 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 2-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 2] www.eaton.com 421 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Shot 2: InitiateFc4 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 2-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 2] Shot 3: InitiateFc1 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 3-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 3] Shot 3: InitiateFc2 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 3-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 3] Shot 3: InitiateFc3 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 3-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 3] Shot 3: InitiateFc4 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 3-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 3] Shot 4: InitiateFc1 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 4-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 4] 422 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Shot 4: InitiateFc2 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 4-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 4] Shot 4: InitiateFc3 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 4-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 4] Shot 4: InitiateFc4 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 4-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 4] Shot 5: InitiateFc1 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 5-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 5] Shot 5: InitiateFc2 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 5-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 5] Shot 5: InitiateFc3 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 5-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 5] www.eaton.com 423 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Shot 5: InitiateFc4 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 5-6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 5] Shot 6: InitiateFc1 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 6] Shot 6: InitiateFc2 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 6] Shot 6: InitiateFc3 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 6] Shot 6: InitiateFc4 Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Attempts = 6 /AR /Shot Manager /Shot 6] Module Automatic Reclosure Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /AR] 424 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /AR] Ex Shot Inc-I Module input state: The AR Shot counter [Protection Para will be incremented by this external Signal. This can be used for Zone Coordination (of /Global Prot Para upstream Auto Reclosure devices). Note: This parameter enables the functionality /AR] only. The assignment has to be set within the global parameters. Ex Lock-I Module input state: External AR lockout. [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /AR] DI Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the lockout state of the AR (if the resetting via digital inputs has been selected). [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /AR] Comm Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the Lockout State of the AR by Communication. [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /AR] Module Automatic Reclosure Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Standby Signal: Standby t-Man Close Blo Signal: AR blocked after breaker was switched on manually. This timer will be started if the breaker was switched on manually. While this timer is running, AR cannot be started. Ready Signal: Ready to shoot Running Signal: Auto Reclosing Running t-dead Signal: Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt Bkr CLOSE Cmd Signal: Bkr. Switch ON (CLOSE) Command t-Run2Ready Signal: Examination Time: If the Breaker remains after a reclosure attempt (shot) for the duration of this timer in the Closed position, the AR has been successful and the AR module returns into the ready state. Lock Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out t-Reset Lockout Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR lockout. The reset of the AR lockout state will be delayed for this time after the reset signal (e.g digital input or Scada) has been detected. www.eaton.com 425 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Blo Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked t-Blo Reset Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR blocking. The release (de-blocking) of the AR will be delayed for this time, if there is no blocking signal anymore. successful Signal: Auto Reclosing successful failed Signal: Auto Reclosing Failure t-AR Supervision Signal: AR Supervision Pre Shot Pre Shot Control Shot 1 Shot Control Shot 2 Shot Control Shot 3 Shot Control Shot 4 Shot Control Shot 5 Shot Control Shot 6 Shot Control Service Alarm 1 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 1, too many switching operations Service Alarm 2 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 2, too many switching operations Max Shots / h exceeded Signal: The maximum allowed number of shots per hour has been exceeded. Res Statistics Cr Signal: Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of AR, successful and unsuccessful no of AR. Res Service Cr Signal: Reset the Service Counters for pickup and blocking. Reset Lockout Signal: The AR Lockout has been reset via the panel. Res Max Shots / h Signal: The Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour has been reset. ARRecCState Signal: AutoReclosing states defined by IEC61850:1=Ready/2=In Progress/3=Successful Automatic Reclosure Module Values Value Description Default Size Menu Path AR Shot No. Counter - Auto Reclosure Attempts 0 0-6 [Operation /Count and RevData /AR] Total number Cr Total number of all executed Automatic Reclosures Attempts 0 0 - 65536 [Operation /Count and RevData /AR] Cr successfl Total number of successfully executed Automatic Reclosures 0 0 - 65536 [Operation /Count and RevData /AR] 426 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Default Size Menu Path Cr failed Total number of unsuccessfully executed automatic reclosure attempts 0 0 - 65536 [Operation /Count and RevData /AR] Cr Service Alarm1 Remaining numbers of ARs until Service Alarm 1 1000 0 - 1000 [Operation /Count and RevData /AR] Cr Service Alarm2 Remaining numbers of ARs until Service Alarm 2 65536 0 - 65536 [Operation /Count and RevData /AR] Max Shots / h Cr Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour. 0 0 - 65536 [Operation /Count and RevData /AR] Setting Group Parameters of the AR Abort Functions Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment: 1 Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the assigned signal is true. If the state of this function is true the AR will be aborted. BlockFct -.- [Protection Para /<n> /AR /BlockFct] Assignment: 2 Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the assigned signal is true. If the state of this function is true the AR will be aborted. BlockFct -.- [Protection Para /<n> /AR /BlockFct] Assignment: 3 Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the assigned signal is true. If the state of this function is true the AR will be aborted. BlockFct -.- [Protection Para /<n> /AR /BlockFct] Assignment: 4 Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the assigned signal is true. If the state of this function is true the AR will be aborted. BlockFct -.- [Protection Para /<n> /AR /BlockFct] www.eaton.com 427 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Assignment: 5 Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the assigned signal is true. If the state of this function is true the AR will be aborted. BlockFct -.- [Protection Para /<n> /AR /BlockFct] Assignment: 6 Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the assigned signal is true. If the state of this function is true the AR will be aborted. BlockFct -.- [Protection Para /<n> /AR /BlockFct] AR Abort Functions Name Description -.- No assignment 50P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27M[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27M[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59M[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59M[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59N[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59N[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 428 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 46[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 47[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 47[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32V[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32V[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32V[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55D[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55D[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command AR Start Functions Name Description -.- No assignment 50P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command www.eaton.com 429 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 50R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 430 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E 46 - Current Unbalance Protection Elements: 46[1] ,46[2] This is the 46 device Current Unbalance setting, which works similar to the 47 device Voltage Unbalance setting. The positive and negative sequence currents are calculated from the 3-phase currents. The Threshold setting defines a minimum operating current magnitude of either I1 or I2 for the 46 function to operate, which insures that the relay has a solid basis for initiating a current unbalance trip. The »%(I2/I1)« setting is the unbalance trip pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current »%(I2/I1)« for ABC rotation and »%(I1/I2)« for ACB rotation. The device will automatically select the correct ratio based on the Phase Sequence setting in the System Configuration group described above. This function requires positive or negative sequence current magnitude above the threshold setting and the percentage current unbalance above the »%(I2/I1)« setting before allowing a current unbalance trip. Therefore, both the threshold and percent settings must be met for the specified Delay time setting before the relay initiates a trip for current unbalance. All elements are identically structured. www.eaton.com 431 432 www.eaton.com IC IB IA 3 2 %(I2/I1) (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings PPS NPS Filter I2 (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name = 46[1]...[n] 46[1]...[n] Name.%(I2/I1) Name.Threshold AND AND 0 t Name.t AND 14 Name.TripCmd 15 Name.Trip Name.Pickup IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". www.eaton.com Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] 433 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Threshold 0.1 In The Threshold setting defines a minimum 0.01 – 4.00 In operating current magnitude of I2 for the 46 function to operate, which ensures that the relay has a solid basis for initiating a current unbalance trip. This is a supervisory function and not a trip level. [Protection Para /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] %(I2/I1) The %(I2/I1) setting is the unbalance trip pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current (% Unbalance=I2/I1), or %(I2/I1) for ABC rotation and %(I1/I2) for ACB rotation. 2 - 40% 46[1]: 40% [Protection Para 46[2]: 20% /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] Only available if: %(I2/I1) = Use t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT 46[1]: 10 s [Protection Para 46[2]: 20 s /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] Current Unbalance Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] 434 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /46[1]] Current Unbalance Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning: Current Unbalance Module Object to be tested: Test of the unbalanced load protection function. Necessary means: • Three-phase current source with adjustable current unbalance; and • Timer. Procedure: Check the phase sequence: • Ensure that the phase sequence is the same as that set in the system parameters. • Feed-in a three-phase nominal current. • Change to the »Measuring Values« menu. • Check the measuring value for the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.«. The measuring value displayed for »I2 Fund.« should be zero (within the physical measuring accuracy). www.eaton.com 435 IM02602007E EDR-5000 If the displayed magnitude for I2 Fund. is the same as that for the balanced nominal currents fed to the relay, it implies that the phase sequence of the currents seen by the relay is reversed. • Now turn-off phase A. • Again check the measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« in the »Measuring Values« menu. The measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« should now be 33%. • Turn-on phase A, but turn-off phase B. • Once again check the measuring value of the unbalanced current I2 Fund. in the »Measuring Values« menu. The measuring value of the asymmetrical current »I2 Fund.« should be again 33%. • Turn-on phase B, but turn-off phase C. • Again check the measuring value of unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« in the »Measuring Values« menu. The measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« should still be 33%. Testing the trip delay: • Apply a balanced three-phase current system (nominal currents). • Switch off IA (the threshold value »Threshold« for »I2 Fund.« must be below 33%). • Measure the tripping time. The present current unbalance »I2 Fund.« corresponds with 1/3 of the existing phase current displayed. Testing the threshold values • Configure minimum »%(I2/I1)« setting (2%) and an arbitrary threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.). • For testing the threshold value, a current has to be fed to phase A which is lower than three times the adjusted threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.). • Feeding only phase A results in »%(I2/I1) = 100%«, so the first condition »%(I2/I1) >= 2%« is always fulfilled. • Now increase the phase A current until the relay is activated. Testing the drop-out ratio of the threshold values Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A current. The drop-out ratio must not be higher than 0.97 times the threshold value. Testing %(I2/I1) • 436 Configure minimum threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.) (0.01 x In) and set »%(I2/I1)« greater or equal to 10%. www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E • Apply a balanced three-phase current system (nominal currents). The measuring value of »%(I2/I1)« should be 0%. • Now increase the phase A current. With this configuration, the threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.) should be reached before the value »%(I2/I1)« reaches the set »%(I2/I1)« ratio threshold. • Continue increasing the phase 1 current until the relay is activated. Testing the drop-out ratio of %(I2/I1) Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A current. The drop-out of »%(I2/I1)« has to be 1% below the »%(I2/I1)«setting. Successful test result: The measured trip delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios are within the permitted deviations/tolerances, specified under Technical Data. www.eaton.com 437 IM02602007E EDR-5000 LOP – Loss of Potential Available elements: LOP LOP function detects the loss of voltage in any of the voltage input measuring circuits and uses the following measured values and information to detect an LOP condition: • Three-phase voltages; • Ratio of negative-to-positive sequence voltages; • Zero sequence voltage; • Three-phase currents; • Residual current (I0); • Pickup flags from all overcurrent elements; and • Breaker status. Once an LOP condition is detected and it lasts longer than an adjustable minimum pickup time, the LOP Pickup will be set. The LOP Block will only be set if the LOP-Block control setting is set to enabled (activated). The LOP Pickup and LOP Block signals can both be used as logical signal to block the protective functions which use the voltage information such as voltage restraint. The minimum pickup timer is used to prevent short time incorrect operation of the LOP function during breaker switching-on operation. 438 www.eaton.com 2 Name = LOP www.eaton.com Bkr state = closed No IOC Pickup 3*I0 IC IB IA V0 %(V2/V1) VC/VCA VB/VBC VA/VAB IOC = Instantaneous Overcurrent 3*I0 < 0.1 x In I < 2 x In V0 < 1.0 V %(V2/V1) > 40% V < 1.0 V (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Active Inactive LOP Blo Enable LOP[1]...[n] AND OR OR AND 0 t-Pickup 0.0 9999 s R S Q 0 t-Min Hold Time 50 ms t-ResetDelay 0 100 ms AND AND Name.LOP Blo 38 Name.Pickup EDR-5000 IM02602007E 439 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the LOP Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Use Use [Device Planning] Global Protection Parameters of the LOP Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /LOP] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /LOP] Setting Group Parameters of the LOP Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Supervision /LOP] ExBlo Fc LOP Blo Enable Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) blocking by the module LOP. Inactive Inactive, Active [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /LOP] [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /LOP] 440 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t-Pickup Pickup Delay 0 – 9999.0 s 0.1 s [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /LOP] LOP Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /LOP] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /LOP] State Module input state: Breaker Position (0 = Indeterminate, 1 = OPEN, 2 = CLOSE, 3 = Disturbed) [] LOP Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Pickup Signal: Pickup Loss of Potential LOP Blo Signal: Loss of Potential blocks other elements Commissioning: Loss of Potential Object to be tested: Testing the LOP. Necessary means: • Three-phase current source and • Three-phase voltage source. www.eaton.com 441 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Procedure part 1: Examine if the output signals »LOP BLO « (200ms delay) and »LOP« only become true if: • • • • • • Any of the three-phase voltages becomes less 1 Volt; and The residual voltage is less than 1 Volt or the %V2/V1 ratio is greater 40% and All three-phase currents are less than 2 * Ipu (rated current); and The residual current is less than 0.1 Ipu (rated current); and No pickup of an IOC element; and The breaker is closed. Successful test result part 1: The output signals only become true if all the above mentioned conditions are fulfilled. Procedure part 2: Assign the »LOP« or »LOP BLO« output signals to all protection element that should be blocked by LOP (e.g.: Undervoltage Protection, Voltage Restraint … ). Test if those elements are blocked if the LOP modules issue a blocking signal. Successful test result part 2: All elements that should be blocked in case of LOP are blocked if the conditions (Procedure part 1) are fulfilled. 442 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E SOTF - Switch Onto Fault Protection SOTF In case a faulty line is energized (e.g.: when an grounding switch is in the CLOSE position), an instantaneous trip is required. The SOTF module is provided to generate a permissive signal for other protection functions such as overcurrents to accelerate their trips. The SOTF condition is recognized according to the User’s operation mode that can be based on: • • • • • The breaker state; No current flowing; Breaker state and no current flowing; Breaker switched on manually; and/or An external trigger. This protection module can initiate a high speed trip of the overcurrent protection modules. The module can be started via a digital input that indicates that the breaker is manually closed. This module issues a signal only (the module is not armed and does not issue a trip command). In order to influence the trip settings of the overcurrent protection in case of switching onto a fault, the User has to assign the signal “SOTF.ENABLED“ to an Adaptive Parameter Set. Please refer to Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets sections. Within the Adaptive Parameter Set, the User has to modify the trip characteristic of the overcurrent protection according to the User's needs. www.eaton.com 443 444 www.eaton.com SOTF.I< Breaker.Prot CLOSE (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings *Applies only for devices with Auto Reclosure AR.Running* Ext SOTF Bkr[x].Ex Man CLOSE Cmd IC IB IA 41 2 Name = SOTF SOTF AND AND Ext SOTF Bkr manual CLOSE Bkr State And I< I< Bkr State SOTF.Mode OR T t SOTF. t-enable 0 OR AND SOTF.AR Blo * SOTF.enabled SOTF.I< IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Mode Mode Bkr State, Bkr manual CLOSE [Protection Para I<, /Global Prot Para Bkr State And I<, /SOTF] Bkr manual CLOSE, Ext SOTF ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /SOTF] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /SOTF] Rvs Blo Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /SOTF] Ext SOTF External Switch Onto Fault 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- Only available if: Mode = Ext SOTF [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /SOTF] Setting Group Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /SOTF] www.eaton.com 445 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description ExBlo Fc Rvs Blo Fc I< Setting Range Default Menu Path Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive [Protection Para Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, reverse blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/element are blocked that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active". Inactive The breaker is in the OPEN Position, if the measured current is less than this parameter. 0.01 In /<n> /SOTF] [Protection Para /<n> /SOTF] 0.01 – 1.00 In [Protection Para /<n> /SOTF] t-enable While this timer is running, and while the module is not blocked, the Switch Onto Fault Module is effective (SOTF is armed). 0.10 – 10.00 s 2s [Protection Para /<n> /SOTF] Switch Onto Fault Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /SOTF] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /SOTF] Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /SOTF] Ex Man CLOSE Cmd-I Module Input State: External manual breaker CLOSE command (NOT for AR!) [] Bkr Pos-I Module input state: Breaker Position by now [] (switching position) Ext SOTF-I Module Input State: External Switch Onto Fault Alarm [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /SOTF] 446 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Signals of the Switch Onto Fault Module (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings. I< Signal: No Load Current. Commissioning: Switch Onto Fault [ANSI 50HS] Object to be tested: Testing the module Switch Onto Fault according to the configured operating mode: • • • • I< (No current); Bkr. state (Breaker position); I< (No current) and Bkr. state (Breaker position); and Bkr. manual CLOSE. Necessary means: • • • Three-phase current source (if the Enable Mode depends on current); Ampere meters (may be needed if the Enable Mode depends on current); and Timer. Test Example for Mode Bkr. Manual CLOSE Mode I< (In order to test the effectiveness): Initially, do not feed any current. Start the timer and feed with an abruptly changing current that is distinctly greater than the I<-threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay. Mode I< and Bkr. state: Simultaneously, manually switch on the breaker and feed with an abrupt change current that is distinctly greater than the I<-threshold. Mode Bkr. state: The breaker has to be in the OFF position. The signal „SOTF.ENABLED“=0 is false. If the breaker is switched on, the signal „SOTF.ENABLED“=1 becomes true as long as the timer t-effective is running. • The breaker has to be in the OPEN position. There must be no load current. • The status display of the device shows the signal "SOTF.ENABLED“=1. Testing: • Manually switch the breaker to the CLOSE position and start the timer at the same time. www.eaton.com 447 IM02602007E EDR-5000 • After the hold time t-enable is expired, the state of the signal has to change to "SOTF.enabled“=0. • Write down the measured time. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios correspond with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section. 448 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup Available Elements: CLPU When manually or automatically closing a breaker after it has been open for a prolonged time, a greater than normal load current may be experienced due to the load inrush . This high starting current causes some overcurrent elements to unnecessarily trip the breaker. The cold load pickup (CLPU) function prevents this from happening. The cold load pickup function detects a warm-to-cold load transition according to the four selectable cold load detection modes: • • • • Breaker state; Undercurrent (I<); Breaker state AND undercurrent; and Breaker state OR undercurrent. After a warm-to-cold load transition has been detected, a specified load-off timer will be started. This Usersettable load-off timer is used in some cases to make sure that the load is really “cold” enough. After the loadoff timer times out, the CLPU function issues an “enable” signal »CLPU.ENABLED« that can be used to block Userselected, sensitive protection elements such as instantaneous overcurrent elements, current unbalance, or power protection elements. Using this enable signal, some User-selected time inverse overcurrent elements may also be desensitized by means of activating adaptive settings of the corresponding overcurrent elements. When a cold load condition is finished (a cold-to-warm load condition is detected) due to, for example, breaker closing or load current injection, a load inrush detector will be initiated that supervises the coming and going of the load inrush current process. A load inrush is detected if the coming load current exceeds a User-specified inrush current threshold. This load inrush is considered as finished if the load current is decreased to 90% of the inrush current threshold. After the inrush current is diminished, a settle timer starts. The cold load pickup enable signal can only be reset after the settle timer times out. Another max-Block timer, which is started parallel with the load inrush detector after a cold load condition is finished, may also terminate the CLPU enable signal if a load inrush condition is prolonged abnormally. The cold load pickup function can be blocked manually by external or internal signal at the User´s choice. For the devices with the Auto-Reclosing function, the CLPU function will be blocked automatically if auto-reclosure is initiated (AR is running). This module issues a signal only (it is not armed). In order to influence the tripping settings of the overcurrent protection, the User has to assign the signal “CLPU.ENABLED“ to an adaptive parameter set. Please refer to the Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets section. Within the adaptive parameter set, the User has to modify the tripping characteristic of the overcurrent protection according to the needs. www.eaton.com 449 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Please be aware of the meaning of the two delay timers. t load Off (Pickup Delay): After this time expires, the load is no longer diversified. t Max Block (Release Delay): After the starting condition is fulfilled (e.g.: breaker switched on manually), the “CLPU.enabled” signal will be issued for this time. That means for the duration of this time, the tripping thresholds of the overcurrent protection can be desensitized by means of adaptive parameters (please refer to the Parameters section). This timer will be stopped if the current falls below 0.9 times of the threshold of the load inrush detector and remains below 0.9 times of the threshold for the duration of the settle time. 450 www.eaton.com CLPU www.eaton.com CLPU.I< Cold Load *Applies only for devices with Auto Reclosure 0.9 * Threshold 0.9 * Threshold 1.0 * Threshold 1.0 * Threshold Load Inrush Detector CLPU.detected CinBkr-52a Imax 0 1 0 1 0 1 Name = CLPU CLPU AR.Running* IC IB IA AND (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Bkr[x].Pos OPEN 2 Name = CLPU Settle Time+e 0 t-Max Block OR AND AND t-Load Off 0 Settle Time Bkr State Or I< Bkr State And I< I< Bkr State CLPU.Mode 0 t-Max Block OR 0 OR t-Load Off R1 S Q Q AND CLPU.Load Inrush CLPU.Settle Time CLPU.enabled CLPU.detected CLPU.I< EDR-5000 IM02602007E Example Mode: Breaker Position 451 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Cold Load Pickup Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameter of the Cold Load Pickup Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Mode Mode Bkr State, Bkr State [Protection Para I<, /Global Prot Para Bkr State Or I<, /CLPU] Bkr State And I< ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /CLPU] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /CLPU] Rvs Blo Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /CLPU] Set Parameters of the Cold Load Pickup Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /CLPU] ExBlo Fc 452 Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". www.eaton.com Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /CLPU] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Rvs Blo Fc t-Load Off Setting Range Default Menu Path Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, reverse blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/element are blocked that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active". Inactive [Protection Para Select the outage time required for a load to 0.00 – 7200.00 s be considered cold. If the Pickup Timer (Delay) has run out, a Cold Load Signal will be issued. 10 s /<n> /CLPU] [Protection Para /<n> /CLPU] t-Max Block Select the maximum amount of time 0.00 – 300.00 s allowed for cold load pickup to be active; if the time has elapsed a warm load signal will be issued. 10 s [Protection Para /<n> /CLPU] I< The breaker is in the OPEN Position, if the measured current is less than this parameter. 0.01 – 1.00 In 0.01 In [Protection Para /<n> /CLPU] Threshold Set the load current inrush threshold. 0.10 – 4.00 In 1.2 In [Protection Para /<n> /CLPU] Settle Time Select the time for the cold load inrush. 0.00 – 300.00 s 1.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /CLPU] States of the Inputs of the Cold Load Pickup Module Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /CLPU] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /CLPU] Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /CLPU] www.eaton.com 453 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via Bkr Pos-I Module input state: Breaker Position by now [] (switching position). Signals of the Cold Load Pickup Module (States of the Outputs) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled detected Signal: Cold Load detected I< Signal: No Load Current. Load Inrush Signal: Load Inrush Settle Time Signal: Settle Time Commissioning of the Cold Load Pickup Module Object to be tested: Testing the Cold Load Pickup module according to the configured operating mode: • • • • I< (No current); Bkr. state (Breaker position); I< (No Current) and Bkr. state (Breaker position); and I< (No Current) or Bkr. state (Breaker position). Necessary means: Three-phase current source (if the Enable Mode depends on current); Ampere meters (may be needed if the Enable Mode depends on current); and • Timer. • Test Example for Mode Bkr. State (Breaker Position) Mode I<: In order to test the tripping delay, start the timer then feed with an abruptly changing current that is distinctly less than the I<-threshold. Measure the tripping delay. In order to measure the drop-out ratio, feed an abruptly changing current that is distinctly above the I<-threshold. Mode I< and Bkr state: Combine the abruptly changing current(switching the current ON and OFF) with the manual switching ON and OFF of the breaker. Mode I< or Bkr state: Initially carry out the test with an abruptly changing current that is switched ON and OFF (above and below the I<-threshold). Measure the tripping times. Finally, carry out the test by manually switching the breaker ON and OFF. 454 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 • The breaker has to be in the OFF position. There must not be any load current. • The Status Display of the device shows the signal "CLPU.ENABLED“=1. • The Status Display of the device shows the signal ”CLPU.I<“=1. IM02602007E Testing the tripping delay and the resetting ratio: • Manually switch the breaker ON and simultaneously start the timer. • • After the the »t Max Block (Release Delay)« timer has expired, the signal "CPLU.Enabled “=0 has to be false. • • Write down the measured time. • • Manually switch the breaker OFF and simultaneously start the timer. • • After the »t load Off« timer has expired, the signal ”CPLU.ENABLED “=1 has to become true. • Write down the measured time. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section. www.eaton.com 455 IM02602007E EDR-5000 27M - Undervoltage Protection Available elements: 27M[1] ,27M[2] M is for “Main” referring to protection metered by the Main Voltage transformer in the System Configuration. All undervoltage elements are identically structured. Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of "Main VT con". In case that within the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Open-Delta": Vn=Main VT sec . In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye": Vn= MainVT sec 3 This is the 27 device undervoltage setting for the main three phase VT. This function consists of a Phase, a Pickup, a Delay setting. The Phase setting allows the User to select at which phase (any one, any two, or all) the undervoltage function operates. The Pickup setting is the magnitude at which the undervoltage element operates. The Delay setting is the time period an undervoltage must occur before the device initiates a trip. Depending on the settings within the System Parameters, the element works based on phase-to-phase (»OpenDelta«) or phase-to-ground (»wye«) voltages. This element will operate depending on the phase setting: if any one, any two, or all of the voltage(s) that is/are selected by the Phase setting drop(s) below the set point. This element works based on RMS values. An undervoltage pickup occurs when the measured voltage drops below the UV Threshold setting. The undervoltage trip is set when the voltage stays below the threshold setting for the delay time specified (within the number of phases specified by the phase setting). The undervoltage pickup and trip is reset when the voltage rises above the drop-out ratio specified in Specifications section for the undervoltage protection. If the element should be blocked in the event of a “Loss of Potential”, the »LOP BLO« parameter must be set to »active«. If the VT measurement location is not at the bus bar side but at the output side, the following has to be taken into account. When disconnecting the line, it has to be ensured by an »External Blocking« that undervoltage tripping cannot happen. In order to block the 27M element in case that the breaker is open: • • Assign the »Bkr.POS OPEN« signal to a blocking input (»ExBlo1« or »ExBlo2« within the Global Parameters) of the 27M element, and »ExBlo Fc« has to be set to “active” within the parameter sets of the the 27M element. When the auxiliary voltage is switched on and the measuring voltage has not yet been applied, undervoltage tripping has to be prevented by an »External 456 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Blocking«. Otherwise a continuous tripping would occur, disabling the ability to energize again. If phase voltages are applied to the measuring inputs of the device and system parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase-to-ground«, the messages issued by the voltage protection module in case of actuation or trip should be interpreted as follows: »27M[1].PICKUP A« or »27M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage »VA«. »27M[1].PICKUP B« or »27M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage »VB«. »27M[1].PICKUP C« or »27M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage »VC«. However, if line-to-line voltages are applied to the measuring inputs and system parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase to Phase«, then the messages should be interpreted as follows: »27M[1].PICKUP A« or »27M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by phase-to-phase voltage »VAB«. »27M[1]. PICKUP B« or »27M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase-to-phase voltage »VBC«. »27M[1]. PICKUP C« or »27M[1].TRIP C« => pickup or trip caused by phase-to-phase voltage »VCA« www.eaton.com 457 458 www.eaton.com 3 VC VB VA 38 2 RMS RMS RMS (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings LOP.LOP Blo Active Inactive Name.LOP Blo V< (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name = 27M[1]...[n] 27M[1]...[n] AND AND AND AND OR AND all any two any one Name.Mode AND AND OR 0 t Name.t AND AND AND AND 14 30 29 28 15 Name.TripCmd Name.Trip 22 Name.Trip Phase C 21 Name.Trip Phase B 20 Name.Trip Phase A Name.Pickup Name.Pickup Phase C Name.Pickup Phase B Name.Pickup Phase A IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Undervoltage Protection Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the Undervoltage Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the Undervoltage Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". www.eaton.com Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] 459 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Phases Any one Indicates if one, two of three or all phases are required for operation Any one, [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] [Protection Para Any two, /<n> All /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.01 – 1.30 Vn element will be started. Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of "Main VT con". In case that within the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Open-Delta" , "Vn = Main VT sec ". In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye", "Vn = Main VT sec/SQRT(3)". 27M[1]: 0.80 Vn [Protection Para 27M[2]: 0.90 Vn /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V< t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 27M[1]: 10 s [Protection Para 27M[2]: 2.00 s /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] LOP Blo Blocking if voltage transformer failure detected. LOP (Loss of Potential) Inactive, Active Active [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] Vstart< If the voltage falls below this voltage, the Time Depending Voltage Protection will be started. 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = Vstart< /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] 460 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path V(t)<1 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.01 Vn [Protection Para Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] t1 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 0.00 s Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] V(t)<2 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.01 Vn Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] t2 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 0.15 s Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] V(t)<3 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.70 Vn Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] t3 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 0.15 s Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] V(t)<4 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< 0.70 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] www.eaton.com 461 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t4 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 0.70 s [Protection Para Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] V(t)<5 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] t5 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 1.50 s Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] V(t)<6 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] t6 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 3.00 s Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] V(t)<7 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] t7 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< 3.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] 462 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path V(t)<8 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn [Protection Para Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] t8 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 3.00 s Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] V(t)<9 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] t9 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 3.00 s Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] V(t)<10 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] t10 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 3.00 s Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V(t)< [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] Undervoltage Protection Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] www.eaton.com 463 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /27M[1]] Undervoltage Protection Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Phase A Signal: Pickup Phase A Pickup Phase B Signal: Pickup Phase B Pickup Phase C Signal: Pickup Phase C Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning: Undervoltage Protection [27M] This test can be carried out similar to the test for overvoltage protection 59M (by using the related undervoltage values). Please consider the following deviations: • For testing the threshold values, the test voltage has to be decreased until the relay is activated. • For detection of the dropout ratio, the measuring quantity has to be increased to achieve more than 103% of the trip value. At 103% of the trip value, the relay is to dropout at the earliest moment. 464 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E 59M - Overvoltage Protection Available elements: 59M[1] ,59M[2] M is for “Main” referring to protection metered by the Main Voltage transformer in the System Configuration. All elements are identically structured. Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of "Main VT con". In case that within the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Open-Delta": Vn=Main VT sec . In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye": Vn= MainVT sec 3 This is the 59 device Overvoltage setting for the Main VT. This element consists of a Phase, a Pickup, and a Delay setting. The Phase setting allows the User to select which phase (any one, any two, or all) the Overvoltage function operates. Depending on the settings within the System Parameters, the element works based on phase-to-phase (»Open-Delta«) or phase-to-ground (»wye«) voltages. This element will operate depending on the phase setting: if any one, any two, or all of the voltage(s) that is/are selected by the Phase setting rise(s) above the set point. This element works based on RMS values. An overvoltage pickup occurs when the measured voltage rises above the overvoltage threshold setting. The overvoltage trip is set when the voltage stays above the threshold setting for the delay time specified (within the number of phases specified by the phase setting).. The overvoltage pickup and trip is reset when the voltage falls below the drop-out ratio specified in Specifications section for the overvoltage protection. If phase voltages are applied to the measuring inputs of the device and system parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase-to-ground«, the messages issued by the voltage protection module in case of actuation or trip should be interpreted as follows: »59M[1].PICKUP A« or »59M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage »VA«. »59M[1].PICKUP B« or »59M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage »VB«. »59M[1].PICKUPC« or »59M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage »VC«. However,if line-to-line voltages are applied to the measuring inputs and system parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase to Phase«, then the messages should be interpreted as follows: »59M[1].PICKUP A« or »59M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by line-to-line voltage »VAB«. »59M[1]. PICKUP B« or »59M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by line-to-line voltage »VBC«. »59M[1]. PICKUP C« or »59M[1].TRIP C« => pickup or trip caused by line-to-line voltage »VCA« www.eaton.com 465 466 www.eaton.com 3 VC VB VA 2 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings RMS RMS RMS V> (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name = 59M[1]...[n] 59M[1]...[n] AND AND AND OR AND all any two any one Name.Mode AND AND OR 0 t Name.t AND AND AND AND 14 30 29 28 15 Name.TripCmd Name.Trip 22 Name.Trip Phase C 21 Name.Trip Phase B 20 Name.Trip Phase A Name.Pickup Name.Pickup Phase C Name.Pickup Phase B Name.Pickup Phase A IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Overvoltage Protection Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the Overvoltage Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the Overvoltage Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". www.eaton.com Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] 467 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Phases Any one Indicates if one, two of three or all phases are required for operation Any one, [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] [Protection Para Any two, /<n> All /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.01 – 1.30 Vn element will be started. Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of "Main VT con". In case that within the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Open-Delta" , "Vn = Main VT sec ". In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye", "Vn = Main VT sec/SQRT(3)". 59M[1]: 1.2 Vn [Protection Para 59M[2]: 1.1 Vn /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V> t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode = V> Or V< 59M[1]: 10 s [Protection Para 59M[2]: 2.00 s /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] Vstart< If the voltage falls below this voltage, the Time Depending Voltage Protection will be started. 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] V(t)<1 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.01 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] 468 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t1 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 0.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] V(t)<2 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.01 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] t2 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 0.15 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] V(t)<3 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.70 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] t3 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 0.15 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] V(t)<4 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.70 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] t4 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 0.70 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] www.eaton.com 469 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path V(t)<5 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] t5 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 1.50 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] V(t)<6 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] t6 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 3.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] V(t)<7 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] t7 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 3.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] V(t)<8 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] 470 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t8 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 3.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] V(t)<9 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] t9 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 3.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] V(t)<10 Pickup value 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.90 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] t10 Tripping delay 0.00 – 10.00 s 3.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] Overvoltage Protection Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] www.eaton.com 471 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Main-V-Prot /59M[1]] Overvoltage Protection Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Phase A Signal: Pickup Phase A Pickup Phase B Signal: Pickup Phase B Pickup Phase C Signal: Pickup Phase C Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning: Overvoltage Protection [59M] Object to be tested: Test of the overvoltage protection elements, 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase (for each element). Necessary means: • Three phase AC voltage source; • Timer for measuring of the tripping time; and • Voltmeter. Procedure (3 x single-phase, 1 x three-phase, for each element) Testing the threshold values: For testing the threshold values and drop-out values, the test voltage has to be increased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances. Testing the trip delay: For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay. The timer is started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips. 472 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Testing the drop-out ratio: Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only drop-out at a minimum of 97% of the trip value. Successful test result: The measured threshold values, trip delays, and drop-out ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data. www.eaton.com 473 IM02602007E EDR-5000 27A - Auxiliary Undervoltage Protection Available elements: 27A[1] ,27A[2] All elements are identically structured. This is the 27A device Undervoltage setting for the Auxiliary VT. This device setting works exactly the same as the 27M except it is a single-phase element only operating from the Auxiliary VT input. The Alarm Delay is the time period a LOP must occur before the device initiates a »LOP BLO« signal that can be used to block other elements like 51V (Voltage Restraint). 474 www.eaton.com V 3 2 www.eaton.com (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings RMS Name.V< (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name = 27A[1]...[n] 27A[1]...[n] AND 0 t Name.t AND Name.TripCmd Name.Pickup 15 23 Name.Trip 14 31 EDR-5000 IM02602007E 475 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Aux. Undervoltage Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the Aux. Undervoltage Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the Aux. Undervoltage Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] ExBlo Fc 476 Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". www.eaton.com Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Pickup 27A[1]: 0.8 Vn [Protection Para 27A[2]: 0.9 Vn /<n> Vn refers to either the primary or secondary 0.01 – 1.30 Vn voltage of the aux VT. [Protection Para /<n> /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] Only available if: Device Planning: 59.Mode = V< /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 27A[1]: 10 s [Protection Para 27A[2]: 2.00 s /<n> /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] Aux. Undervoltage Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] www.eaton.com 477 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /27A[1]] Aux. Undervoltage Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning: Aux. Undervoltage Object to be tested: Aux. undervoltage protection elements. Necessary components: • One-phase AC voltage source; • Timer for measuring of the tripping time; and • Voltmeter. Procedure (for each element): Testing the threshold values For testing the threshold and dropout values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the residual voltage has to be decreased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances. Testing the trip delay For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay. The timer is started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is reached and it is stopped when the relay trips. Testing the dropout ratio Increase the measuring quantity to more than 103% of the trip value. The relay must only dropout at a maximum of 103% of the trip value. Successful test result The measured threshold values, trip delays, and dropout ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data. 478 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E 59A - Auxiliary Overvoltage Protection Available elements: 59A[1] ,59A[2] All elements are identically structured. This is the 59 device Overvoltage setting for the Auxiliary VT. This device setting works exactly the same as the 59M, except it is a single-phase element only operating from the Auxiliary VT input. www.eaton.com 479 480 V 3 2 www.eaton.com (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings RMS Name.Pickup (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name = 59A[1]...[n] 59A[1]...[n] AND 0 t Name.t AND Name.TripCmd Name.Pickup 15 23 Name.Trip 14 31 IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Aux. Overvoltage Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the Aux. Overvoltage Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the Aux. Overvoltage Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". www.eaton.com Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] 481 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Pickup 59A[1]: 1.2 Vn [Protection Para 59A[2]: 1.1 Vn /<n> Vn refers to either the primary or secondary 0.01 – 1.30 Vn voltage of the aux VT. [Protection Para /<n> /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] Only available if: Device Planning: 59.Mode = V> /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 59A[1]: 10 s [Protection Para 59A[2]: 2.00 s /<n> /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] Aux. Overvoltage Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] 482 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Aux-V-Prot /59A[1]] Aux. Overvoltage Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning: Aux. Overvoltage Object to be tested: Aux. Overvoltage protection elements. Necessary components: • One-phase AC voltage source; • Timer for measuring of the tripping time; and • Voltmeter. Procedure (for each element): Testing the threshold values For testing the threshold and dropout values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the voltage has to be increased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances. Testing the trip delay For testing the trip delay a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay. The timer is started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips. Testing the dropout ratio Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only dropout at a minimum of 97% of the trip value. Successful test result The measured threshold values, trip delays, and dropout ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data. www.eaton.com 483 IM02602007E EDR-5000 59N - Neutral Overvoltage Available elements: 59N[1] ,59N[2] All elements are identically structured. This is the 59 device for the Neutral Overvoltage settings. This element offers a criterion setting. The criterion setting tells if the threshold is based on the fundamental (Phasor) or RMS. 484 www.eaton.com www.eaton.com 3 VX 2 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings Fund. Name.Pickup (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name = 59N[1]...[n] 59N[1]...[n] AND 0 t Name.t AND Name.TripCmd Name.Pickup 15 23 Name.Trip 14 31 EDR-5000 IM02602007E 485 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Neutral Overvoltage Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the Neutral Overvoltage Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] Setting Group Parameters of the Neutral Overvoltage Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] ExBlo Fc 486 Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". www.eaton.com Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Pickup 59N[1]: 0.4 Vn [Protection Para 59N[2]: 0.3 Vn /<n> Vn refers to either the primary or secondary 0.01 – 1.30 Vn voltage of the aux VT. [Protection Para /<n> /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] Only available if: Device Planning: 59.Mode = V> /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 59N[1]: 5.00 s [Protection Para 59N[2]: 2.00 s /<n> /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] Neutral Overvoltage Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] www.eaton.com 487 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Neutral-V-Prot /59N[1]] Neutral Overvoltage Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning: Neutral Overvoltage Protection Object to be tested: Neutral overvoltage protection elements. Necessary components: • One-phase AC voltage source; • Timer for measuring of the tripping time; and • Voltmeter. Procedure (for each element): Testing the threshold values For testing the threshold and dropout values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the voltage has to be increased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances. Testing the trip delay For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay. The timer is started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips. Testing the dropout ratio Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only dropout at a minimum of 97% of the trip value. Successful test result The measured threshold values, trip delays, and dropout ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data. 488 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 25 - Sync-check Available Elements: Sync The sync-check function can be bypassed by external sources. In this case, synchronization has to be secured by other synchronizing systems before breaker closing! The Bus voltages are to be measured by the first three measuring inputs of the voltage measuring card (VA/VAB, VB/VBC, VC/VCA). The line voltage is to be measured by the fourth measuring input of the voltage measuring card (VX). In the menu [System Para/General Settings/V Sync] the User has to define to which phase the fourth measuring input is compared. Sync-check The sync-check function is provided for the applications where a line has two-ended power sources. The synccheck function has the abilities to check voltage magnitude, angle differences, and frequency difference (slip frequency) between the bus and the line. If enabled, the sync-check may supervise the closing operation manually, automatically, or both.. This function can be overridden by certain bus-line operation conditions and can be bypassed with an external source. Voltage Difference ΔV The first condition for paralleling two electrical systems is that their voltage phasors have the same magnitude. This can be controlled by the generator's AVR. Bus VA Line VA Bus VC Line VB Line VC Bus VB Frequency Difference (Slip Frequency) ΔF The second condition for paralleling two electrical systems is that their frequencies are nearly equal. This can be controlled by the generator's speed governor. www.eaton.com 489 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Line VA Bus VA Bus f Line f Bus VC Line VB Line VC Bus VB If the generator frequency fBus is not equal to the mains frequency fLine, it results in a slip frequency ΔF = |fBus -fLine| between the two system frequencies. ∆ v(t) t Voltage Curve with Enlarged Resolution. v(t)Line v(t)Busbar v(t) ∆ v(t) t 490 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Angular or Phase Difference. Even if the frequency of both systems is exactly identical, usually an angular difference of the voltage phasors is the case. Bus VA Line VA Angle Diff Bus f = Line f Bus VC Line VB Line VC Bus VB At the instant of synchronization, the angular difference of the two systems should be nearly zero because, otherwise, unwanted load inrushes occur. Theoretically, the angular difference can be regulated to zero by giving short pulses to the speed governors. When paralleling generators with the grid, in practice, synchronization is requested as quick as possible and so usually a slight frequency difference is accepted. In such cases, the angular difference is not constant but changes with the slip frequency ΔF. By taking the breaker closing time into consideration, a lead of the closing release impulse can be calculated in a way that breaker closing takes place at exactly the time when both systems are in angular conformity. Basically the following applies: • Where large rotating masses are concerned, the frequency difference (slip frequency) of the two systems should possibly be nearly zero, because of the very high load inrushes at the instant of breaker closing. For smaller rotating masses, the frequency difference of the systems can be higher. Synchronization Modes The sync-check module is able to check the synchronization of two electrical systems (system-to-system) or between a generator and an electrical system (generator-to-system). For paralleling two electrical systems, the station frequency, voltage, and phase angle should be exactly the same as the utility grid. Whereas the synchronization of a generator to a system can be done with a certain slip-frequency, depending on the size of the generator used. Therefore the maximum breaker closing time has to be taken into consideration. With the set breaker closing time, the sync-check module is able to calculate the moment of synchronization and gives the paralleling release. When paralleling two systems, it has to be verified that the system-tosystem mode is selected. Paralleling two systems in generator-to-system mode can cause severe damage! Working Principle Sync-check (Generator-to-System) (Please refer to the block diagram following this section.) The sync-check element measures the three phase-to-neutral voltages »VA«, »VB«, and »VC« or the three phase-to-phase voltages »VAB«, »VBC«, and »VCA« of the generator busbar. The line voltage Vx is measured www.eaton.com 491 IM02602007E EDR-5000 by the fourth voltage input. If all synchronous conditions are fulfilled (i. e.: ΔV [VoltageDiff], ΔF [SlipFrequency], and Δφ [AngleDiff]) are within the limits, a signal will be issued that both systems are synchronous. An advanced Close Angle Evaluator function takes the breaker closing time into consideration. 492 www.eaton.com Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings www.eaton.com t t-MaxBkrCloseDelay Angle difference: Line to Bus Frequency difference: Line to Bus Voltage difference: Line to Bus Line VX Bus VCA Bus VC Bus VBC Bus VB Bus VAB Wye Open-Delta Main VT con Advanced Close Angle Calculator MaxAngleDiff MaxSlipFrequency MaxVoltageDiff MaxDeadLineVoltage MinLiveLineVoltage MaxDeadBusVoltage MinLiveBusVoltage BkrCloseInitiate SyncMode= Generator2System (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Bus VA 2 Sync=: SyncMode= Generator2System LL DB LB 0 t-VoltDead AND AND AND DL LBLL DBDL=Active AND 0 t-VoltDead Bypass-I Bypass= Active DBLL = Active LBDL=Active Bkr=Open AND AND AND AND DBDL DBLL AND LBDL AND AND Bypass override AND AND Sync override OR Bkr=Open 0 t-MaxSyncSuperv Ext. Blocked OR AND AND AND AngleDiffTooHigh Sys-in-Sync SlipTooHigh VDiffTooHigh LiveLine In-Sync Allowed LiveBus SyncOverridden SynchronFailed SynchronRunTiming EDR-5000 IM02602007E 493 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Working Principle Sync-check (System-to-System) (Please refer to the block diagram on next page.) The sync-check function for two systems is very similar to the sync-check function for generator-to-system except there is no need to take the breaker closing time into account. The sync-check element measures the three phase-to-neutral voltages »VA«, »VB«, and »VC« or the three phase-to-phase voltages »VAB«, »VBC«, and »VCA« of the station voltage bus bar. The line voltage Vx is measured by the fourth voltage input. If all synchronous conditions are fulfilled (i. e.: ΔV [VoltageDiff], ΔF [SlipFrequency], and Δφ [AngleDiff]) are within the limits, a signal will be issued that both systems are synchronous. 494 www.eaton.com Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings www.eaton.com Angle difference: Line to Bus Frequency difference: Line to Bus Voltage difference: Line to Bus Line VX Bus VCA Bus VC Bus VBC Bus VB Bus VAB Wye Open-Delta Main VT con MaxAngleDiff MaxSlipFrequency MaxVoltageDiff MaxDeadLineVoltage MinLiveLineVoltage MaxDeadBusVoltage MinLiveBusVoltage (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Bus VA 2 Sync=: SyncMode= System2System LL DB LB 0 t-VoltDead AND AND DL LBLL DBDL=Active AND 0 t-VoltDead Bypass-I Bypass= Active DBLL = Active LBDL=Active AND AND AND AND DBDL DBLL AND LBDL AND AND Bypass override AND Sync override OR Ext. Blocked OR AND AngleDiffTooHigh Sys-in-Sync SlipTooHigh VDiffTooHigh LiveLine In-Sync Allowed LiveBus SyncOverridden EDR-5000 IM02602007E 495 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Sync-check Override Conditions If enabled the following conditions can override the sync-check function: • • • LBDL = Live Bus – Dead Line DBLL = Dead Bus – Live Line DBDL = Dead Bus – Dead Line Also the sync-check function can be bypassed by an external source. When the sync-check function is overridden or bypassed, synchronization has to be secured by other synchronizing systems before breaker closing! Device Planning Parameters of the Sync-check Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Trigger Signals for Sync-check Name Description -.- No assignment DI-8P X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input Logic.LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE2.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE2.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE2.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE2.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE3.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE3.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE3.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE3.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) 496 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE4.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE4.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE4.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE4.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE5.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE5.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE5.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE5.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE6.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE6.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE6.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE6.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE7.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE7.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE7.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE7.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE8.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE8.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE8.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE8.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE9.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE9.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE9.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE9.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE10.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE10.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE10.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE10.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE11.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE11.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE11.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE11.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE12.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE12.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE12.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE12.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE13.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE13.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE13.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) www.eaton.com 497 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE13.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE14.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE14.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE14.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE14.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE15.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE15.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE15.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE15.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE16.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE16.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE16.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE16.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE17.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE17.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE17.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE17.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE18.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE18.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE18.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE18.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE19.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE19.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE19.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE19.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE20.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE20.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE20.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE20.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE21.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE21.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE21.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE21.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE22.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE22.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE22.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE22.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE23.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE23.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output 498 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE23.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE23.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE24.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE24.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE24.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE24.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE25.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE25.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE25.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE25.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE26.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE26.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE26.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE26.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE27.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE27.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE27.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE27.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE28.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE28.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE28.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE28.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE29.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE29.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE29.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE29.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE30.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE30.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE30.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE30.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE31.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE31.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE31.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE31.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE32.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE32.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE32.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE32.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE33.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate www.eaton.com 499 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE33.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE33.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE33.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE34.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE34.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE34.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE34.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE35.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE35.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE35.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE35.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE36.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE36.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE36.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE36.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE37.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE37.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE37.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE37.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE38.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE38.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE38.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE38.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE39.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE39.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE39.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE39.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE40.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE40.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE40.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE40.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE41.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE41.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE41.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE41.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE42.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE42.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE42.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE42.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) 500 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE43.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE43.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE43.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE43.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE44.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE44.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE44.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE44.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE45.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE45.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE45.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE45.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE46.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE46.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE46.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE46.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE47.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE47.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE47.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE47.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE48.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE48.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE48.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE48.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE49.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE49.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE49.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE49.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE50.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE50.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE50.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE50.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE51.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE51.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE51.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE51.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE52.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE52.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE52.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) www.eaton.com 501 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE52.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE53.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE53.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE53.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE53.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE54.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE54.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE54.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE54.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE55.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE55.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE55.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE55.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE56.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE56.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE56.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE56.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE57.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE57.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE57.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE57.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE58.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE58.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE58.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE58.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE59.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE59.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE59.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE59.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE60.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE60.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE60.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE60.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE61.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE61.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE61.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE61.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE62.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE62.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output 502 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE62.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE62.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE63.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE63.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE63.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE63.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE64.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE64.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE64.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE64.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE65.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE65.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE65.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE65.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE66.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE66.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE66.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE66.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE67.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE67.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE67.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE67.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE68.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE68.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE68.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE68.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE69.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE69.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE69.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE69.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE70.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE70.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE70.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE70.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE71.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE71.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE71.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE71.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE72.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate www.eaton.com 503 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE72.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE72.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE72.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE73.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE73.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE73.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE73.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE74.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE74.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE74.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE74.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE75.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE75.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE75.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE75.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE76.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE76.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE76.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE76.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE77.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE77.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE77.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE77.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE78.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE78.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE78.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE78.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE79.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE79.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE79.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE79.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE80.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE80.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE80.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE80.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Sys.Maint Mode Active Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Active Sys.Maint Mode Inactive Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Inactive 504 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Sync-check Release Signals Name Description -.- No assignment Sync.In-Sync Allowed Signal: In-Sync Allowed DI-8P X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input Logic.LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE2.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE2.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE2.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE2.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE3.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE3.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE3.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE3.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE4.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE4.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE4.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE4.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE5.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE5.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE5.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE5.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE6.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE6.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE6.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE6.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE7.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE7.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE7.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE7.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) www.eaton.com 505 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE8.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE8.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE8.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE8.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE9.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE9.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE9.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE9.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE10.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE10.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE10.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE10.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE11.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE11.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE11.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE11.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE12.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE12.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE12.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE12.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE13.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE13.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE13.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE13.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE14.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE14.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE14.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE14.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE15.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE15.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE15.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE15.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE16.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE16.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE16.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE16.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE17.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE17.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE17.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) 506 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE17.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE18.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE18.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE18.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE18.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE19.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE19.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE19.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE19.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE20.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE20.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE20.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE20.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE21.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE21.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE21.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE21.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE22.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE22.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE22.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE22.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE23.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE23.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE23.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE23.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE24.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE24.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE24.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE24.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE25.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE25.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE25.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE25.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE26.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE26.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE26.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE26.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE27.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE27.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output www.eaton.com 507 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE27.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE27.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE28.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE28.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE28.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE28.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE29.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE29.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE29.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE29.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE30.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE30.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE30.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE30.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE31.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE31.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE31.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE31.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE32.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE32.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE32.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE32.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE33.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE33.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE33.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE33.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE34.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE34.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE34.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE34.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE35.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE35.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE35.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE35.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE36.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE36.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE36.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE36.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE37.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate 508 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE37.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE37.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE37.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE38.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE38.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE38.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE38.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE39.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE39.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE39.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE39.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE40.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE40.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE40.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE40.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE41.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE41.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE41.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE41.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE42.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE42.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE42.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE42.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE43.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE43.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE43.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE43.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE44.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE44.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE44.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE44.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE45.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE45.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE45.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE45.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE46.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE46.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE46.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE46.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) www.eaton.com 509 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE47.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE47.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE47.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE47.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE48.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE48.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE48.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE48.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE49.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE49.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE49.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE49.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE50.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE50.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE50.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE50.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE51.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE51.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE51.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE51.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE52.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE52.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE52.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE52.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE53.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE53.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE53.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE53.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE54.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE54.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE54.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE54.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE55.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE55.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE55.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE55.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE56.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE56.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE56.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) 510 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE56.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE57.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE57.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE57.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE57.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE58.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE58.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE58.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE58.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE59.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE59.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE59.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE59.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE60.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE60.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE60.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE60.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE61.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE61.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE61.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE61.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE62.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE62.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE62.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE62.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE63.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE63.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE63.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE63.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE64.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE64.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE64.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE64.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE65.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE65.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE65.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE65.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE66.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE66.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output www.eaton.com 511 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE66.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE66.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE67.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE67.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE67.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE67.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE68.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE68.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE68.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE68.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE69.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE69.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE69.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE69.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE70.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE70.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE70.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE70.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE71.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE71.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE71.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE71.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE72.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE72.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE72.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE72.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE73.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE73.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE73.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE73.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE74.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE74.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE74.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE74.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE75.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE75.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE75.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE75.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE76.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate 512 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE76.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE76.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE76.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE77.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE77.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE77.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE77.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE78.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE78.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE78.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE78.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE79.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE79.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE79.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE79.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE80.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE80.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE80.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE80.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Global Protection Parameter of the Sync-check Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Sync] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Sync] Bypass The Sync-check will be bypassed if the state of the assigned signal (logic input) becomes true. 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Sync] BkrCloseInitiate Breaker Close Initiate with sync-check from 1..n, SyncRequestList any control sources (e.g.: HMI / SCADA). If the state of the assigned signal becomes true, a Breaker Close will be initiated (Trigger Source). www.eaton.com -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Sync] 513 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Set Parameters of the Sync-check Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Sync /General Settings] ExBlo Fc Bypass Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Allowing to bypass the Sync-check, if the state signal that is assigned to the parameter with the same name within the Global Parameters (logic input) becomes true. Inactive Inactive, [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /General Settings] Active [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /General Settings] SyncMode Sync-check mode: GENERATOR2SYSTEM System2System, = Synchronizing generator to system (breaker close initiate needed). Generator2System SYSTEM2SYSTEM = Sync-check between two systems (Stand-Alone, no breaker info needed). System2System [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /Mode / Times] tMaximum breaker close time delay (Only MaxBkrCloseD used for GENERATOR-SYSTEM working elay mode and is critical for a correct synchronized switching) . 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.05 s [Protection Para /<n> /Sync Only available if: SyncMode = System2System /Mode / Times] tSynchron-Run timer: Max. time allowed for 0.00 – 3000.00 s MaxSyncSuper synchronizing process after a close initiate. v Only used for GENERATOR2SYSTEM working mode. 30.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Sync Only available if: SyncMode = System2System /Mode / Times] MinLiveBusVolt Minimum Live Bus voltage (Live bus 0.10 – 1.30 Vn age detected, when all three phase bus voltages are above this limit). 0.65 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /DeadLiveVLevels] 514 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path MaxDeadBusV Maximum Dead Bus voltage (Dead bus 0.01 – 1.00 Vn oltage detected, when all three phase bus voltages are below this limit). 0.03 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /DeadLiveVLevels] MinLiveLineVol Minimum Live Line voltage (Live line tage detected, when line voltage above this limit). 0.10 – 1.30 Vn 0.65 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /DeadLiveVLevels] MaxDeadLineV Maximum Dead Line voltage (Dead Line 0.01 – 1.00 Vn oltage detected, when line voltage below this limit). 0.03 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /DeadLiveVLevels] t-VoltDead Voltage dead time (A Dead Bus/Line 0.000 – 300.000 s condition will be accepted only if the voltage falls below the set dead voltage levels longer than this time setting). 0.167 s [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /DeadLiveVLevels] MaxVoltageDiff Maximum voltage difference between bus and line voltage phasors (Delta V) for synchronism (Related to bus voltage secondary rating). 0.01 – 1.00 Vn 0.24 Vn [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /Conditions] MaxSlipFreque Maximum frequency difference (Slip: Delta ncy f) between bus and line voltage allowed for synchronism 0.01 – 2.00 Hz 0.20 Hz [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /Conditions] MaxAngleDiff Maximum phase angle difference (Delta-Phi 1 - 60° in degree) between bus and line voltages allowed for synchronism. 20° [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /Conditions] www.eaton.com 515 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path DBDL Enable/disable Dead-Bus AND Dead-Line synchronism overriding. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Sync /Override] DBLL Enable/disable Dead-Bus AND Live-Line synchronism overriding. Inactive, Inactive Active [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /Override] LBDL Enable/disable Live-Bus AND Dead-Line synchronism overriding. Inactive, Inactive Active [Protection Para /<n> /Sync /Override] States of the Inputs of the Sync-check Module Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Sync] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Sync] Bypass-I State of the module input: Bypass [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Sync] BkrCloseInitiate-I 516 State of the module input: Breaker Close Initiate with synchronism check from any control sources (e.g. HMI / SCADA). If the state of the assigned signal becomes true, a Breaker Close will be initiated (Trigger Source). www.eaton.com [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Sync] IM02602007E EDR-5000 Signals of the Sync-check Module (States of the Outputs) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking LiveBus Signal: Live-Bus or Dead-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Dead-Bus LiveLine Signal: Live-Line or Dead-Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Dead-Line Sync-check RunTiming Signal: Sync-check RunTiming Sync-checkFailed Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for 5s when the breaker is still open after the Sync-check Run-timer has timed out. SyncOverridden Signal:Sync-check is overridden because one of the Sync-check overriding conditions (DB/DL or ExtBypass) is met. VDiffTooHigh Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high. SlipTooHigh Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line voltages too high. AngleDiffTooHigh Signal: Phase Angle difference between bus and line voltages too high. Sys-in-Sync Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the system synchronism criteria. In-Sync Allowed Signal: In-Sync Allowed. Sync-check Statistic Values Value Description Menu Path Slip Freq Slip frequency [Operation /Measured Values /Synchronism] Volt Diff Voltage difference [Operation /Measured Values /Synchronism] Angle Diff Angle difference [Operation /Measured Values /Synchronism] f Bus Bus frequency [Operation /Measured Values /Synchronism] www.eaton.com 517 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Value Description Menu Path f Line Line frequency [Operation /Measured Values /Synchronism] V Bus Bus Voltage [Operation /Measured Values /Synchronism] V Line Line Voltage [Operation /Measured Values /Synchronism] Angle Bus Bus Angle (Reference) [Operation /Measured Values /Synchronism] Angle Line Line Angle [Operation /Measured Values /Synchronism] 518 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E 47 - Voltage Unbalance Protection Available elements: 47[1] ,47[2] This is the 47 device Voltage Unbalance setting, which consists of the threshold, %(V2/V1), and delay settings. The voltage unbalance function is based on the Main VT system 3-phase voltages. The positive and negative sequence voltages are calculated from the 3-phase voltages. The threshold setting defines a minimum operating voltage magnitude of either V1 or V2 for the 47 function to operate, which ensures that the relay has a solid basis for initiating a voltage unbalance trip. This is a supervisory function and not a trip level. The %(V2/V1) setting is the unbalance trip pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence voltage to positive sequence voltage (% Unbalance=V2/V1), or %(V2/V1) for ABC rotation and %(V1/V2) for ACB rotation. The device will automatically select the correct ratio based on the phase sequence setting in the System Configuration group described above. This function requires positive or negative sequence voltage magnitude above the threshold setting and the percentage voltage unbalance above the %(V2/V1) setting before allowing a voltage unbalance trip. Therefore, both the threshold and percent settings must be met for the specified Delay time setting before the relay initiates a trip for voltage unbalance. The voltage unbalance pickup and trip functions are reset when the positive and negative sequence voltages V1 and V2 drop below the threshold setting or (V2/V1) drops below the %(V2/V1) setting minus 1%. www.eaton.com 519 520 3 2 www.eaton.com NPS Filter (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings VC VB VA PPS Filter (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Threshold V1< V1> Name.Mode Device Planning Name = 47[1]...[n] 47[1]...[n] V2 V1 Name.%(V2/V1) Name.Threshold AND AND 0 t Name.t AND Name.TripCmd Name.Trip 15 14 Name.Pickup IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Unbalance Module Parameter Description Options Mode Unbalance Protection: Supervision of the Voltage System Do not use, Default Menu Path Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Unbalance Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true.1 Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true.2 -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] Parameter Set Parameters of the Voltage Unbalance Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". www.eaton.com Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] 521 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Threshold 0.2 Vn The threshold defines a minimum operating 0.01 – 1.30 Vn voltage magnitude of either V1 or V2 for the 47 function to operate, which ensures that the relay has a solid basis for initiating a voltage unbalance trip. This is a supervisory function and not a trip level. The meaning of Vn: Phase to Phase: Vn = Main VT sec. Phase to Ground: Vn = Main VT / SQRT(3). [Protection Para /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] Only available if: Device Planning: 47.Mode = Threshold %(V2/V1) The %(V2/V1) setting is the unbalance trip 2 - 40% pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence voltage to positive sequence voltage (% Unbalance=V2/V1), or %(V2/V1) for ABC rotation and %(V1/V2) for ACB rotation. 47[1]: 40% [Protection Para 47[2]: 20% /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] Only available if: %(V2/V1) = Use t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 47[1]: 10.0 s [Protection Para 47[2]: 20 s /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] LOP Blo Blocking if voltage transformer failure detected. LOP (Loss of Potential) Inactive, Active Only available if: Device Planning: 47.Mode = Threshold Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] 522 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 States of the Inputs of the Voltage Unbalance Module Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Unbalance-Prot /47[1]] Signals of the Voltage Unbalance Module (States of the Outputs) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning: Voltage Unbalance Module Object to be tested: Test of the unbalanced load protection function. Necessary means: • Three-phase AC voltage source with adjustable voltage unbalance; and • Timer. Procedure: Check the phase sequence: www.eaton.com 523 IM02602007E EDR-5000 • Ensure that the phase sequence is the same as that set in the system parameters. • Feed-in a three-phase nominal voltage. • Change to the [Measured Values/Voltage] menu. • Check the measuring value for the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.«. The measuring value displayed for »V2 Fund.« should be zero (within the physical measuring accuracy). If the displayed magnitude for V2 Fund. is the same as that for the balanced nominal voltages fed to the relay, it implies that the phase sequence of the voltages seen by the relay is reversed. • Now turn-off phase A. • Again check the measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« in the [Measured Values/Voltage] menu. The measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« should now be 33% of the nominal voltage. • Turn-on phase A, but turn-off phase B. • Once again check the measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« in the [Measured Values/ Voltage] menu. The measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« should be again 33%. • Turn-on phase B, but turn-off phase C. • Again check the measuring value of unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« in the [Measured Values/Voltage] menu. The measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« should still be 33%. • Testing the trip delay: • Apply a balanced three-phase voltage system (nominal voltages). • Switch off VA (the threshold value »Threshold« for »V2 Fund.« must be below 33% of the nominal voltage Vn). • Measure the tripping time. The present voltage unbalance »V2 Fund.« corresponds with 1/3 of the existing phase voltage displayed. Testing the threshold values • Configure minimum »%(V2/V1)« setting (2%) and an arbitrary threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.). • For testing the threshold value, a voltage has to be fed to phase A which is lower than three times the adjusted threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.). • Feeding only phase A results in »%(V2/V1) = 100%«, so the first condition »%(V2/V1) >= 2%« is always fulfilled. • Now increase the phase A voltage until the relay is activated. 524 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Testing the drop-out ratio of the threshold values Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A voltage. The drop-out ratio must not be higher than 0.97 times the threshold value. Testing %(V2/V1) • Configure minimum threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.) (0.01 x Vn) and set »%(V2/V1)« greater or equal to 10%. • Apply a balanced three-phase voltage system (nominal voltages). The measuring value of »%(V2/V1)« should be approximately 0%. • Now increase the phase A voltage. With this configuration, the threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.) should be reached before the value »%(V2/V1)« reaches the set »%(V2/V1)« ratio threshold. • Continue increasing the phase 1 voltage until the relay is activated. Testing the drop-out ratio of %(V2/V1) Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A voltage. The drop-out of »%(V2/V1)« has to be 1% below the »%(V2/V1)«setting. Successful test result: The measured trip delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios are within the permitted deviations/tolerances, specified under Technical Data. www.eaton.com 525 IM02602007E EDR-5000 81O/U, 81R, 78V Frequency Protection Available elements: 81[1] ,81[2] ,81[3] ,81[4] ,81[5] ,81[6] All frequency protective elements are identically structured. Frequency - Measuring Principle The frequency is calculated as the average of the measured values of the three phase frequencies. Only valid measured frequency values are taken into account. If a phase voltage is no longer measurable, this phase will be excluded from the calculation of the average value. The measuring principle of the frequency supervision is based in general on the time measurement of complete cycles, whereby a new measurement is started at each zero passage. The influence of harmonics on the measuring result is thus minimized. V(t) T t T Frequency tripping is sometimes not desired by low measured voltages which, for instance. occur during alternator acceleration. All frequency supervision functions are blocked if the voltage is lower 0.15 times Vn. Frequency Functions Due to its various frequency functions, the device is very flexible. That makes it suitable for a wide range of applications where frequency supervision is an important criterion. In the Device Planning menu, the User can decide how to use each of the six frequency elements. f[1] to f[6] can be assigned as: • • • • • • • • 526 81U – Under-frequency; 81O – Over-frequency; 81R – Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt); 81UR – Under-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt); 81OR – Over-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt); 81UΔR – Under-frequency and DF/DT (absolute frequency change per definite time interval); 81OΔR – Over-frequency and DF/DT (absolute frequency change per definite time interval); and 78V – Vector Surge. www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E 81U – Under-frequency This protection element provides a pickup threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency falls below the set pickup threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency remains under the set pickup threshold until the tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued. With this setting, the frequency element protects electrical generators, loads, or electrical operating equipment in general against under-frequency. 81O – Over-frequency This protection element provides a pickup threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency exceeds the set pickup threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency remains above the set pickup threshold until the tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued. With this setting, the frequency element protects electrical generators, loads, or electrical operating equipment in general against over-frequency. Working Principle (Please refer to the block diagram on next page.) The frequency element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase voltages is below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode set in the Device Planning (81U or 81O), the phase voltages are compared to the set pickup threshold for overor under-frequency. If in any of the phases, the frequency exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously and the tripping delay timer is started. When the frequency still exceeds or is below the set pickup threshold after the tripping delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued. www.eaton.com 527 528 3 2 Or 81O-Over www.eaton.com <15%Vn <15%Vn <15%Vn Frequency Calculation f (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings VC VB VA (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name = 81[1]...[n] 81[1]...[n]:81U-Under AND Name.f (81O-Over|81UUnder) 81O-Over: 81U-Under 81U-Under: 81O-Over Name.Mode Device Planning AND 0 t Name.t AND 15 Name.Blo by V< Name.TripCmd Name.Trip Name.Trip 81 14 Name.Pickup 81 Name.Pickup IM02602007E EDR-5000 EDR-5000 IM02602007E 81R Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt) Electrical generators running in parallel with the mains (e. g.: industrial internal power supply plants) should be separated from the mains when failure in the intra-system occurs for the following reasons: • Damage to electrical generators must be prevented when mains voltage is recovering asynchronously (e. g.: after a short interruption). • The industrial internal power supply must be maintained. A reliable criterion of detecting mains failure is the measurement of the rate of change of frequency 81R (df/dt). The precondition for this is a load flow via the mains coupling point. At mains failure, the load flow change spontaneously leads to an increasing or decreasing frequency. At active power deficit of the internal power station, a linear drop of the frequency occurs and a linear increase occurs at power excess. Typical frequency gradients during application of "mains decoupling" are in the range of 0.5 Hz/s up to over 2 Hz/s. The protective device detects the instantaneous frequency gradient 81R (df/dt) of each mains voltage period. Through multiple evaluations of the frequency gradient in sequence, the continuity of the directional change (sign of the frequency gradient) is determined. Because of this special measuring procedure, a high safety in tripping and thus a high stability against transient processes (e. g.: switching procedure) are achieved. The frequency gradient (rate of change of frequency [df/dt]) may have a negative or positive sign, depending on frequency increase (positive sign) or decrease (negative sign). In the frequency parameter sets, the User can define the kind of df/dt mode: • • • Positive df/dt = the frequency element detects an increase in frequency; Negative df/dt = the frequency element detects a decrease in frequency; and Absolute df/dt (positive and negative) = the frequency element detects both, increase and decrease in frequency. This protection element provides a tripping threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency gradient df/dt exceeds or falls below the set tripping threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency gradient remains still above/below the set tripping threshold until the tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued. Working Principle (Please refer to block diagram on next page.) The frequency element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase voltages is below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode set in the Device Planning (81R), the phase voltages are compared to the set frequency gradient (df/dt) threshold. If in any of the phases, the frequency gradient exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold (acc. to the set df/dt mode) and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously and the tripping delay timer is started. When the frequency gradient still exceeds or is below the set pickup threshold after the tripping delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued. www.eaton.com 529 530 www.eaton.com VC VB 3 Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings <15%Vn <15%Vn <15%Vn df/dt Calculation 81R-Rate of Change Name.Mode Device Planning (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) VA 2 81[1]...[n]: 81R-Rate of Change Name = 81[1]...[n] Absolute df/dt AND Idf/dtI -df/dt +df/dt Negative df/dt Positive df/dt df/dt Mode 81R-Rate of Change AND 0 t Name.t AND 14 15 Name.Blo by V< Name.TripCmd Name.Trip Name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT Name.Pickup Name.Pickup df/dt | DF/DT IM02602007E EDR-5000 EDR-5000 IM02602007E 81UR – Under-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt) With this setting, the frequency element supervises if the frequency falls below a set pickup threshold and if the frequency gradient exceeds a set threshold at the same time. In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an under-frequency pickup threshold f<, a frequency gradient df/dt, and a tripping delay can be set. Whereby: • • • Positive df/dt = the frequency element detects an increase in frequency; Negative df/dt = the frequency element detects a decrease in frequency; and Absolute df/dt (positive and negative) = the frequency element detects both, increase and decrease in frequency. 81OR – Over-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt) With this setting, the frequency element supervises if the frequency exceeds a set pickup threshold and if the frequency gradient exceeds a set threshold at the same time. In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an over-frequency pickup threshold f>, a frequency gradient df/dt, and a tripping delay can be set. Whereby: • • • Positive df/dt = the frequency element detects an increase in frequency; Negative df/dt = the frequency element detects a decrease in frequency; and Absolute df/dt (positive and negative) = the frequency element detects both, increase and decrease in frequency. Working Principle (Please refer to block diagram on next page.) The frequency element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase voltages is below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode set in the Device Planning (81UR & df/dt or 81OR & dt/dt), the phase voltages are compared to the set frequency pickup threshold and the set frequency gradient (df/dt) threshold. If in any of the phases, both the frequency and the frequency gradient exceed or falls below the set thresholds and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously and the tripping delay timer is started. When the frequency and the frequency gradient still exceed or are below the set threshold after the tripping delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued. www.eaton.com 531 532 3 2 www.eaton.com <15%Vn <15%Vn <15%Vn df/dt Calculation Frequency Calculation f f (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings VC VB VA (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Idf/dtI -df/dt +df/dt AND Absolute df/dt Negative df/dt Positive df/dt df/dt Mode 81U-Under 81O-Over 81UR- Under & df/dt 81OR- Over & df/dt Name.Mode Device Planning 81[1]...[n]: 81UR- Under & df/dt Or 81OR- Over & df/dt Name = 81[1]...[n] 81R-Rate of Change f AND 0 t Name.t AND Name.Pickup 81 14 15 Name.Blo by V< Name.TripCmd Name.Trip Name.Trip 81 Name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT Name.Pickup Name.Pickup df/dt | DF/DT IM02602007E EDR-5000 EDR-5000 IM02602007E 81UΔR – Under-frequency and DF/DT With this setting, the frequency element supervises the frequency and the absolute frequency difference during a definite time interval. In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an under-frequency pickup threshold f<, a threshold for the absolute frequency difference (frequency decrease) DF and supervision interval DT can be set. 81OΔR – Over-frequency and DF/DT With this setting, the frequency element supervises the frequency and the absolute frequency difference during a definite time interval. In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an over-frequency pickup threshold f>, a threshold for the absolute frequency difference (frequency increase) DF and supervision interval DT can be set. Working Principle (Please refer to block diagram on next page.) The frequency element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase voltages is below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode set in the Device Planning (81UR & DF/DT or 81OR & DF/DT), the phase voltages are compared to the set frequency pickup threshold and the set frequency decrease or increase threshold DF. If in any of the phases, the frequency exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously. At the same time the timer for the supervision interval DT is started. When, during the supervision interval DT, the frequency still exceeds or is below the set pickup threshold and the frequency decrease/increase reaches the set threshold DF, a tripping command will be issued. Working Principle of DF/DT Function (Please refer to f(t) diagram after the block diagram.) Case 1: When the frequency falls below a set f< threshold (81U) at t1, the DF/DT element energizes. If the frequency difference (decrease) does not reach the set value DF before the time interval DT has expired, no trip will occur. The frequency element remains blocked until the frequency falls below the under-frequency threshold f< (81U) again. Case 2: When the frequency falls below a set f< threshold (81U) at t4, the DF/DT element energizes. If the frequency difference (decrease) reaches the set value DF before the time interval DT has expired (t5), a trip command is issued. www.eaton.com 533 534 4 2 Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings www.eaton.com <15%Vn <15%Vn <15%Vn Frequency Calculation f (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings VC VB VA (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) AND 81U-Under 81O-Over 81UDR- Under & DF/DT 81ODR- Over & DF/DT Name.Mode Device Planning 81[1]...[n]: 81UDR- Under & DF/DT Or 81ODR- Over & DF/DT Name = 81[1]...[n] f AND DT <name>.81+D F 1 t AND AND 14 15 Name.Blo by V< Name.TripCmd Name.Trip Name.Trip 81 Name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT Name.Pickup Name.Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Name.Pickup 81 IM02602007E EDR-5000 81U-Under fN f 81[1]...[n]: 81UDR- Under & DF/DT Name = 81[1]...[n] t1 DT t2 t3 Temporarily Blocking Reset t4 DT t5 t6 Trip t EDR-5000 www.eaton.com IM02602007E DF DF DF 535 IM02602007E EDR-5000 78V Vector Surge The vector surge supervision protects synchronous generators in mains parallel operation due to very fast decoupling in case of mains failure. Very dangerous are mains auto reclosings for synchronous generators. The mains voltage returning typically after 300 ms can hit the generator in asynchronous position. A very fast decoupling is also necessary in case of long time mains failures. Generally there are two different applications. • Only mains parallel operation - no single operation: In this application, the vector surge supervision protects the generator by tripping the generator breaker in case of mains failure. • Mains parallel operation and single operation: For this application, the vector surge supervision trips the mains breaker. Here it is insured that the gen.-set is not blocked when it is required as an emergency set. A very fast decoupling in case of mains failures for synchronous generators is very difficult. Voltage supervision units cannot be used because the synchronous alternator, as well as the load impedance, support the decreasing voltage. In this situation, the mains voltage drops only after some 100 ms below the pickup threshold of the voltage supervision and, therefore, a safe detection of mains auto reclosings is not possible with voltage supervision only. Frequency supervision is partially unsuitable because only a highly loaded generator decreases its speed within 100 ms. Current relays detect a fault only when short-circuit type currents exist, but cannot avoid their development. Power relays are able to pickup within 200 ms, but they also cannot prevent the power from rising to short-circuit values. Since power changes are also caused by sudden loaded alternators, the use of power relays can be problematic. Whereas the vector surge supervision of the device detects mains failures within 60 ms without the restrictions described above because it is specially designed for applications where very fast decoupling from the mains is required. Adding the typical operating time of a breaker or contactor, the total disconnection time remains below 150 ms. Basic requirement for tripping of the generator/mains monitor is a change in load of more than 15 - 20% of the rated load. Slow changes of the system frequency, for instance at regulating processes (adjustment of speed regulator), do not cause the relay to trip. Trippings can also be caused by short-circuits within the grid, because a voltage vector surge higher than the preset value can occur. The magnitude of the voltage vector surge depends on the distance between the shortcircuit and the generator. This function is also of advantage to the Power Utility Company because the mains short-circuit capacity and, consequently, the energy feeding the short-circuit is limited. To prevent a possible false tripping, the vector surge measuring is blocked at a low input voltage <15% Vn. The undervoltage lockout acts faster then the vector surge measurement. Vector surge tripping is blocked by a phase loss so that a VT fault (e. g.: faulty VTs fuse) does not cause false tripping. 536 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Measuring Principle of Vector Surge Supervision Equivalent circuit at synchronous generator in parallel with the mains. V = I1* j Xd VP I1 I2 V1 Grid Voltage vectors at mains parallel operation. V1 VP V = I1* j Xd Grid/Load Generator The rotor displacement angle between stator and rotor is dependent on the mechanical moving torque of the generator shaft. The mechanical shaft power is balanced with the electrical fed mains power and, therefore, the synchronous speed keeps constant. www.eaton.com 537 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Equivalent circuit at mains failure. V´ = I´1* j Xd VP I1 V´1 Grid In case of mains failure or auto-reclosing, the generator suddenly feeds a very high load. The rotor displacement angle is decreased repeatedly and the voltage vector V1 changes its direction (V1'). Voltage vectors at mains failure. VP V1 V´1 V´ = I´1* j Xd Generator 538 Load www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Voltage vector surge. Voltage Vector Surge V(t) V(t) V(t)` Trip t=0 t 78V vector surge As shown in the voltage/time diagram, the instantaneous value of the voltage jumps to another value and the phase position changes. This is called phase or vector surge. The relay measures the cycle duration. A new measuring is started at each zero passage. The measured cycle duration is internally compared with a reference time and from this the deviation of the cycle duration of the voltage signal is ascertained. In case of a vector surge as shown in the above graphic, the zero passage occurs either earlier or later. The established deviation of the cycle duration is in compliance with the vector surge angle. If the vector surge angle exceeds the set value, the relay trips immediately. Tripping of the vector surge is blocked in case of loss of one or more phases of the measuring voltage. Working Principle (Please refer to block diagram on next page.) The vector surge element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase voltages is below 15% Vn, the vector surge calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode set in the Device Planning (78V), the phase voltages are compared to the set vector surge threshold. If in any of the phases, the vector surge exceeds the set threshold and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm and a trip command is issued instantaneously. www.eaton.com 539 540 www.eaton.com VC VB 3 Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings <15%Vn <15%Vn <15%Vn Delta phi Calculation 78V vector surge Name.Mode Device Planning (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) VA 2 81[1]...[n]: 78V vector surge Name = 81[1]...[n] AND 78V vector surge Name.78V vector surge AND AND 15 14 Name.Blo by V< Name.TripCmd Name.Trip Name.Trip Vector Surge Name.Pickup Name.Pickup Vector Surge IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, 81[1]: 81O- [Device PlanOver ning] 81U-Under, 81[2]: 81O-Over 81O-Over, 81UR- Under & df/dt, 81[3]: 81U-Under 81OR- Over & df/dt, 81UDR- Under & DF/DT, 81ODR- Over & DF/DT, 81R-Rate of Change, 78V vector surge 81[4]: 81U-Under 81[5]: 81R-Rate of Change 81[6]: 81R-Rate of Change Global Protection Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Freq-Prot /81[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Freq-Prot /81[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Freq-Prot /81[1]] www.eaton.com 541 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Setting Group Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Freq-Prot /81[1]] ExBlo Fc Blo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive Inactive, [Protection Para /<n> /Freq-Prot /81[1]] Active [Protection Para /<n> /Freq-Prot /81[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive 81O-Over 81[1]: 61.00 Hz [Protection Para 81[2]: 61.0 Hz /<n> 81[3]: 51.00 Hz /Freq-Prot 81[4]: 51.00 Hz /81[1]] Pickup value for over-frequency. 40.00 – 69.95 Hz Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 81O-Over Or 81OR- Over & df/dt Or 81ODR- Over & DF/DT [Protection Para /<n> /Freq-Prot /81[1]] 81[5]: 51.00 Hz 81[6]: 51.00 Hz 81U-Under Pickup value for under-frequency. 40.00 – 69.95 Hz Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 81U-Under Or 81UR- Under & df/dt Or 81UDR- Under & DF/DT 81[1]: 59.0 Hz [Protection Para 81[2]: 49.00 Hz /<n> 81[3]: 59.0 Hz /Freq-Prot 81[4]: 59.0 Hz /81[1]] 81[5]: 59.0 Hz 81[6]: 59.0 Hz 542 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t Tripping delay 0.00 – 3600.00 s 1.00 s [Protection Para Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 81U-Under Or 81O-OverOr 81OR- Over & df/dt Or 81UR- Under & df/dt /<n> /Freq-Prot /81[1]] 81R-Rate of Change Measured value (calculated): Rate-offrequency-change. 0.1 – 10.0 Hz/s 1.0 Hz/s [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 81R-Rate of Change Or 81UR- Under & df/dt Or 81OR- Over & df/dt /Freq-Prot /81[1]] t-df/dt Trip delay df/dt 0.00 – 300.00 s 1.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Freq-Prot /81[1]] DF Frequency difference for the maximum 0.0 – 10.0 Hz admissible variation of the mean of the rate of frequency-change. This function is inactive if DF=0. 1.00 Hz [Protection Para /<n> /Freq-Prot Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 81UDR- Under & DF/DT Or 81ODROver & DF/DT DT Time interval of the maximum admissible rate-of-frequency-change. /81[1]] 0.1 – 10.0 s 1.00 s [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 81UDR- Under & DF/DT Or 81ODROver & DF/DT /Freq-Prot /81[1]] df/dt Mode df/dt Mode Absolute df/dt, Absolute df/dt Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode Positive df/dt, = 81R-Rate of Change Or 81UR- Under & df/dt Or 81OR- Over & df/dt Only available Negative df/dt if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 81R-Rate of Change Or 81UR- Under & df/dt Or 81OR- Over & df/dt Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 81R-Rate of Change 78V vector surge Measured Value (Calculated): Vector Surge 1 - 30° Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 78V vector surge [Protection Para /<n> /Freq-Prot /81[1]] 10° [Protection Para /<n> /Freq-Prot /81[1]] www.eaton.com 543 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Frequency Protection Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Freq-Prot /81[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Freq-Prot /81[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Freq-Prot /81[1]] Frequency Protection Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage. Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning: Over-frequency [ANSI 81O] Object to be tested: All configured over-frequency protection stages. 544 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Necessary means: • Three-phase voltage source with variable frequency; and • Timer. Procedure: Testing the threshold values • Keep on increasing the frequency until the respective frequency element is activated; • Note the frequency value; and • Disconnect the test voltage. Testing the trip delay • Set the test voltage to nominal frequency and • Now connect a frequency jump (activation value) and then start a timer. Measure the tripping time at the relay output. Testing the drop-out ratio: Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 99.95% of the trip value (or 0.05% fn). The relay must only fall back at 99.95% of the trip value at the earliest (or 0.05% fn). Successful test result: Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data. Commissioning: Under-frequency [ANSI 81U] For all configured under-frequency elements, this test can be carried out similar to the test for over-frequency protection (by using the related under-frequency values). Please consider the following deviations: • For testing the threshold values, the frequency has to be decreased until the protection element is activated. • For detection of the drop-out ratio, the measuring quantity has to be increased to more than 100.05% of the trip value (or 0.05% fn). At 100.05% of the trip value the relay is to fall back at the earliest (or 0.05% fn). Commissioning: 81R Rate of Change (df/dt) Object to be tested: All frequency protection stages that are projected as df/dt. Necessary means: • Three-phase voltage source and • Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear, defined rate of change of frequency. Procedure: Testing the threshold values • Keep on increasing the rate of change of frequency until the respective element is activated and • Note the value. www.eaton.com 545 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Testing the trip delay • Set the test voltage to nominal frequency: • Now apply a step change (sudden change) that is 1.5 times the setting value (example: apply 3 Hz per second if the setting value is 2 Hz per second); and • Measure the tripping time at the relay output. Compare the measured tripping time to the configured tripping time. Successful test result: Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data. Commissioning: 81U and Rate of Change (f< and -df/dt) Object to be tested: All frequency protection stages that are projected as f< and -df/dt. Necessary means: • Three-phase voltage source and • Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear, defined rate of change of frequency. Procedure: Testing the threshold values • Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device: • Decrease the frequency below the f< threshold: and • Apply a rate of change of frequency (step change) that is below the setting value (example: apply -1 Hz per second if the setting value is -0.8 Hz per second). After the tripping delay is expired the relay has to trip. Successful test result: Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data. Commissioning: 81O and Rate of Change (f> and df/dt) Object to be tested: All frequency protection stages that are projected as f> and df/dt. Necessary means: • Three-phase voltage source and • Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear, defined rate of change of frequency. Procedure: Testing the threshold values • Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device; • Increase the frequency above the f> threshold; and • Apply a rate of change of frequency (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply 1 Hz per second if the setting value is 0.8 Hz per second). After the tripping delay is expired the relay has to trip. 546 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Successful test result: Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data. Commissioning: 81UΔR – Under-frequency and DF/DT Object to be tested: All frequency protection stages that are projected as f< and Df/Dt. Necessary means: • Three-phase voltage source and • Frequency generator that can generate and measure a defined frequency change. Procedure: Testing the threshold values • Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device; • Decrease the frequency below the f< threshold; and • Apply a defined frequency change (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply a frequency change of 1 Hz during the set time interval DT if the setting value DF is 0.8 Hz ). The relay has to trip immediately. Successful test result: Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data. Commissioning: 81OΔR – Over-frequency and DF/DT Object to be tested: All frequency protection stages that are projected as f> and Df/Dt. Necessary means: • Three-phase voltage source and • Frequency generator that can generate and measure a defined frequency change. Procedure: Testing the threshold values • Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device; • Increase the frequency above the f> threshold; and • Apply a defined frequency change (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply a frequency change of 1 Hz during the set time interval DT if the setting value DF is 0.8 Hz ). The relay has to trip immediately. Successful test result: Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data. www.eaton.com 547 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Commissioning: Vector Surge 78V Object to be tested: All frequency protection stages that are projected as vector surge (78V). Necessary means: • Three-phase voltage source that can generate a definite step (sudden change) of the voltage pointers (phase shift). Procedure: Testing the threshold values • Apply a vector surge (sudden change) that is 1.5 times the setting value (example: if the setting value is 10° apply 15°). Successful test result: Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratio can be taken from the Technical Data. 548 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E 32 - Power Protection Available Elements: 32[1] ,32[2] ,32[3] This is the 32 device Power Protection setting. Each element can be set to one of five settings: • • • • • Do Not Use; Over Forward Power (P>); Under Forward Power (P<); Over Reverse Power (Pr>); and Under Reverse Power (Pr<). Each element consists of a Pickup and a Delay setting. These elements are based on rated apparent power VAn. Definition for VAn is as follows: • • VAn = SQRT(3) * VT secondary rating * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for wye or VAn = 3 * VT secondary rating/SQRT(3) * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for delta connections. The following graphics show the areas that are protected by the corresponding modes. www.eaton.com 549 IM02602007E EDR-5000 32 - Forward Power - Over and Under Q No Trip Trip Region P Pickup P> Q Trip Region No Trip P Pickup P< 550 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 32 - Reverse Power - Over and Under Q Trip Region No Trip P Pickup Pr> Q No Trip Trip Region P Pickup Pr< www.eaton.com 551 552 Please Refer to Diagram:.CTS 40 www.eaton.com 3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings Syst W RMS Pickup Pr< Pickup Pr> Pickup P< Pickup P> PQS.Mode Device Planning Please Refer to Diagram:.LOP (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings 38 2 32[1]...[n] Name = 32[1]...[n] OR OR Name.Mode Pickup P>, Pickup P<, Pickup Pr>, Pickup Pr< active Loss of Potential Blo AND AND 0 t Name.t AND 14 15 Name.TripCmd Name.Trip Name.Pickup IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Power Protection Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, 32[1]: Over [Device Planforward ning] Over forward, 32[2]: Under forward Under forward, Over reverse, 32[3]: Over reverse Under reverse Global Protection Parameters of the Power Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32[1]] Parameter Set Parameters of the Power Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Power-Prot /32[1]] www.eaton.com 553 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description ExBlo Fc Blo TripCmd Setting Range Default Menu Path Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive [Protection Para Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive Inactive, /<n> /Power-Prot /32[1]] Active [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Loss of Potential Blo Active Blocking of the protective element in case that of lacking measuring input quantities (Loss of Potential) Inactive, [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32[1]] Active [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32[1]] Pickup P> Over(load) Active Power Pickup Value. Can 0.02 – 10.00 VAn be used for monitoring the maximum allowed forward power limits of transformers or overhead lines. 1.20 VAn [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot Only available if: Device Planning: PQS.Mode = Pickup P> Pickup P< Under(load) Active Power Pickup Value (e.g.: caused by idling motors). /32[1]] 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 0.80 VAn [Protection Para /<n> Only available if: Device Planning: PQS.Mode = Pickup P< /Power-Prot /32[1]] Pickup Pr> Over Reverse 0.02 – 10.00 VAn Only available if: Device Planning: PQS.Mode = Pickup Pr> 1.20 VAn [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32[1]] 554 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Pickup Pr< Under Reverse 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 0.80 VAn [Protection Para Only available if: Device Planning: PQS.Mode = Pickup Pr< /<n> /Power-Prot /32[1]] t Tripping delay 0.00 – 1100.00 s 0.01 s [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32[1]] States of the Inputs of the Power Protection Module Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32[1]] Signals of the Power Protection Module (States of the Outputs) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection www.eaton.com 555 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning Examples for the Power Protection Module Object to be tested: Testing the projected Power Protection Modules: • • • • P>; P<; Pr>; and Pr<. Necessary means: • • • 3-phase AC voltage source ; 3-phase AC current source; and Timer. Procedure – Testing the wiring: • Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. • Adjust the current pointers 30 degrees lagging to the voltage pointers. • The following measuring values have to be shown: • P=0.86 Pn; • Q=0.5 Qn; and • S=1 Sn. If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign, check the wiring. The examples shown within this chapter have to be carried out with the tripping values and tripping delays that apply to the User's switchboard. If the User is testing „greater than thresholds“ (e.g.: P>), start at 80% of the tripping value and increase the object to be tested until the relay picks up. In case the User is testing „less than thresholds“ (e.g.: P<), start at 120% of the tripping value and reduce the object to be tested until the relay picks up. If the User is testing tripping delays of „greater than“ modules (e.g.: P>), start a timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from 80% of the tripping value to 120% of the tripping value. If the User is testing tripping delays of „less than“ modules (e.g.: P<), start a timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from 120% of the tripping value to 80% of the tripping value. 556 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E P> Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1). • The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 1.1 Pn). • In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value. Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1). • The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 1.1 Pn). • In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section. P< Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Pn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1). • The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Pn). • In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Decrease the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured. Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.3 Pn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1). • The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive algebraic sign. www.eaton.com 557 IM02602007E EDR-5000 • Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Pn). • In order to test the tripping delay feed, 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Decrease the current with an abrupt change to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section. Pr> Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with 180 degree phase angle between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay. • The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 1.1 Pn). • In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value. Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with 180 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay. • The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 1.1 Pn). • In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section. 558 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Pr< Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Pn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current with 180 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay. • The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 0.3 Pn). • In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Decrease the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value. Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.3 Pn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current with 180 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay. • The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Pn). • In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Decrease the current with an abrupt change to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section. www.eaton.com 559 IM02602007E EDR-5000 32V - Reactive Power Protection Available Elements: 32V[1] ,32V[2] ,32V[3] This is the 32V device Reactive Power Protection setting. Each element can be set to one of five settings: • • • • • Do Not Use; Over Forward Reactive Power (Q>); Under Forward Reactive Power (Q<); Over Reverse Reactive Power (Qr>); and Under Reverse Reactive Power (Qr<). Each element consists of a Pickup and a Delay setting. These elements are based on rated apparent power Van. Definition for VAn is as follows: • • VAn = SQRT(3) * VT secondary rating * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for wye or VAn = 3 * VT secondary rating/SQRT(3) * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for delta connections. The following graphics show the areas that are protected by the corresponding modes. 560 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 32V Forward Reactive Power - Over and Under Q Trip Region Pickup Q> No Trip P . Q No Trip Pickup Q< Trip Region P www.eaton.com 561 IM02602007E EDR-5000 32V Reverse Reactive Power - Over and Under Q P No Trip Pickup Qr> Trip Region Q P Trip Region Pickup Qr< No Trip 562 www.eaton.com www.eaton.com 3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings Pickup Qr< Pickup Qr> Pickup Q< Pickup Q> PQS.Mode Device Planning Please Refer to Diagram:.CTS Please Refer to Diagram:.LOP (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Syst VAr RMS 40 38 2 32V[1]...[n] Name = 32V[1]...[n] OR OR Name.Mode Pickup Q>, Pickup Q<, Pickup Qr>, Pickup Qr< active Loss of Potential Blo AND AND 0 t Name.t AND 14 15 Name.TripCmd Name.Trip Name.Pickup EDR-5000 IM02602007E 563 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Reactive Power Protection Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, 32V[1]: Over forward [Device Planning] Over forward, Under forward, 32V[2]: Under forward Over reverse, Under reverse 32V[3]: Over reverse Global Protection Parameters of the Reactive Power Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32V[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32V[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32V[1]] Parameter Set Parameters of the Reactive Power Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Power-Prot /32V[1]] 564 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description ExBlo Fc Blo TripCmd Setting Range Default Menu Path Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive [Protection Para Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive Inactive, /<n> /Power-Prot /32V[1]] Active [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32V[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Loss of Potential Blo Active Blocking of the protective element in case that of lacking measuring input quantities (Loss of Potential) Inactive, [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32V[1]] Active [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32V[1]] Pickup Q> Over(load) Reactive Power Pickup Value. 0.02 – 10.00 VAn Monitoring the maximum allowed reactive power of the electrical equipment like transformers or overhead lines). If the maximum value is exceeded, a condensator bank could be switched off. 1.20 VAn [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32V[1]] Only available if: Device Planning: PQS.Mode = Pickup Q> Pickup Q< Under(load) Reactive Power Pickup Value. Monitoring the minimum value of the reactive power. If it falls below the set value, a condensator bank could be switched on. 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 0.80 VAn /<n> /Power-Prot Only available if: Device Planning: PQS.Mode = Pickup Q< Pickup Qr> Over Reverse [Protection Para /32V[1]] 0.02 – 10.00 VAn Only available if: Device Planning: PQS.Mode = Pickup Qr> 1.20 VAn [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32V[1]] www.eaton.com 565 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Pickup Qr< Under Reverse 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 0.80 VAn [Protection Para Only available if: Device Planning: PQS.Mode = Pickup Qr< /<n> /Power-Prot /32V[1]] t Tripping delay 0.00 – 1100.00 s 0.01 s [Protection Para /<n> /Power-Prot /32V[1]] States of the Inputs of the Reactive Power Protection Module Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32V[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32V[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Power-Prot /32V[1]] Signals of the Reactive Power Protection Module (States of the Outputs) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 566 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning Examples for the Reactive Power Protection Module Object to be tested: Testing the projected Power Protection Modules. • • • • Q>; Q<; Qr>; and Qr<. Necessary means: • • • 3-phase AC voltage source; 3-phase AC current source; and Timer. Procedure – Testing the wiring: • Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. • Adjust the current pointers 30° lagging to the voltage pointers. • The following measuring values have to be shown: • P=0.86 Pn; • Q=0.5 Qn; and • S=1 Sn. If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign, check the wiring. The examples shown within this chapter have to be carried out with the tripping values and tripping delays that apply to the User's switchboard. If the User is testing „greater than thresholds“ (e.g.: Q>), start at 80% of the tripping value and increase the object to be tested until the relay picks up. In case the User is testing „less than thresholds“ (e.g.: Q<), start at 120% of the tripping value and reduce the object to be tested until the relay picks up. If the User is testing tripping delays of „greater than“ modules (e.g.: Q>), start a timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from 80% of the tripping value to 120% of the tripping value. If the User is testing tripping delays of „less than“ modules (e.g.: Q<), start a timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from 120% of the tripping value to 80% of the tripping value. www.eaton.com 567 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Q> Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1,1 Qn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current (90 degrees phase shift) to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=0). • The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 1.1. Qn). • In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value. Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Qn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current (90 degree phase shift) to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=0). • The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e.g. 1.1. Qn). • In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section. Q< Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current (90 degree phase shift) to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=0). • The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Qn). • In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Decrease the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value. 568 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current (90 degree phase shift) to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=0). • The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Qn). • In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Decrease the current with an abrupt change to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section. Qr> Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1.1 Qn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with -90 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay. • The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 1.1 Qn). • In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value. Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Qn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with -90 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay. • The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e. g. 1.1 Qn). • In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section. www.eaton.com 569 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Qr< Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current with -90 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay. • The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 0.3 Qn). • In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Decrease the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value. Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn) • Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current with -90 degree phase shift between voltage and current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay. • The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic sign. • Set the pickup threshold (e. g. 0.3 Qn). • In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. Decrease the current with an abrupt change to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section. 570 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 55A and 55D - PF Protection Available elements: PF-55D[1] ,PF-55D[2] ,PF-55A[1] ,PF-55A[2] Definition Apparent Power Factor 55A (RMS - Includes Harmonics): The Apparent Power Factor is computed by dividing real power (watts) by volt-amperes. The apparent power factor computation includes harmonics. PF apparent = Watt VA Definition Displacement Power Factor 55D (Fundamental): The Displacement Power Factor is computed by dividing the fundamental watts by the fundamental voltamperes as shown below. This definition is only valid at the system fundamental operating frequency. The Displacement Power Factor isolates the fundamental portion of the Power Factor from the effects of harmonics. PF displacement = Watt Watt 2var2 These elements supervise the Power Factor within a defined area (limits). The area is defined by four parameters: • The Trigger Quadrant (lead or lag); • • The Threshold (Power Factor value); • • The Reset Quadrant (lead or lag); and • • The Reset Value (Power Factor value). Q leading lagging PF<0 PF>0 90°<phi<180° 0°<phi<90° P lagging leading PF>0 PF<0 180°<phi<270° 270°<phi<360° www.eaton.com 571 572 3 2 www.eaton.com (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) φ <0.5%In <20%Vn Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings Imax V PF RMS Fund. Name.Criterion (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name = PF[1]...[n] PF[1]...[n] OR Name.PF OR AND Comp Comp 0 t Name .t Pre-trigger time Name.t-Reset Name.t-Pickup Post-trigger time Pickup Delay And Release Delay AND 14 Name.Impossible 15 Name.TripCmd Name.Trip Name.Compensator Name.Pickup IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Power Factor Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameter of the Power Factor Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] Set Parameters of the Power Factor Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". www.eaton.com Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] 573 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive Trig Mode Lagging Trigger Mode. Should the Module be Leading, triggered if the Current Phasor is leading to the Voltage Phasor = Lead? Or should the Lagging Module be triggered if the Current Phasor is lagging to the Voltage Phasor = Lag? [Protection Para /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] [Protection Para /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] Trigger-PF This is the power factor where the relay will 0.5 - 0.99 pick up 0.7 [Protection Para /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] Res Mode Trigger Mode. Should the Module be Leading, triggered if the Current Phasor is leading to the Voltage Phasor = Lead? Or should the Lagging Module be triggered if the Current Phasor is lagging to the Voltage Phasor = Lag? Lagging [Protection Para /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] Reset-PF This setting is the power factor, at which the 0.5 - 0.99 relay will reset the power factor trip. It is like setting a hysteresis for the Trigger setting. 0.9 [Protection Para /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] t-trip Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] 574 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description t-Pickup Comp Pre-trigger time for the Compensation Signal. When this timer is elapsed the compensation signal will be activated. Setting Range Default Menu Path 0.00 – 300.00 s 5.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] t-Reset Comp Reset (Post-trigger) time of the Compensation Signal. When this timer is elapsed the compensation signal will be deactivated. 0.00 – 300.00 s 5.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] States of the Inputs of the Power Factor Module Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /Power Factor-Prot /PF-55D[1]] Signals of the Power Factor Module (States of the Outputs) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor www.eaton.com 575 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal Impossible Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible Commissioning: Power Factor Object to be tested: • Testing the projected Power Factor Modules. Necessary means: • • • Three-phase AC voltage source; Three-phase AC current source; and Timer. Procedure – Testing the wiring: • Feed the rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay. • Adjust the current pointers 30° lagging to the voltage pointers. • The following measuring values have to be shown: • P = 0.86 Pn • Q = 0.5 Qn • S = 1 Sn If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign, check the wiring. In this example, the PF-Trigger is set to 0.86 = 30° (lagging) and the PFReset is set to 0.86 = 30° (leading). Carry out the test with the settings (trigger and reset) that fit the switchboard. Testing the threshold values (Trigger) (PF Trigger: Example = 0.86 lagging): • Feed the rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1). • Adjust the angle between the voltage and current (current pointer lagging) until the relay picks up. • Write down the pickup value. Testing the Reset (PF Reset: Example = 0.86 leading): • 576 Reduce the angle between voltage and current beyond PF = 1 (current pointer leading) until the alarm drops off. www.eaton.com EDR-5000 • IM02602007E Write down the reset value. Testing the trip delay (PF Trigger: Example = 0.86 lagging): • Feed the rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1). • Adjust the angle between voltage and current (current pointer lagging) with an abrupt change to PF = 0.707 (45°) lagging. • Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Compare the measured tripping time to the selected trip time. Successful test result: The measured total tripping delays, threshold, and reset values correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found the Technical Data section. www.eaton.com 577 IM02602007E EDR-5000 ExP - External Protection Available elements: ExP[1] ,ExP[2] ,ExP[3] ,ExP[4] All elements of the external protection ExP[1]...[4] are identically structured. By means of these elements, the protective device can detect and execute pickups and trips that are issued by other external devices. This can be helpful, for logging purposes, if the other device is not equipped with an event or disturbance recorder. This might also be helpful if the other device has no communication (SCADA) interface. 578 www.eaton.com www.eaton.com 3 2 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. ) Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings 1..n, Assignment List Name.Trip 1..n, Assignment List Name.Alarm (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name = ExP[1]...[n] ExP[1]...[n] AND AND AND 14 Name.TripCmd 15 Name.Trip Name.Alarm Name.Alarm-I Name.Trip-I EDR-5000 IM02602007E 579 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the External Protection Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Do not use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the External Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ExP /ExP[1]] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ExP /ExP[1]] ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of the module/the element, if blocking is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ExP /ExP[1]] Alarm Assignment for External Alarm 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ExP /ExP[1]] Trip External trip of the Bkr. if the state of the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ExP /ExP[1]] 580 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Setting Group Parameters of the External Protection Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /ExP /ExP[1]] ExBlo Fc Blo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Permanent blocking of the Trip Command of the module/element. Inactive Inactive, [Protection Para /<n> /ExP /ExP[1]] Active [Protection Para /<n> /ExP /ExP[1]] ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Fc blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd Fc=active". Inactive [Protection Para /<n> /ExP /ExP[1]] External Protection Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ExP /ExP[1]] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ExP /ExP[1]] www.eaton.com 581 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para Trip Command /Global Prot Para /ExP /ExP[1]] Alarm-I Module Input State: Alarm [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ExP /ExP[1]] Trip-I Module Input State: Trip [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /ExP /ExP[1]] External Protection Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command Alarm Signal: Alarm Trip Signal: Trip TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning: External Protection Object to be tested: • Test of the External Protection Module. Necessary means: • Dependent on the application. Procedure: • 582 Simulate the functionality of the External Protection (pickup, trip, and blockings) by (de-)energizing the digital inputs. www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Successful test result: All external pickups, external trips, and external blockings are correctly recognized and processed by the device. www.eaton.com 583 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Supervision 50BF – Breaker Failure Supervision BF Principle – General Use The breaker failure (BF) protection is used to provide backup protection in the event that a breaker fails to operate properly during fault clearing. A breaker failure condition is recognized if current is still flowing through the breaker after tripping or opening breaker commands have been issued for a specified time. The User can select different trigger modes. In addition, up to three additional trigger events (trip commands) can be assigned from all the protection modules. Trigger Modes There are three trigger modes for the breaker failure available. In addition, there are three assignable trigger inputs available. • All Trips: All trip signals that are assigned to this breaker (within the breaker manager) will start the BF module. • Current Trips: All current trips that are assigned to this breaker (within the breaker manager) will start the BF module. • External Trips: All external trips that are assigned to this breaker (within the breaker manager) will start the BF module. In addition, the User can also select none (e.g.: if the User intends to use one of the three additional assignable trigger inputs). Those trips can exclusively start the breaker failures that are assigned within the breaker manager to the breaker that is to be supervised. Select the winding side from which the measured currents should be taken in case this protective device is a transformer differential protection. 584 www.eaton.com www.eaton.com IC IB IA BF.Trigger3 BF.Trigger2 BF.Trigger1 15 15 15 2 15 15 15 none Name.I-BF > External Trips Current Trips All Trips External Trips Current Trips All Trips Determining the trigger mode for the Breaker Failure. (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name = BF BF AND OR AND R1 S Res Lockout Q Q 0 t-BF Name.t-BF R1 S 1 1 14 BF.Lockout BF.Trigger3-I BF.Trigger2-I BF.Trigger1-I BF.Trip BF.Pickup EDR-5000 IM02602007E 585 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Direct Commands Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Res Lockout Reset Lockout Inactive, Inactive [Operation Active /Reset] Device Planning Parameters of the BF Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Use Use [Device Planning] Global Protection Parameters of the BF Module Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /BF] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /BF] Trigger Trigger1 Determining the trigger mode for the Breaker Failure. Trigger that will start the BF - . -, All Trips [Protection Para All Trips, /Global Prot Para Current Trips, /Supervision ExP Fc /BF] Trigger -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /BF] Trigger2 Trigger that will start the BF Trigger -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /BF] 586 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Trigger3 Trigger that will start the BF Trigger -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /BF] Setting Group Parameters of the BF Module In order to prevent a faulty activation of the BF Module, the pickup (alarm) time must be greater than the sum of: • The close-open time of the breaker (please refer to the technical data of the manufacturer of the breaker); • + The tripping delay of the device (please refer to the Technical Data section); • + The security margin; and • + The operating time. Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Supervision /BF] ExBlo Fc I-BF > Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Current level that needs to exist after Trip Command has been given. 0.00 In 0.00 – 0.10 In [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /BF] [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /BF] t-BF If the delay time is expired, an BF alarm is given out. 0.00 – 10.00 s 0.20 s [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /BF] www.eaton.com 587 IM02602007E EDR-5000 BF Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /BF] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /BF] Trigger1 Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /BF] Trigger2 Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /BF] Trigger3 Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /BF] BF Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Pickup Signal: BF-Module Started (Pickup) Trip Signal: Breaker Failure Trip Lockout Signal: Lockout Res Lockout Signal: Reset Lockout 588 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 BF Module Trigger Functions In case that the protective device is equipped with directional overcurrent protection. All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be displayed as ANSI 50/51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 50/51 element wont change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional” to “directional”. These trips will start the BF module if all trips have been selected as the trigger event. Name Description -.- No assignment 50P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27M[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27M[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59M[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59M[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59N[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59N[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 47[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 47[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command www.eaton.com 589 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 81[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55D[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55D[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ZI.TripCmd Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command ExP[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command DI-8P X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input Logic.LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE2.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE2.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE2.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE2.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE3.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE3.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE3.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE3.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE4.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE4.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE4.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE4.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE5.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE5.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE5.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) 590 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE5.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE6.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE6.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE6.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE6.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE7.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE7.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE7.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE7.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE8.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE8.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE8.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE8.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE9.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE9.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE9.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE9.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE10.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE10.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE10.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE10.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE11.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE11.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE11.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE11.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE12.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE12.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE12.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE12.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE13.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE13.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE13.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE13.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE14.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE14.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE14.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE14.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE15.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE15.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output www.eaton.com 591 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE15.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE15.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE16.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE16.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE16.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE16.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE17.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE17.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE17.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE17.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE18.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE18.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE18.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE18.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE19.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE19.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE19.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE19.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE20.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE20.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE20.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE20.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE21.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE21.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE21.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE21.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE22.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE22.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE22.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE22.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE23.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE23.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE23.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE23.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE24.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE24.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE24.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE24.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE25.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate 592 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE25.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE25.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE25.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE26.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE26.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE26.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE26.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE27.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE27.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE27.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE27.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE28.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE28.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE28.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE28.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE29.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE29.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE29.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE29.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE30.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE30.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE30.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE30.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE31.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE31.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE31.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE31.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE32.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE32.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE32.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE32.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE33.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE33.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE33.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE33.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE34.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE34.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE34.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE34.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) www.eaton.com 593 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE35.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE35.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE35.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE35.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE36.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE36.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE36.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE36.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE37.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE37.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE37.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE37.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE38.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE38.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE38.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE38.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE39.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE39.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE39.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE39.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE40.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE40.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE40.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE40.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE41.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE41.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE41.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE41.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE42.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE42.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE42.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE42.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE43.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE43.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE43.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE43.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE44.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE44.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE44.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) 594 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE44.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE45.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE45.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE45.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE45.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE46.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE46.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE46.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE46.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE47.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE47.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE47.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE47.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE48.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE48.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE48.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE48.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE49.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE49.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE49.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE49.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE50.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE50.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE50.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE50.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE51.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE51.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE51.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE51.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE52.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE52.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE52.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE52.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE53.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE53.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE53.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE53.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE54.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE54.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output www.eaton.com 595 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE54.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE54.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE55.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE55.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE55.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE55.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE56.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE56.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE56.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE56.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE57.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE57.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE57.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE57.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE58.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE58.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE58.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE58.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE59.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE59.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE59.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE59.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE60.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE60.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE60.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE60.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE61.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE61.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE61.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE61.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE62.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE62.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE62.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE62.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE63.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE63.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE63.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE63.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE64.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate 596 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE64.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE64.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE64.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE65.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE65.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE65.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE65.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE66.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE66.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE66.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE66.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE67.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE67.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE67.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE67.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE68.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE68.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE68.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE68.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE69.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE69.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE69.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE69.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE70.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE70.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE70.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE70.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE71.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE71.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE71.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE71.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE72.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE72.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE72.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE72.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE73.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE73.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE73.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE73.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) www.eaton.com 597 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE74.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE74.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE74.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE74.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE75.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE75.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE75.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE75.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE76.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE76.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE76.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE76.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE77.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE77.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE77.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE77.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE78.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE78.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE78.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE78.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE79.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE79.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE79.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE79.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE80.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE80.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE80.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE80.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) These trips will start the BF module if all current functions have been selected as the trigger event. In case that the protective device is equipped with directional overcurrent protection. All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be displayed as ANSI 50/51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 50/51 element wont change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional” to “directional”. Name Description -.- No assignment 50P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 598 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 50P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ZI.TripCmd Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command These trips will start the BF module if external trips have been selected as the trigger event. Name Description -.- No assignment ExP[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Commissioning: Breaker Failure Protection The time that is configured for the BF MUST NOT be below the breaker control time, otherwise an unwanted operation of the BF is caused by any protective trip. Object to Be Tested: • Test of the breaker failure protection. Necessary Means: • • • Current source; Current meter; and Timer. www.eaton.com 599 IM02602007E EDR-5000 When testing, the applied test current must always be higher than the tripping threshold »I-BF«. If the test current falls below the threshold while the breaker is in the “Off” position, no pickup will be generated. Procedure (Single-Phase): For testing the tripping time of the BF protection, a test current has to be higher than the threshold value of one of the current protection modules that are assigned to trigger the BF protection. The BF trip delay can be measured from the time when one of the triggering inputs becomes active to the time when the BF protection trip is asserted. To avoid wiring errors, checked to make sure the breaker in the upstream system switches off. The time, measured by the timer, should be in line with the specified tolerances. Re-connect the control cable to the breaker! Successful Test Result: The actual times measured comply with the setpoint times. The breaker in the higher-level section switches off. 600 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 CTS – Current Transformer Supervision CTS Most functions of metering, protection, and control in the relay rely on correct current measurements. It is important to make sure the CT connections and their operations are correct. The failures (including CT secondary wire broken, insulation broken down, broken wiring between CT and relay, and mismatched polarities) will cause the incorrect current measurements. The other CT errors (due to the magnetizing current that is proportional to the primary current, CT saturation, and measuring circuit and quantization error) can also cause inaccurate current measurements. The CTS utilizes the Kirchhoff’s current law to detect a CT failure and can differentiate the wiring errors from the measurement errors by adding biases to offset the measurement related errors. The biases include two terms, one of which is related to the static error that accounts for CT magnetizing characteristic differences and current measurement circuit calibration errors and other is the dynamic error that is proportional to the measured maximum current due to CT transformation characteristics. The CTs are assumed to be used in the wyegrounded winding sides. Under normal conditions, the mismatch between the calculated and the measured zero sequence current should be less than the bias value. However, if there is a CT wiring error, such relationship will not hold true. If the mismatch exceeds the bias for a specified time, an alarm will be generated. The operating principle can be expressed in terms of CT secondary currents as follow: IL1IL2IL3KI∗IG=3∗I 0KI∗ IG∆IKd∗Imax KI is the ratio of the ground CT ratio over the phase CT ratio, and it is automatically calculated from the rated system parameters. ∆I = Kd = Imax = Total bias value = The static error, a minimum mismatch allowed between the calculated and measured zero sequence current. The dynamic error factor, a restrain slope that defines a percentage error generated by a high current. maximum phase current. ∆I + Kd x Imax. The current transformer supervision operation can be graphically represented as follows. Limit Value Kd*Imax I Imax If the current is measured in two phases only (for example only IA/IB) or if there is no separate ground current measuring (e.g.: normally via a zero sequence CT), the supervision function should be deactivated. www.eaton.com 601 2 602 www.eaton.com IX IC IB IA IX Calculated (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings CTS Σ - + Kd CTS. ¬I 0 t CTS.t AND CTS.Pickup 40 IM02602007E EDR-5000 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Device Planning Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Do not use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameter of the Current Transformer Supervision Parameter Description Setting Range ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Default Menu Path -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /CTS] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /CTS] Setting Group Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Supervision /CTS] ExBlo Fc ΔI Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive In order to prevent faulty tripping of phase selective protection functions that use the current as tripping criterion. If the difference of the measured ground current and the calculated value I0 is higher than the pick up value ΔI, an pickup event is generated after expiring of the excitation time. In such a case, a fuse failure, a broken wire or a faulty measuring circuit can be assumed. 0.50 In 0.10 – 1.00 In [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /CTS] [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /CTS] www.eaton.com 603 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Pickup delay Pickup delay 0.1 – 9999.0 s 1.0 s [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /CTS] Kd Dynamic correction factor for the evaluation 0.00 - 0.99 of the difference between calculated and measured ground current. This correction factor allows transformer faults, caused by higher currents, to be compensated. 0.00 [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /CTS] Current Transformer Supervision Input States Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /CTS] ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /CTS] Current Transformer Supervision Signals (Outputs States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Pickup Signal: Pickup Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision Commissioning: Current Transformer Failure Supervision Preconditions: 1.Measurement of all three-phase currents (are applied to the measuring inputs of the device). 2.The ground current is detected via a zero sequence transformer (not in residual connection). 604 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Object to Be Tested: Check of the CT Supervision (by comparing the calculated with the measured ground current). Necessary Means: Three-phase current source. Procedure, Part 1: • • • • Set the limiting value of the CTs to »delta I=0.1*In«. Feed a three-phase, symmetrical current system (approx. nominal current) to the secondary side. Disconnect the current of one phase from one of the measuring inputs (the symmetrical feeding at the secondary side has to be maintained). Make sure that the »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated. Successful Test Result, Part 1: The »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated. Procedure, Part 2: • • • Feed a three-phase, symmetrical current system (approx. nominal current) to the secondary side. Feed a current that is higher than the threshold value for the measuring circuit supervision to the ground current measuring input. Make sure that the »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated. Successful Test Result, Part 2: The »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated. www.eaton.com 605 IM02602007E EDR-5000 74TC - Trip Circuit Monitoring TCM The trip circuit monitoring is used for monitoring if the trip circuit is ready for opening operations. The monitoring can be fulfilled by two ways. The one way assumes only 52a is used in the trip circuit and other assumes besides 52a, 52b is also used for the circuit monitoring. Two options either 52a only (or breaker closed) or both (52a and 52b) are provided for the User to select based on use of the breaker status in the trip circuit. With 52a only in the trip circuit, the monitoring is only effective when the breaker is closed while if both 52a and 52b are used, the trip circuit will be monitored all time as long as the control power is on. The trip circuit continuity is monitored through the digital inputs DI1 and DI2, and the breaker status 52a or 52b or both must be monitored through the other digital inputs. Note that the digital inputs used for this purpose must be configured properly based on the trip circuit control voltage and also that the de-bouncing times must be set to minimum. If the trip circuit is detected broken, an alarm will be issued with a specified delay, which must be greater than a period from the time when a trip contact is closed to the time when the breaker status is clearly recognized by the relay. In Slot 1 has two digital inputs, each of which has a separate root (contact separation) for the trip circuit supervision. In this case, the trip circuit supply voltage serves also as supply voltage for the digital inputs and so the supply voltage failure of a trip circuit can be detected directly. In order to identify a conductor failure in the trip circuit on the supply line or in the trip coil, the off-coil has to be looped-in to the supervision circuit. The time delay is to be set in a way that switching actions cannot cause false trips in this module. 606 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 One Breaker Application Examples Trip Circuit Monitoring for one Breaker: Auxiliary Contacts (52a and 52b) in trip circuit. Relay Control Voltage V+ V- Breaker 1 (Bkr[1]) Control Voltage - DC X1 COM1 DI1 COM2 DI2 W1-52a W1-52b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE V+ TC V- 52a 52b Trip +DC 52a and 52b in Trip Circuit DI-Threshold X1 6 5 AND t-TCM OR DI-Threshold t TCM.Pickup 0 X1 8 7 AND www.eaton.com 607 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Trip Circuit Monitoring for One Breaker: Auxiliary Contacts (52a Only) in Trip Circuit. Relay Control Voltage V+ V- Breaker 1 (Bkr[1]) Control Voltage - DC X1 COM1 DI1 W1-52a W1-52b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PE V+ TC V- 52a 52b Trip +DC 52a only in Trip Circuit DI-Threshold X1 6 5 t-TCM TCM.Pickup t AND 0 Bkr.Pos CLOSE Device Planning Parameters of the Trip Circuit Monitoring Module Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning] Use Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Circuit Monitoring Module Parameter Description Setting Range Mode Select if trip circuit is going to be monitored Closed, when the breaker is closed or when the breaker is either open or close. Either Default Menu Path Closed [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /TCM] 608 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Input 1 Select the input configured to monitor the trip coil when the breaker is closed. -.-, DI-8P X1.DI 1 [Protection Para DI-8P X1.DI 1, /Global Prot Para DI-8P X1.DI 2, /Supervision DI-8P X1.DI 3, /TCM] DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 Input 2 Select the input configured to monitor the trip coil when the breaker is open. Only available if Mode set to “Either”. -.-, -.- [Protection Para DI-8P X1.DI 1, /Global Prot Para Only available if: Mode = Either DI-8P X1.DI 2, /Supervision DI-8P X1.DI 3, /TCM] DI-8P X1.DI 4, DI-8P X1.DI 5, DI-8P X1.DI 6, DI-8P X1.DI 7, DI-8P X1.DI 8 ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /TCM] ExBlo2 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. -.- [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /TCM] www.eaton.com 609 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Setting Group Parameters of the Trip Circuit Monitoring Module Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Function Permanent activation or deactivation of module/element. Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para Active /<n> /Supervision /TCM] ExBlo Fc t-TCM Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, blocking of the module/element. This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active assigned to the corresponding global protection parameter. If the signal becomes true, those modules/elements are blocked that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active". Inactive Tripping delay time of the Trip Circuit Supervision 0.2 s 0.10 – 10.00 s [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /TCM] [Protection Para /<n> /Supervision /TCM] Trip Circuit Monitoring Module Input States Name Description Assignment Via CinBkr-52a-I Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52a) [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /TCM] CinBkr-52b-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the [Protection Para Bkr. (52b) /Global Prot Para /Supervision /TCM] ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /TCM] 610 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 [Protection Para /Global Prot Para /Supervision /TCM] Bkr Pos Detect-I Module Input State: Criterion by which the Breaker Switch Position is to be detected. [] Trip Circuit Monitoring Module Signals (Output States) Name Description Active Signal: Active ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Pickup Signal: Pickup Trip Circuit Supervision Not Possible Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker. Commissioning: Trip Circuit Monitoring for Breakers For breakers that trip by means of little energy (e.g.: via an optocoupler), it has to be ensured that the current applied by the digital inputs will not cause false tripping of the breaker. Object to Be Tested: Test of the trip circuit monitoring (with 52a and 52b contact). Procedure, Part 1: Simulate failure of the control voltage in the power circuits. Successful Test Result, Part 1: After expiration of »t-TCM« the trip circuit supervision, TCM of the device should signal an alarm. Procedure, Part 2: Simulate a broken cable in the breaker control circuit. Successful Test Result, Part 2: After expiration of »t-TCM«, the trip circuit supervision TCM of the device should signal an alarm. www.eaton.com 611 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Self Supervision The System-OK contact (SC relay, life-contact) cannot be configured. The system contact is a Form “C” contact that picks up when the device is free from internal faults. While the device is booting up, the System OK relay (SC) remains dropped-off (unenergized). As soon as the system is properly started (and protection is active), the System Contact picks up and the System LED is activated accordingly. The devices are continuously monitored and supervised by different methods during normal operation as well as during the start-up phase. Results of this supervision may be: • • • • • Messages appearing within the event recorder; Indications within the display or PowerPort-E; Corrective measures; Restart of the device; or Any combination of the above results. In case of failures that cannot be corrected immediately, 3 restarts within 20 minutes are accepted before the device will be deactivated. In such a case, the device should be removed for service to ensure continuous correct operation. The Eaton Customer Service contact information and address can be found at the front of this manual. In case of any failures, the recorders of the device should be left untouched to ensure an easy diagnosis and proper repair at the factory. Besides the records and visible indications to the customer, there is internal information about failures. These allow Eaton service personnel at the repair facility to make a detailed analysis of files with failure reports. Self supervision is applied by different functions at different cyclic or non-cyclic timings to the following parts and functions of the device: • • • • • Faultless cyclic execution of the software; Functional capability of memory boards; Consistency of data; Functional capability of hardware sub-assemblies; and Faultless operation of the measuring unit. Faultless cyclic operation of the software is supervised by timing analysis and checking results of different functions. Errors of the software (watchdog function) lead to restarting the device and switching off the SystemOK contact (life contact). In addition, the “System-OK” LED will blink red after 3 unsuccessful attempts to restart the device within a time period of 20 minutes. The main processor cyclically monitors the operation of the signal processor and initiates corrective actions or restart of the device in case of faulty operation. Data and files are generally secured against unintended overwriting or faulty changes by check-sums. The measuring unit continuously checks the measured data by comparing received data with data from a second channel sampled in parallel. The auxiliary voltage is monitored continuously. If the voltage of one of the different supply circuits falls below a certain threshold, a restart of the device is initiated. If the voltage staggers around the threshold, the device also starts again after several seconds. Additionally the level of all internal supply voltage groups are continuously monitored. Independent of these separate monitoring functions, the intermediate voltage circuit is buffered until all important and relevant operational and fault-data have been saved and the device initiates a restart. 612 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Error Messages / Codes After a reboot of the device, the reason for rebooting will be displayed under [Operation/Status Display/Sys/Reboot]. For more information about the reboot reason, please refer to the information in this section. The reboot will also be logged within the event recorder. Rebooting causes an event named “Sys.Reboot”. Numeric Reboot Codes Error Messages/Codes 1. Reboot after clean switching off of the device - Normal reboot after clean shut-down of the device. 2. Reboot by User command - User-initiated reboot through panel command. 3. Super reset - Reset to factory settings. 4. Restart by debugger - Eaton internally for system-analysis purposes. 5. Restart because of configuration changes. 6. General failure - Reboot without definite reason. 7. Reboot by “SW-system abort” (HOST-side) - Summary of several reboot reasons detected by the software (i.e.: wrong pointer, corrupted files, etc.). 8. Reboot by watchdog timeout (HOST-side) - Signaling if the protection-class-task hangs. 9. Reboot by system abort (DSP-side) - Summary of several reboot reasons detected by software (i.e.: wrong pointer, DSP-side). 10. Reboot by watchdog timeout (DSP-side) - Appears when DSP sequence needs too long for one cycle. 11. Loss of auxiliary voltage or low voltage reboot after loss of auxiliary voltage or voltage dropping below reboot level but not becoming zero. 12. Faulty memory access - Message of MMU (memory mapping unit) that prohibited memory access has occurred. www.eaton.com 613 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Programmable Logic Available Elements (Equations): Logic General Description The protective device includes programmable logic equations for programming inputs, outputs, blocking of protective functions, and custom logic functions in the relay. The logic provides control of the relay output contacts based on the state of the inputs that can be chosen from the assignment list (protective function pickups, protective function states, breaker states, system alarms, and module inputs). The User can use the output signals of a logic equation as inputs in higher equations (e.g.: the output signal of logic equation 10 might be used as an input of logic equation 11). Principle Overview Type of logic gate selectable IN1 Inverting settable IN2 Inverting settable Gate Out Timer Out Delay Timer AND OR t-On Delay NAND IN3 Inverting settable IN4 Inverting settable Reset Latched Inverting settable 614 NOR Inverting settable Set S Q Reset R Q Out t-Off Delay www.eaton.com Out inverted www.eaton.com Inactive Active Inverting Reset 1..n, Assignment List LE[x].Reset Latched Inactive Active Inverting4 1..n, Assignment List LE[x].IN4 Inactive Active Inverting3 1..n, Assignment List LE[x].IN3 Inactive Active Inverting2 1..n, Assignment List LE[x].IN2 Inactive Active Inverting1 1..n, Assignment List LE[x].IN1 LE[1]...[n] XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR AND OR NAND NOR φ NOR NAND OR AND Gate Inactive Active Inverting Set t-Off Delay t-On Delay Delay Timer XOR R S Q Q Out inverted Out Timer Out Gate Out EDR-5000 IM02602007E Detailed Overview – Overall Logic Diagram. 615 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Available Gates (Operators) Within the Logic Equation, the following Gates can be used. Gate AND AND OR AND OR NAND OR NOR Input Signals The User can assign up to four Input signals (from the assignment list) to the inputs of the gate. As an option, each of the four input signals can be inverted (negated). Timer Gate (On Delay and Off Delay) The output of the gate can be delayed. The User has the option to set an On and an Off delay. Latching The timer issues two signals: an unlatched and a latched signal. The latched output can optionally be inverted. In order to reset the latched signal, the User has to assign a reset signal from the assignment list. Optionally, the reset signal can also be inverted. If no »Reset Latched« signal is assigned, then the »LATCH OUT «signal will be identical with the »TIMER OUT « signal. Cascading Logical Outputs The device will evaluate output states of the logic equations starting from “Logic Equation 1” up to the logic equation with the highest number. This evaluation cycle will be continuously repeated. Cascading Logic Equations in an ascending sequence. Cascading in an ascending sequence means that the User utilizes the output signal of “Logic Equation n” as input of “Logic Equation n+1”. If the state of “Logic Equation n” changes, the state of the output of “Logic Equation n+1” will be updated within the same cycle. Cascading Logic Equations in a descending sequence. Cascading in a descending sequence means that the User utilizes the output signal of “Logic Equation n+1” as input of “Logic Equation n”. If the output of “Logic Equation n+1” changes, this change of the feed back signal at the input of “Logic Equation n” will be delayed for one cycle. 616 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Cascading in Ascending Order LE1.IN1 Update within the same evaluation cycle LE1.IN2 LE1.IN3 Logic Equation1 Output of Logic Equation 1 LE2.IN2 LE1.IN4 LE2.IN3 Logic Equation2 Output of Logic Equation 2 LE2.IN4 LE1.IN1 Update within the same evaluation cycle LE1.IN2 LE1.IN3 Logic Equation1 Output of Logic Equation 1 LE2.IN2 LE1.IN4 LE2.IN3 Logic Equation2 Output of Logic Equation 2 LE3.IN2 LE2.IN4 Logic Equation3 LE3.IN3 LE3.IN4 Cascading in Descending Order LE2.IN1 Output of Logic Equation 3 Update within the same evaluation cycle Update within the next evaluation cycle (1 cycle delay) LE2.IN2 LE2.IN3 Logic Equation2 Output of Logic Equation 2 LE1.IN2 LE2.IN4 LE1.IN3 Logic Equation1 Output of Logic Equation1 LE1.IN4 LE3.IN1 Update within the same evaluation cycle LE3.IN2 LE3.IN3 Update within the next evaluation cycle (1 cycle delay) Logic Equation3 Output of Logic Equation 3 Update within the next but one evaluation cycle (2 cycles delay) LE2.IN2 LE3.IN4 LE2.IN3 Logic Equation2 Output of Logic Equation 2 LE1.IN2 LE2.IN4 LE1.IN3 Logic Equation1 Output of Logic Equation 1 LE1.IN4 www.eaton.com 617 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Programmable Logic at the Panel WARNING improper use of logic equations might result in personal injury or damage the electrical equipment. Do not use logic equations unless the User can ensure the safe functionality. How to configure a logic equation? • Within the Device Planning, set the number of required Logic Equations. • Call up the [Logic] menu. • Select a Logic Equation that is to be set. • Set the Input Signals (where necessary, invert them). • If required, configure the timer (»On delay« and »Off delay«). • If the latched output signal is used, assign a reset signal to the reset input. • Within the »status display«, the User can check the status of the logical inputs and outputs of the logic equation. In case the logic equations should be cascaded, the User has to be aware of timing delays (cycles) in case of descending sequences (Please refer to the Cascading Logical Outputs section). By means of the Status Display [Operation/Status Display], the logical states can be verified. Programmable Logic Via PowerPort-E WARNING improper use of logic equations might result in personal injury or damage the electrical equipment. Do not use logic equations unless the User can ensure the safe functionality. It is recommended to configure the logic via the PowerPort-E application. How to configure a logic equation? • Within the Device Planning, set the number of required Logic Equations. • Call up the [Logic] menu. • Set the Input Signals (where necessary, invert them). 618 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 • If required, configure the timer (»On delay« and »Off delay«). • If the latched output signal is used, assign a reset signal to the reset input. • Within the »status display«, the User can check the status of the logical inputs and outputs of the logic equation. In case the logic equations should be cascaded, the User has to be aware of timing delays (cycles) in case of descending sequences (Please refer to section: Cascading Logical Outputs). By means of the Status Display [Operation/Status Display], the logical states can be verified. Device Planning Parameters of the Programmable Logic Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path No of Equations: Number of required Logic Equations: 0, 20 [Device Planning] 5, 10, 20, 40, 80 Selection List for Logic Input Signals Name Description -.- No assignment Prot.Active Signal: Active Prot.Available Signal: Protection is available Prot.I dir fwd Signal: Phase current failure forward direction Prot.I dir n poss Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage Prot.I dir rev Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction Prot.IR dir fwd Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) forward Prot.IR dir n poss Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not possible Prot.IR dir rev Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction Prot.IX dir fwd Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) forward Prot.IX dir n poss Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) direction detection not possible Prot.IX dir rev Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) reverse direction Prot.Pickup Signal: General Pickup Prot.Trip Signal: General Trip Breaker.Interl CLOSE1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command Breaker.Interl CLOSE2-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command www.eaton.com 619 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Breaker.Interl CLOSE3-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command Breaker.Interl OPEN1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command Breaker.Interl OPEN2-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command Breaker.Interl OPEN3-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command Breaker.Ack unsucc SwitchCmd-I State of the module input: Acknowledge an error signal the signalizes an unsuccessful switching attempt Breaker.SC CLOSE-I State of the module input: Switching CLOSE Command, e.g.: the state of the Logic or the state of the digital input Breaker.SC OPEN-I State of the module input: Switching OPEN Command, e.g.: the state of the Logic or the state of the digital input Breaker.CinBkr-52a-I Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52a) Breaker.CinBkr-52b-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52b) Breaker.Ready-I Module Input State: Breaker Ready Breaker.Sys-in-Sync-I State of the module input: This signals has to become true within the synchronization time. If not, switching is unsuccessful. Breaker.Operate Position-I State of the module input: The withdrawable Breaker is in the Operate Position Breaker.Test Position-I State of the module input: The withdrawable Breaker is in the Test Position Breaker.Removed-I State of the module input: The withdrawable Breaker is Removed Breaker.Ack TripCmd-I State of the module input: Acknowledgment Signal (only for automatic acknowledgment). Module input signal Breaker.SI SingleContactInd Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary contact (pole) only. Thus indeterminate and disturbed Positions cannot be detected. Breaker.Pos not CLOSE Signal: Pos not CLOSE Breaker.Pos CLOSE Signal: Breaker is in CLOSE-Position Breaker.Pos OPEN Signal: Breaker is in OPEN-Position Breaker.Pos Indeterm Signal: Breaker is in Indeterminate Position Breaker.Pos Disturb Signal: Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The feedback signals (Position Indicators) contradict themselves. After expiring of a supervision timer this signal becomes true. Breaker.Ready Signal: Breaker is ready for operation. Breaker.t-Dwell Signal: Dwell time Breaker.Operate Position Signal: The withdrawable Breaker is in the Operate Position Breaker.Test Position Signal: The withdrawable Breaker is in the Test Position Breaker.Removed Signal: The withdrawable Breaker is Removed Breaker.CES succesf Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed successfully. Breaker.CES Disturbed Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command unsuccessful. Switchgear in disturbed position. Breaker.CES SAuthority Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed. No switching authority. 620 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Breaker.CES SwitchgDir Command Execution Supervision: Switching Direction Control. A switchgear that is already OPEN should be switched OPEN again (doubly). Breaker.CES DoubleOperating Command Execution Supervision: A second switch command is in conflict with a pending one. Breaker.CES CLOSE durg OPEN Cmd Command Execution Supervision: CLOSE Command during a pending OPEN Command. Breaker.CES SG not ready Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready Breaker.CES Field Interl Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed because of field interlocking. Breaker.CES Station Interl Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed because of station interlocking. Breaker.CES SyncTimeout Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed No Synchronization signal while t-sync was running. Breaker.Prot CLOSE Signal: CLOSE command issued by the Prot module. Breaker.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Breaker.Ack TripCmd Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command Breaker.CLOSE incl Prot CLOSE Signal: The CLOSE Command includes the CLOSE Command issued by the Protection module. Breaker.OPEN incl TripCmd Signal: The OPEN Command includes the OPEN Command issued by the Protection module. Breaker.Position Ind manipulated Signal: Position Ind manipulated Breaker.Bwear Slow Breaker Signal: Slow Breaker Alarm Breaker.Res Bwear Slow Breaker Signal: Resetting the slow breaker alarm. Breaker.CLOSE Cmd Signal: CLOSE command issued to the switchgear. Depending on the setting the signal may include the CLOSE command of the Prot module. Breaker.OPEN Cmd Signal: OPEN command issued to the switchgear. Depending on the setting the signal may include the OPEN command of the Prot module. Breaker.CLOSE Cmd manual Signal: CLOSE Cmd manual Breaker.OPEN Cmd manual Signal: OPEN Cmd manual Breaker.CLOSE request Signal: Synchronous CLOSE request 50P[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup 50P[1].Trip Signal: Trip 50P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup 50P[2].Trip Signal: Trip 50P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[3].Pickup Signal: Pickup 50P[3].Trip Signal: Trip 50P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup www.eaton.com 621 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 51P[1].Trip Signal: Trip 51P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup 51P[2].Trip Signal: Trip 51P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[3].Pickup Signal: Pickup 51P[3].Trip Signal: Trip 51P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 50X[1].Trip Signal: Trip 50X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 50X[2].Trip Signal: Trip 50X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 51X[1].Trip Signal: Trip 51X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 51X[2].Trip Signal: Trip 51X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 50R[1].Trip Signal: Trip 50R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 50R[2].Trip Signal: Trip 50R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 51R[1].Trip Signal: Trip 51R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 51R[2].Trip Signal: Trip 51R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27M[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 27M[1].Trip Signal: Trip 27M[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27M[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 27M[2].Trip Signal: Trip 27M[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59M[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 622 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 59M[1].Trip Signal: Trip 59M[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59M[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 59M[2].Trip Signal: Trip 59M[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27A[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 27A[1].Trip Signal: Trip 27A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27A[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 27A[2].Trip Signal: Trip 27A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59A[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 59A[1].Trip Signal: Trip 59A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59A[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 59A[2].Trip Signal: Trip 59A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59N[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 59N[1].Trip Signal: Trip 59N[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59N[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 59N[2].Trip Signal: Trip 59N[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence 46[1].Trip Signal: Trip 46[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence 46[2].Trip Signal: Trip 46[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 47[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry 47[1].Trip Signal: Trip 47[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 47[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry 47[2].Trip Signal: Trip 47[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[1].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[1].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. www.eaton.com 623 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 81[1].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[1].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[1].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[1].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[1].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[2].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[2].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 81[2].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[2].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[2].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[2].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[2].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[3].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[3].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[3].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 81[3].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[3].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[3].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[3].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[3].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[4].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[4].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[4].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 81[4].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[4].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[4].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[4].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[4].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[5].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[5].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[5].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 624 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 81[5].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[5].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[5].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[5].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[5].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[6].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[6].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[6].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 81[6].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[6].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[6].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[6].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[6].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 32[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32[2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32[3].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32[3].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32V[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32V[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32V[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32V[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32V[2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32V[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32V[3].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32V[3].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32V[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55D[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor PF-55D[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor PF-55D[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55D[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor PF-55D[2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor www.eaton.com 625 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description PF-55D[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55A[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor PF-55A[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor PF-55A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55A[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor PF-55A[2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor PF-55A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ZI.Ground OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground OUT ZI.Ground Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Pickup ZI.Ground Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Trip ZI.IN Signal: Zone Interlocking IN ZI.OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT ZI.Phase OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase OUT ZI.Phase Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Pickup ZI.Phase Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Trip ZI.Pickup Signal: Pickup Zone Interlocking ZI.Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip ZI.TripCmd Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command SOTF.Active Signal: Active SOTF.enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings. SOTF.Ex Man CLOSE Cmd-I Module Input State: External manual breaker CLOSE command (NOT for AR!) SOTF.I< Signal: No Load Current. CLPU.detected Signal: Cold Load detected CLPU.enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled CLPU.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking CLPU.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking CLPU.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking CLPU.I< Signal: No Load Current. CLPU.Load Inrush Signal: Load Inrush CLPU.Settle Time Signal: Settle Time BF.Lockout Signal: Lockout BF.Pickup Signal: BF-Module Started (Pickup) BF.Trip Signal: Breaker Failure Trip TCM.Not Possible Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker. TCM.Pickup Signal: Pickup Trip Circuit Supervision CTS.Pickup Signal: Pickup Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision LOP.Pickup Signal: Pickup Loss of Potential AR.Blo Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked 626 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description AR.failed Signal: Auto Reclosing Failure AR.Lock Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out AR.Pre Shot Pre Shot Control AR.Ready Signal: Ready to shoot AR.Running Signal: Auto Reclosing Running AR.Standby Signal: Standby AR.successful Signal: Auto Reclosing successful Sync.In-Sync Allowed Signal: In-Sync Allowed Sync.Sys-in-Sync Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the system synchronism criteria. Sync.LiveBus Signal: Live-Bus or Dead-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Dead-Bus Sync.LiveLine Signal: Live-Line or Dead-Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Dead-Line Sync.SlipTooHigh Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line voltages too high. Sync.SynchronFailed Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for 5 s when the breaker is still open after the Sync-check Run-timer has timed out. Sync.Sync-checkRunTiming Signal: Sync-check RunTiming Sync.SyncOverridden Signal: Sync-check is overridden because one of the Synchronism overriding conditions (DB/DL or ExtBypass) is met. Sync.VDiffTooHigh Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high. WiredInputs.52a M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Closed WiredInputs.52b M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Open WiredInputs.TOCa M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Connected WiredInputs.43/10 M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Selected To Trip WiredInputs.52a M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Closed WiredInputs.52b M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Open WiredInputs.TOCa M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Connected WiredInputs.43/10 M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Selected To Trip WiredInputs.52a T -I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Closed WiredInputs.52b T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Open WiredInputs.TOCa T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Connected WiredInputs.43/10 T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Selected To Trip WiredInputs.43 M-I State of the module input: System In Manual WiredInputs.43 A-I State of the module input: System in Auto WiredInputs.43 P1-I State of the module input: Preferred Source 1 WiredInputs.43 P2-I State of the module input: Preferred Source 2 WiredInputs.Bkr Trouble-I Breaker Trouble DI-8P X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input www.eaton.com 627 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description DI-8P X1.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input RO-6 X5.RO 1 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.RO 2 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.RO 3 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.RO 4 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.RO 5 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.RO 6 Signal: Relay Output RO-4Z X2.ZI OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT RO-4Z X2.RO 1 Signal: Relay Output RO-4Z X2.RO 2 Signal: Relay Output RO-4Z X2.RO 3 Signal: Relay Output RO-4Z X2.RO 4 Signal: Relay Output IEC61850.VirtualOutput1-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput2-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput3-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput4-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput5-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput6-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput7-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput8-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput9-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput10-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput11-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput12-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput13-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput14-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput15-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput16-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualInput1 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput2 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput3 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput4 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput5 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput6 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput7 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) 628 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description IEC61850.VirtualInput8 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput9 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput10 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput11 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput12 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput13 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput14 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput15 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput16 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) Logic.LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE2.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE2.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE2.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE2.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE3.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE3.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE3.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE3.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE4.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE4.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE4.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE4.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE5.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE5.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE5.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE5.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE6.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE6.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE6.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE6.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE7.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE7.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE7.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE7.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE8.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE8.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output www.eaton.com 629 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE8.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE8.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE9.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE9.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE9.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE9.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE10.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE10.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE10.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE10.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE11.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE11.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE11.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE11.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE12.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE12.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE12.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE12.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE13.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE13.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE13.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE13.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE14.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE14.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE14.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE14.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE15.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE15.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE15.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE15.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE16.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE16.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE16.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE16.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE17.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE17.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE17.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE17.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE18.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate 630 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE18.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE18.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE18.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE19.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE19.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE19.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE19.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE20.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE20.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE20.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE20.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE21.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE21.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE21.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE21.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE22.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE22.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE22.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE22.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE23.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE23.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE23.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE23.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE24.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE24.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE24.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE24.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE25.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE25.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE25.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE25.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE26.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE26.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE26.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE26.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE27.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE27.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE27.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE27.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) www.eaton.com 631 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE28.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE28.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE28.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE28.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE29.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE29.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE29.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE29.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE30.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE30.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE30.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE30.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE31.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE31.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE31.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE31.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE32.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE32.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE32.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE32.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE33.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE33.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE33.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE33.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE34.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE34.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE34.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE34.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE35.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE35.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE35.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE35.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE36.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE36.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE36.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE36.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE37.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE37.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE37.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) 632 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE37.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE38.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE38.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE38.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE38.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE39.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE39.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE39.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE39.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE40.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE40.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE40.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE40.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE41.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE41.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE41.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE41.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE42.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE42.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE42.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE42.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE43.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE43.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE43.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE43.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE44.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE44.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE44.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE44.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE45.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE45.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE45.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE45.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE46.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE46.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE46.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE46.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE47.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE47.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output www.eaton.com 633 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE47.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE47.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE48.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE48.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE48.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE48.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE49.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE49.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE49.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE49.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE50.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE50.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE50.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE50.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE51.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE51.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE51.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE51.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE52.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE52.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE52.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE52.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE53.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE53.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE53.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE53.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE54.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE54.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE54.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE54.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE55.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE55.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE55.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE55.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE56.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE56.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE56.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE56.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE57.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate 634 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE57.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE57.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE57.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE58.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE58.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE58.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE58.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE59.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE59.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE59.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE59.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE60.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE60.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE60.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE60.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE61.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE61.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE61.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE61.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE62.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE62.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE62.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE62.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE63.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE63.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE63.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE63.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE64.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE64.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE64.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE64.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE65.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE65.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE65.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE65.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE66.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE66.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE66.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE66.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) www.eaton.com 635 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE67.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE67.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE67.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE67.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE68.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE68.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE68.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE68.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE69.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE69.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE69.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE69.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE70.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE70.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE70.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE70.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE71.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE71.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE71.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE71.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE72.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE72.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE72.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE72.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE73.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE73.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE73.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE73.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE74.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE74.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE74.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE74.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE75.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE75.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE75.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE75.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE76.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE76.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE76.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) 636 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE76.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE77.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE77.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE77.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE77.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE78.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE78.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE78.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE78.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE79.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE79.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE79.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE79.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE80.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE80.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE80.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE80.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) System Alarms.Alarm Current Demand Signal: Alarm Current demand value System Alarms.Alarm I THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current System Alarms.Alarm V THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage System Alarms.Alarm VA Demand Signal: Alarm VAs demand value System Alarms.Alarm VA Power Signal: Alarm VAs peak System Alarms.Alarm VAr Demand Signal: Alarm VARs demand value System Alarms.Alarm VAr Power Signal: Alarm VArs peak System Alarms.Alarm Watt Demand Signal: Alarm WATTS demand value System Alarms.Alarm Watt Power Signal: Alarm WATTS peak System Alarms.Trip Current Demand Signal: Trip Current demand value System Alarms.Trip I THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current System Alarms.Trip V THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage System Alarms.Trip VA Demand Signal: Trip VAs demand value System Alarms.Trip VA Power Signal: Trip VAs peak System Alarms.Trip VAr Demand Signal: Trip VARs demand value System Alarms.Trip VAr Power Signal: Trip VArs peak System Alarms.Trip Watt Demand Signal: Trip WATTS demand value System Alarms.Trip Watt Power Signal: Trip WATTS peak Sys.Maint Mode Active Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Active Sys.Maint Mode Comm Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Comm. Mode Sys.Maint Mode DI Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Digital Input Mode Sys.Maint Mode Inactive Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Inactive www.eaton.com 637 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Sys.MaintMode Manually Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Manual Mode Sys.Maint Mode-I Module Input State: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Switch Sys.Min. 1 param changed Signal: At least one parameter has been changed. Sys.PS 1 Signal: Parameter Set 1 Sys.PS 2 Signal: Parameter Set 2 Sys.PS 3 Signal: Parameter Set 3 Sys.PS 4 Signal: Parameter Set 4 Sys.PS1-I State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should activate this Parameter Setting Group. Sys.PS2-I State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should activate this Parameter Setting Group. Sys.PS3-I State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should activate this Parameter Setting Group. Sys.PS4-I State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should activate this Parameter Setting Group. Sys.PSS manual Signal: Manual switch over of a Parameter Set Sys.PSS via Comm Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Communication Sys.PSS via Inp fct Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Input Function Sys.Res AlarmCr Signal: Res AlarmCr Sys.Res OperationsCr Signal: Res OperationsCr Sys.Res TotalCr Signal: Res TotalCr Sys.Res TripCr Signal: Res TripCr Global Protection Parameter of the Programmable Logic Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path LE1.Gate Logic gate AND, AND [Logic OR, /LE 1] NAND, NOR LE1.IN1 Assignment of the Input Signal 1..n, LogicList -.- [Logic /LE 1] LE1.Inverting1 LE1.IN2 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, Only available if an input signal has been assigned. Active Assignment of the Input Signal 1..n, LogicList Inactive [Logic /LE 1] -.- [Logic /LE 1] 638 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path LE1.Inverting2 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, Inactive [Logic Only available if an input signal has been assigned. Active Assignment of the Input Signal 1..n, LogicList LE1.IN3 /LE 1] -.- [Logic /LE 1] LE1.Inverting3 LE1.IN4 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, Only available if an input signal has been assigned. Active Assignment of the Input Signal 1..n, LogicList Inactive [Logic /LE 1] -.- [Logic /LE 1] LE1.Inverting4 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, Only available if an input signal has been assigned. Active LE1.t-On Delay Switch On Delay 0.00 – 36000.00 s Inactive [Logic /LE 1] 0.00 s [Logic /LE 1] LE1.t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 36000.00 s 0.00 s [Logic /LE 1] LE1.Reset Latched Reset Signal for the Latching 1..n, LogicList -.- [Logic /LE 1] LE1.Inverting Reset Inverting Reset Signal for the Latching Inactive, Inactive Active LE1.Inverting Set Inverting the Setting Signal for the Latching Inactive, [Logic /LE 1] Inactive Active [Logic /LE 1] Programmable Logic Inputs Name Description Assignment Via LE1.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal [Logic /LE 1] LE1.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal [Logic /LE 1] LE1.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal [Logic /LE 1] LE1.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal [Logic /LE 1] www.eaton.com 639 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Assignment Via LE1.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching [Logic /LE 1] Programmable Logic Outputs Name Description LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) 640 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Commissioning Before starting work on an open switchboard, it is required that the switchboard is de-energized and the following five safety regulations have been met. Safety precautions: • Disconnect the power supply; • Secure against reconnection; • Verify that the equipment is de-energized; • Connect to ground and short-circuit all phases; and • Cover or safeguard all live adjacent parts. The secondary circuit of a current transformer must never be opened during operation. The prevailing high voltages can cause severe injury or death. Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched off, it is likely that there are still hazardous voltages at the component connections. All locally applicable national and international installation and safety regulations for working at electrical power installations MUST always to be followed. Prior to the initial voltage connection, the following must be guaranteed: • • • • • • • • • • • • Correct grounding of the device; That all signal circuits are tested; That all control circuits are tested; Transformer wiring is checked; Correct rating of the CTs; Correct burden of the CTs; That the operational conditions are in line with the Technical Data; Correct rating of the transformer protection; Function of the transformer fuses; Correct wiring of all digital inputs; Polarity and capacity of the supply voltage; and Correct wiring of the analog inputs and outputs. The permissible deviations of measuring values and device adjustment are dependent on the Technical Data/Tolerances. Commissioning/Protection Test Commissioning/protection test must be carried out by authorized and qualified personnel. Before the device is put into operation, the related documentation MUST be read and understood. www.eaton.com 641 IM02602007E EDR-5000 With any test of the protection functions, the following has to be checked: Is activation/tripping saved in the event recorder? Is tripping saved in the fault recorder? Is tripping saved in the disturbance recorder? Are all signals/messages correctly generated? Do all generally configured blocking functions work properly? Do all temporarily configured (via DI) blocking functions work properly? To enable checks on all LEDs and relay functions, these have to be provided with the relevant pickup (alarm) and tripping functions of the respective protection functions/elements. This MUST be tested in practical operation. • • • • • • • Check of all temporary blockings (via digital inputs). • In order to avoid malfunctions, all blockings related to tripping/non-tripping of protection function MUST be tested. The test can be very complex and should therefore be performed by the same personnel who set up the protection concept. Check all general trip blockings. All general trip blockings MUST be tested. Prior to the initial operation of the protection device, all tripping times and values shown in the adjustment list MUST be confirmed by a secondary test. Any description of functions, parameters, inputs, or outputs that does not match the device in hand can be ignored. Decommissioning – Removing the Plug from the Relay Dismounting the relay will lead to a loss of the protection functionality. Ensure that there is a back-up protection. If you are not aware of the consequences of decommissioning the device – STOP! DO NOT start. Inform SCADA before you start. Switch-off the power supply. Ensure that the cabinet is de-energized and that there are no voltages that could lead to injury of personnel. Disconnect the terminals at the rear-side of the device. DO NOT pull any cable – pull on the plug! If it is stuck, use a screw driver. Fasten the cables and terminals in the cabinet by means of cable clips to ensure that no accidental electrical connections are caused. Hold the device at the front-side while removing the mounting nuts. 642 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Remove the device carefully from the cabinet. In case no other device is to be mounted or replaced, cover/close the cutout in the front-door. Close the cabinet. www.eaton.com 643 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Service and Commissioning Support Within the service menu, various functions support maintenance and commissioning of the device. General Within the [Service/General] menu, the User can initiate a reboot of the device. Maintenance Mode Principle – General Use The Maintenance Mode can be used to reduce arc flash levels. Refer to Std. NFPA70E. DO NOT attempt to install or perform maintenance on equipment while it is energized. Severe personal injury or death can result from contact with energized equipment. Verify that no voltage is present before opening doors of the switchboard. If maintenance will be performed on a device, special protective clothing and equipment MUST BE USED and all industry standard procedures MUST BE FOLLOWED. Failure to do so can result in severe personal injury or death. The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing time and lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the User to switch to more sensitive settings via the HMI/panel, Communication, or via a Digital Input while maintenance work is being performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide greater security for maintenance personnel and helps reduce the possibility of injury. The status of the Maintenance Mode (active/inactive) is stored power fail-safe. Manual activation is only possible via the HMI/panel (not via PowerPort-E). The Maintenance Mode can be activated: • • • Manually (only at the HMI/panel); Via communication; or Via a digital input. Changing to another mode is only possible if there is no active Activation Signal (e.g.: if the device is in the “Via Digital Input Mode” and while the assigned Digital Input is “true”, the User cannot switch to the “Manual Mode”). 644 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Before Use The sensitivity settings for the Maintenance Mode have to be calculated and programmed into the device (according to Std. NFPA70E). They are not part of the device by default. When the Maintenance Mode is enabled and fault current causes its operation, the fault clearing time of the associated breaker has to be very fast. Calculate the sensitivity setting on the basis of Std. NFPA70E. Program those sensitivity settings either into a setting group or into Adaptive Parameters. How to Use the Maintenance Mode Calculate the sensitivity setting on the basis of Std. NFPA70E. Program those sensitivity settings either into a setting group or into Adaptive Parameters. The Maintenance Mode offers two output signals: “Maint Mode activated” and “Maint Mode not activated”. The »Maint Mode.ACTIVATED« signal should be used to: • • • Switch to another setting group (in case the sensitivity settings are saved within this setting group); Activate “Adaptive Parameters” (in case the sensitivity settings are saved within these adaptive parameters); and/or Block or activate dedicated functions. Please see the Adaptive Parameters section for more details. The »Maint Mode.NOT ACTIVATED« signal should be used to: • Switch back to the standard setting group when Maintenance Mode should not be used. For fast access, the Maintenance Mode can be accessed by means of the »Softkey« Maint on the start screen (root) of the device. www.eaton.com 645 646 www.eaton.com 1..n, Dig Inputs Sys.Maint Mode Activated by Activation via DI Activation via Comm Activation Manually Inactive Sys.Maint Mode Mode Maint Mode Sys Comm Cmd Active Inactive Sys.MaintMode Manually AND AND AND OR Sys.Maint Mode-I Sys.Maint Mode Inactive Sys.Maint Mode Active Sys.Maint Mode DI Sys.Maint Mode Comm Sys.MaintMode Manually IM02602007E EDR-5000 EDR-5000 IM02602007E Forcing the Relay Output Contacts The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from Relay Output Contacts section. Principle – General Use The User MUST ENSURE that the relay output contacts operate normally after maintenance is completed. If the relay output contacts do not operate normally, the protective device WILL NOT provide protection. For commissioning purposes or for maintenance, relay output contacts can be set by force. Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Force RO], relay output contacts can be set by force: • • Permanent; or Via timeout. If they are set with a timeout, they will keep their “Force Position” only as long as this timer runs. If the timer expires, the relay will operate normally. If they are set as Permanent, they will keep the “Force Position” continuously. There are two options available: • • Forcing a single relay »Force Rox«; and Forcing an entire group of relay output contacts »Force all Outs«. Forcing an entire group takes precedence over forcing a single relay output contact! A relay output contact WILL NOT follow a force command as long as it is disarmed at the same time. A relay output contact WILL follow a force command: • • If it is not disarmed; and If the Direct Command is applied to the relay(s). Keep in mind, that forcing all relay output contacts (of the same assembly group) takes precedence over the force command of a single relay output contact. www.eaton.com 647 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Disarming the Relay Output Contacts The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from the Relay Output Contacts section. Principle – General Use Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/DISARMED], entire groups of relay output contacts can be disabled. By means of this test mode, contact outputs switching actions of the relay output contacts are prevented. If the relay output contacts are disarmed, maintenance actions can be carried out without the risk of taking entire processes off-line. The User MUST ENSURE that the relay output contacts are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance is complete. If they are not armed, the protective device WILL NOT provide protection. Zone Interlocking Output and the Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed. Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/DISARMED] entire groups of relay output contacts can be disarmed: • • Permanent; or Via timeout. If they are set with a timeout, they will keep their “Disarm Position” only as long as this timer runs. If the timer expires, the relay output contacts will operate normally. If they are set Permanent, they will keep the “Disarm State” continuously. A relay output contact WILL NOT be disarmed as long as: • A relay output contact WILL NOT be disarmed if it is latched (and not yet reset). • A relay output contact WILL NOT be disarmed as long as a running t-OFF-delay timer is not yet expired (hold time of a relay output contact). • If the Disarm Control is not set to active. • If the Direct Command is not applied. A relay output contact WILL be disarmed if it is not latched and: 648 • If there is no running t-OFF-delay timer (hold time of a relay output contact); and • If the DISARM Control is set to active; and • If the Direct Command Disarm is applied. www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Failure Simulator (Sequencer)* Available Elements: Sine wave gen * = Availability depends on ordered device. For commissioning support and in order to analyze failures, the protective device offers the option to simulate measuring quantities. The simulation menu can be found within the [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave gen] menu. The simulation cycle consists of three states: • • • Pre-failure; Failure; and Post-failure State (Phase). Within the [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave gen/Configuration] sub-menu, the duration of each phase can be set. In addition; the measuring quantities to be simulated can be determined (e.g.: voltages, currents, and the corresponding angles) for each phase (and ground). Setting the device into the simulation mode means taking the protective device out of operation for the duration of the simulation. Do not use this feature during operation of the device if the User cannot guarantee that there is a running and properly working backup protection. Sine wave gen pre Failure Simulation post t-PreFault t-FaultSimulation t-PostFault The energy counters will be stopped while the failure simulator is running. The simulation voltages are always phase to neutral voltages, irrespectively of the mains voltage transformers' connection method (Phase-to-phase / Wye / Open Delta). www.eaton.com 649 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Application Options of the Fault Simulator**: Stop Options Do not stop Cold Simulation (Option 1) Hot Simulation (Option 2) Simulation without tripping the breaker: Simulation is authorized to trip the breaker: Run complete: Pre Failure, Failure, Post Failure. Blocking protective Trips to the Breaker. That means verifying if the protective device generates How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode a trip without energizing the trip (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave coil of the breaker (similar to gen/Process] disarm the relay output contact). Ex Force Post = no assignment and Press/Call up Start Simulation. Stop by external signal How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave gen/Process] Trip Cmd Mode = Trip How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave gen/Process] Force Post: As soon as this signal becomes true, the Fault Simulation will be forced to switch into the Trip Cmd Mode = No Trip Post Failure mode. How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave gen/Process] Ex Force Post = Assigned Signal Manual stop As soon as this signal becomes true, the Fault Simulation will be terminated and the device changes back to normal operation. How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave gen/Process] Press/Call up Stop Simulation. **Please note: Due to internal dependencies, the frequency of the simulation module is 0.16% greater than the rated one. Global Protection Parameter of the Failure Simulator Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path t-PreFault Pre Fault Duration 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.0 s [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /Times] 650 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description tDuration of Fault Simulation FaultSimulation Setting Range Default Menu Path 0.00 – 10800.00 s 0.0 s [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /Times] t-PostFault t-PostFault 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.0 s [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /Times] TripCmd Mode Trip Command Mode No TripCmd, No TripCmd With TripCmd [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Process] ExBlo External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List is activated (allowed) within a parameter set and if the state of the assigned signal is true. Breaker.Pos CLOSE [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Process] Ex ForcePost Force Post state. Abort simulation. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Process] www.eaton.com 651 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Voltage Parameter of the Failure Simulator Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path VA Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: Phase A 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Voltage] VB Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: Phase B 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Voltage] VC Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: Phase C 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Voltage] 652 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path VX Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: VX 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.0 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Voltage] Angle VA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase A 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Voltage] Angle VB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase B 240° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Voltage] Angle VC Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase C 120° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Voltage] www.eaton.com 653 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Setting Range Angle VX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Fund. Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase: VX Default Menu Path 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Voltage] VA Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: Phase A 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.5 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Voltage] VB Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: Phase B 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.5 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Voltage] VC Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: Phase C 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.5 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Voltage] 654 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path VX Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: Phase VX 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0. 5Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Voltage] Angle VA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase A 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Voltage] Angle VB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase B 240° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Voltage] Angle VC Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase C 120° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Voltage] www.eaton.com 655 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Setting Range Angle VX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Fund. Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase: VX Default Menu Path 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Voltage] VA Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: Phase A 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Voltage] VB Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: Phase B 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Voltage] VC Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: Phase C 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Voltage] 656 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path VX Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: Phase VX 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.0 Vn [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Voltage] Angle VA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase A 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Voltage] Angle VB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase B 240° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Voltage] Angle VC Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase C 120° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Voltage] www.eaton.com 657 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Setting Range Angle VX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Fund. Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase VX Default Menu Path 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Voltage] Current Parameter of the Failure Simulator Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path IA Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: Phase A 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Current] IB Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: Phase B 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Current] 658 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path IC Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: Phase C 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Current] IX meas Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre State: IX 0.00 – 25.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Current] Angle IA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Current Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase A 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Current] Angle IB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Current Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase B 240° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Current] www.eaton.com 659 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Setting Range Angle IC Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Current Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase C Default Menu Path 120° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Current] Angle IX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Fund. Current Phasor during Pre Phase: IX 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PreFault /Current] IA Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: Phase A 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Current] IB Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: Phase B 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Current] 660 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path IC Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: Phase C 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Current] IX meas Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault State: IX 0.00 – 25.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Current] Angle IA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Current Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase A 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Current] Angle IB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Current Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase B 240° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Current] www.eaton.com 661 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Setting Range Angle IC Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Current Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase C Default Menu Path 120° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Current] Angle IX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Fund. Current Phasor during Fault Phase: IX 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-FaultSimulation /Current] IA Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: Phase A 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Current] IB Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: Phase B 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Current] 662 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path IC Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: Phase C 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Current] IX meas Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude during Post phase: IX 0.00 – 25.00 In 0.0 In [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Current] Angle IA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Current Phasor during Post phase: Phase A 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Current] Angle IB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Current Phasor during Post phase: Phase B 240° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Current] www.eaton.com 663 IM02602007E Parameter EDR-5000 Description Setting Range Angle IC Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Current Phasor during Post phase: Phase C Default Menu Path 120° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Current] Angle IX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° Fund. Current Phasor during Post phase: IX 0° [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Configuration /t-PostFault /Current] States of the Inputs of the Failure Simulator Name Description Assignment Via ExBlo Module Input State: External Blocking [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Process] Ex ForcePost-I State of the module input:Force Post state. [Service Abort simulation. /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Process] 664 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Signals of the Failure Simulator (States of the Outputs) Name Description Running Signal: Measuring value simulation is running. State Signal: Wave generation states: 0=AdcNormal, 1=PreFault, 2=Fault, 3=Post, 4=InitReset. Direct Commands of the Failure Simulator Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path Start Simulation Start Fault Simulation (Using the test parameters) Inactive, Inactive [Service Active /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Process] Stop Simulation Stop Fault Simulation (Using the test parameters) Inactive, Inactive Active [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) /WARNING! Cont? /Sine wave gen /Process] Failure Simulator Values Value Description Default Size Menu Path State Wave generation states: 0=AdcNormal, 1=PreFault, 2=Fault, 3=Post, 4=InitReset L1 L2 L3 Normal L1 L2 L3 Normal, [Service /Test Mode (Prot inhibit) t-PreFault, /WARNING! Cont? tFaultSimulati /Sine wave gen on, /State] t-PostFault, Init Res www.eaton.com 665 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Technical Data Use Copper conductors only, 75°C (167°F). Conductor size AWG 14 [2.5 mm]. Climatic Environmental Conditions Storage Temperature: Operating Temperature: Permissible Humidity at Ann. Average: Permissible Installation Altitude: -30°C to +70°C (-22°F to 158°F) -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F) <75% rel. (on 56d up to 95% rel.) <2,000 m (6,561.67 ft) above sea level If 4,000 m (13,123.35 ft) altitude applies, a changed classification of the operating and test voltages may be necessary. Degree of Protection EN 60529 HMI Front Panel with Seal: IP54 Rear Side Terminals: IP20 Routine Test Insulation Test Acc. to IEC60255-5: Aux. Voltage Supply, Digital Inputs, Current Measuring Inputs, Signal Relay Outputs: Voltage Measuring Inputs: All Wire-Bound Communication Interfaces: All tests to be carried out against ground and other input and output circuits. 2.5 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz 3.0 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz 1.5 kV DC Housing Housing B2: Height / Width Housing Depth (Incl. Terminals): Material, Housing: Material, Front Panel: Mounting Position: Weight: 666 183 mm (7.205 in.) / 212.7 mm (8.374 in.) 208 mm (8.189 in.) Aluminum extruded section Aluminum/Foil front Horizontal (±45° around the X-axis must be permitted) Approx. 4.2 kg (9.259 lb) www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Current and Ground Current Measurement Plug-in Connector with Integrated Short-Circuiter (Conventional Current Inputs) Phase and Ground Current Inputs: Nominal Currents: Max. Measuring Range: Capacity: Overcurrent Proof: Power Consumption: 1A/5A Up to 40 x In (phase currents) Up to 25 x In (ground current standard) 4 x In/continuously 30 x In / 10 s 100 x In / 1 s 250 x In / 10 ms (1 half-wave) Phase current inputs At In = 1 A S = 0.15 mVA At In = 5 A S = 0.15 mVA Ground current input At In = 1 A S = 0.35 mVA At In = 5 A S = 0.35 mVA Sensitive Ground Current Inputs: Nominal Currents: Max. Measuring Range: Capacity: Overcurrent Proof: Power Consumption: Frequency Range: Terminals: 1 A / 5 A with a special 50:0.025 core balance CT Up to 2.5 x In 1.5 x In / continuously 3.0 x In / 10 s 10 x In / 1 s 25 x In / 10 ms (1 half-wave) At In = 1 A S = 0.35 mVA At In = 5 A S = 0.35 mVA 50 Hz / 60 Hz ±10% Screw-type terminals with integrated short-circuiters (contacts) Screws M4, captive type acc. to VDEW Connection Cross Sections: 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x AWG 14) with wire end ferrule 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x AWG 12) with ring cable sleeve or cable sleeve 1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x AWG 10) with ring cable sleeve or cable sleeve The current measuring board´s terminal blocks may be used as with 2 (double) conductors AWG 10,12,14 otherwise with single conductors only. Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement Nominal Voltages: Max. Measuring Range: Continuous Loading Capacity: Power Consumption: Frequency Range: Terminals: 100 V/ 110 V/ 230 V/ 400 V (can be configured) 2 x nominal voltage 2 x nominal voltage (800 Vac) at Vn = 100 V S = 0.1 mVA at Vn = 110 V S = 0.1 mVA at Vn = 230 V S = 0.4 mVA at Vn = 400 V S = 1.0 mVA 50 Hz or 60 Hz ±10% Screw-type terminals www.eaton.com 667 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Frequency Measurement Nominal Frequencies: 50 Hz / 60 Hz Voltage Supply Aux. Voltage: Buffer Time in Case of Supply Failure: Max. Permissible Making Current: 24 - 270 Vdc / 48 - 230 Vac (-20/+10%) >= 50 ms at minimal aux. voltage Interrupted communication is permitted. 18 A peak value for <0.25 ms 12 A peak value for <1 ms The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of: • 2,5 A time-lag miniature fuse 5 x 20 mm (approx. 0.2 x 0.8 in.) according to IEC 60127 • 3,5 A time-lag miniature fuse 6,3 x 32 mm (approx. 0.25 x 1.25 in.) according to UL 248-14 Power Consumption Power Supply Range: 24 - 270 Vdc: 48 - 230 Vac (For Frequencies of 50-60 Hz): Power consumption in Idle Mode Approx. 7 W Approx. 7 VA Max. Power Consumption Approx.13 W Approx.13 VA Display Display Type: Resolution - Graphics Display: LCD with LED background illumination 128 x 64 pixel LED - Type: Number of LEDs, Housing B2: Two colored: red / green 15 Front Interface RS232 Baud Rates: Handshake: Connection: 115,200 Baud RTS and CTS 9-pole D-Sub plug Real Time Clock Running Reserve of the Real Time Clock: 1 year min. Digital Inputs Max. Input Voltage: Input Current: Reaction Time: Drop-out Time: 668 300 Vdc / 259 Vac <4 mA <20 ms <30 ms www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E (Safe State of the Digital Inputs) Switching Thresholds: Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 60 Vdc, 110 Vac / dc, 230 Vac / dc Un = 24 Vdc Switching Threshold 1 ON: Switching Threshold 1 OFF: Min. 19.2 Vdc Max. 9.6 Vdc Un = 48 V / 60Vdc Switching Threshold 2 ON: Switching Threshold 2 OFF: Min. 42.6 Vdc Max. 21.3 Vdc Un = 110 / 120 Vac / dc Switching Threshold 3 ON: Switching Threshold 3 OFF: Min. 88.0 Vdc / 88.0 Vac Max. 44.0 Vdc / 44.0 Vac Un = 230 / 240 Vac / dc Switching Threshold 4 ON: Switching Threshold 4 OFF: Min. 184 Vdc / 184 Vac Max. 92 Vdc / 92 Vac Terminals: Screw-type terminal Relay Outputs Continuous Current: Max. Make Current: Max. Breaking Current: Max. Switching Voltage: Switching Capacity: Contact Type: Terminals: 5 A ac / dc 25 A ac / 25 A dc for 4 s 30 A / 230Vac according to ANSI IEEE Std C37.90-2005 30 A / 250Vdc according to ANSI IEEE Std C37.90-2005 5 A ac up to 240 Vac 5 A dc up to 30 V (resistive) 0.3 A dc at 250 V (resistive) 250 V ac / 250 Vdc 1,250 VA Form C or normally open contact Screw-type terminals Supervision Contact (SC) Continuous Current: Max. Switch-on Current: Max. Breaking Current: Max. Switching Voltage: Switching Capacity: Contact Type: Terminals: 5 A ac / dc 15 A ac / 15 A dc for 4 s 5 A ac up to 250 Vac 5 A dc up to 30 Vdc (resistive) 0,25 A at 250 Vdc (resistive) 250 V ac / 250 Vdc 1,250 VA Form C or normally open contact Screw-type terminals Time Synchronization IRIG-B00X Nominal input voltage: Connection: 5V Screw-type terminals (twisted pair) www.eaton.com 669 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Zone Interlocking Only for Zone Interlock Tripping Outputs (Zone Interlock, semiconductor output): 5 Vdc, <2mA for connection to electronic inputs only. Zone Out: Output voltage (High) Output voltage (Low) 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc 0.0 to +0.5 Vdc Zone In: Nominal input voltage Max. input voltage Switching threshold ON Switching threshold OFF +5 Vdc +5.5 Vdc min. 4.0 Vdc max. 1.5 Vdc Galvanic isolation Connection: 2.5 kV ac (to ground and other IO) Screw-type terminals (twisted pair) RS485* Master/Slave: Connection: Slave 6 screw-clamping terminals RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL) (terminating resistors internal) The RS485 interface is realized via terminals. The communication cable has to be shielded. The shielding has to be fixed at the screw that is marked with the ground symbol (rear side of the device). Fiber Optic* Master/Slave: Connection: Slave ST-Plug URTD-Interface* Connection: Versatile Link *availability depends on device Boot Phase After switching on the power supply, the protection will be available in approximately 16 seconds. After approximately 97 seconds, the boot phase is completed (HMI and Communication initialized). 670 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Standards Approvals • UL-listed file: e217753 Design Standards Generic Standard Product Standard EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3 IEC 60255-6 EN 50178 UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment) CSA C22.2 No. 14-95 (Industrial Control Equipment) ANSI C37.90 High Voltage Tests (IEC 60255-6) High Frequency Interference Test IEC 60255-22-1 Within one circuit Class 3 Insulation Voltage Test IEC 60255-5 EN 50178 1 kV/2 s Circuit to ground 2.5 kV/2 s Circuit to circuit 2.5 kV/2 s All circuits to other circuits and exposed conductive parts 2.5 kV (eff.)/50Hz, 1 min. Except interfaces 1.5 kV DC, 1 min. Voltage measuring input 3 kV (eff.)/50 Hz, 1 min. Impulse Voltage Test IEC 60255-5 5 kV/0.5J, 1.2/50 µs EMC Immunity Tests Fast Transient Disturbance Immunity Test (Burst) IEC 60255-22-4 Power supply, mains inputs IEC 61000-4-4 Class 4 Other in- and outputs ANSI C37.90.1 Surge Immunity Test IEC 61000-4-5 Class 4 Class 3 ±4 kV, 2.5 kHz ±2 kV, 5 kHz (coupling network) ±4 kV, 2.5 kHz (coupling clamp) Within one circuit 2 kV Circuit to ground 4 kV Communication cables to ground 2 kV www.eaton.com 671 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Electrical Discharge Immunity Test IEC 60255-22-2 Air discharge IEC 61000-4-2 Class 3 Contact discharge Radiated Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test IEC 61000-4-3 26 MHz – 80 MHz Class X 80 MHz – 1 GHz ANSI C37.90.2 1 GHz – 3 GHz 8 kV 6 kV 10 V/m 35 V/m 10 V/m Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields IEC 61000-4-6 10 V Class 3 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Test IEC 61000-4-8 Continuous Class 4 3 sec 30 A/m 300 A/m EMC Emission Tests Radio Interference Suppression Test IEC/CISPR11 Limit value class B Radio Interference Radiation Test IEC/CISPR11 Limit value class B Environmental Tests Classification: IEC 60068-1 Climatic 20/060/56 Classification IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of ambient conditions (Storage) Classification of ambient conditions (Transportation) Classification of ambient conditions (Stationary use at weather protected locations) 1K5/1B1/1C1L/1S1/1M2 but min. -30°C (-22°F) 2K4/2B1/2C1/2S1/2M2 but min. -30°C (-22°F) 3K6/3B1/3C1/3S1/3M2 but min. -20°C (-4°F) /max 60°C (140°F) Temperature Test duration -20°C (-4°F) 16 h Temperature Relative humidity Test duration 60°C (140°F) <50% 72 h Test Cab: Damp Heat (Steady State) IEC 60068-2-78 Temperature Relative humidity Test duration 40°C (104°F) 93% 56 d IEC 60721-3-2 IEC 60721-3-3 Test Ad: Cold IEC 60068-2-1 Test Bd: Dry Heat IEC 60068-2-2 672 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Test Db: Damp Heat (Cyclic) IEC 60068-2-30 Temperature Relative humidity Cycles (12 + 12-hour) 60°C (140°F) 95% 2 Mechanical Tests Test Fc: Vibration Response Test IEC 60068-2-6 (10 Hz – 59 Hz) IEC 60255-21-1 Displacement Class 1 (59Hz – 150Hz) Acceleration 0.0014 in. (0.035 mm) 0.5 gn Number of cycles in each axis Test Fc: Vibration Endurance Test IEC 60068-2-6 (10 Hz – 150 Hz) IEC 60255-21-1 Acceleration Class 1 Number of cycles in each axis Test Ea: Shock Test IEC 60068-2-27 IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1 1.0 gn 20 Shock response test 5 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses in each direction Shock resistance test 15 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses in each direction Test Eb: Shock Endurance Test IEC 60068-2-29 Shock endurance test IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1 Test Fe: Earthquake Test IEC 60068-3-3 KTA 3503 IEC 60255-21-3 Class 2 1 Single axis earthquake vibration test 10 gn, 16 ms, 1,000 impulses in each direction 3 – 7 Hz: Horizontal 0.394 in. (10 mm), 1 cycle each axis 7 – 35 Hz Horizontal: 2 gn, 1 cycle each axis www.eaton.com 673 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Specifications Specifications of the Real Time Clock Resolution: 1 ms Tolerance: <1 minute / month (+20°C [68°F]) Specifications of the Measured Value Acquisition Phase and Ground Current Measuring Frequency Range: 50 Hz / 60 Hz ± 10% Accuracy: Class 0.5 Amplitude Error if I < In: ±0.5% of the rated value Amplitude Error if I > In: ±0.5% of the measured value Amplitude Error if I > 2 In: ±1.0% of the measured value Resolution: 0.01 A Harmonics: Up to 20% 3rd harmonic ±2% Up to 20% 5th harmonic ±2% Frequency Influence: <±2% / Hz in the range of ±5 Hz of the configured nominal frequency Temperature Influence: <±1% within the range of 0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F) Phase-to-ground and Residual Voltage Measurement Nominal voltage (Vn): 60 ... 600 V in 1 V steps Max measuring range: 2 x nominal value (Vn) Frequency range: 50 Hz or 60 Hz ±10% Precision: Class 0,5 Amplitude error for V<Vn (measured): ±0.5% of the rated value Amplitude error for V<Vn (calculated): ±1.0% of the rated value Amplitude error for V>Vn (measured): ±0.5% of the measured value Amplitude error for V>Vn (calculated): ±1.0% of the calculated value Resolution: 0.1 V Harmonics: up to 20% 3rd harmonic ±1%, up to 20% 5th harmonic ±1% Frequency influence: <±2% / Hz in the range of ±5 Hz of the configured nominal frequency Temperature influence: <±1% within the range of 0°C up to +55°C Frequency Measurement Nominal frequency: 50 Hz / 60 Hz Precision: ±0.05% of fn within the range of 40-70 Hz at voltages >50 V Voltage dependency: frequency acquisition of 5 V – 800 V 674 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Protection Elements Accuracy The tripping delay relates to the time between alarm and trip. The accuracy of the operating time relates to the time between when the measured value has exceeded the threshold until the protection element is picked-up. Overcurrent Protection Elements 50P[x], 51P/[x] and directional Overcurrent Protection 67P[x] Accuracy Pickup ±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% x In. Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% x In t DEFT ±1% resp. ±10 ms Operating Time <35 ms Starting from I higher than 1.1 x I> Disengaging Time <45 ms t-Multiplier ±5% IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC EINV IEC LINV ANSI MINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV Flat It I2t I4t Reset Mode ±1% resp. ±10 ms IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC EINV IEC LINV 5% ANSI MINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV Flat It I2t I4t www.eaton.com 675 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Voltage restraint 51V[x] Accuracy Pickup ±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% x In. Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% x In Operating Time <35 ms Starting from I higher than 1.1 x I> Disengaging Time <45 ms t-Multiplier ±5% IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC EINV IEC LINV ANSI MINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV Flat It I2t I4t Reset Mode ±1% resp. ±10 ms IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC EINV IEC LINV 5% ANSI MINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV Flat It I2t I4t Ground Current Elements: 50X[x], 50R[x], 51X[x], 51R[x] and directional Ground Current Protection 67X[x], 67R[x] Accuracy Pickup (measured ground current) ±1.5% of the setting value, Resp. 1% x In Pickup (calculated ground current) ±2.0% of the setting value, Resp. 1.5% x In Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% x In t DEFT ±1% resp. ±10 ms 676 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Operating Time <35 ms Starting from IE higher than 1.1 x IE> Disengaging Time <45 ms t-Multiplier ±5% IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC EINV IEC LINV ANSI MINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV Flat It I2t I4t Reset Mode ±1% resp. ±10 ms IEC characteristics IEC NINV IEC VINV IEC EINV IEC LINV 5% Reset curves if ANSI characteristics ANSI MINV ANSI VINV ANSI EINV Flat It I2t I4t Phase under- and phase overvoltage 27M[x]/59M[x] Pickup Accuracy ±1.5% of the setting value Operating Time Resp. 1% x Vn 97% or 0.5% x Vn DEFT ±1% resp. ±10 ms <35 ms Starting from V higher/lower than 1.1 x V> or V< Disengaging Time <45 ms Dropout Ratio t www.eaton.com 677 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Aux. under- and phase overvoltage and neutral overvoltage 27A[x]/59A[x]/59N[x] Pickup Accuracy ±1.5% of the setting value Operating Time Resp. 1% x Vn 97% or 0.5% x Vn DEFT ±1% resp. ±10 ms <35 ms Starting from VG or VX higher than 1.1 x VG> or VX> Disengaging Time <45 ms Dropout Ratio t Current unbalance: 46[x] Threshold I2/I1 ≥ 0.1 x In t Operating Time Accuracy ±2% of the setting value resp.1% In ±1% DEFT ±1% resp. ±10 ms <60 ms Starting from I2/I1 ≥ 1.1 x In Disengaging Time <40 ms Voltage unbalance: 47[x] Threshold V2/V1 ≥ 0.1 x Vn t Operating Time Accuracy ±2% of the setting value resp.1% Vn ±1% DEFT ±1% resp. ±10 ms <60 ms Starting from V2/V1 ≥ 1.1 x Vn Disengaging Time <40 ms Frequency Protection 81O[x] Threshold Dropout ratio t Operating time Starting from f higher than f>+0.02 Hz Disengaging time Frequency Protection 81U[x] Threshold t Dropout ratio Operating time Starting from f lower than f<-0.02 Hz Release time V Block f Dropout ratio 678 Accuracy 10 mHz at fn 99.95% or 0.05% x fn ±1% resp. ±10 ms 40-50Hz <60 ms 50-70Hz <50 ms 40-50Hz <85 ms 50-70Hz <75 ms Accuracy 10 mHz at fn ±1% resp. ±10 ms 100.05% or 0.05% x fn 40-50Hz <60 ms 50-70Hz <50 ms 40-50Hz <85 ms 50-70Hz <75 ms ±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% x Vn 103% or 0.5% x Vn www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Rate of Change of Frequency df/dt Threshold t Operating time Accuracy 100 mHz per Second ±1% resp. ±10 ms <40 ms Disengaging time <40 ms Rate of Change of Frequency Df/Dt Threshold t Operating time Accuracy 100 mHz per Second ±1% resp. ±10 ms <40 ms Disengaging time <40 ms Vector surge 87V Threshold Operating time Accuracy ±0,5° [1-30°] at Vn and fn <40 ms PQ-protection 32[x]/32V[x] Threshold t Operating time Disengaging time Dropout Ratio Accuracy ±3% or ±1.5% Sn ±1% resp. ±10 ms 75 ms 75 ms 97% for P>/Q> and 103% for P</Q< PF-55D/PF-55A - Power Factor Threshold Operating time Accuracy ± 0.01 (absolute) <120 ms AR – Auto Reclosing t-ManualCloseBlock t-Lock2Ready t-Run2Ready t-Block2Ready t-Brk CLOSE Cmd t-sync_AR t-AR Supervision Accuracy ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1% resp. ±10 ms Sync - Sync-Check Operating time t-MaxBrkCloseDelay t-MaxSyncSuperv MinLiveBusVoltage MaxDeadBusVoltage MinLiveLineVoltage MaxDeadLineVoltage t-VoltDead MaxVoltageDiff MaxSlipFrequency MaxAngleDiff Accuracy Max. 300 ms ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x Vn ±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x Vn ±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x Vn ±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x Vn ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x Vn, may be exceeded when open delta is configured 10 mHz at fn ±1° SOTF – Switch onto fault Operating time I< t-enable Accuracy <35 ms ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% x In ±1% resp. ±10 ms www.eaton.com 679 IM02602007E EDR-5000 CLPU – Cold load pickup Operating time t-Load OFF t-Max Block I< Accuracy <35 ms ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1% resp. ±10 ms ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% x In Breaker Failure Protection 50BF Accuracy I-BF> ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% x In t-BF ±1% resp. ±10 ms Operating Time <40 ms Starting from I Higher than 1.3 x I-BF> Disengaging Time <40 ms Trip Circuit Monitoring TCM t-TCM Accuracy ±1% resp. ±10 ms LOP - loss of potential t-Pickup Accuracy ±1% resp. ±10 ms Current Transformer Supervision CTS ΔI Dropout Ratio Pickup delay Accuracy ±2% of the setting value resp. 1.5% In 94% ±1% resp. ± 10 ms 680 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E Appendix The following terms, abbreviations, and acronyms are used in this manual. Please refer to this section for their meanings / definitions. A AC A/D Ack. AMP AND ANG ANSI AR AUX AVG, avg AWG BF BFI BKR, bkr Blo °C calc CB CD Char CHK CHNL Cmd. CMND CMN COM Comm COMP CONN CONT CPU Cr. CRT, CRNT CSA CT Ctrl. CTS d D/A D-Sub-Plug DC, dc DEFT DFLT DGNST DI Diagn. Ampere(s), Amp(s) Alternating current Analog to digital Acknowledge Ampere(s), Amp(s) Logical gate (The output becomes true if all Input signals are true.) Angle American National Standards Institute Automatic reclosure Auxiliary Average American wire gauge Breaker failure Breaker failure initiate Breaker Blocking(s) Degrees Celsius Calculated Circuit breaker, Breaker Compact disk Curve shape Check Channel Command Command Common input Common input Communication Compensated, comparison Connection Continuous, contact Central processing unit Counter(s) Current Canadian Standards Association Control transformer Control Current transformer supervision Day Digital to analog Communication interface Direct current Definite time characteristic (Tripping time does not depend on the height of the current.) Default Diagnostics Digital Input Diagnosis www.eaton.com 681 IM02602007E Diagn Cr DIFF DIN DIR, dir DMD DPO DSP dt EINV EMC EN err. / Err. EVTcon Ex ExBlo ExP EXT °F F Fc FIFO FIFO Principal FLA FO FTP fund FWD G, g gn GND GPS h HARM HMI HTL HTTP Hz I I I0 I1 I2 IA IAB IB IBC I-BF IC IC's ICA ID IEC IED 682 EDR-5000 Diagnosis counter(s) Differential Deutsche Industrie Norm Directional Demand Dropout Digital signal processor Rate of change Extremely inverse tripping characteristic Electromagnetic compatibility Europäische Norm Error Parameter determines if the residual voltage is measured or calculated. External External blocking(s) External protection Extension, external Degrees Fahrenheit Field Function (Enable or disable functionality = allow or disallow.) First in first out First in first out Full load current Fiber optic File transfer protocol Fundamental (ground wave) Forward Generator Acceleration of the earth in vertical direction (9.81 m/s2) Ground Global positioning system Hour Harmonic / harmonics Human machine interface (Front of the protective relay) Manufacturer internal product designation Hyper text transfer protocol Hertz Fault current Current Zero current (symmetrical components), Zero sequence current Positive sequence current (symmetrical components) Negative sequence current (symmetrical components) Phase A current Phase A minus B current Phase B current Phase B minus C current Tripping threshold Phase C current Manufacturer internal product designation Phase C minus A current Identification International Electrotechnical Commission Intelligent electronic device www.eaton.com EDR-5000 IM02602007E IEEE IG IG Igd IGnom IH1 IH2 IINV in. incl. Info. Interl. INV Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Ground current (not residual) Fault current Differential ground current Nominal ground current Fundamental harmonic (1st harmonic) 2nd harmonic Inverse Inch Include, including Information Interlocking Inverse characteristic (The tripping time will be calculated depending on the height of the current) I/O Input / output IOC Instantaneous overcurrent IOV Instantaneous overvoltage IR Calculated ground current IRIG Input for time synchronization (Clock), Inter-range instrumentation group ISO International Standards Organization IT Thermal Characteristic I2T Thermal Characteristic I4T Thermal Characteristic IUV Instantaneous undervoltage IX 4th measuring input of the current measuring assembly group (either ground or neutral current) J Joule kA Kiloampere kg Kilogram kHz Kilohertz kV Kilovolt(s) kVdc or kVDC Kilovolt(s) direct current L1 Phase A L2 Phase B L3 Phase C l/ln Ratio of current to nominal current. LED Light emitting diode lb-in Pound-inch LINV Long time inverse tripping characteristic LV Low voltage m Meter M Machine mA Milliampere(s), Milliamp(s) MAG Magnitude MAN, man. Manual / manually MAX, max. Maximum meas Measured MIN, min. Minimum min. Minute MINV Moderately Inverse Tripping Characteristic MK Manufacturer Internal Product Designation Code mm Millimeter MMU Memory mapping unit MRT Minimum response time www.eaton.com 683 IM02602007E ms MTA MTR MV mVA MVA MVA A MVA B MVA C MVAR MVAR A MVAR B MVAR C MVARH MW MW A MW B MW C MWH N N/A, n/a N.C. NEG NINV Nm No N.O. NOM, Nom. NT O OC, O/C O/P, Op, OUT OV OVERFREQ OVLD P Para. PC PCB PE PF PF A PF B PF C Ph POS PRESS PRI, pri PROT, Prot PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 684 EDR-5000 Milli-second(s) Maximum torque angle Motor Medium voltage Milli volt amperes (Power) Mega volt-ampere (total 3-phase) Mega volt-ampere (phase A) Mega volt-ampere (phase B) Mega volt-ampere (phase C) Mega Var (total 3-phase) Mega Var (phase A) Mega Var (phase B) Mega Var (phase C) Mega Var-Hour Megawatt(s) (total 3-phase) Megawatt(s) (phase A) Megawatt(s) (phase B) Megawatt(s) (phase C) Megawatt-Hour(s) Neutral Not applicable Not connected Negative Normal inverse tripping characteristic Newton-meter Number Normal open (Contact) Nominal Manufacturer internal product designation code Over Overcurrent Output Overvoltage Over-frequency Overload Phase Parameter Personal computer Printed circuit board Protected Earth Power factor (total 3-phase) Power factor (phase A) Power factor (phase B) Power factor (phase C) Phase Positive Pressure Primary Protection Module (Master Module), protection Parameter set 1 Parameter set 2 Parameter set 3 Parameter set 4 www.eaton.com EDR-5000 PSet PSS pu PWM PWR R rec. REF rel REM res ResetFct REV RevData RMS RO RO1 RO2 RO3 Rst RTD RX (Rx) s S SAT SC Sca SCADA sec SEC, sec SENS SEQ Sig. SNTP SRC StartFct STATS Sum SUPERV SW SYNC SYNCHCHK Sys. t or t. t T Tcmd TCP TCP/IP TEMP, temp THD TI TOC IM02602007E Parameter set Parameter set switch (Switching from one parameter set to another) Per unit Pulse width modulated Power Reset Record Reference Relative Remote Reset Reset function Reverse Review data Root mean square Relay Output 1st Relay Output 2nd Relay Output 3rd Relay Output Reset Resistance-temperature detector Receive, receiver Second Sensitive CT saturation Supervision contact SCADA Communication module, supervisory control and data acquisition Second(s) Secondary Sensitive Sequence Signal Simple network time protocol Source Start function Statistics Summation Supervision Software Sync-check, Synchrocheck Sync-check, Synchrocheck System Time Tripping delay Time, transformer Trip command Transmission control protocol Communication protocol Temperature Total harmonic distortion Manufacturer internal product designation code Time overcurrent www.eaton.com 685 IM02602007E TOV TRANS TripCmd TX (Tx) txt UC UL UMZ URTD USB V V0 V1 V2 VA VAB Vac / V ac VAG VARH VB VBA VBG VC VCA VCG Vdc / V dc VDE VDEW VE V/Hz VINV VT VTS W WDC WDG WH www X XCT XInv Z 686 EDR-5000 Time overvoltage Transient Trip command Transmit, transmitter Text Undercurrent Underwriters Laboratories DEFT (definite time tripping characteristic) Universal resistance-temperature detector Universal serial bus Volts Zero sequence voltage Positive sequence voltage Negative sequence voltage Phase A voltage Phase A to B voltage Volts alternating current Phase A to ground voltage Var-hour voltage Phase B voltage Phase B to A voltage Phase B to ground voltage Phase C voltage Phase C to A voltage Phase C to ground voltage Volts direct current Verband Deutscher Elektrotechnik Verband der Elektrizitätswirtschaft Residual voltage Volts per Hertz Very inverse tripping characteristic Voltage transformer Voltage transformer supervision Watt(s) Watch dog contact (supervision contact) Winding Watthour World wide web Reactance 4th current measuring input (ground or neutral current) Inverse characteristic Impedance, zone www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase) Explanation: t = Tripping delay I = Fault current Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip. DEFT 100 I 10 0.01 Pickup 40 t [s] 1 300 s t 0.1 0.0 s 0.01 1 10 I Pickup www.eaton.com 687 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Time Current Curves (PHASE) The following characteristics are available: • • • • • • • • • • • NINV (IEC/XInv); VINV (IEC/XInv); LINV (IEC/XInv); EINV (IEC/XInv); MINV (ANSI/XInv); VINV (ANSI/XInv); EINV (ANSI/XInv); Thermal Flat; Therm Flat IT; Therm Flat I2T; and Therm Flat I4T. Explanation: t = Tripping delay t-multiplier = Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor I = Fault current Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip. 688 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 IEC NINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 0.14 I *t-multiplier [s] 2 (Pickup) Trip -1 t= 0.14 I 0.02 (Pickup) t [s] *t-multiplier [s] -1 t-multiplier x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 689 IM02602007E EDR-5000 IEC VINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 13.5 I 2 (Pickup)-1 Trip *t-multiplier [s] 13.5 t= I (Pickup)-1 t [s] t-multiplier x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) 690 *t-multiplier [s] www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 IEC LINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 120 I 2 (Pickup)-1 *t-multiplier [s] Trip 120 t= I *t-multiplier [s] ( Pickup)-1 t-multiplier t [s] x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 691 IM02602007E EDR-5000 IEC EINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 80 I 2 (Pickup) *t-multiplier [s] -1 Trip t= 80 I 2 (Pickup) *t-multiplier [s] -1 t [s] t-multiplier x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) 692 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 ANSI MINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 4.85 I *t-multiplier [s] 2 (Pickup) -1 Trip t= ( 0.0515 + 0.1140 0.02 I (Pickup) -1 ) *t-multiplier [s] t-multiplier t [s] x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 693 IM02602007E EDR-5000 ANSI VINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 21.6 2 I )-1 (Pickup *t-multiplier [s] Trip t= ( 19.61 I 2 (Pickup) t [s] ) *t-multiplier [s] t-multiplier x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) 694 -1 + 0.491 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 ANSI EINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 29.1 *t-multiplier [s] 2 I (Pickup)-1 Trip t= ( 28.2 I (Pickup) t [s] + 0.1217 2 -1 ) *t-multiplier [s] t-multiplier x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 695 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Therm Flat Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= ( 5*3 I In Trip 2 2 0 ) 5*1 t= *t-multiplier [s] ( I In 0 *t-multiplier [s] ) t = 45 *t-multiplier [s] 4 1× 10 3 1× 10 TM[s]= 10 5 100 2 1.0 t [s] 10 0.5 1 0.05 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.1 1 10 x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) 696 www.eaton.com 100 t-multiplier IM02602007E EDR-5000 IT Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset Trip 2 t= ( 5*3 I In 0 ) 1 *t-multiplier [s] 5*3 t= ( I In 1 *t-multiplier [s] ) 4 1× 10 3 1× 10 100 TM[s]= t [s] 10 10 t-multiplier 5 2 1 1.0 0.5 0.1 0.05 0.01 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 697 IM02602007E EDR-5000 I2T Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset Trip 2 t= ( 5*3 I In 2 0 *t-multiplier [s] t= ) ( 5*3 I In 2 ) *t-multiplier [s] 4 1× 10 3 1× 10 100 t [s] t-multiplier 10 TM[s]= 1 10 5 0.1 2 1.0 0.01 0.01 0.05 0.1 1 x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) 698 www.eaton.com 10 0.5 100 IM02602007E EDR-5000 I4T Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset Trip 4 2 t= ( 5*3 I In 0 ) t= *t-multiplier [s] ( 5*3 I In *t-multiplier [s] 4 ) 4 1× 10 3 1× 10 100 t [s] t-multiplier 10 TM[s]= 1 10 5 2 0.1 1.0 0.5 0.05 0.01 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 699 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Calculated) The following characteristics is available: DEFT (definite time). • Explanation: t = Tripping delay IG = Fault current Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip. The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents; but this is only possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected. DEFT 100 IR calc Pickup 10 0.01 I/I> 20 40 t [s] 1 300 s t 0.1 0.0 s 0.01 1 IR calc Pickup 700 www.eaton.com 10 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Measured) The following characteristics is available: • DEFT (definite time). Explanation: t = Tripping delay IX = Fault current Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip. The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents; but this is only possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected. DEFT 100 IX Pickup 10 0.01 I/I> 20 40 t [s] 1 300 s t 0.1 0.0 s 0.01 1 IX 10 Pickup www.eaton.com 701 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Time Current Curves (Ground Current) The following characteristics are available: NINV (IEC/XInv); VINV (IEC/XInv); LINV (IEC/XInv); EINV (IEC/XInv); MINV (ANSI/XInv); VINV (ANSI/XInv); EINV (ANSI/XInv); Thermal Flat; Therm Flat IT; Therm Flat I2T; and Therm Flat I4T. • • • • • • • • • • • Explanation: t = Tripping delay t-multiplier = Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor IG = Fault current Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip. The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents; but this is only possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected. 702 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 IEC NINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 0.14 2 IG (Pickup) -1 *t-multiplier [s] Trip t= 0.14 0.02 IG (Pickup) -1 t [s] *t-multiplier [s] t-multiplier x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 703 IM02602007E EDR-5000 IEC VINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 13.5 IG 2 (Pickup)-1 *t-multiplier [s] Trip t= 13.5 IG (Pickup) -1 t [s] t-multiplier x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) 704 *t-multiplier [s] www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 IEC LINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 120 IG 2 )-1 (Pickup Trip *t-multiplier [s] t= 120 IG (Pickup)-1 *t-multiplier [s] t-multiplier t [s] x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 705 IM02602007E EDR-5000 IEC EINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 80 IG 2 (Pickup) -1 *t-multiplier [s] Trip t= 80 IG 2 (Pickup) -1 t [s] t-multiplier x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) 706 *t-multiplier [s] www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 ANSI MINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 4.85 2 IG (Pickup) *t-multiplier [s] -1 Trip t= ( 0.0515 + 0.1140 0.02 IG (Pickup) -1 ) *t-multiplier [s] t-multiplier t [s] x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 707 IM02602007E EDR-5000 ANSI VINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 21.6 IG 2 )-1 (Pickup *t-multiplier [s] t= ( 19.61 2 IG (Pickup) -1 t [s] + 0.491 ) *t-multiplier [s] t-multiplier x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) 708 Trip www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 ANSI EINV Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset t= 29.1 *t-multiplier [s] IG 2 )-1 (Pickup Trip t= ( 28.2 + 0.1217 2 IG (Pickup) -1 t [s] ) *t-multiplier [s] t-multiplier x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 709 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Therm Flat Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset 5*1 IG t= Trip 2 0 (IGnom) t= *t-multiplier [s] 5 IG 0 (IGnom) *t-multiplier [s] t = 5 *t-multiplier [s] 4 1× 10 3 1× 10 TM[s]= 10 5 100 2 t [s] 1.0 10 0.5 1 0.05 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.1 1 10 x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) 710 www.eaton.com 100 t-multiplier IM02602007E EDR-5000 IT Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset Trip 2 5*1 IG t= 1 0 (IGnom) *t-multiplier [s] t= 5*1 IG 1 (IGnom) *t-multiplier [s] 1× 104 3 1× 10 100 t [s] t-multiplier TM[s]= 10 5 10 5 1 2 2 1.0 0.1 0.5 0.05 0.01 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 711 IM02602007E EDR-5000 I2T Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset Trip 2 2 t= 5*1 IG 0 5*1 IG t= *t-multiplier [s] 2 (IGnom) (IGnom) *t-multiplier [s] 4 1× 10 3 1× 10 100 t [s] t-multiplier 10 TM[s]= 1 10 5 0.1 2 0.05 0.01 0.01 0.1 1 1.0 0.5 10 x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) 712 www.eaton.com 100 IM02602007E EDR-5000 I4T Notice! Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and instantaneous. Reset Trip 2 5*1 IG t= 4 0 (IGnom) *t-multiplier [s] 5*1 IG t= 4 (IGnom) *t-multiplier [s] 4 1× 10 3 1× 10 100 t [s] t-multiplier 10 TM[s]= 10 1 5 2 0.1 1.0 0.5 0.05 0.01 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup) www.eaton.com 713 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Assignment List The »ASSIGNMENT LIST« below summarizes all module outputs (signals) and inputs (e.g.: states of the assignments). Name Description -.- No assignment Prot.Available Signal: Protection is available. Prot.Active Signal: Active Prot.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Prot.Pickup Phase A Signal: General Pickup Phase A Prot.Pickup Phase B Signal: General Pickup Phase B Prot.Pickup Phase C Signal: General Pickup Phase C Prot.Pickup IX or IR Signal: General Pickup - Ground Fault Prot.Pickup Signal: General Pickup Prot.Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A Prot.Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B Prot.Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C Prot.Trip IX or IR Signal: General Trip Ground Fault Prot.Trip Signal: General Trip Prot.Res Fault a Mains No Signal: Resetting of fault number and number of grid faults. Prot.I dir fwd Signal: Phase current failure forward direction Prot.I dir rev Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction Prot.I dir n poss Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage Prot.IR dir fwd Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) forward Prot.IR dir rev Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction Prot.IR dir n poss Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not possible. Prot.IX dir fwd Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) forward Prot.IX dir rev Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) reverse direction Prot.IX dir n poss Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) direction detection not possible. Prot.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 Prot.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 Control.Local Switching Authority: Local Control.Remote Switching Authority: Remote Breaker.SI SingleContactInd Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary contact (pole) only. Thus indeterminate and disturbed Positions cannot be detected. Breaker.Pos not CLOSE Signal: Pos not CLOSE Breaker.Pos CLOSE Signal: Breaker is in CLOSE-Position Breaker.Pos OPEN Signal: Breaker is in OPEN-Position 714 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Breaker.Pos Indeterm Signal: Breaker is in Indeterminate Position Breaker.Pos Disturb Signal: Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The feedback signals (Position Indicators) contradict themselves. After expiring of a supervision timer this signal becomes true. Breaker.Ready Signal: Breaker is ready for operation. Breaker.CES succesf Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed successfully. Breaker.CES Disturbed Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command unsuccessful. Switchgear in disturbed position. Breaker.CES SAuthority Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed. No switching authority. Breaker.CES SwitchgDir Command Execution Supervision: Switching Direction Control. A switchgear that is already OPEN should be switched OPEN again (doubly). Breaker.CES DoubleOperating Command Execution Supervision: A second switch command is in conflict with a pending one. Breaker.CES CLOSE durg OPEN Cmd Command Execution Supervision: CLOSE Command during a pending OPEN Command. Breaker.CES SG not ready Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready. Breaker.CES Field Interl Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed because of field interlocking. Breaker.CES SyncTimeout Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not executed No Synchronization signal while t-sync was running. Breaker.Prot CLOSE Signal: CLOSE command issued by the Prot module. Breaker.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command Breaker.Ack TripCmd Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command Breaker.Bwear Slow Breaker Signal: Slow Breaker Alarm Breaker.Res Bwear Slow Breaker Signal: Resetting the slow breaker alarm. Breaker.CLOSE Cmd Signal: CLOSE command issued to the switchgear. Depending on the setting the signal may include the CLOSE command of the Prot module. Breaker.OPEN Cmd Signal: OPEN command issued to the switchgear. Depending on the setting the signal may include the OPEN command of the Prot module. Breaker.CLOSE Cmd manual Signal: CLOSE Cmd manual Breaker.OPEN Cmd manual Signal: OPEN Cmd manual Breaker.CLOSE request Signal: Synchronous CLOSE request Breaker.CinBkr-52a-I Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52a) Breaker.CinBkr-52b-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52b) Breaker.Ready-I Module Input State: Breaker Ready Breaker.Sys-in-Sync-I State of the module input: This signals has to become true within the synchronization time. If not, switching is unsuccessful. Breaker.Ack TripCmd-I State of the module input: Acknowledgment Signal (only for automatic acknowledgment). Module input signal. Breaker.Interl CLOSE1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command www.eaton.com 715 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Breaker.Interl CLOSE2-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command Breaker.Interl CLOSE3-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command Breaker.Interl OPEN1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command Breaker.Interl OPEN2-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command Breaker.Interl OPEN3-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command Breaker.SC CLOSE-I State of the module input: Switching CLOSE Command, e.g.: the state of the Logic or the state of the digital input. Breaker.SC OPEN-I State of the module input: Switching OPEN Command, e.g.: the state of the Logic or the state of the digital input. Breaker.Operations Alarm Signal: Service Alarm, too many Operations Breaker.Isum Intr trip: IA Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded: IA. Breaker.Isum Intr trip: IB Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded: IB. Breaker.Isum Intr trip: IC Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded: IC. Breaker.Isum Intr trip Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting (tripping) currents exceeded in at least one phase. Breaker.Res TripCmdCr Signal: Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip commands. Breaker.Res Isum trip Signal: Reset summation of the tripping currents. Breaker.WearLevel Alarm Signal: Breaker Wear curve Alarm Level in %. Breaker.WearLevel Lockout Signal: Breaker Wear Curve Lockout Level in %. Breaker.Res Bwear Curve Signal: Res Bwear Curve Breaker.Isum Intr per hour Alarm Signal: Isum Intr per hour Alarm Breaker.Res Isum Intr per hour Alarm Signal: Res Isum Intr per hour Alarm 50P[1].Active Signal: Active 50P[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 50P[1].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 50P[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 50P[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50P[1].Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA 50P[1].Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB 50P[1].Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC 50P[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup 50P[1].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A 50P[1].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B 50P[1].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C 50P[1].Trip Signal: Trip 50P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 50P[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 716 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 50P[1].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 50P[1].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 50P[1].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 50P[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 50P[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 50P[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50P[1].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 50P[1].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter1 50P[1].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter2 50P[1].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter3 50P[1].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter4 50P[2].Active Signal: Active 50P[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 50P[2].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 50P[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 50P[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50P[2].Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA 50P[2].Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB 50P[2].Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC 50P[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup 50P[2].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A 50P[2].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B 50P[2].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C 50P[2].Trip Signal: Trip 50P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[2].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 50P[2].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 50P[2].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 50P[2].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 50P[2].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 50P[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 50P[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 50P[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50P[2].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 50P[2].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 50P[2].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 50P[2].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 50P[2].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 50P[3].Active Signal: Active www.eaton.com 717 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 50P[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 50P[3].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 50P[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 50P[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50P[3].Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA 50P[3].Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB 50P[3].Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC 50P[3].Pickup Signal: Pickup 50P[3].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A 50P[3].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B 50P[3].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C 50P[3].Trip Signal: Trip 50P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50P[3].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 50P[3].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 50P[3].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 50P[3].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 50P[3].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 50P[3].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 50P[3].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 50P[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50P[3].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 50P[3].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 50P[3].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 50P[3].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 50P[3].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 51P[1].Active Signal: Active 51P[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 51P[1].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 51P[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 51P[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51P[1].Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA 51P[1].Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB 51P[1].Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC 51P[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup 51P[1].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A 51P[1].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B 51P[1].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C 51P[1].Trip Signal: Trip 718 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 51P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 51P[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 51P[1].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 51P[1].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 51P[1].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 51P[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 51P[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 51P[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51P[1].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 51P[1].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 51P[1].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 51P[1].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 51P[1].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 51P[2].Active Signal: Active 51P[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 51P[2].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 51P[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 51P[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51P[2].Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA 51P[2].Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB 51P[2].Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC 51P[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup 51P[2].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A 51P[2].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B 51P[2].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C 51P[2].Trip Signal: Trip 51P[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[2].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 51P[2].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 51P[2].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 51P[2].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 51P[2].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 51P[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 51P[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 51P[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51P[2].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 51P[2].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 51P[2].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 www.eaton.com 719 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 51P[2].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 51P[2].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 51P[3].Active Signal: Active 51P[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 51P[3].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 51P[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 51P[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51P[3].Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA 51P[3].Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB 51P[3].Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC 51P[3].Pickup Signal: Pickup 51P[3].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A 51P[3].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B 51P[3].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C 51P[3].Trip Signal: Trip 51P[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51P[3].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 51P[3].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 51P[3].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 51P[3].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 51P[3].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 51P[3].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 51P[3].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 51P[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51P[3].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 51P[3].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 51P[3].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 51P[3].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 51P[3].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 50X[1].Active Signal: Active 50X[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 50X[1].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 50X[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 50X[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50X[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 50X[1].Trip Signal: Trip 50X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 50X[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 720 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 50X[1].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 50X[1].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 50X[1].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 50X[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 50X[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 50X[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50X[1].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 50X[1].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 50X[1].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 50X[1].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 50X[1].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 50X[2].Active Signal: Active 50X[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 50X[2].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 50X[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 50X[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50X[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 50X[2].Trip Signal: Trip 50X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50X[2].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 50X[2].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 50X[2].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 50X[2].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 50X[2].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 50X[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 50X[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 50X[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50X[2].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 50X[2].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 50X[2].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 50X[2].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 50X[2].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 51X[1].Active Signal: Active 51X[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 51X[1].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 51X[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 51X[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51X[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 51X[1].Trip Signal: Trip www.eaton.com 721 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 51X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 51X[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 51X[1].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 51X[1].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 51X[1].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 51X[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 51X[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 51X[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51X[1].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 51X[1].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 51X[1].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 51X[1].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 51X[1].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 51X[2].Active Signal: Active 51X[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 51X[2].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 51X[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 51X[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51X[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 51X[2].Trip Signal: Trip 51X[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51X[2].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 51X[2].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 51X[2].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 51X[2].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 51X[2].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 51X[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 51X[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 51X[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51X[2].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 51X[2].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 51X[2].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 51X[2].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 51X[2].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 50R[1].Active Signal: Active 50R[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 50R[1].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 50R[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 722 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 50R[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50R[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 50R[1].Trip Signal: Trip 50R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 50R[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 50R[1].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 50R[1].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 50R[1].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 50R[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 50R[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 50R[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50R[1].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 50R[1].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 50R[1].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 50R[1].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 50R[1].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 50R[2].Active Signal: Active 50R[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 50R[2].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 50R[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 50R[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50R[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 50R[2].Trip Signal: Trip 50R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 50R[2].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 50R[2].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 50R[2].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 50R[2].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 50R[2].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 50R[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 50R[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 50R[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 50R[2].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 50R[2].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 50R[2].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 50R[2].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 50R[2].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 51R[1].Active Signal: Active www.eaton.com 723 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 51R[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 51R[1].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 51R[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 51R[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51R[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 51R[1].Trip Signal: Trip 51R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 51R[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 51R[1].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 51R[1].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 51R[1].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 51R[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 51R[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 51R[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51R[1].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 51R[1].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 51R[1].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 51R[1].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 51R[1].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 51R[2].Active Signal: Active 51R[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 51R[2].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking 51R[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 51R[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51R[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR 51R[2].Trip Signal: Trip 51R[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 51R[2].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set 51R[2].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1 51R[2].AdaptSet 2 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2 51R[2].AdaptSet 3 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3 51R[2].AdaptSet 4 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4 51R[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 51R[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 51R[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 51R[2].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking 51R[2].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1 51R[2].AdaptSet2-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2 724 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 51R[2].AdaptSet3-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3 51R[2].AdaptSet4-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4 27M[1].Active Signal: Active 27M[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 27M[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 27M[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 27M[1].Pickup Phase A Signal: Pickup Phase A 27M[1].Pickup Phase B Signal: Pickup Phase B 27M[1].Pickup Phase C Signal: Pickup Phase C 27M[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 27M[1].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A 27M[1].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B 27M[1].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C 27M[1].Trip Signal: Trip 27M[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27M[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 27M[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 27M[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 27M[2].Active Signal: Active 27M[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 27M[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 27M[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 27M[2].Pickup Phase A Signal: Pickup Phase A 27M[2].Pickup Phase B Signal: Pickup Phase B 27M[2].Pickup Phase C Signal: Pickup Phase C 27M[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 27M[2].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A 27M[2].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B 27M[2].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C 27M[2].Trip Signal: Trip 27M[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27M[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 27M[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 27M[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59M[1].Active Signal: Active 59M[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 59M[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 59M[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59M[1].Pickup Phase A Signal: Pickup Phase A www.eaton.com 725 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 59M[1].Pickup Phase B Signal: Pickup Phase B 59M[1].Pickup Phase C Signal: Pickup Phase C 59M[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 59M[1].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A 59M[1].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B 59M[1].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C 59M[1].Trip Signal: Trip 59M[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59M[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 59M[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 59M[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59M[2].Active Signal: Active 59M[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 59M[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 59M[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59M[2].Pickup Phase A Signal: Pickup Phase A 59M[2].Pickup Phase B Signal: Pickup Phase B 59M[2].Pickup Phase C Signal: Pickup Phase C 59M[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element 59M[2].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A 59M[2].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B 59M[2].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C 59M[2].Trip Signal: Trip 59M[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59M[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 59M[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 59M[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 27A[1].Active Signal: Active 27A[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 27A[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 27A[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 27A[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 27A[1].Trip Signal: Trip 27A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27A[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 27A[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 27A[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 27A[2].Active Signal: Active 27A[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 726 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 27A[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 27A[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 27A[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 27A[2].Trip Signal: Trip 27A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 27A[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 27A[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 27A[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59A[1].Active Signal: Active 59A[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 59A[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 59A[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59A[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 59A[1].Trip Signal: Trip 59A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59A[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 59A[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 59A[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59A[2].Active Signal: Active 59A[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 59A[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 59A[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59A[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 59A[2].Trip Signal: Trip 59A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59A[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 59A[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 59A[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59N[1].Active Signal: Active 59N[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 59N[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 59N[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59N[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 59N[1].Trip Signal: Trip 59N[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59N[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 59N[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 59N[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59N[2].Active Signal: Active www.eaton.com 727 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 59N[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 59N[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 59N[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 59N[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element 59N[2].Trip Signal: Trip 59N[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 59N[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 59N[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 59N[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 46[1].Active Signal: Active 46[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 46[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 46[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 46[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence 46[1].Trip Signal: Trip 46[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 46[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 46[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 46[2].Active Signal: Active 46[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 46[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 46[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 46[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence 46[2].Trip Signal: Trip 46[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 46[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 46[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 46[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 47[1].Active Signal: Active 47[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 47[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 47[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 47[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry 47[1].Trip Signal: Trip 47[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 47[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 47[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 47[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 728 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 47[2].Active Signal: Active 47[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 47[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 47[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 47[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry 47[2].Trip Signal: Trip 47[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 47[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 47[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 47[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[1].Active Signal: Active 81[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 81[1].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage. 81[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 81[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[1].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[1].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 81[1].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[1].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[1].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[1].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[1].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 81[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 81[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[2].Active Signal: Active 81[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 81[2].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage. 81[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 81[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[2].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[2].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 81[2].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[2].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[2].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT www.eaton.com 729 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 81[2].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[2].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 81[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 81[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[3].Active Signal: Active 81[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 81[3].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage. 81[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 81[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[3].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[3].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 81[3].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[3].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[3].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[3].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[3].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[3].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[3].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 81[3].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 81[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[4].Active Signal: Active 81[4].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 81[4].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage. 81[4].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 81[4].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[4].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[4].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 81[4].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[4].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[4].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[4].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[4].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[4].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[4].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 730 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 81[4].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 81[4].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[5].Active Signal: Active 81[5].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 81[5].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage. 81[5].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 81[5].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[5].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[5].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 81[5].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[5].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[5].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[5].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[5].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[5].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[5].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[5].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 81[5].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 81[5].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[6].Active Signal: Active 81[6].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 81[6].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage. 81[6].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 81[6].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 81[6].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection 81[6].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange. 81[6].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge 81[6].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[6].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit. 81[6].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT 81[6].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi 81[6].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal) 81[6].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 81[6].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 81[6].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 81[6].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32[1].Active Signal: Active 32[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking www.eaton.com 731 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 32[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 32[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32[2].Active Signal: Active 32[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 32[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 32[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32[2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32[3].Active Signal: Active 32[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 32[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 32[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32[3].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32[3].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32[3].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32[3].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32V[1].Active Signal: Active 32V[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 32V[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 32V[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32V[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32V[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32V[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32V[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32V[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32V[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32V[2].Active Signal: Active 732 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description 32V[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 32V[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 32V[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32V[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32V[2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32V[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32V[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32V[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32V[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32V[3].Active Signal: Active 32V[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking 32V[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked 32V[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command 32V[3].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection 32V[3].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection 32V[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command 32V[3].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32V[3].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 32V[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command PF-55D[1].Active Signal: Active PF-55D[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking PF-55D[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked PF-55D[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command PF-55D[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor PF-55D[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor PF-55D[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55D[1].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal PF-55D[1].Impossible Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible PF-55D[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking PF-55D[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking PF-55D[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command PF-55D[2].Active Signal: Active PF-55D[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking PF-55D[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked PF-55D[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command PF-55D[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor PF-55D[2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor PF-55D[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55D[2].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal www.eaton.com 733 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description PF-55D[2].Impossible Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible PF-55D[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking PF-55D[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking PF-55D[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command PF-55A[1].Active Signal: Active PF-55A[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking PF-55A[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked PF-55A[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command PF-55A[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor PF-55A[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor PF-55A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55A[1].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal PF-55A[1].Impossible Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible PF-55A[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking PF-55A[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking PF-55A[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command PF-55A[2].Active Signal: Active PF-55A[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking PF-55A[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked PF-55A[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command PF-55A[2].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor PF-55A[2].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor PF-55A[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command PF-55A[2].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal PF-55A[2].Impossible Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible PF-55A[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking PF-55A[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking PF-55A[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command ZI.Active Signal: Active ZI.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking ZI.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ZI.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command ZI.Bkr Blo Signal: Blocked by Breaker Failure ZI.Phase Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Pickup ZI.Phase Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Trip ZI.Ground Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Pickup ZI.Ground Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Trip ZI.Pickup Signal: Pickup Zone Interlocking ZI.Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip 734 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description ZI.TripCmd Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command ZI.Phase OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase OUT ZI.Ground OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground OUT ZI.OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT ZI.IN Signal: Zone Interlocking IN ZI.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 ZI.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 ZI.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command ZI.Bkr Blo-I Signal: Blocked by Breaker Failure SOTF.Active Signal: Active SOTF.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking SOTF.Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking SOTF.enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to modify Overcurrent Protection Settings. SOTF.I< Signal: No Load Current. SOTF.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking SOTF.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking SOTF.Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking SOTF.Ex Man CLOSE Cmd-I Module Input State: External manual breaker CLOSE command (NOT for AR!) SOTF.Ext SOTF-I Module Input State: External Switch Onto Fault Alarm CLPU.Active Signal: Active CLPU.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking CLPU.Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking CLPU.enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled CLPU.detected Signal: Cold Load detected CLPU.I< Signal: No Load Current. CLPU.Load Inrush Signal: Load Inrush CLPU.Settle Time Signal: Settle Time CLPU.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking CLPU.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking CLPU.Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking ExP[1].Active Signal: Active ExP[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking ExP[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExP[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm ExP[1].Trip Signal: Trip ExP[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 www.eaton.com 735 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description ExP[1].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 ExP[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP[1].Alarm-I Module Input State: Alarm ExP[1].Trip-I Module Input State: Trip ExP[2].Active Signal: Active ExP[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking ExP[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExP[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP[2].Alarm Signal: Alarm ExP[2].Trip Signal: Trip ExP[2].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[2].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 ExP[2].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2 ExP[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP[2].Alarm-I Module Input State: Alarm ExP[2].Trip-I Module Input State: Trip ExP[3].Active Signal: Active ExP[3].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking ExP[3].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExP[3].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP[3].Alarm Signal: Alarm ExP[3].Trip Signal: Trip ExP[3].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[3].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 ExP[3].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 ExP[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP[3].Alarm-I Module Input State: Alarm ExP[3].Trip-I Module Input State: Trip ExP[4].Active Signal: Active ExP[4].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking ExP[4].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked ExP[4].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP[4].Alarm Signal: Alarm ExP[4].Trip Signal: Trip ExP[4].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command ExP[4].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 ExP[4].ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 ExP[4].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command ExP[4].Alarm-I Module Input State: Alarm 736 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description ExP[4].Trip-I Module Input State: Trip BF.Active Signal: Active BF.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking BF.Pickup Signal: BF-Module Started (Pickup) BF.Trip Signal: Breaker Failure Trip BF.Lockout Signal: Lockout BF.Res Lockout Signal: Reset Lockout BF.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 BF.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 BF.Trigger1 Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF BF.Trigger2 Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF BF.Trigger3 Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF TCM.Active Signal: Active TCM.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking TCM.Pickup Signal: Pickup Trip Circuit Supervision TCM.Not Possible Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker. TCM.CinBkr-52a-I Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52a) TCM.CinBkr-52b-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52b) TCM.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 TCM.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 CTS.Active Signal: Active CTS.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking CTS.Pickup Signal: Pickup Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision CTS.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 CTS.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 LOP.Active Signal: Active LOP.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking LOP.Pickup Signal: Pickup Loss of Potential LOP.LOP Blo Signal: Loss of Potential blocks other elements LOP.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 LOP.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 AR.Active Signal: Active AR.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking AR.Standby Signal: Standby AR.t-Man Close Blo Signal: AR blocked after breaker was switched on manually. This timer will be started if the breaker was switched on manually. While this timer is running, AR cannot be started. AR.Ready Signal: Ready to shoot AR.Running Signal: Auto Reclosing Running AR.t-dead Signal: Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt www.eaton.com 737 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description AR.Bkr CLOSE Cmd Signal: Bkr. Switch ON (CLOSE) Command AR.t-Run2Ready Signal: Examination Time: If the Breaker remains after a reclosure attempt (shot) for the duration of this timer in the Closed position, the AR has been successful and the AR module returns into the ready state. AR.Lock Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out AR.t-Reset Lockout Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR lockout. The reset of the AR lockout state will be delayed for this time after the reset signal (e.g digital input or Scada) has been detected. AR.Blo Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked AR.t-Blo Reset Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR blocking. The release (de-blocking) of the AR will be delayed for this time, if there is no blocking signal anymore. AR.successful Signal: Auto Reclosing successful AR.failed Signal: Auto Reclosing Failure AR.t-AR Supervision Signal: AR Supervision AR.Pre Shot Pre Shot Control AR.Shot 1 Shot Control AR.Shot 2 Shot Control AR.Shot 3 Shot Control AR.Shot 4 Shot Control AR.Shot 5 Shot Control AR.Shot 6 Shot Control AR.Service Alarm 1 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 1, too many switching operations AR.Service Alarm 2 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 2, too many switching operations AR.Max Shots / h exceeded Signal: The maximum allowed number of shots per hour has been exceeded. AR.Res Statistics Cr Signal: Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of AR, successful and unsuccessful no of AR. AR.Res Service Cr Signal: Reset the Service Counters for pickup and blocking. AR.Reset Lockout Signal: The AR Lockout has been reset via the panel. AR.Res Max Shots / h Signal: The Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour has been reset. AR.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 AR.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 AR.Ex Shot Inc-I Module input state: The AR Shot counter will be incremented by this external Signal. This can be used for Zone Coordination (of upstream Auto Reclosure devices). Note: This parameter enables the functionality only. The assignment has to be set within the global parameters. AR.Ex Lock-I Module input state: External AR lockout. AR.DI Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the lockout state of the AR (if the resetting via digital inputs has been selected). 738 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description AR.Comm Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the Lockout State of the AR by Communication. Sync.Active Signal: Active Sync.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking Sync.LiveBus Signal: Live-Bus or Dead-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Dead-Bus Sync.LiveLine Signal: Live-Line or Dead-Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Dead-Line Sync.SynchronRunTiming Signal: Sync-checkRunTiming Sync.SynchronFailed Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for 5s when the breaker is still open after the Sync-check Run-timer has timed out. Sync.SyncOverridden Signal:Sync-check is overridden because one of the Synchronism overriding conditions (DB/DL or ExtBypass) is met. Sync.VDiffTooHigh Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high. Sync.SlipTooHigh Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line voltages too high. Sync.AngleDiffTooHigh Signal: Phase Angle difference between bus and line voltages too high. Sync.Sys-in-Sync Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the system synchronism criteria. Sync.In-Sync Allowed Signal: In-Sync Allowed Sync.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking 1 Sync.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking 2 Sync.Bypass-I State of the module input: Bypass Sync.BkrCloseInitiate-I State of the module input: Breaker Close Initiate with synchronism check from any control sources (e.g. HMI / SCADA). If the state of the assigned signal becomes true, a Breaker Close will be initiated (Trigger Source). WiredInputs.52a M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Closed WiredInputs.52b M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Open WiredInputs.TOCa M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Connected WiredInputs.43/10 M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Selected To Trip WiredInputs.52a M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Closed WiredInputs.52b M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Open WiredInputs.TOCa M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Connected WiredInputs.43/10 M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Selected To Trip WiredInputs.52a T -I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Closed WiredInputs.52b T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Open WiredInputs.TOCa T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Connected WiredInputs.43/10 T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Selected To Trip WiredInputs.43 M-I State of the module input: System In Manual WiredInputs.43 A-I State of the module input: System in Auto WiredInputs.43 P1-I State of the module input: Preferred Source 1 www.eaton.com 739 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description WiredInputs.43 P2-I State of the module input: Preferred Source 2 WiredInputs.Bkr Trouble-I Breaker Trouble DI-8P X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 2 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 3 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 4 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 5 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 6 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 7 Signal: Digital Input DI-8P X1.DI 8 Signal: Digital Input RO-6 X5.RO 1 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.RO 2 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.RO 3 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.RO 4 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.RO 5 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.RO 6 Signal: Relay Output RO-6 X5.DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance. RO-6 X5.Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals. RO-4Z X2.ZI OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT RO-4Z X2.RO 1 Signal: Relay Output RO-4Z X2.RO 2 Signal: Relay Output RO-4Z X2.RO 3 Signal: Relay Output RO-4Z X2.RO 4 Signal: Relay Output RO-4Z X2.DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are ARMED AGAIN after maintenance. RO-4Z X2.Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals. Event rec.Res all rec Signal: All records deleted Disturb rec.Recording Signal: Recording Disturb rec.Memory full Signal: Memory Full Disturb rec.Clear fail Signal: Clear Failure in Memory Disturb rec.Res all rec Signal: All records deleted Disturb rec.Res record Signal: Delete Record 740 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Disturb rec.Man. Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger Disturb rec.Start1-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Disturb rec.Start2-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Disturb rec.Start3-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Disturb rec.Start4-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Disturb rec.Start5-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Disturb rec.Start6-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Disturb rec.Start7-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Disturb rec.Start8-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Fault rec.Res record Signal: Delete Record Fault rec.Man. Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger Fault rec.Start1-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Fault rec.Start2-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Fault rec.Start3-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Fault rec.Start4-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Fault rec.Start5-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Fault rec.Start6-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Fault rec.Start7-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Fault rec.Start8-I State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if: Trend rec.Hand Reset Hand Reset EnergyCr.Cr Overflow VAh Net Signal: Counter Overflow VAh Net EnergyCr.Cr Overflow Wh Net Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Net EnergyCr.Cr Overflow Wh Fwd Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Fwd EnergyCr.Cr Overflow Wh Rev Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Rev EnergyCr.Cr Overflow VArh Net Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Net EnergyCr.Cr Overflow VArh Lag Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lag EnergyCr.Cr Overflow VArh Lead Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lead EnergyCr.VAh Net Res Cr Signal: VAh Net Reset Counter EnergyCr.Wh Net Res Cr Signal: Wh Net Reset Counter EnergyCr.Wh Fwd Res Cr Signal: Wh Fwd Reset Counter EnergyCr.Wh Rev Res Cr Signal: Wh Rev Reset Counter EnergyCr.VArh Net Res Cr Signal: VArh Net Reset Counter EnergyCr.VArh Lag Res Cr Signal: VArh Lag Reset Counter EnergyCr.VArh Lead Res Cr Signal: VArh Lead Reset Counter EnergyCr.Res all Energy Cr Signal: Reset of all Energy Counters EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn VAh Net Signal: Counter VAh Net will overflow soon. EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn Wh Net Signal: Counter Wh Net will overflow soon. EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn Wh Fwd Signal: Counter Wh Fwd will overflow soon. EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn Wh Rev Signal: Counter Wh Rev will overflow soon. www.eaton.com 741 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn VArh Net Signal: Counter VArh Net will overflow soon. EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn VArh Lag Signal: Counter VArh Lag will overflow soon. EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn VArh Lead Signal: Counter VArh Lead will overflow soon. Modbus.Transmission Signal: Communication Active Modbus.Comm Cmd 1 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 2 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 3 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 4 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 5 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 6 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 7 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 8 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 9 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 10 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 11 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 12 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 13 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 14 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 15 Communication Command Modbus.Comm Cmd 16 Communication Command IEC61850.VirtualInput1 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput2 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput3 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput4 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput5 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput6 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput7 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput8 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput9 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput10 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput11 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput12 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput13 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput14 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput15 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualInput16 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind) IEC61850.VirtualOutput1-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput2-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput3-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) 742 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description IEC61850.VirtualOutput4-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput5-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput6-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput7-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput8-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput9-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput10-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput11-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput12-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput13-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput14-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput15-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IEC61850.VirtualOutput16-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO) IRIG-B.Active Signal: Active IRIG-B.Inverted Signal: IRIG-B inverted IRIG-B.Control Signal1 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal2 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal4 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal5 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal6 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal7 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal8 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal9 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal10 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal11 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal12 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal13 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal14 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal15 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal16 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal17 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal IRIG-B.Control Signal18 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal Statistics.ResFc all Signal: Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Demand, Power Demand, Min, Max) Statistics.ResFc I Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg) Statistics.ResFc P Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg) Statistics.ResFc Max Signal: Resetting of all Maximum values Statistics.ResFc Min Signal: Resetting of all Minimum values Statistics.StartFc 1-I State of the module input: Start of Statistics 1 (Update the displayed Demand) www.eaton.com 743 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Statistics.StartFc 2-I State of the module input: Start of Statistics 2 (Update the displayed Demand) Logic.LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE1.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE1.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE1.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE1.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE1.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE2.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE2.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE2.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE2.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE2.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE2.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE2.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE2.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE2.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE3.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE3.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE3.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE3.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE3.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE3.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE3.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE3.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE3.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE4.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE4.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE4.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE4.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE4.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE4.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE4.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE4.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE4.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE5.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate 744 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE5.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE5.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE5.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE5.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE5.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE5.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE5.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE5.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE6.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE6.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE6.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE6.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE6.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE6.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE6.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE6.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE6.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE7.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE7.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE7.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE7.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE7.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE7.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE7.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE7.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE7.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE8.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE8.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE8.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE8.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE8.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE8.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE8.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE8.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE8.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE9.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE9.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE9.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE9.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) www.eaton.com 745 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE9.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE9.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE9.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE9.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE9.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE10.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE10.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE10.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE10.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE10.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE10.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE10.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE10.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE10.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE11.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE11.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE11.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE11.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE11.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE11.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE11.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE11.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE11.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE12.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE12.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE12.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE12.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE12.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE12.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE12.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE12.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE12.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE13.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE13.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE13.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE13.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE13.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE13.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE13.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal 746 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE13.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE13.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE14.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE14.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE14.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE14.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE14.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE14.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE14.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE14.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE14.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE15.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE15.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE15.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE15.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE15.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE15.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE15.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE15.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE15.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE16.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE16.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE16.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE16.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE16.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE16.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE16.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE16.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE16.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE17.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE17.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE17.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE17.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE17.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE17.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE17.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE17.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE17.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE18.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate www.eaton.com 747 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE18.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE18.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE18.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE18.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE18.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE18.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE18.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE18.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE19.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE19.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE19.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE19.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE19.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE19.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE19.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE19.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE19.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE20.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE20.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE20.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE20.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE20.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE20.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE20.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE20.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE20.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE21.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE21.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE21.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE21.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE21.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE21.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE21.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE21.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE21.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE22.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE22.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE22.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE22.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) 748 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE22.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE22.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE22.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE22.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE22.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE23.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE23.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE23.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE23.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE23.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE23.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE23.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE23.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE23.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE24.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE24.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE24.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE24.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE24.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE24.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE24.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE24.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE24.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE25.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE25.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE25.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE25.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE25.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE25.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE25.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE25.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE25.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE26.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE26.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE26.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE26.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE26.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE26.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE26.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal www.eaton.com 749 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE26.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE26.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE27.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE27.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE27.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE27.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE27.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE27.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE27.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE27.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE27.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE28.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE28.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE28.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE28.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE28.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE28.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE28.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE28.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE28.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE29.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE29.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE29.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE29.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE29.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE29.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE29.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE29.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE29.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE30.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE30.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE30.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE30.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE30.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE30.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE30.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE30.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE30.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE31.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate 750 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE31.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE31.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE31.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE31.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE31.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE31.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE31.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE31.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE32.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE32.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE32.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE32.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE32.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE32.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE32.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE32.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE32.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE33.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE33.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE33.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE33.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE33.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE33.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE33.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE33.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE33.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE34.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE34.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE34.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE34.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE34.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE34.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE34.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE34.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE34.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE35.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE35.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE35.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE35.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) www.eaton.com 751 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE35.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE35.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE35.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE35.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE35.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE36.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE36.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE36.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE36.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE36.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE36.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE36.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE36.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE36.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE37.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE37.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE37.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE37.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE37.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE37.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE37.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE37.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE37.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE38.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE38.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE38.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE38.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE38.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE38.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE38.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE38.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE38.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE39.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE39.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE39.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE39.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE39.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE39.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE39.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal 752 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE39.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE39.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE40.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE40.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE40.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE40.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE40.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE40.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE40.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE40.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE40.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE41.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE41.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE41.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE41.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE41.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE41.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE41.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE41.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE41.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE42.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE42.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE42.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE42.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE42.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE42.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE42.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE42.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE42.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE43.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE43.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE43.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE43.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE43.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE43.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE43.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE43.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE43.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE44.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate www.eaton.com 753 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE44.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE44.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE44.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE44.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE44.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE44.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE44.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE44.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE45.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE45.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE45.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE45.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE45.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE45.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE45.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE45.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE45.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE46.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE46.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE46.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE46.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE46.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE46.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE46.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE46.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE46.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE47.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE47.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE47.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE47.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE47.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE47.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE47.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE47.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE47.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE48.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE48.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE48.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE48.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) 754 www.eaton.com IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE48.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE48.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE48.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE48.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE48.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE49.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE49.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE49.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE49.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE49.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE49.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE49.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE49.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE49.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE50.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE50.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE50.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE50.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE50.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE50.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE50.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE50.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE50.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE51.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE51.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE51.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE51.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE51.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE51.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE51.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE51.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE51.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE52.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE52.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE52.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE52.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE52.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE52.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE52.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal www.eaton.com 755 IM02602007E EDR-5000 Name Description Logic.LE52.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE52.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE53.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE53.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE53.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE53.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE53.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE53.Gate In2-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE53.Gate In3-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE53.Gate In4-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal Logic.LE53.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching Logic.LE54.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate Logic.LE54.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output Logic.LE54.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q) Logic.LE54.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT) Logic.LE54.Gate In1-I State of
0
advertisement
Related documents
Download
advertisement
Add this document to collection(s)
You can add this document to your study collection(s)
Sign in Available only to authorized usersAdd this document to saved
You can add this document to your saved list
Sign in Available only to authorized users